Richard S. Tuttle

Elvangar

Our story so far

Our story so far…

Young Lord of Khadora is the story of a young soldier who is unhappy with the culture of his country. His superb military skills, and the loyalty of his troops, enable Marak to take the reins of a minor Situ estate when the opportunity arises. When the neighboring lords conspire against Lord Marak, he uses cunning, courage, and unconventional warfare to subdue them. When his own protector, Lord Ridak of the Situ Clan, turns against Lord Marak, the young lord strikes a blow for a new culture. He creates his own clan, the Torak clan, and defies the norms by freeing his slaves. At the end of volume one, Lord Marak secretly controls five small clans on the frontier of Khadora.

Star of Sakova introduces Lyra, a young mage student who is thrust into an unfamiliar world by an attack on her father’s magic academy. Running for her life, Lyra enters the dreaded Sakova, expecting death at every turn. Instead, she finds that the god Kaltara has chosen her to lead the Sakovan people. Young Lyra unravels the mystery of the attack on the magic academy and the kidnapping of her father, Master Malafar. During the struggle to save the Sakovan people from ruin, Lord Marak visits and discovers long lost ties between the Sakovans and the people of his Chula father. By the end of volume two of the Forgotten Legacy, Lyra displays magic talents that only Kaltara could have given her. She faces off against the false Katana Alazar and defeats him in a public display that eliminates the threat of war.

Web of Deceit features a young villager from a remote area of Fakara. The story opens with the destruction of Rejji’s village and a chance meeting with Mistake, a young elf-like woman. Rejji and Mistake are captured by slavers and sold to a Khadoran estate where they befriend a young Fakaran with the rare ability to speak with animals. Lord Marak frees the trio from slavery as he seeks to learn more about the strange country of Fakara. When the trio returns to Fakara, they become embroiled in a power struggle between the Jiadin tribe and the rest of the tribesmen, known as the Free Tribes. On a trip to the Sage of the Mountain, Rejji discovers that he is the long-awaited Astor of prophecy. He finds a painting in the ancient lost city of Angragar that depicts Lord Marak, Lyra, and himself. By the end of volume three, Rejji succeeds in uniting the Free Tribes under his banner and defeating the Jiadin. He immediately makes plans to rebuild his native country.

Aakuta: the Dark Mage introduces a new, mysterious figure. A powerful, dark mage suddenly appears in a country devoid of male mages. The mage appears to have no allegiances in the growing struggle between Lord Marak and the forces of evil, but he has the habit of always showing up when conflict erupts. Meanwhile, Lord Marak tries to rouse Khadora into stopping an invasion by the Jiadin. Not only do the other lords refuse to help him, but they are actively trying to ruin him through attacks and assassination attempts. The secret alliances long held by Lord Marak are eventually discovered as Marak first ascends to the Lords’ Council and eventually becomes Emperor of Khadora. At the conclusion of volume four, Emperor Marak is uniting Khadora under his banner. His plan is to rally all of the armies to help him combat the coming invasion of evil.

In Island of Darkness, a false Katana again rules Omunga. War is declared on the Sakovans even while Vand’s people poison the food supply of Omunga. Emperor Marak guides Lyra as she attempts to win the war without causing too many casualties. She knows about the coming invasion from across the sea and is forced to preserve as many of her Omungan enemy as possible. Meanwhile, Mistake and MistyTrail discover that they are sisters. They set out on a sea voyage and are shipwrecked off the Island of Darkness. As they search for a way to get home, the sisters discover elves, which were long thought to be extinct. In their bid for freedom, the sisters must rescue a pair of elves to get them off the island. During the rescues, the women discover many dark secrets of the evil enemy. At the end of volume five, Emperor Marak has ordered his people to deliver Mistake and her new friends to Khadoratung where he hopes to learn more about Vand and the lost nation of elves.

Prologue

Thousands of years ago…

Kieran yawned and stretched as the first rays of the sun peeked through the window of his small room. He rose from the bed and walked to the window. His almond-shaped eyes blinked twice as he gazed out at the sunlight flashing through the trees of the forest. His right hand rose reflexively to shade his face from the glare of the morning sun. The young elf inhaled deeply, as if to sample the air of the new day, before turning to the washbasin on the table next to the window. He quickly washed and excitedly hurried to the kitchen for the morning meal.

“The sun is already up,” his mother chided jokingly. “You have already lost the first race of the day.”

“Good morning, Mother,” smiled Kieran. “I guess I did stay up too late last night, but I want very much to score highly on the test today. I still have several hours before I must be there.”

“You worry too much,” his mother smiled as she placed a bowl of oatmeal on the table. “Your talents are strong, and you study hard. You will do fine.”

“I know,” nodded Kieran as he sat down and drew the bowl to him. “Doing fine is not the question, though. I seek to score the highest ever recorded on the mage test. I think I can do it.”

“I am sure that you can,” smiled his mother. “I suppose you will be studying some more before you leave this morning?”

“No, Mother,” Kieran replied seriously as he pushed the bowl of oatmeal away and rose from his chair. “More studying will not help me. I am going to the temple to pray.”

Kieran’s mother smiled proudly as her son rose. Kieran hugged her and then rushed out the door of the house and down the flight of stairs to the beach. As he ran along the beach towards the center of Alamanda, his eyes were drawn towards the sea. He almost stumbled and fell as he came to an abrupt halt.

Far off on the horizon were a dozen large ships, far more than Kieran had ever seen at any one time. His eyes strained to identify them, but they were too far off. He shrugged and continued his run towards the elven city and the temple within it.

The elven homes that he raced past were modest wooden structures nestled in the sevemore trees that lined the beach. He paid no mind to them as his eyes focused on the gleaming stone buildings of the city before him. Excitement coursed through his body as his feet left the sand and landed on the stone blocks of the city street. His eyes darted towards the quay where elven trading ships were loading goods destined for foreign and exotic shores. On any other morning, Kieran would have been tempted to stay and watched the loading and listen to the stories told by the elven sailors, but not today. Today was a special day. It was the day of his mage testing.

Kieran turned away from the harbor and ran towards the temple. He smiled and waved to friends and strangers alike as he raced through the city streets. Many of the residents of Alamanda knew Kieran and most knew that this day was his day of testing. Shouts of encouragement followed Kieran all the way to the temple. He grinned broadly at the encouragement as he slowed to a walk at the base of the stairs to the temple. As excited as he was, Kieran knew better than to run within the temple.

Kieran solemnly climbed the outside steps leading to the main level of the temple. He walked through the entrance doors and headed for the staircase that would take him to the roof. A priest coming down the stairs stopped and watched Kieran cross the entry foyer of the temple.

“Today is your day,” smiled the priest. “I am pleased to see that you have taken time for your devotions. One must never forget their obligations to Kaltara.”

“I would never forget,” Kieran responded with a smile. “It is Kaltara that will aid me today. Without God, I have no talents.”

“You are a wise boy,” nodded the priest. “You do not have to go to the roof. There are many empty prayer rooms available. Would you like me to pray with you today?”

“No, thank you,” replied Kieran, “although you could offer a prayer for me if it pleases you. Besides, I prefer the roof. I feel as if it places me closer to God.”

The priest placed a hand on Kieran’s shoulder and nodded. “It would please me to pray for you,” he smiled. “Go to the roof. Do not keep Kaltara waiting.”

Kieran smiled and nodded and started up the stairs. He fought the urge to run up the stairs, and each step seemed to last forever. Finally, the elven boy reached to the top of the stairs. He moved out onto the roof and stared up at the sky with reverence. The sun was over the tops of the sevemore trees as he knelt in the center of the roof and began praying. Time lost all meaning for Kieran.

The first indication of trouble was the smell of smoke. Kieran pushed the distraction from his mind as he concentrated on his prayers. Suddenly, shouts ripped through the air and the elven boy found that he could no longer concentrate. He rose to his feet and felt a shock ripple through his body as his eyes took in the sight below him.

Twelve great ships sat off the coast of Alamanda. Fiery arrows rained from the ships towards the city and the sevemore forests surrounding it. Elves raced away from the water’s edge as magicians on the ships began casting fiery projectiles at the city. The reverberations of impacting force bolts echoed off the stone streets and buildings. Kieran watched in horror as stone buildings collapsed and great fires raced through the forest. His first thought was for the safety of his mother. He turned to race into the temple, but he found the friendly priest coming out onto the roof.

“Kieran,” the priest said seriously, “you must carry a message to the king.”

“I cannot,” protested Kieran. “I must get my mother to safety.”

“It is already too late for that,” frowned the priest as he pointed along the coast. “They struck that area on the way in. There is no hope for the families living there.”

“But I must try,” cried Kieran. “Send someone else to the king.”

The priest placed both hands on the boy’s shoulders and looked him in the eyes. “Hear me, Kieran,” the priest said sternly. “There is no time to waste. The humans are intent on destroying all of us. Already their smaller boats are bringing troops to shore. You have always had strong faith in Kaltara, but I doubt that you realize how strong Kaltara’s faith is in you. It is Kaltara that has commanded me to come up here and send you to the king. You are the only one who can make it there. Kaltara will guide you.”

“What am I to say to the king?” asked Kieran as tears flowed down his cheeks.

“Tell him that Angragar has attacked us,” instructed the priest. “Tell him that humans have betrayed us as was foretold. Remind him that he was told to never trust the humans. Make him swear revenge for this treachery.”

“I don’t understand,” Kieran shook his head. “Why would the humans do this?”

“The humans have turned away from Kaltara,” explained the priest. “Never again can the elves trust the humans. Go now. Run swiftly, and may Kaltara watch over you.”

Kieran raced into the temple and down the stairs. When he emerged from the temple, he faltered as his eyes took in the destruction of the city. Piles of stone rubble lined the streets where shops and trade stalls used to be. Everything that was flammable was burning, including the forest on both sides of the city. Elven bodies littered the streets, and small boats were ferrying humans to the quay. Several strong blasts struck the temple, sending showers of stone over the steps. Kieran reflexively ducked as slivers of stone rained down upon him. Suddenly, the priest stepped out of the door of the temple. His white robes were covered in blood and one of his eyes was swollen shut.

“Run, Kieran,” commanded the priest. “Run with every shred of your energy. Go now.”

Kieran stared with horror at the old priest. He immediately turned and raced down the steps of the temple and into the forest behind it.

Chapter 1

In the Land of Humans

The Balomar soldiers halted in front of the inn, which was several hours ride from the Khadoran city of Chantise. The cortain rose in his saddle and silently issued orders to his men. One squad of twenty soldiers rode past the inn and positioned themselves on the road to the east. Another squad turned and blocked the road to the west.

“Is this really necessary?” Lord Oktar questioned. “We have no right to block the road.”

“I promised Marshal Berman that I would take every precaution,” replied the cortain. “As soon as we determine that the inn is safe, our men will unblock the road. I will keep a few men posted on the road to make sure that no armies are approaching, but the rest will make camp behind the building.”

The lord of the Balomar clan nodded with resignation as the cortain issued orders to the third squad of soldiers under his command. Four soldiers dismounted and approached the inn. Two went around to the rear of the building while the other two opened the front door and entered. Within moments the soldiers returned with Marshal Berman in tow. The marshal paused outside the front door of the inn as his eyes swept the area to note the position of the Balomar troops. He nodded with approval as he approached Lord Oktar.

“Well done, Cortain,” the marshal said. “Have your men make camp out back. One squad at a time may enter the inn and dine while the rest keep watch.”

“What about blocking the road?” asked the Balomar lord. “That is uncalled for since the Emperor’s decree regarding attacks on neighboring clans.

“It is not neighboring clans that triggers my caution,” explained Marshal Berman. “There have been strange reports of murders recently. I will not allow the Lord of the Balomar clan to be assassinated under my watch. The road will be watched, but not blocked. Let’s get inside.”

Lord Oktar nodded, and the cortain ordered his men to dismount. Half of the squad preceded the Balomar lord into the inn, and the other half followed. The soldiers filled the benches on one side of the common room, reserving the far corner table for their lord and marshal. The other half of the common room was left open for travelers. The innkeeper’s eyes brightened as he watched the soldiers taking their seats. The three lone travelers already in the common room watched with curiosity, but soon returned their attention to their meals.

“Tell me about these murders,” prompted Lord Oktar after he had ordered meals from the innkeeper.

“There is little to tell,” frowned the Balomar marshal. “They are random attacks, and no one can see the reasons behind them.”

“They are not attempted robberies?” inquired the lord.

“No,” Marshal Berman shook his head. “They are just senseless murders. The assassins are unknown to the victims as best we can tell. People are afraid to stray from their estates.”

“Have any of the assassins been caught?” asked Lord Oktar.

“Not yet,” replied the marshal, “but I have spoken with the neighboring clans, and we have all agreed to try to capture one.”

“Well, I don’t think a lone murderer is going to take on an entire corte of troops,” shrugged the lord. “That would be suicide.”

“You are probably correct,” nodded the marshal, “but I will keep you protected regardless. Why are you not returning directly to the estate?”

“Emperor Marak is still having trouble convincing some of the clans to send their troops to Khadoratung for training,” explained Lord Oktar. “He asked me to visit some of the recalcitrant lords and convince them of the need to join together.”

“Why are they refusing?” frowned the marshal. “Emperor Marak has the blessing of the Lords’ Council in this endeavor. Do they think the battle with the Jiadin is the end of our troubles?”

“Some do not see any troubles on the horizon,” conceded Lord Oktar. “They are demanding proof of the Emperor’s warnings.”

“How can he prove anything to them before the invasion is actually launched?” responded the marshal. “Must they see the armies of the enemy to realize the danger that they are in?”

“Some would probably try to find an innocent explanation even then,” sighed Lord Oktar. “I do not have much hope of success for this mission, but I promised Emperor Marak that I would try my best.”

“How long will you be away from the estate?” asked the marshal.

“Perhaps a week more,” shrugged the lord. “I do not plan to spend a great deal of time at any one estate. If they will not listen to my plea, I will leave for the next estate.”

“I want every precaution taken,” Marshal Berman demanded as he turned to the cortain beside him. “Lord Oktar is to be always surrounded by your men. Do you understand?”

The cortain nodded as the door to the common room opened. A middle-aged man entered the room. His dark cloak had a hood, but the traveler had chosen not to use it. His beady eyes scanned the room slowly as he took a seat at an empty table on the side of the room opposite the Balomar troops. The innkeeper delivered plates of food to some of the soldiers and then walked across the room to the newcomer. The stranger ordered a meal and a cup of ale. He stared vacantly across the room as he waited for his food.

Marshal Berman watched the new arrival in silence for a few moments. When the innkeeper delivered the man’s food, the traveler sniffed the plate cautiously, his hawkish nose crinkling with concern. He finally shrugged and began eating his food.

“Do you watch every traveler with such interest?” Lord Oktar asked as he noted the marshal’s distraction.

“I guess I do,” sighed the marshal as he returned his attention to the Balomar lord. “It is one thing to protect a lord against known enemies, but suspecting every unknown person has become irritating. I will feel safer when you are back on the estate. Perhaps I should double your guard.”

“An entire corte is more than sufficient,” Lord Oktar shook his head. “Any more men and I will go broke feeding them. Keep them training for what is to come.”

“Very well,” agreed the marshal as he watched the stranger devour his food and push his plate away from him.

The soldier across the table from the marshal noted the concern on his leader’s face. He turned to watch the stranger stand up and leave the table. The soldier’s hand drifted towards the knife in his belt, but he relaxed as the traveler turned and headed for the door.

“Now you have made your men nervous as well,” chided Lord Oktar as he shook his head. “If a traveler cannot stop at an inn for a meal, Khadora is in a poor state indeed.”

When the stranger reached the front door of the inn, he suddenly turned and threw a knife at Lord Oktar. The Balomar lord looked on in horror as the knife sped towards him. The room erupted in shouts with soldiers scrambling to their feet. Being crowded into the corner of the room, the lord knew there was no way he would be able to rise in time to avoid the knife. Lord Oktar closed his eyes as he waited for death to claim him.

The nervous soldier across the table from the lord rose quickly and threw his body into the path of the knife. He grunted quietly as the knife ripped into his flesh. His body fell onto the table, sending food plates and cups of ale flying.

A soldier closer to the door leaped to his feet and drew his sword. As the assassin turned to flee, the soldier shoved his sword into the door, slamming it shut. Another soldier drew his sword and attacked the stranger. With his back to the closed door, the assassin had nowhere to flee. The soldier’s sword struck the assassin in his left eye. The stranger slammed backwards into the door and tumbled to the floor.

Marshal Berman leaped onto the table and ran towards the front door. He shouted orders to secure the entire building as he raced across the room. Soldiers immediately seized the innkeeper and the other travelers in the room as the marshal knelt next to the assassin and searched his body. Marshal Berman rose with a disgusted sigh.

“Throw the body outside,” commanded the marshal. “I will not have him fouling the air in here.”

Two soldiers opened the door and tossed the body outside while the marshal marched back to the table of Lord Oktar.

“I owe you an apology,” Lord Oktar said softly to Marshal Berman as two soldiers lifted their wounded comrade off of Lord Oktar’s table and placed him on the next one. “I could not imagine such an attack. How could he have possibly hoped to survive?”

“Overconfidence?” shrugged the marshal. “I really cannot fathom what goes through such a mind. There was nothing on his body to identify him in any way. He had a small pouch of gold and nothing else. We don’t even know what clan he hails from.”

“Is he dead?” asked Lord Oktar.

“Very much so,” nodded Marshal Berman. “I wish I could have interrogated him before he died. Barring that, I can make no sense of his attack.”

“Perhaps some people around here will recognize him,” suggested the cortain. “I could have my men start asking around.”

“No,” the marshal replied adamantly. “Get your other two squads fed. You are escorting Lord Oktar away from here within the hour. I will stay and see if I can find any clues as to his identity.”

The cortain nodded and ordered the squad to go outside and relieve one of the other squads. Marshal Berman walked over the wounded soldier.

“I’ll be alright, Marshall,” smiled the soldier as he held a rag to the wound in his side.

“You acted properly,” nodded the marshal. “Your act of bravery will be rewarded. You will stay with me, and I will get you to a healer. Are you well enough to ride?”

“I can ride,” nodded the soldier. “It looks worse than it is. I will be alright.”

The squad of soldiers entering the inn paused and looked around the room. Several soldiers still held the innkeeper and the travelers at sword-point. The squad leader issued crisp instructions to his men and they relieved the soldiers still on duty.

“What are we to do with these men?” the squad leader asked the cortain.

The cortain turned to Marshal Berman for orders.

“Let them go,” sighed the marshal. “I think the assassin was working alone.”

“Assassin?” questioned the squad leader. “What assassin?”

“The one who tried to kill Lord Oktar,” snapped the marshal. “You had to trip over his body to get in here. Concern yourself with your orders and not foolish questions.”

The squad leader felt thoroughly rebuked, but he was still confused. He inhaled deeply to summon his courage and then faced the marshal.

“Begging the marshal’s pardon,” the squad leader said sheepishly, “but there was no body outside. I did not know there was an attempt on Lord Oktar’s life.”

The marshal opened his mouth to berate the squad leader, but he stopped before he had issued a syllable. He rushed to the door and threw it open. He stepped outside and scanned the area for the assassin’s body, but he found nothing.

“He must have an accomplice,” shouted the marshal. “Did you see anyone carrying a body away from the inn?”

“I only saw one person leave the inn since we arrived,” answered the squad leader. “He was a strange looking man with an eye put out. He rode off just a few moments before we were relieved.”

“That is impossible,” shouted the marshal. “That man was dead. I checked him myself.”

“He still knew how to ride a horse,” the squad leader replied sheepishly.

* * *

The river barge bumped to a halt as the lines tugged on the pilings. Mistake adjusted her stance as the movement threatened to topple her.

“I never thought that I would get to see Khadoratung,” MistyTrail said softly as a gangplank was thrown from the dock. “This is exciting.”

“I am glad that you think so,” frowned Mistake. “I doubt that Eltor and Caldal even know that we have arrived. What is wrong with them? They have refused to come out of the cabin the entire trip down the river.”

“They changed even before that,” answered MistyTrail. “When we boarded Emperor Marak’s ship, they started acting weird. I don’t think they like being with us any more.”

“Well I am going to find out what is going on,” Mistake said with determination. “I will not be embarrassed by them in front of the Emperor.”

Mistake strode purposely towards the small cabin in the center of the barge. She opened the door and stepped into the small communal kitchen area. As she approached the ladder to the bunkroom upstairs, she heard the voices of the elves. She froze and listened.

“We have to get off,” declared Eltor. “This is the end of the line for this barge.”

“I don’t care if it is the end,” retorted Caldal. “I do not understand why we didn’t just get a ship at Raven’s Point and head home. Now we are even deeper inside the land of the humans. We have to escape.”

“Escape to where?” countered Eltor. “We do not even know where we are. How do you expect to find Elvangar?”

“I don’t know,” admitted Caldal, “but we must leave anyway. You know the restrictions set down by Queen Alycia.”

“We broke those restrictions when we sailed past the Barrier Islands,” replied Eltor. “Talking to humans will not add any more punishment to our debt. We have no choice. If we ever hope to see Elvangar again, we will need the help of humans to get there.”

“Not if I can help it,” swore Caldal. “I had my fill of humans on Motanga. I do not wish to see another.”

Suddenly, Eltor’s head appeared over the edge of the hole allowing passage to the bunkroom. He gazed down at Mistake with a frown.

“Is it common in this land to eavesdrop on friends?” Eltor asked accusingly.

“Is it common among elves to keep secrets from their friends?” retorted Mistake. “MistyTrail and I have been wondering what was wrong with the two of you. Why did you not share your concerns with us? Must I resort to spying to learn the truth?”

“Fair enough,” conceded Eltor. “We should have told you earlier, but we are forbidden from meeting humans. It is the law of the elves.”

“You have chosen a fine time to reveal that,” frowned Mistake. “We have arrived in Khadoratung, and we are expected at the Imperial Palace within the hour. There is no way to change that now.”

“You cannot force us to go,” Caldal said loudly.

“I cannot,” Mistake conceded, “but go you must. If you tried to leave now without seeing Emperor Marak, he would suspect that you are allied with Vand. He would order your arrest.”

“Allied with Vand?” protested Caldal. “Nothing could be more ridiculous.”

“She has a point,” interjected Eltor. “This emperor has provided passage for us to Khadoratung so that he might meet us. If we disappeared at the last moment, who could blame him for being suspicious? We must go, Caldal. We have already broken the law by speaking to humans. Another one won’t make a difference.”

Mistake heard Caldal grumbling under his breath, but the elves started descending the ladder. She retreated to the deck of the barge and waited alongside MistyTrail. A few moments later, Eltor and Caldal joined them. The elves stared at the city of Khadoratung as Mistake led them off the barge and away from the dock.

The wharf area was busy with men bustling to and fro as they unloaded a long line of barges. The smell of overripe fruit permeated the air and Caldal started breathing through his mouth. Mistake hurried the small group past warehouses and trade shops as they moved deeper into the city. Eltor looked curiously at the tradesmen and their goods as he passed by. Within minutes they were at the edge of a vast marketplace. The group involuntarily slowed down as Eltor, Caldal, and MistyTrail took in the immenseness of the market. None of them had ever seen a market so large.

Mistake gave up trying to herd the small group directly to the Imperial Palace. Eltor and Caldal studied each of the stalls intently, while MistyTrail roamed on ahead quickly scanning the tables as if searching for something in particular. When MistyTrail reached the end row, she turned and strode along it. Suddenly, someone grabbed her arm, and she whirled around, a knife automatically sliding into her hand. The man’s eyes widened in horror as MistyTrail brought the knife up between them.

“Hold,” the man swallowed hard. “I did not mean to accost you. I thought you were Mistake. I am sorry.”

“You know Mistake?” MistyTrail asked, her eyes narrowing with distrust.

“Yes,” the man nodded vigorously. “I am Wendal. That is my stand over there,” he added as he pointed to a small stand a few paces away. “You look remarkably like her.”

“I am her sister,” MistyTrail smiled weakly as she returned the knife to its sheath. “She has mentioned you. I am sorry if I scared you.”

“Well you did indeed scare me,” Wendal chuckled nervously. “I see that you are as quick of hand as she is, too. It must run in the family. Please come back to my stall. I dare not leave it unattended.”

MistyTrail nodded and followed the merchant back to his stall. She gazed at the expensive merchandise with interest.

“Where is Mistake?” asked Wendal. “Has she come with you?”

MistyTrail looked around and saw her small group of friends a dozen stalls away. She pointed them out to Wendal.

“She will be here soon,” answered MistyTrail. “We are on our way to visit the Emperor.”

“Are you now?” grinned Wendal. “I would suspect that your statement was all bluster if I did not know your sister. What makes you think the Emperor will see you?”

“He sent for us,” answered MistyTrail as she picked up a piece of jewelry and examined it. “We rescued two elves from the Island of Darkness. Emperor Marak wants to talk to them.”

“The Island of Darkness?” responded Wendal. “It sounds scary.”

“It was,” MistyTrail sighed as she placed the jewelry back on the table. “I am sure that the Emperor will see us promptly.”

Mistake saw MistyTrail talking to Wendal. She grabbed Eltor and Caldal by the arms and hurried them towards Wendal’s stall.

“Take them to the end of the market,” Mistake commanded MistyTrail. “I will catch up to you in a moment.”

MistyTrail frowned and was about to object when she saw the displeasure on Mistake’s face. She smiled politely at Wendal and then herded the elves away from the stall.

“So you found your sister,” beamed Wendal. “I never had a doubt that you would succeed. She looks very much like you.”

“That she does,” nodded Mistake, “but she is prone to telling tall tales. I am trying hard to break her of the habit, but it is hard. Sometimes I think she doesn’t even know what is real and what is fancy. I hope she didn’t say anything really crazy. She embarrasses me sometimes.”

“Actually,” grinned Wendal, “we barely had time to say hello before you arrived. I hope you have time later to stop by for a chat. I would like to know what you have been up to.”

“I will try,” Mistake said cheerily as she left the stall and hurried to catch up to her friends.

Mistake caught up with the others and guided them out of the market and into a large well-groomed park. She paused when they were free of passersby.

“What did you tell Wendal?” asked Mistake.

“Not much,” frowned MistyTrail. “Why are you upset? I thought he was your friend?”

“In a way he is,” shrugged Mistake, “but that does not mean that I share things with him freely. Wendal is the most expensive merchant in Khadora. He buys and sells anything that commands a large price.”

“Well I wasn’t going to steal any of his wares,” pouted MistyTrail, “if that is what you were worrying about. That is your thing, not mine.”

“That is not what I was talking about,” Mistake retorted angrily. “Sometimes what commands a large price in Khadora is information. Did you stop to think that some people might pay to know that there are elves in Khadora? Emperor Marak asked us not to share any information with anyone until we talked to him first.”

“Well we ought to go see him then,” countered MistyTrail. “There is no reason for us to stand in this park debating it. Let’s go.”

Eltor and Caldal had dismissed the conversation when it started. The elves stood in the park gazing at the Imperial Palace. The massive white building sat behind a high black metal fence with gates sprinkled along its length. They watched people coming and going and saw soldiers marching in and out the doors in a wide variety of uniforms.

“Are you sure that this emperor will even speak to us?” asked Eltor. “We may have to wait days just to find out if he will speak to us.”

“He will speak to us,” assured Mistake as she exhaled in frustration. “Come on. Let’s get this over with. I am tired of being a shepherd.”

Mistake led the way through the park to the black fence. She opened one of the gates and marched the group to the steps leading to the door. Four Imperial soldiers stood guard outside the door. They stared at the small group as they approached. Mistake winced as she imagined what they must look like. Eltor and Caldal were still dressed in the Motanga uniforms they had stolen. The garish red uniforms were torn and ill fitting. Mistake and MistyTrail were dressed in animal skins, but even their clothes needed mending in more than one place. She chewed on her lower lips as the eyes of the soldiers bore into them.

“What is your purpose in coming here?” demanded one of the soldiers as soon as the group reached the bottom of the steps.

“This is not going to go well,” Caldal whispered to Eltor. “It will not be days of waiting. It will be weeks.”

“I am Mistake,” announced Mistake as she flashed a white pin before the soldiers’ eyes. “I have been commanded by Emperor Marak to bring these three before him immediately upon entering the city. Please send a runner immediately to inform the emperor of my arrival.”

The nearest soldier’s eyebrows rose in surprise at the bold response. He stepped to the door and cracked it open. He whispered to someone inside and then closed the door.

“Marshal Chack will be here in a moment,” the soldier declared. “Please stand off to one side while you wait.”

“I am sure his response will be swift,” retorted Mistake. “Anyone coming behind us can wait.”

The soldier shook his head and glared at Mistake. He was about to demand that she move to one side when the door opened. Marshal Chack walked out and stood on the top step. He stared at Mistake and the others around there. He smiled thinly and shook his head.

“Let them in,” stated the Imperial marshal. “I will take care of them.”

One of the soldiers opened the door and Marshal Chack led the small group into the palace. He halted in the massive entry foyer and stared at the group again.

“Do you know how to find the soldiers’ dining room?” he asked Mistake.

“I know where it is,” Mistake nodded.

Marshal Chack reached into a pouch and handed two small white pins to Mistake. “Put one of those on your sister and one on yourself,” he commanded. “Go to the dining room and wait there. I am not going to let these two men roam the halls in those uniforms. I will take them to change their clothes. They will meet you there.”

Mistake was suspicious about the arrangements, but her eyes gleamed with the thought of having two more Imperial pins. She reached out and grabbed the pins. Marshal Chack gently took Eltor and Caldal by the arms and led them away.

Chapter 2

Emperors

Marshal Chack led the two elves along a long corridor leading to the rear of the Imperial Palace. He guided through a door and into a large room filled with tubs for bathing. Tall shelves filled with uniforms lined two walls, and huge tanks of water occupied the third wall.

“You can wash up here,” Marshal Chack said as he closed the door. “I think we will find some clothes in here that will fit you.”

Eltor stared at the large selection of white uniforms. He turned and stared at the marshal.

“You intend for us to wear your uniforms?” the elf asked. “We are not joining your army.”

“I only offer clean clothes,” replied the marshal as he walked to a wide closet on the fourth wall. “No one has mentioned anything about accepting you into the armies of Khadora.”

The wide closet had several doors in it. The marshal opened one of the doors to the closet, and Eltor moved up behind him to watch. Several uniforms hung from hooks high in the closet. One of them had broad gold stripes around the edges. The elf stared at the uniform and then looked at the marshal.

“Why do you have gold on your uniform?” Eltor asked. “All of the other soldiers we saw inside the palace do not.”

“I am the Imperial Marshal,” answered Marshal Chack as he knelt and scanned the drawers that filled the lower half of the closet.

Some of the drawers had names written on them, but most did not. The marshal opened several of the drawers without names and tried to gauge the size of the tunics within.

“My gold stripes set me apart from the rest of the Imperial troops,” the marshal continued. “The Emperor is the only other person to wear gold on his uniform, and his gold is much wider than mine. I will find you something in gray so that you are not offended by wearing the Imperial color. Take off your rags and get washed up.”

Eltor turned and saw Caldal standing near the door with his arms crossed and a scowl on his face. It was obvious to Eltor that Caldal did not want to be in the palace. He shook his head and walked to his friend.

“Washing will make you feel better,” Eltor said softly. “Besides, anything we get to wear will have to be better than these Motangan uniforms.”

“I want nothing from the humans,” Caldal said stubbornly. “Let us flee while we can.”

“Every door out of the palace is manned,” Eltor shook his head. “We will never make it out of here alive. Wash and change your clothes. I promise that we will flee when the time is right.”

Caldal stood defiantly for several moments before sighing and stripping off his uniform. He threw the clothes on the floor and began washing. Eltor grabbed several clean rags from a shelf and joined him. Moments later, Marshal Berman crossed the room and placed two sets of clothes on a small table near the elves.

“These ought to be a fairly close fit,” declared the marshal. “If you wish, I will have something altered to fit you better, but it will not be complete before you meet the Emperor.”

“Then we are really going to see him?” asked Eltor. “I thought Mistake was merely boasting about it.”

“You will get to see him,” replied the marshal. “He needs to know about the Island of Darkness and the land of the elves.”

Caldal muttered something under his breath, which did not sound friendly. Marshal Berman was about to say something when the door opened and a gray-clad warrior entered. The marshal immediately marched across the room to greet the new arrival.

“You are needed on the training field, Marshall,” declared the newcomer.

“I was just getting the elves ready to join Mistake and MistyTrail in the dining room,” replied the marshal.

“I will take care of the elves,” replied the warrior. “I need to wash up myself.”

The marshal nodded and left the room as the warrior closed the door. The elves stared at the newcomer as he began to remove his weapons and place them on the floor. They whispered to each other as numerous knives and stars were placed next to the large two-handed sword. The warrior stripped off his dirty gray uniform and threw it on the floor. He walked across the room and stepped into a large tub of water and began washing.

“We could take those weapons,” Caldal whispered to Eltor. “Surely we could escape without the humans noticing us? We are elves after all.”

“Only when the time is right,” insisted Eltor, “and the time is not yet right. We will meet this human emperor and then leave. Be patient.”

“I will be patient,” Caldal grudgingly agreed, “but I will not say anything to him about Elvangar. The humans must not know anything about our homeland. That is the law.”

“I know the law,” retorted Eltor as he watched the human bathe. “We will tell him about Motanga and nothing else. As soon as we are out of this palace, we will find our own way home. I am sure that we can lose the humans easily.”

“We can steal a boat and put this human land behind us,” nodded Caldal.

“I am not pleased to be reduced to stealing,” frowned Eltor.

“Why not?” asked Caldal. “These humans are our enemies just as much as the ones on Motanga. We stole their boat.”

“These humans have not threatened our lives yet,” posed Eltor. “I cannot see them in the same light as Vand’s people.”

“I can,” scowled Caldal. “Just because they have not threatened us yet is no reason to believe that they won’t. All humans are alike. They are not to be trusted. They are our enemies. I will slit one of their throats to get a ship. Maybe we should try to take the emperor hostage when we meet him and demand a ship as ransom?”

“He will likely be well guarded,” frowned Eltor. “The humans would never be foolish enough to leave him in the presence of strangers without guards.”

“We shall see,” Caldal said stubbornly.

“We don’t even know how to get back to Elvangar,” Eltor pointed out. “Suppose we do succeed in getting a ship? Then what? We don’t know which direction to sail.”

“We need to find some charts of the human land,” nodded Caldal. “Maybe we can determine something about our location when we see them?”

The human warrior stepped out of the tub and dried himself. He walked to the wide closet and opened the door. The warrior was hidden from the elves by the door to the closet. As the human dressed, Caldal silently dashed across the room and snared two knives from the pile of weapons. He raced back to Eltor and placed the weapons under the gray uniforms that the marshal had laid out for the elves.

“That is enough washing for me,” Caldal said loudly. “I guess we should try to fit into these uniforms now so we look nice when we meet the emperor.”

The warrior smiled inwardly as he slipped on his clean white uniform. Caldal grinned as he pulled on the gray uniform and slid the stolen knife under his tunic. Eltor had just managed to hide his knife when the door to the closet slammed shut. He looked over at the warrior and his eyes grew wide. The once dirty warrior stood in a clean white uniform with broad gold bands running through it. Emperor Marak grinned at the elves as he fastened his cape.

“Not exactly what you expected to see?” asked the Emperor as he walked to his pile of weapons and began picking them up. “You have much to learn about humans. We are not your enemies.”

Caldal fidgeted with his hand beneath his tunic. Emperor Marak stared coldly at him while Eltor gently laid his hand on his friend’s shoulder in a calm warning.

“You do not want to start this relationship by dying,” warned the Emperor as he stuffed his stars into a pouch. “Leave your knife where it is, and no one will get hurt.”

Caldal saw the Emperor standing across the room holding his still-sheathed sword. He knew that the missing knives had been noted, and that they would soon be taken back. He thought this would be his last chance to attack. If he could wound the Emperor now and take him hostage, they would have a free pass out of Khadora. Caldal pulled his knife and threw it at Emperor Marak.

The Emperor’s sword rose swiftly, knocking the flying knife to the floor. He quickly swung the sword to one side, causing the sheath to slide off the sinuous blade. He shook his head sadly as he held the two-handed sword before him.

“I would have credited you with more sense than that,” the Emperor said softly. “I will have the other knife dropped to the floor now.”

Eltor swallowed hard and nodded. He reached under his tunic and dropped the stolen knife to the floor. He kicked it across the room towards the Emperor.

“We are not your enemy,” Emperor Marak declared as he retrieved his sheath and slid the sword into it. “I had hoped that you would realize that without being told.”

The Emperor retrieved the knives and slid them into sheaths on his belt. He positioned the sheathed sword so it hung down his back and then flipped the cape over it. Neither elf spoke, and when the Emperor had all of his weapons restored, he walked over and stood before them.

“Are not Mistake and MistyTrail elves?” he asked.

“They are,” nodded Eltor.

“Then why do you assume that we would be your enemies?” asked the Emperor. “Mistake and MistyTrail are well accepted and loved in this land. We have no reason to hate you.”

“All humans are our enemies,” declared Caldal. “That is our law.”

“Then your laws need changing,” stated the Emperor. “Are all elves thieves?”

“I did not steal your knife,” shrugged Caldal. “I meant to return it.”

“And return it you did,” retorted the Emperor, “although not in a friendly manner. I was referring to your plan to steal a boat.”

Caldal’s mouth dropped open as he turned and looked across the room to where the warrior had bathed. He looked back at the Emperor and shook his head.

“You heard us talking?” asked Caldal. “How is that possible?”

“I heard everything,” nodded the Emperor. “It was not a conversation that pleased me. I had wanted very much to meet elves in the hopes that a friendship could be developed between our peoples, but I can see now that the elves prefer a world ruled by Vand instead of Kaltara.”

“Never,” spat Eltor. “How can you say such a thing?”

“Just who do you think Vand will attack after he is done destroying us?” asked the Emperor. “Do you think that Elvangar is immune to such attacks? Has not Vand attacked Elvangar before?”

“Humans attacked us many ages ago,” replied Eltor. “That is why you are our enemies. We once trusted humans and traded with them, but they returned our friendship with treachery.”

“It was Vand who attacked you,” declared Emperor Marak. “He will do so again. You have been to the Island of Darkness. Can you doubt that the attack will come?”

“How would you know who attacked us ages ago?” asked Caldal. “You are just making up stories to befriend us. When you know what you need to know, you will discard us and lay plans for attacking Elvangar.”

“What if I could prove to you that Vand attacked the elves to create a division between human and elf?” asked Emperor Marak. “Would you be willing to carry a message from me to your king?”

“The king died years ago,” replied Eltor. “Queen Alycia rules the elves.”

“Are you saying that you will allow us to go home?” Caldal asked skeptically.

“I want you to go home,” assured Emperor Marak. “Even if your queen refuses to establish relations with us, she must be informed of what is happening on the Island of Darkness. Vand will not be satisfied with only our destruction. He will seek to destroy the elves as well.”

“How can you possibly prove what happened ages ago?” asked Eltor.

“I will take you to the lost city of Angragar,” offered Emperor Marak. “There you will be able to read scrolls from thousands of years ago. The history of good relations between your people and mine is well documented. The story of Vand is also documented. Will you accept my offer?”

Eltor and Caldal exchanged skeptical glances. Emperor Marak turned and walked away to let the elves discuss his proposition between themselves. He did not bother to construct an air tunnel to listen in. Instead he waited by the door. Finally the elves crossed the room to the door.

“We will accompany you to Angragar,” stated Eltor. “We will also hold you to your offer to allow us to leave this land, regardless of whether or not we find the proof you say exists. Do you agree?”

“I agree,” nodded the Emperor. “I will even see that you have a ship so you don’t have to steal one,” he added with a smile. “Let us go get Mistake and MistyTrail. I want to hear all about the Island of Darkness before your memories fade.”

“My memories will never fade,” frowned Caldal as he thought back on his time in the Chamber of Horrors.

* * *

Lady Mystic and Aakuta reached the top of the stairs in the great pyramid on the Island of Darkness. The soldiers immediately opened the doors to the throne room and admitted them. Aakuta trailed slightly behind Lady Mystic and followed her without question. She strode off to one side of the room and moved to the front to get a good view.

“What is the significance of today’s meeting?” Aakuta asked softly.

“I am not sure,” Lady Mystic admitted. “I do know that Clarvoy has returned from the mainland. I suspect that he brings great news.”

“Who is this Clarvoy?” asked the dark mage.

“He is the spymaster,” answered Lady Mystic. “He is Vand’s most favored servant. Do not cross him if you wish to live.”

Aakuta’s eyes swept the room, noting the presence and absence of those he had come to know during his time on Motanga. As his eyes swept over the Emperor, he saw that Vand was watching him. Aakuta quickly averted his eyes.

“He has been asking questions about you lately,” Lady Mystic said softly with a cruel smile upon her lips. “Perhaps you are not fully trusted yet.”

“Do not be so smug,” Aakuta retorted. “I do not think Vand trusts anyone. I have been as loyal as any other.”

“Perhaps,” replied Lady Mystic as the doors opened once more.

A man entered the chamber. He was neither tall nor short. Nor could he be described as either wide or thin. He had no facial hair, save thin eyebrows. When he removed his hat, Aakuta saw that the man’s head was clean-shaven. His nose was average, and his ears neither protruded too far from his head nor did they lay flat against his skull. The only things remarkable about the man were his eyes. The eyes were a sparkling black that seemed to penetrate whatever they focused on. And those eyes instantly surveyed the people in the room as he marched down the center carpet and halted several paces from the throne.

“Welcome back, Clarvoy,” the Emperor said dryly. “What news do you bring me?”

“There is much to tell,” Clarvoy reported in a dull monotone voice. “Is it necessary for all to hear?”

“I have chosen the audience for today,” declared the Emperor. “Speak.”

“Omunga has fallen to the Sakovans,” Clarvoy began. “Their crops are being rejuvenated by mages, and the bloodshed during the war was much less than we had hoped for. Karnic obviously failed his assignment. He has already paid for his failure.”

Vand’s eyes darted to gaze upon Aakuta and then returned to the spymaster.

“This does not please me,” frowned the Emperor.

“Many things will not please you this day,” replied Clarvoy, “but you will be wiser for having heard what I must say.”

“Continue,” prodded the Emperor.

“The Khadoran Emperor is training all of the armies of Khadora,” continued the spymaster. “Each clan has been instructed to send troops to Khadoratung to be trained. When they return to their estates, others replace them. This could cause us a great deal of concern.”

“What can be done to disrupt it?” asked Vand.

“Only trouble in the local areas would disrupt it at this stage,” replied Clarvoy. “I have been using some hellsouls to test the reactions of the clans. When there are unexplained murders near the estates, the armies are reluctant to move. If enough of this happens, Emperor Marak will not be able to train the armies. The clans will cite the need to enforce order in their home regions.”

“What else have you found out?” asked Vand.

“Four elves were seen in Khadora,” reported the spymaster. “Two females and two males. The males wore the uniforms of Motanga. It is rumored that the two females rescued the males.”

Rage fell over Vand’s face as he pointed to a soldier with gold trim on his uniform.

“There was a watch house abandoned not long ago,” stated the Emperor. “Their boat was also missing. Summon that sector commander to me immediately.”

The officer bowed and swiftly left the room.

“What is that about?” whispered Aakuta.

“The watchers were thought to have deserted their post,” replied Lady Mystic. “It now appears otherwise. The sector commander will be punished for allowing the escape.”

“What will happen to him?” asked Aakuta.

“Whatever happens to him,” smiled Lady Mystic, “he will wish he was already dead.”

“The enemy also has a method of communicating magically,” continued the spymaster. “They call it an air tunnel. It has the capability to send speech over great distances.”

Vand sat staring blankly for several moments before saying, “I want that spell known by my people. Discover how it is done. I also want to know how to disrupt their use of it.”

“I will see to it,” promised the spymaster.

“Is there anything else?” asked Vand.

“I could use more hellsouls,” Clarvoy stated.

“How many do you need?” asked Vand.

“As many as you can spare,” answered the spymaster. “I can make good use of them on the mainland.”

“Then I shall create more for you,” the Emperor smiled wickedly. “You shall have as many as you require.”

“Hellsouls?” asked Aakuta in a soft voice.

“They are revenants,” explained Lady Mystic. “They are very interesting creatures. When they are killed, they rise again to continue serving their master. We should watch as Vand creates new ones. He will probably be doing so this afternoon. Want to go?”

“Very much so,” smiled Aakuta. “I also have an idea regarding the punishment of the sector commander.”

“Oh?” Lady Mystic asked with interest. “What have you thought up?”

“Remember telling me about the special chamber that Vand visits?” questioned the dark mage. “Would not that be a fitting end to a traitor?”

Lady Mystic smiled broadly as she subtly nodded her head. “I do like the way you think, Aakuta. That would be greater entertainment than anything I could think of. Do you mind if I mention it to Vand?”

“Not at all,” smiled Aakuta. “The credit shall all be yours.”

Lady Mystic smiled as she separated from Aakuta and approached the Emperor. Vand stared at Aakuta while Lady Mystic whispered in his ear. He nodded slowly, and Lady Mystic returned to her spot next to the dark mage.

“The Emperor agrees with you,” Lady Mystic whispered when she returned. “When everyone else is dismissed, we are to remain behind. He wants us to witness the punishment.”

Aakuta let Lady Mystic’s words roll around in his mind as he thought about the way the Emperor had stared at him. A cold chill ran up Aakuta’s spine. He suddenly realized that Vand did not trust him at all. The punishment was to serve as notice to Aakuta should the dark mage get any ideas of treason.

The meeting dragged on for another hour after the spymaster had finished. Aakuta became bored with listening to the trivial concerns of the petitioners. Suddenly, the door opened and a man was thrown into the room. The man wore the uniform of the Motanga military, but he had no weapons on him. The officer who had left the chamber to fetch the sector commander strode through the doors before they closed.

“Today’s session is over,” announced the Emperor as he glared at the soldier on the floor.

People silently turned and filed out of the room. When the door finally closed, only Aakuta, Lady Mystic, the Emperor, and the two soldiers remained. The Emperor rose from his throne and walked down the steps. He circled around the officer on the floor and spat upon him.

“Your dereliction of duty has cost me greatly,” snarled the Emperor. “You have allowed elves to escape this island. Even now they walk the roads of Khadora. How should you pay for your failure?”

“I beg your mercy,” cried the commander. “I had no way of knowing that the escapees were in my sector. I have served you faithfully. Please don’t kill me.”

“Very well,” the Emperor replied after several minutes of silence. “Stand up.”

The commander rose submissively. He looked around the room to see who was present. He avoided the glare from the emperor and stared at the floor. Vand gestured to the gold-trimmed officer and instructed him to open a door at the rear of the chamber. The officer immediately complied, his expression one of wonder.

“Walk with me,” the Emperor said to the commander.

The soldier nodded and followed the Emperor out of the chamber. Lady Mystic tugged on Aakuta’s sleeve and nodded towards the door. The two mages followed the emperor and the soldiers. The small group emerged into a corridor. They walked along the corridor a short distance before they came to another door. The emperor turned and dismissed the gold-trimmed officer. When he had left, the emperor opened the door to the chamber. A blast of hot arid air immediately swept into the corridor. The emperor’s face began to glow with pleasure.

“Wait inside for me,” the emperor instructed the commander.

The soldier nodded and walked into the chamber. A sudden brilliant glow emanated from the chamber, and the soldier began screaming hysterically. Emperor Vand smiled thinly at Aakuta.

“Don’t even think of betraying me,” Vand warned Aakuta. “There are some powers so great that you will never be able to comprehend them.” Turning to face Lady Mystic, the emperor continued, “Enjoy yourself with the commander. Make sure that everyone knows what happened to him.”

Lady Mystic nodded her assurance, and Vand stepped into the chamber. After several minutes, the screaming soldier flew out of the chamber and slammed into the wall of the corridor. The door closed silently, cutting off the brilliant glow.

“What do we do with him now?” Aakuta asked as he watched the screaming soldier banging his head against the stone floor in an attempt to kill himself.

“We enjoy the show,” shrugged Lady Mystic. “He needs to be seen in the city as an example of what happens to those who fail their duties. Should we levitate him down the stairs, or just toss his body off the roof?”

“He won’t die?” asked Aakuta.

“Not until he is allowed to,” replied Lady Mystic.

Chapter 3

An Odd Assortment

The string of red-clad soldiers wound through the city to the Temple of Vand. The line ran around the temple and into a huge cavernous room through the rear entrance. Lady Mystic and Aakuta stood in the center of the room watching the procession. At the end of the room opposite the entrance, Emperor Vand stood mumbling words as he took a soldier’s right wrist into his hand. A small curl of smoke rose from the contact, and the soldier jolted slightly. Vand dropped the man’s wrist and waited for the next soldier to step forward so he could repeat the procedure.

The recently processed soldier shook his head as he fought the pain that had been inflicted on him. After a few seconds, he walked forward to a long table and picked up the clothes that had been laid out for him. He turned silently and marched towards the rear exit from the temple where Clarvoy and Santiock waited for him. General Santiock stared at the soldier as the man halted in front of him.

“Brown and yellow uniform,” General Santiock announced.

“He will be impersonating a soldier of the Kamaril clan of Khadora,” declared Clarvoy. “He will not be leaving until tomorrow.”

“Return to your barracks,” ordered General Santiock. “Report to the docks at daybreak.”

The soldier nodded silently and marched out the door. Already the next hellsoul was approaching the general.

“Simple black cloak,” announced General Santiock.

“I have need of him tonight,” Clarvoy smiled mischievously. “Send him to the docks.”

Suddenly, the crazed commander raced into the temple, his red uniform torn and ragged and his wide-open eyes focusing on nothing. The man’s mouth was twisted grotesquely and drool ran down his chin. The guards moved quickly to halt his progress. Two spears pierced the man’s side and a sword slashed across his abdomen. The commander fell to the ground, screaming in pain. Seconds later, he rose and began running again, his entrails hanging through his fresh wound. The guards seized him and dragged him out of the temple. Vand looked briefly at the distraction and instantly returned to processing the long line of soldiers.

“What a horrible existence,” remarked Aakuta from the center of the room. “How long will he exist like that?”

“As I said before,” smiled Lady Mystic. “He will not be allowed to die until Vand feels the punishment has been met. Such is the price to pay for betraying a god.”

“A rather heavy price,” Aakuta remarked. “It was humorous at first, but it grows tiring now.”

“It is meant to grate on your nerves, Aakuta,” smiled Lady Mystic. “For some reason Vand does not trust you. I can’t imagine why.”

“Nor can I,” scowled Aakuta. “I have tried to be helpful to the Emperor. I have studied your spells and potions. I have even offered my advice on how to improve them. My every action has been to make Vand’s operation more successful, but he insists on sending fools to the mainland. Can he not see the destruction he is doing to his own cause?”

“Do you think he cares about his losses?” laughed Lady Mystic. “Vand is thousands of years old, Aakuta. His playing in Khadora and its neighboring countries brings amusement to him. It really doesn’t matter in the end what the Torak does. So he unites the pitiful armies of Khadora, so what? They still will be unable to defend against what Vand is going to throw at them. The same is true of the Sakovans and the Fakarans. In fact, maybe their newfound organization will make the war more enjoyable.”

“Are you telling me that my advice is rejected even though he knows that I am right?” asked the dark mage.

“Vand doesn’t want your advice,” replied Lady Mystic. “He wants you to be excited about his projects. Oh, your advice might be desirable when it conflicts with his other advisors as that makes for an interesting exchange, but he will not alter his methods because you think your ways are better.”

“So he is going to send these thousands of hellsouls to the mainland just for excitement?” questioned Aakuta.

“Mostly,” nodded Lady Mystic. “Oh, Clarvoy will make good use of them no doubt, but it is the excitement Vand desires. Think about it. It is really a brilliant plan. Thousands of assassins roaming the mainland causing death and destruction, and they will not be able to be killed. Imagine the havoc this will cause. It almost makes me want to go and watch.”

“How does Vand get his excitement from this?” inquired Aakuta. “What gain does he get when he cannot witness the havoc?”

“He can somehow,” frowned Lady Mystic. “I do not understand it, but he has a way of seeing what happens. I think he gets visions in that chamber behind the throne room. How the visions come, or how accurate they are, is unknown to me, but he usually has a good feel for what is going on in the mainland.”

“Interesting,” mused Aakuta. “I truly wonder what exists in there.”

“Do not even think about it,” warned Lady Mystic. “You saw what happened to the commander. Your curiosity will be your death, or worse.”

* * *

Rhoda rose from her bed at Raven’s Point and walked to the window. The breeze was coming off the ocean as she leaned out the window. She inhaled deeply and closed her eyes as the wind gently blew her long black hair back into the room. As an air mage, Rhoda loved the feel of the wind upon her face. She remained frozen for several minutes as she felt the soft caress of the breeze. Eventually, she opened her eyes and stared into the predawn darkness. The stars overhead twinkled brightly, but she could smell the faint tinge of fog in the air. She pulled back from the window and slipped on a robe.

Rhoda padded softly through the mansion so as not to disturb those who were still sleeping. She nodded to the sentries at the rear door of the mansion, as she did every morning, and pranced out into the darkness. She raced down to the waterfront and ran along the wooden boulevard until it ended. As she leaped onto the sandy beach, she felt the soft sand flow over her toes. She squealed softly with joy as she ran along the beach, away from the mansion. When she reached her favorite cove, she halted and spun in a circle, letting her arms fly out from her sides.

She inhaled deeply again and closed her eyes. The breeze was almost nonexistent in the cove and a frown fell over her face. As an air mage, she loved the feel of the wind. She stared upward and could not see the stars. The smell of fog was strong, and she looked down and gazed upon the sea. She could just make out some wisps of fog just offshore. She sighed with resignation and began to take off her robe for her morning dip.

A foreign sound echoed softly through the fog, and Rhoda froze. She tilted her head as if to hear better, but the sound was already gone. She remained unmoving for several long moments, hoping to hear it again.

Suddenly, she heard the air ripping apart to her right. She whirled to face the noise, her mouth opening to scream, but it was too late. The freeze ball slammed into the air mage, instantly halting any movement. Her open eyes stared through the ice as she watched helplessly. Several men dressed in dark colors ran towards her. She could barely make out the shapes moving in the darkness, but there was nothing she could do about it.

Four men seized her frozen frame and lifted it off the beach. They carried her swiftly along the beach to a waiting boat. She saw two other men already in the boat as her capturers lowered her to the floor. The sounds that filtered through the ice were grossly distorted. The men spoke briefly, but she could not understand what they were saying. What she did understand was that her life was about to change, and there wasn’t anything she could do about it.

* * *

“Great shot!” congratulated Huckel. “Both of you are excellent archers.”

“It was a fair shot,” grumbled Caldal as he held the bow away from himself and stared at it. “If you humans had a decent bow, I would show you what an elf could do.”

“If you can tell me how to make a better bow,” offered the Khadoran trainer, “I would have on made for you.”

“These bows will do,” replied Caldal with a shake of his head.

“Aye,” nodded Huckel, “you do well with them. Anyway, it is time for you to head up to the Emperor’s office. “Come back when you have time. I would like to learn how you shoot so well.”

Caldal did not reply as he turned and strode off. Eltor ran to catch up to him.

“Why were you so cold to Huckel?” asked Eltor. “He was kind enough to you.”

“He just wants to learn our elven secrets,” scowled Caldal. “I will tell these humans nothing.”

“Your mind creates enemies where none exist,” scolded Eltor. “These humans do not hate us, and Huckel was just genuinely interested. He was not trying to pry secrets out of you when he offered to make you a bow. He was trying to please you.”

“And what about learning our secrets of accuracy?” retorted Caldal. “You heard him say that he wants to learn how we do it.”

“Of course he does,” Eltor shook his head in frustration. “If you saw someone doing something better than you, wouldn’t you want to learn how it was done? Huckel trains soldiers from all over Khadora. If he can learn better ways of doing something, he is eager to do so. I admire him for that. He really cares about teaching his men the best that he can. Your rudeness to him was insulting.”

“Insulting?” balked Caldal as he halted outside the rear door to the Imperial Palace. “How did I insult him?”

“You insulted me,” Eltor corrected. “After your performance towards him, I am ashamed to be known as an elf. I can only imagine what that man thinks of us now. I suppose he will see all elves as being rude, arrogant, and egotistical.”

“What does it matter what he thinks?” shrugged Caldal. “It is against the law to interact with humans. We are not supposed to be here, and he will never be allowed into Elvangar. Who cares what a human thinks of us?”

“I care,” admitted Eltor. “I know the hatred that was shown to us by the humans of Motanga, but we have seen none of that here in Khadora. In fact, just the opposite is true. Emperor Marak has opened up his palace to us. Our every request is instantly fulfilled. He has given us fine animal-skin clothes and weapons to call our own. Even though you attacked him when we first met, he lets us go armed and unescorted. That is not the mindset of an enemy.”

“But the law…” Caldal began.

“I know the law,” Eltor shouted. “The law also said that we were forbidden to pass the Barrier Islands,” he added more calmly, “but we did so knowingly. Do not hold up the law to me when you willingly break the portions that you want to. We will already face punishment when we return to Elvangar. I will not mistreat these humans for fear of the punishment that I will receive. In fact, I want to learn what I can from them. This is a golden opportunity, Caldal. No one in our lifetime has interacted with these humans. Their entire understanding of elves will be based upon what you and I do here. Do you really wish to create more enemies for our people?”

“But they are humans,” frowned Caldal. “There will never be any relations between them and our people.”

“You may be right,” conceded Eltor, “but you may also be wrong. Elves and humans did live together at one time. Who is to say that it can never happen again?”

“Queen Alycia will not allow it,” Caldal said firmly.

“Do you know her mind so well?” asked Eltor. “What if Emperor Marak is right about an invasion from Motanga? What if Queen Alycia agrees with Emperor Marak? What if she changes the law?”

“I cannot imagine that happening,” Caldal shook his head. “It is just not imaginable.”

“And what if she does want it to be,” posed Eltor, “and we have already poisoned the relationship with the way we treated these humans? Is your stubborn pride worth alienating all humans? Will it burden you so to act cordial to these humans during our stay here?”

“I suppose I could be nicer,” conceded Caldal, “but you ask too much. I cannot feign friendship where none exists.”

“Not even for MistyTrail?” smiled Eltor. “She may be an elf, but she is a product of this land. She has grown up in the land of humans. Are you willing to accept her scorn for the way you treat her friends?”

“Why would she care?” questioned Caldal. “Once she sees Elvangar, she will never return here.”

“I cannot see the future,” declared Eltor, “but I can see the hurt in her face when you are rude to the humans. You must have noticed it.”

“She has been more distant since we arrived here,” admitted Caldal, “but I figured that she chose her human friends over us.”

“It is we who have been more distant,” corrected Eltor. “Ever since we set foot on the human’s ship, we have withdrawn from her and Mistake. I can see it now as I look back on our behavior. I wish I had been able to see it then.”

“You almost sound like you are growing close to these humans,” frowned Caldal. “Next you will be telling them the secrets of Elvangar.”

“No,” Eltor shook his head. “I will never reveal anything that will endanger our people, but I am growing fond of the humans. Think about how we have been treated and then imagine that these people are a lost tribe of elves. How would you feel towards them?”

Caldal thought silently for a moment before answering. “I would feel differently,” he conceded, “but they are not elves.”

“No, they aren’t,” agreed Eltor, “but they have treated us more than fairly. All I ask is that you try to be diplomatic in our relations with these people. You do not have to like them, but try not to hate them. Can you do that?”

“I will try,” nodded Caldal as he opened the door to the palace.

The elves hurried up the staircase and along the corridor to the Emperor’s office. The sentries outside the office nodded politely and opened the door for them. They walked into the office and found a number of people already assembled. Mistake and MistyTrail smiled at the elves as they entered. There were two soldiers dressed in black and silver, the emperor, a person in a black hooded cloak, a sailor wearing black and silver, and a young woman in a simple white robe.

“Welcome,” smiled Emperor Marak. “Our group is now complete. Let me introduce everyone so that we can get to know one another. Our new arrivals are elves from Elvangar. Eltor is on the right; Caldal on the left.”

Everyone stood and turned to face the elves.

“Most of you have already met Mistake and MistyTrail,” the Emperor continued as he nodded towards the two women. “Ophia in the white robe is a mage. Gunta and Halman here are two of the soldiers of my Torak clan, and Captain Mynor is the finest sea captain that I know. He will not be traveling with us, but he needs to know what we discuss here today.”

“If he is for our transport to Elvangar,” interrupted Caldal, “Eltor and I are quite capable of sailing on our own. We just need a ship.”

“Elvangar is not his purpose,” promised the Emperor, “but Motanga might be. I am not yet sure what role he will play, but I think it prudent for him to be aware of what is going on.”

Caldal nodded sheepishly and turned to see if Eltor was glaring at him.

“The last member of our expedition is Axor,” the Emperor continued as he nodded to the hooded man. “He is a Chula shaman from the Pfledor tribe.”

“With the exception of Captain Mynor,” asked Eltor, “are we all going to Angragar?”

“Yes,” answered Emperor Marak. “We will also be joined by others as we get closer. We will meet up with some Fakarans after we cross the Fortung Mountains. A contingent of Sakovans will also join us in Fakara. They will be traveling there by ship.”

“Who is coming from the Sakova?” asked MistyTrail.

“Lyra and three others,” answered the Emperor. “I do not know the identity of the others. It will be whoever Lyra decides.”

“And Rejji?” asked Mistake.

“He and three others will meet us in Fakara,” nodded Emperor Marak. “Again, I do not know who he will choose.”

“This seems like a lot of people just to read scrolls,” frowned Eltor. “Is all of this necessary?”

“That is not the only reason for our trip to Angragar,” replied Emperor Marak. “I believe that the Torak, the Astor, and the Star must journey there together. I am not sure what will happen, but I could not ask Rejji or Lyra to travel without protection. The party is as small as I could make it.”

The door to the office opened and an Imperial soldier entered. Instead of approaching the Emperor, he turned and walked the length of the room to the door leading to the living quarters of the Emperor. He opened the door and walked through it, closing it behind him.

“Are we going to meet Rejji in Ghala?” asked Mistake.

“Much has happened in Fakara since you left, Mistake,” smiled the Emperor. “Rejji has already built two more cities. The city of Meliban now sits at the mouth of the Meliban River, and the city of Taggot was built at the mouth of that river. It is not yet determined where we will meet Rejji. If you will excuse me for a moment, I must attend to something.”

Emperor Marak walked across the floor and opened the door to the living quarters. He passed through the door and closed it.

“I assume that this is important?” asked the Emperor.

“I would not interrupt otherwise,” answered the Imperial soldier.

“Very well, Fisher,” nodded the Emperor. “What is it?”

“There have been random murders throughout Khadora,” answered the Torak spy.

“I have heard reports about them,” nodded the Emperor.

“Yes,” continued Fisher, “but you did not hear that the assassins were hellsouls.”

“Hellsouls?” Emperor Marak echoed with surprise. “They should not be outside Angragar. How did they escape?”

“They are not from Angragar,” replied Fisher. “They are from Motanga, and there are more coming, many more. I am sure you will understand their purpose.”

“To create havoc throughout the country,” nodded the Emperor. “They will do exactly that, too.”

“Vand has also discovered your use of air tunnels,” Fisher continued. “He will seek to use them for himself. He may also try to disrupt your use of them.”

“How could he possibly know about our air tunnels?” asked the Emperor.

“I do not know,” admitted Fisher, “but it gets worse. An air mage from Raven’s Point is missing. Where she normally takes her morning stroll, patches of ice were found in the sand. I suspect that she was abducted so that Vand can learn the workings of the air tunnel. Your communications may no longer be secure.”

“That changes much,” frowned Emperor Marak. “We have become very dependent upon those air tunnels. If he can intercept our messages, we will suffer great losses. It will even be worse if he can disrupt our ability to send messages. We must discover an alternative method of communications.”

“I will travel to the mage school when I leave here,” offered Fisher. “Perhaps they can figure something out.”

“Good,” nodded the Emperor. “Any ideas on how we can combat the hellsouls? Rejji’s staff and the Sword of Torak appear to be the only weapons that can kill them.”

“I am working on it,” answered the spy.

“Alright,” replied Emperor Marak. “The group in my office is going with me to Angragar. I want to be kept current on what you discover. We can use Fardale to channel messages. Check in with them once a day.”

“Do you trust the elves?” asked Fisher. “That Caldal is one that I would watch.”

“He is headstrong,” shrugged the Emperor, “but I think his heart is in the right place. He is just trying to protect his people. I do not hold that against him.”

“You would be wise to be cautious with him,” warned Fisher. “If he thinks you mean harm to the elven people, he will strike without a second thought.”

“I suspect that Eltor would as well if they truly thought I was their enemy,” nodded the Emperor. “I hope to prove to them that I am not.”

“Keep Gunta and Halman close at all times,” advised Fisher. “I do not want to lose the Torak over some petty misunderstanding.”

“And I thought your concern was for me personally,” Emperor Marak chided sarcastically.

“It always is,” grinned the Torak spy, “but this is more important than even you now. The whole known world is riding on your shoulders, Marak. Always remember that your death means the death of thousands. Do not tempt fate.”

“I will try not to,” promised the Emperor. “I offer the same caution to you, my friend. I would not have been able to do what I have done without your help. Keep yourself healthy.”

Fisher nodded and opened the door for the Emperor. He would wait a respectable time before leaving the living quarters himself.

Emperor Marak reentered his office and walked to his desk. The chatter that had existed in the room died as he entered and everyone looked expectantly at him.

“Are there any questions about this journey?” asked the Emperor.

“When do we leave?” asked Eltor.

“We leave at first light,” answered Emperor Marak. “Anyone that needs to requisition weapons should do so today. We travel with only what we can carry on our horses. We will not have a pack train, so keep it light.”

There were no further questions and everyone left the room. Mistake and MistyTrail joined up with the elves as they walked down the stairs.

“Are you two alright with this plan?” asked Mistake. “You have been out of sorts lately.”

“We are,” smiled Eltor. “Please understand that this is hard on us. Our laws prohibit what we are doing now. We will be punished when we return to Elvangar.”

“No punishment can be as bad as what we saved you from in Motanga,” MistyTrail said as she locked eyes with Caldal.

Caldal frowned stubbornly for a moment and then nodded his head in agreement.

“I owe you my life,” he declared. “I know that I have acted rudely since arriving here. Eltor has already rebuked me for doing so, but I cannot wash away the years of training that I grew up with. I will try to behave. Correct me gently when you see me straying from your good graces.”

“I will try gently at first,” grinned MistyTrail. “I hope you are quick at adjusting. I would hate to have to beat some sense into you.”

“Your attempts at it could be fun,” chuckled Caldal in his first display of merriment since entering Khadora. “Perhaps we should practice this afternoon before we pack for the trip?”

Chapter 4

Attack of the Hellsouls

The army encampment outside of the Sakovan city of Alamar spread for miles in every direction. Thousands of tents dotted the landscape, and wagons loaded with food spread through the camp like the veins of a leaf. Lyra halted her horse and sat silently for several moments absorbing the image.

“I am glad that we didn’t have to face this army during the war,” commented StarWind. “It is one thing to talk about twenty thousand men, but it is quite another to see them all gathered in one place.”

“How long will Alamar’s food last feeding so many?” asked HawkShadow.

“The armies will not be staying here for long,” answered the Star of Sakova. “The purpose of the meeting today is to send General Romero and General Didyk back to Okata. By the time they reach the city, the mages will have restored the fields there.”

“Can the generals be trusted?” asked HawkShadow. “They were our enemies not long ago.”

“I don’t know,” Lyra conceded, “but we have little choice in the matter. I asked General Manitow to keep them here until I spoke to them. I want a chance to impress upon them the need for solidarity. We must get ready to face Vand’s armies. We need the loyalty of these generals and their men.”

“I do not trust them,” interjected Goral.

Lyra smiled at the Sakovan giant. “I do not trust them either, Goral, but we still need them, and I will trust StarWind’s people to keep a close eye on them.”

“I will infiltrate spies into their camps,” promised the Sakovan spymaster. “If the generals become treasonous, I will know about it.”

“I have faith in you, StarWind,” smiled the Star of Sakova. “I also have confidence that HawkShadow will eliminate those who seek to destroy this union of ours.”

“Is that why you are not taking us to Angragar?” asked the Sakovan assassin.

“Yes,” Lyra admitted. “It is necessary for me to join the Torak and the Astor in Angragar, but the trip comes at a critical time for the Sakova. I need skilled Sakovans to protect me on this trip, but I need the best to remain here. LunarSigh and DarkBlade are already waiting for me within the city. They will keep me safe until I return home.”

“Both are well skilled,” StarWind responded, “but you are to take three people with you. Who is the third?”

“My Uncle Temiker,” smiled Lyra. “I want his help when we start studying the ancient tomes of the Qubari. He often sees things that others miss. I want to be sure that we learn everything that we can about this coming invasion.”

“Your choice of Temiker pleases me,” smiled StarWind. “He will watch over you.”

“Kaltara always watches over me,” Lyra replied with a smile. “Let’s go talk to our generals.”

The four Sakovans rode down the hill and through the encampment. Imperial Guards scurried to and fro throughout the camp, but those along the path of the Star of Sakova stopped and stared as the Sakovans rode by. Some soldiers wondered who the strangers were, but word quickly spread that the Star of Sakova was coming. Before they were half way to the generals’ tents, soldiers began bowing as Lyra passed. Soon crowds grew and created a corridor through the camp. Lyra smiled benevolently at the soldiers as she passed.

By the time the Sakovans reached the tents of the two generals, Romero and Didyk were standing outside. They both bowed humbly when the Sakovans halted and dismounted.

The only Imperial Guard, who was not bowed down, moved swiftly from alongside the tent. He stabbed a knife into the side of General Didyk. HawkShadow leaped forward, drawing his two-handed sword as he ran. As the Imperial Guard turned to run away, HawkShadow’s blade sliced into the man’s back. The assassin fell to the ground and died.

Lyra raced to the fallen general and knelt next to him while HawkShadow knelt next to the dead assassin and searched his body. HawkShadow found nothing but a small pouch of gold on the body. He reached for the assassin’s left arm to inspect the wrist area. Some assassins in Omunga were branded with a tattoo resembling a coiled serpent with wings. It was their way of identifying each other. HawkShadow dropped the left arm and examined the right one. He frowned when he saw the mark. It was not the tattoo that he had been expecting to see. Instead of the coiled serpent, there was a thumbprint seared into the man’s flesh. He shook his head and dropped the arm.

Lyra checked the wound in General Didyk’s side. She frowned at the oozing crevice.

“It was a poisoned blade,” Lyra announced. “StarWind, race to the city and fetch LifeTender. Her healing skills are much greater than mine.”

Instead of mounting her horse, StarWind wove an air tunnel to Temiker’s school. HawkShadow ran to help Lyra support the general’s body as he used his knife to cut away the man’s uniform. Imperial Guard’s started to drift closer to the commotion, and two of them knelt on the opposite side of the fallen general and helped HawkShadow disrobe Didyk. Lyra started casting healing spells. During the commotion, almost everyone missed seeing the dead assassin rising to his feet.

“Down,” shouted Goral. “Everyone get down.”

Thousands of soldiers immediately dropped to the ground in confusion. The Sakovan giant thundered across the ground in pursuit of the assassin. Still a couple of paces behind the fleeing man, Goral swung his massive maul as he surged forward. The maul slammed into the man’s head, spraying blood and tissue across the ground. Instantly, all parts of the assassin turned to smoke. The white uniform of the Imperial Guard fell to the ground in a heap. Soldiers who had been sprayed with portions of the exploded head stared as the blood on their uniforms smoked, leaving no stain at all.

“What was that?” asked one of the Imperial Guards as others began quietly moving away from Goral.

Goral turned and strode over to HawkShadow. “I thought you killed him.”

“I did,” frowned HawkShadow as he looked up at the giant. “Trust me. That man was dead. I know dead when I see it.”

“He was a hellsoul,” Lyra announced as she continued to cast healing spells on General Didyk. “There will be more of them soon. Where is LifeTender?”

“She will be here shortly,” promised StarWind.

“Let’s hope that shortly is soon enough to save the general’s life,” frowned the Star of Sakova.

* * *

Rejji and his brother, Bakhai, stood in the square in the center of the city of Taggot. Thousands of tradesmen moved around the city as the sound of hammering echoed from every corner. Horse drawn carts moved logs and loads of stones in every direction.

“Your people can build a city overnight,” commented Bakhai. “It is hard to imagine the small village that existed here not long ago.”

“Overnight is quite an exaggeration,” replied the Astor as he turned to observe the work, “but everyone is working hard to make our dreams come true. Much of the credit must go to Lakado. He drew up the plans for the city. I think he has done a fine job.”

“Are we off to Meliban next?” asked the animal talker. “Is that where we will meet up with Lord Marak?”

“He is Emperor Marak now,” chuckled Rejji. “You must get used to his new title, or you will offend him when he arrives.”

“The Torak is not easily offended,” countered Bakhai. “I do not think he would even notice if I called him Lord Marak.”

“You are probably right,” shrugged Rejji. “You could probably even drop the title of lord, and he would not care. Still, try to be politely proper. There will be others traveling with him, and I do not want the Fakarans to be embarrassed.”

“I will try,” agreed Bakhai.

“I do not think we need to go to Meliban at this time,” Rejji said. “In fact, Marak may not even stop there. We have built inns every half-day’s ride between Ghala and the Fortung Mountains. Depending on when he enters the country, he might bypass the city.”

“I think he will stop even if it is just a half-day’s journey for that day,” Bakhai insisted. “He has a great curiosity, and he will want to see what you have accomplished. He will stop at Meliban.”

Rejji frowned as he saw a man dressed in a dark cloak following Adger, the leader of the Mutang tribe. What caught Rejji’s attention was that the man was walking with his hood concealing his face. Rejji knew of no Mutang tribesman who would dress in such a fashion. He tapped Bakhai on the arm and nodded in the direction of the man. Bakhai turned and stared at the stranger as the hooded man started to close the distance between himself and Adger. Bakhai unsnapped his bow and nocked an arrow.

“Adger,” shouted Rejji. “Come here please.”

The leader of the Mutang tribe turned and smiled at Rejji. He changed direction and started walking towards the square. The hooded man suddenly pulled a knife from beneath his cloak and darted towards Adger. Bakhai aimed and released his arrow without a second thought. The arrow struck the assailant in the chest, and his body tumbled to the ground. Adger turned and stared at the body as Rejji and Bakhai ran towards him.

“Do you know him?” Rejji asked Adger as he used his staff to push back the hood of the assailant.

“I have never seen him before,” Adger shook his head. “What is this all about?”

“He was following you,” answered Bakhai. “When Rejji called to you, this man pulled a knife and ran towards you. He was going to kill you.”

“Why me?” asked Adger. “Do you think he is Jiadin?”

“You are a tribal leader,” answered Rejji as he stared at the assassin’s face. “I think that makes you a target for Vand’s people as well as the remnants of the Jiadin. Emperor Marak warned that hellsouls would be coming to our lands. Perhaps this is one of them.”

“How can we tell for sure?” asked Adger.

Rejji saw the body move, and he forcefully jabbed the dead body with his staff. The body instantly turned to smoke, the cloak collapsing flat on the street.

“He was a hellsoul,” declared Rejji. “The Staff of the Astor banishes them.”

“That is fine if everyone carries a Staff of the Astor,” frowned Adger. “How are the rest of us supposed to deal with creatures that will not die?”

“I do not have an answer for that,” frowned Rejji. “Perhaps I will find one in Angragar.”

“You are going to the lost city?” Adger asked with excitement. “Do you want company?”

“Wyant and Bakhai are going with me,” replied Rejji. “Perhaps I can arrange for more to see the city in the future. Do not spread the word of our trip. Things are still too unsettled in Fakara for my liking.”

“You can trust the secret with me,” Adger readily agreed. “When will you be going?”

“In a few days,” answered Rejji. “We may leave earlier to visit Meliban, but I have not made my mind up yet.”

“I will keep things running smoothly here in your absence,” promised Adger. “Taggot is almost complete. What will we do next?”

“Farm production is at the top of the list,” answered Rejji. “I also want to create towns around the inns we have built across the country. I envision them as centers of commerce for the surrounding farmlands.”

“More likely they will become targets for the remnants of the Jiadin,” frowned Adger.

“I still hope to win over the Jiadin,” replied the Astor. “We have had enough internal strife in this country. It is time to unite and prepare to defend it. You must look at the Jiadin as misguided souls, not as the enemy. We will need their strength to defeat Vand.”

“That is a hard adjustment after the treachery of the Jiadin,” frowned Adger, “but we all believe in you. If that is what you wish, we will follow your commands.”

“That is what I wish,” smiled Rejji.

* * *

The eight travelers descended out of the Fortung Mountains into Fakara. They rode silently along a well-beaten path across the arid wasteland until finally they saw trees in the distance. The hooded rider gazed towards the setting sun to gauge the amount of daylight left.

“Two hours until dark,” Axor stated. “We will reach the forest long before that.”

“Did you have a hand in its creation?” asked Emperor Marak.

“No,” Axor replied, “although some from our tribe did. There are broad fields of grain a ways into the forest. I suspect that is where the Fakarans would construct an inn. We should arrive at dusk.”

Further back in the column, MistyTrail rode alongside Caldal. He rode with a continual frown upon his face.

“What is bothering you, Caldal?” asked the Sakovan. “You always look so sad, or angry. I can never tell which.”

“This land is desolate,” replied the elf. “It is not a land that elves should be in.”

“I doubt that is the reason for your moodiness,” countered MistyTrail. “You were the same riding through the lush fields of Khadora and over the majestic Fortung Mountains. Do you not trust me enough to be honest with me?”

Caldal rode on in silence for several minutes as he was weighing MistyTrail’s question in his mind. Finally, he sighed and faced the Sakovan.

“I like you a great deal,” admitted Caldal, “and I am eternally grateful for your part in rescuing me from the Island of Darkness. I want very much to be honest with you, but I find it hard to express my feelings. I should not be here. I do not belong in the land of humans, yet here I am, riding with a group of my enemy. In some ways I think that this is a great chance to learn about the humans, but then I realize that I am not here of my own free will. I am not chained as I was in Motanga, but I still have no say in my future. I am a prisoner.”

“You are no such thing,” protested MistyTrail. “Emperor Marak would allow you to leave if you wished to. I think he would try to talk you out of it, but in the end he will allow you to make the decision for yourself.”

“And leave you and Eltor?” questioned Caldal. “Perhaps the two of you are the chains that hold me here.”

“I don’t believe that you are being honest with yourself,” retorted MistyTrail. “You are not being forced on this journey against your will. In fact, you are being privileged to accompany the Torak to the lost city of Angragar. Many Khadorans would have volunteered to take your place. There is something deeper bothering you.”

Again Caldal fell silent for a time. As the column entered the forest, his spirits seemed to brighten.

“Maybe you are right,” Caldal said. “Emperor Marak has been a gracious host. The chains that hold me are wholly within my mind. I am not sure that you can understand this, but I will try to explain.”

MistyTrail smiled and nodded encouragingly.

“Elves are taught early that we have no friends in this world,” Caldal continued. “There have been times throughout history when the elves have reached out to others. Each and every time that hand has been cut off. Now the elves are isolated from the rest of the world, and we are taught that our existence depends on maintaining our distance from others.”

“Yet you and Eltor rebelled against that,” MistyTrail pointed out. “You sailed past the Barrier Islands to see what the rest of the world is like.”

“We did,” nodded Caldal, “and look what happened to us. We were destined to die at the hands of the humans on Motanga. You and Mistake intervened to save us, but the experience proves that our lessons were the truth. We should never have left Elvangar. Now our very existence is a threat to our people.”

“How are you a threat to anyone?” asked MistyTrail.

“While Emperor Marak has been quite friendly towards us,” explained Caldal, “he is human. He will now seek to discover the secret of Elvangar. He will not be able to help himself.”

“What if he does try to find Elvangar?” asked MistyTrail. “He would never bring harm to your people.”

“He would not do so intentionally,” agreed Caldal, “but trouble will follow him nonetheless. Once Elvangar appears on the charts of humans, others will seek us out. Some elves may even think it is time for us to return to the world and encourage the humans, but that would be folly. Once the humans learn of Elvangar, the land of the elves will begin to perish.”

“So you are blaming yourself for some future destruction of your people?” questioned MistyTrail. “Is that what is truly bothering you?”

“I think it is something like that,” nodded Caldal. “If Eltor and I had not rebelled and broken the law, Elvangar would remain a myth to the humans. I feel as if I am guilty of the worst nightmare one could ever imagine.”

“You forget about the other elves that were captured by Vand’s people,” noted MistyTrail. “You and Eltor are not the only ones to have strayed from Elvangar. You also don’t realize that the humans from Motanga are the ones that the elves need to fear.”

“The fact that others disobeyed the law is hardly a reprieve from my own transgressions,” frowned Caldal. “I do not stay up at night worrying about what others have done.”

“But you are missing my point,” MistyTrail persisted. “No matter what you do, humans are going to find Elvangar. If Eltor and you were never born, the humans would still find Elvangar. Can’t you see that?”

“Is that supposed to make me feel better about the end of my people?” snapped Caldal. “Do you expect me to sing for joy just because it is not me personally that will be responsible for the death of the elves?”

Caldal suddenly realized that he must have shouted at MistyTrail. The entire column had stopped and everyone was staring at him. Emperor Marak turned around and rode towards Caldal. The elf tried to avoid the human’s eyes, but Emperor Marak sat patiently until Caldal looked up.

“I will not be a party to the destruction of the elves,” the Emperor declared softly. “Whether or not the elves join with us to defeat Vand, I will never allow the elves to be attacked by humans. If that is what is affecting your attitude, be reassured that my intentions are honorable.”

“I have learned that your intentions are honorable,” admitted Caldal, “but that only means that you are a rare human. Once Elvangar is on your charts, elves will begin dying.”

“Elves will begin dying as soon as Vand sets his sights on Elvangar,” replied the Emperor. “With the number of elves he has already captured, do you really think he does not already know the location of your homeland?”

Caldal’s mouth dropped open, and he stared into Emperor Marak’s eyes as he saw the truth in the human’s statement.

“The only saving grace for Elvangar is that Vand intends to attack us first,” Emperor Marak continued. “And I intend to defeat him before he can turn on the elves. Help from your people would be invited and welcomed, but we intend to stand against Vand’s armies regardless of how badly we are outnumbered. If you really want to help your people, alert them to the threat of Vand and prepare Elvangar for the inevitable attack should we be defeated.”

Suddenly, six arrows flew out of the forest towards the Khadoran column. Two arrows struck Emperor Marak in the back, knocking him off his horse. Two arrows struck Gunta and Halman caught another. Both Torak soldiers fell to the ground. The sixth arrow hit MistyTrail’s horse. The horse shrieked and bolted, tossing MistyTrail to the ground.

“Everybody down,” shouted Mistake as she dove at Eltor, knocking both of them off their horses.

Caldal dropped to the ground and threw his body over MistyTrail as the horses ran past. Axor turned his horse and galloped away after the other horses. More arrows flew through the trees, but everyone flattened against the trail. All of the arrows missed.

Eltor shook himself free from Mistake and grabbed his bow. He nudged Caldal with the end of it. Caldal looked up and saw Eltor making motions with his hands. He rolled off of MistyTrail and grabbed his own bow. The two elves nocked arrows and split up. Eltor backtracked along the trail, keeping low to avoid being seen. Caldal did the same in the opposite direction. Mistake and MistyTrail crawled to the Emperor’s body.

When another hail of arrows ripped through the trees, the elves responded with arrows of their own. Two screams came from the forest followed by a number of shouts and the sounds of movement. The sounds grew dimmer.

“They are running away,” shouted Eltor. “Let’s track them.”

“No,” groaned Emperor Marak as he rolled over and stared up at Mistake and MistyTrail. “Tell the elves to stay here.”

“Eltor! Caldal!” shouted Mistake. “Come here quickly.”

The elves halted. The looked first at Mistake and then locked eyes with each other. Eltor finally shrugged and walked towards Mistake. Caldal followed his example.

“Why would you not let us track them?” asked Eltor.

“Because they would lay a trap for you,” the Emperor said as he sat up. “I want the two of you alive to return to Elvangar.”

“How is it that you survived the attack?” asked Caldal. “I saw you struck down by two arrows.”

The Emperor smiled and extended his arm towards Caldal. The elf grabbed the arm and pulled the Emperor to his feet. Gunta and Halman were also getting up and standing.

“The thin cloth that you wear under your tunic is armor,” smiled the Emperor. “It has tremendous abilities in stopping most attacks to the torso.”

“That thin black cloth?” frowned Caldal. “You can’t be serious. That stopped the arrows?”

“I am sure that I have a couple of puncture wounds in my back,” nodded the Emperor, “but no serious damage was done. It sure does hurt, though. I won’t mind a night in a nice bed.”

“That is amazing,” remarked Eltor. “Maybe we should put ours on,” he added as he looked at Caldal.

The Emperor looked from Caldal to Eltor and frowned. “You aren’t wearing yours?”

“We thought it was some human fetish,” Eltor shrugged embarrassingly. “We didn’t know it was armor. How can it protect you and still be so light?”

“It is made of Tyrik silk,” explained the Emperor. “It is then coated with carganite. Not much gets through it.”

“The Chula ran off during the fight,” frowned Caldal as he sought to provide a distraction from his embarrassment. “I guess that is to be expected from one who hides his face.”

“He is trying to capture our horses before they scatter,” explained the Emperor. “Without them, we are truly dead. The enemy would have time to congregate and greatly outnumber us. Do not make the mistake of thinking that Axor is a coward. You will find that Chula shamans are capable of great feats of destruction. As for hiding his face, someday you will learn why. Let’s walk towards the inn. I am sure that Axor will be along shortly with our horses.”

“What about the enemy?” asked Eltor. “We killed a couple of them I am sure of it. Shouldn’t we search the bodies?”

“You can try if you wish,” shrugged the Emperor, “but I doubt that you will find any bodies. Even if you killed them, they will rise again.”

“Hellsouls?” frowned Mistake.

“Hellsouls,” nodded Emperor Marak. “I had word before leaving Khadoratung that thousands of them are being shipped out of Motanga. This will not be the last attack upon us. Somehow Vand must know that I am making this trip.”

“Couldn’t it just be some stray Jiadin?” asked Mistake.

“There are stray Jiadin that could be bandits,” shrugged the Emperor, “but I doubt that they would waste their time attacking eight people who carry no goods. The Jiadin would also prefer to attack on horseback. That is the favored method of fighting in Fakara.”

“You are right,” nodded Mistake. “Jiadin would not hide in the woods and attack from a distance. They would charge down the trail with their swords raised high. It is a cultural thing.”

“One I hope to change before Vand arrives,” smiled the Emperor as Axor came into view and rode towards them.

“I was not able to capture them all,” apologized Axor. “Two of us will have to double up.”

“My horse was struck with an arrow,” offered MistyTrail. “I will ride double with Caldal.”

Chapter 5

Western Woods

Emperor Marak and his party arrived at the Western Woods Inn slightly after dusk. Gunta and Halman dismounted and swept into the inn while everyone else waited. A few moments later the two Torak soldiers emerged and nodded their approval.

“There are no other guests this night,” Gunta reported. “The innkeeper is actually quite excited to have company. Halman and I will care for the horses.”

The party dismounted and entered the inn while Halman and Gunta took the horses around to the stables. The innkeeper and two serving girls stood in the common room waiting for the guests.

“My name is Crawford,” the innkeeper announced cheerily as the guests entered the common room. “Do you require rooms for the night?”

“Four private rooms if they are available,” answered the Emperor.

“Not a soul around tonight,” smiled Crawford. “You can have your pick of the lot. All rooms are sparkling clean as the inn is quite new.”

Emperor Marak smiled at the old man and handed him a small pouch of gold.

“Take what is customary,” the Emperor said. “You must lead a boring life out here on the frontier without customers. Do you like it?”

The innkeeper opened the pouch and extracted four gold coins. He held them up one at a time so that the customer could see how much he was charging for the rooms.

“I like it very much,” answered the innkeeper. “I like the solitude, and I also enjoy the occasional company that comes along. I used to serve under Yojji in the Kheri tribe. After the battle at the Valley of Bones, I realized that I was getting on in years. I can’t fight as I used to. Besides, the days of warfare are over.”

“Did you take enough for eight meals?” asked Emperor Marak. “We are looking forward to sampling your cooking.”

“One gold apiece for two in a room,” nodded the innkeeper. “That includes two meals, the evening meal and the morning meal. If you are wanting trail rations when you leave, that will be extra.”

“Your prices are reasonable,” nodded the Emperor. “We shall sit down and unwind while you prepare the meals.”

“You have a choice,” Crawford said as he walked to the tables and waved his hand as if ushering his customers to their seats. “We have fresh wasooki and clova. Both come with a bowl of vegetable soup and bread. Pitchers of ale are included unless you consume a great deal.”

Emperor Marak slid along a bench at the farthest table from the kitchen. He sat in the corner with his back to the wall as others in the party sat down. Axor sat directly across from the Emperor, while the other four sat at the open end of the table to leave room for Gunta and Halman nearer the Emperor.

“How can you make a fair profit at such prices?” he asked the innkeeper. “In Khadora the tally would be much higher.”

“It is what Rejji has demanded,” answered Crawford. “Fakara has had little in the way of inns. Most travelers still choose to camp along the way, but Rejji wants Fakara to grow into a traveler-friendly place. He keeps the prices low to encourage travelers to get used to staying at the inns. He currently provides gold to the girls and me each month so that we can keep the prices low. When things pick up, we will be free to raise our prices sufficient to survive on the travelers.”

“Clever,” grinned the Emperor. “I think I will have the wasooki.”

Halman and Gunta arrived before the innkeeper had finished taking everyone’s orders. One of the girls brought two pitchers of ale to the table, and the other brought eight mugs. Caldal looked across the table at Axor. The Chula shaman sat silently, his hood still covering his face.

“Why don’t you remove the hood, Axor?” asked the elf. “It must be difficult to enjoy your meal with your face covered. You are among friends here.”

“You have no idea what being a Chula shaman entails,” Axor answered softly. “Even among friends I will remain covered. Besides, I will not embarrass the staff of this inn.”

“Do not pursue it,” Emperor Marak softly advised the elf.

Caldal frowned and stared at the table silently. MistyTrail watched him sulk, and she began to feel sorry for him.

“I think an apology is in order,” she said to Emperor Marak. “Just before we were attacked, you were lecturing Caldal about his attitude. He just made an effort to be sociable, which I believe was very hard for him to do. He does not need to be rebuked at this point.”

Caldal glared at MistyTrail and shook his head. He was about to open his mouth to tell her to be quiet when the Emperor spoke.

“I do apologize,” declared Emperor Marak. “My words were not meant to make you feel apart from us, Caldal. I was merely trying to save Axor from embarrassment. While his looks are revered among his people, other humans might have a hard time accepting him. I suspect that elves would, too. Let’s make a deal this night, Caldal. When I say or do something that you think is wrong, tell me. I will do the same for you and Eltor. If we are willing to communicate with each other, we will not suffer from false impressions. Will you accept?”

“I do accept your offer,” replied Caldal. “I was not really put off by your words. I was attempting to fit in with the group. I just don’t know what to say. I guess I was embarrassed by not knowing what to converse about.”

“I readily accept as well,” interjected Eltor. “Your compassion for the feelings of Caldal makes me respect you more than I do already. Why are you so different from other humans?”

“I am not sure that I am much different in regards to what we are talking about,” answered the Emperor. “There are good people and bad people in this world. I am sure the same is true in Elvangar. I am sorry for what you had to go through in Motanga at the hands of humans, but we are not all like that. You really have no idea how the humans of this land feel towards you.”

“What do you mean?” asked Caldal.

“I have heard many compliments about you from the people at the Imperial Palace in Khadoratung,” stated the Emperor. “While some complained that your attitudes were poor, most expressed admiration for your skills, especially in archery. Many of them would have liked to have gotten to know the two of you better, but you never gave them the chance.”

“That was my fault,” conceded Caldal. “Before you explained to me the truth about humans discovering Elvangar, my attitude was poor. I apologize for it. I wish I could go back and change many things, but that is not possible now.”

“No, it isn’t,” smiled the Emperor, “but you can change the future. Promise yourself that you will give all people a fair chance to be friendly, and you will be surprised how many truly are.”

Caldal’s eyes darted to the hood-covered Chula, but the elf quickly turned away.

“You are right,” purred Axor as he caught the elf’s gaze.

“I am sorry,” apologized Caldal.

“You have no reason to apologize,” replied Axor. “Emperor Marak just spoke words of wisdom to you, and your first thought was that I was ignoring his words. You are correct. I have been hiding under my hood the same way that you have been hiding your feelings inside. I am not giving other people the chance to accept me as the Torak just suggested. His words were the words of a wiser man than me.”

Axor flipped his hood back revealing his long flowing mane. His sparkling eyes sat over a broad snout with whiskers spreading from his split lips. Everyone’s attention was diverted from Axor’s face as one of the serving girls dropped the plates of food she was carrying to the table. The girls turned and ran into the kitchen. Axor sighed and replaced the hood over his face.

“She only saw the back of my head,” Axor said softly. “Perhaps your words were not as wise as I thought they were, Torak.”

“They were wise words,” retorted Caldal. “I, too, was shocked by your appearance, Axor, but that will not make me reject you. Is your appearance typical of all Chula?”

“No,” Axor replied. “Only the strongest in magic can attain such a state. Among my people my appearance is a badge to be worn proudly. Such is not the case among humans.”

Crawford slid two plates onto the table and stared at Axor. The Chula shaman felt the eyes gazing upon him, but he ignored the innkeeper.

“I am sorry for the reaction of my girl,” stated Crawford. “I have heard stories of Chula shaman, but I do not know of anyone who has ever seen one. Feel free to uncover your head in my inn. If it bothers my girls, I will serve you myself. You are a welcome guest here.”

Axor nodded politely at the innkeeper’s words, but he made no move to bare his mane. The innkeeper frowned and walked away. Voices could be heard coming from the kitchen as everyone sat silently at the table. Several minutes later, both young girls came into the common room. The one who had dropped the plates walked nervously to stand behind Axor. He felt her presence and became uncomfortable.

“I am sorry for my reaction,” the girl said nervously. “I have never seen such a sight before, but my father explained that your people are responsible for creating the forests around us and the fields that grow so bountifully. I am ashamed of my actions. Please remove your hood so I may see the face of one so revered in your land.”

“There is nothing for you to apologize for,” Axor said softly. “Let us consider the incident dismissed. You have done nothing wrong.”

It was clear to all that the Chula shaman had just dismissed the serving girl, even if he had done so politely. Still, she did not move. Instead she nervously extended her arms and gently pulled Axor’s hood from his head. Axor’s hands rose to stop her, but the Emperor smiled at the Chula and shook his head. Axor allowed the girl to uncover him. The other girl’s eyes grew wide as she stared at the Chula’s face, but she tried to appear impassive. The girl who had removed the hood walked to the end of the table so she could see the shaman’s face, and Crawford walked up behind her.

Crawford coughed slightly and both girls snapped out of their trance. They bowed respectfully to the shaman.

“We are honored to serve a Chula shaman in our inn,” said one of the girls. “Thank you and your people for the great gift they have given to Fakara.”

The girls bowed again and returned to the kitchen. Their father smiled broadly at the Chula.

“You should be just as proud of your appearance in Fakara as you are in your homeland, shaman,” smiled Crawford. “Our people owe a debt to yours that can never be repaid. Walk proudly among us so that we never forget that debt.”

The innkeeper bowed and retreated to the kitchen. Axor blushed with embarrassment.

“Perhaps your words were wise after all, flatlander,” he said to the Emperor with a smile.

“Flatlander?” echoed the Torak with mock offense. “You must mind your manners, shaman.”

“Indeed I must, Torak,” grinned Axor as he nodded his head in a bow to the Torak. “It appears that Caldal and I share much in common. May your words heal what ails both of us.”

“Well there is one benefit of traveling with a Chula shaman,” chuckled Eltor. “No one has said anything about our ears.”

Everyone laughed at Eltor’s comment, and the conversation turned to lighter topics. They sat for a while after the meal chatting about trivial matters. Crawford and his daughters came out and joined the conversation. After a while, no one paid any particular attention to Axor’s appearance. Finally, Crawford stood up.

“Time for you girls to turn in,” he announced. “You need to be up bright and early in the morning.”

Both girls instantly rose and bowed to the shaman before retreating to their room. Emperor Marak rose and the whole party followed his lead.

“The Western Woods is indeed a friendly place,” Emperor Marak said to Crawford. “I will recommend it highly. I have not enjoyed such food and company for some time, but it is time for me to retire as well.”

“I will stay up for a while,” responded Crawford. “If you want anything, just ask.”

The travelers filed out of the common room and up the stairs. Gunta came up last and handed out the four room keys. Mistake and MistyTrail took one room and the elves another. Halman bunked with Axor, while Gunta followed the Emperor. When they entered the room, Gunta immediately went to the window and gazed out. He leaned out the window and checked the side of the building before retreating.

“Anything out there?” asked the Torak.

“No,” replied Gunta, “but I feel like there will be before long.”

“I feel it, too,” nodded the Emperor. “I have been trying to calculate how long it will take those hellsouls to get here on foot.”

“I thought the attack was one of random chance,” stated Gunta. “Do you think they are coming specifically for us?”

“I think they are coming for me,” corrected the Emperor. “I have no knowledge to base that assumption on, but too many people knew about me taking this trip. There is not a great deal of traffic on this road yet. Do you think hellsouls would just wait forever to ambush whoever came along?”

“They might,” shrugged Gunta, “but we must plan as if they are after you. Should I alert the others?”

“I want the group to get a good night’s sleep,” frowned Emperor Marak. “It will not be good for us to all be tired tomorrow. Share our concerns with Halman, but not the rest. If we see or hear anything during the night, awaken everyone. You and I will take turns sleeping.”

“Why tell Halman then?” asked Gunta. “I thought Halman and I would take turns so that you can sleep through.”

“I want Halman to protect the innkeeper’s daughters if we are attacked,” explained the Emperor. “It is bad enough that we are bringing trouble to this family. I will not bring sorrow to it as well. Halman does not have to stand watch during the night, but he should be aware that we are going to so that he will know what his task is if something happens.”

“Understood,” nodded Gunta as he slipped out the door.

When Gunta returned, Emperor Marak was already asleep. Gunta was glad that Marak had chosen to wear the black and silver of the Torak clan, rather than the white and gold of the Imperial Emperor. If a fight did come this night, the white would stand out too much. Gunta quietly walked to the window and stared out. The view from the window looked out over fields of watula. A few small farmhouses were visible in the distance, but nothing was moving outside. Gunta frowned when he realized that he could not see the road. He wondered if the hellsouls would follow the road or keep off of it. There was little he could do about watching both approaches. He pushed the thought from his mind and concentrated on the soft sounds of the night.

Several hours later, Gunta felt something was not right. He became instantly alert and tried to pinpoint the nature of the problem. He nodded slowly to himself as he realized that the sounds of the night had changed. The cricket chirps could still be heard in the distance, but not nearby, and the horses were restless. Gunta gazed out the window at the stables. Suddenly, he saw a dark shape flit within the stables. He reached over and shook the Emperor.

“What is it?” Emperor Marak asked softly as he rose and strapped on his weapons.

“Something besides horses is in the stables,” reported Gunta.

“Alert the others,” ordered the Torak. “If it is a false alarm, they will only miss a few moments of sleep.”

Gunta nodded and headed for the door. As he opened the door, he heard a shout from downstairs. A distant clash of steel made Gunta draw his sword and race for the stairs.

“Attack!” Gunta shouted as he started running down the stairs.

The Torak ran from the room and headed for the stairs. The door to the room occupied by Halman and Axor flew open. Halman stepped into the hallway with his sword drawn. He ran for the girls’ room at the other end of the hall while Marak started downstairs. Doors were slamming open behind the Torak as he raced down the stairs to the common room. Ahead of him, Marak could see Gunta swinging his sword at something coming in the rear door. Crawford held a bloody sword before him with his back braced against the front door. A dark shape rested unmoving at the innkeeper’s feet.

As Marak’s feet hit the ground floor, the body in front of the innkeeper started to get up. Crawford’s eyes grew wide with fear. He moved forward to kill the invader a second time. When he moved, the door behind him burst open, throwing the innkeeper to the floor. The Torak raced towards the front door. He jumped over the innkeeper and jabbed the Sword of Torak into the hellsoul trying to enter the inn. The hellsoul’s body evaporated in a black puff of smoke. The Emperor heard the innkeeper curse behind him. He also heard the clash of steel and a cry and a thud.

“Crawford?” called the Emperor without turning around.

“I am here,” the innkeeper panted. “This man doesn’t want to stay dead.”

“Go up and protect your girls,” ordered the Torak. “Send Halman down to me.”

“But…” protested Crawford.

“Just go,” commanded the Emperor. “Hurry.”

Emperor Marak slashed another hellsoul trying to get through the front door. As the body disappeared in smoke, he shoved the door shut and put his back to it. The hellsoul that Crawford had been fighting with was trying to get up again. Marak stretched forward and brought his sword down on the hellsoul’s head. The hellsoul disappeared in a puff. Marak saw Axor standing at the foot of the stairs. The room burst into brilliance as the Chula shaman sent a brilliant light disc into the kitchen. Marak could not see what had been shredded in there.

“They are coming in the windows up here,” shouted Eltor from the top of the stairs. “I keep killing them, but they will not die.”

“Axor,” shouted the Torak. “Get halfway up the stairs and kill anything trying to go up. Gunta, join me at the front door. We are taking this fight outside.”

Axor backpedaled up the stairs as Gunta ran away from the rear door. As Gunta ran across the common room, Marak shouted loudly and pulled the front door open. The hellsouls who had been trying to force their way in through the front door hesitated slightly. It was the opening that Marak had hoped for. He pushed the Sword of Torak before him as he stepped outside. Once clear of the door, the Emperor slashed his sword in a figure eight. The sword sliced cleanly through the flesh of the hellsouls. Three dark cloaks dropped to the ground, and Marak pushed onward.

The front of the inn had a small roof over the porch outside. As the Torak emerged from under the roof, a hellsoul dropped onto his back. Gunta’s sword sliced through the hellsoul’s legs, and it fell to the ground screaming. Gunta stepped up alongside the Torak as they both swung their swords furiously. Within moments the front of the inn was clear of hellsouls.

“Back inside,” Marak ordered Gunta as he turned and raced through the front door.

Axor was still on the steps. Body parts littered the floor, but the Torak could see nothing moving. He raced up the steps past the Chula shaman. The upstairs hallway was splattered in blood. MistyTrail and Mistake each had a hellsoul on the floor and were repeatedly stabbing them whenever they opened their eyes. Caldal and Eltor were shooting arrows along the corridor as creatures rose to attack. The Torak rushed towards the women first. He sliced each of the fallen hellsouls and nodded when their bodies disappeared. Marak turned and pushed past the elves.

“Save your arrows,” he said as he pushed by.

The Torak marched along the corridor striking a killing blow to each hellsoul as he rose. Within moments the hallway was thick with smoke.

“Check every room,” ordered the Emperor. “I want to know that they are all dead. If you find one alive, call for me. The Sword of Torak will vanquish them.”

The elves began searching the rooms. The Emperor turned and headed for the girls’ room. He threw open the door just in time to see an empty cloak fall to the floor.

“How did you do that?” Marak asked Halman.

“Decapitation,” answered Halman. “We kept killing the same three over and over again. When I decapitated one, he disappeared in a puff of smoke, just as if I had used the Sword of Torak. I figured if it could work once, why not try it on the others.”

“Excellent,” grinned the Emperor. “We must get word of this to everyone. Are the girls alright?”

“They are scared,” answered Crawford, “but otherwise unharmed. Thank you for sending Halman to protect them. They would have surely died if he had not been here. They came through the window.”

“From the roof out front,” nodded the Emperor. “Stay and watch over them, Crawford. Halman, make a circuit outside to see if any more are around.”

Halman nodded and raced out of the room. Marak turned to see if the elves had found anymore. They had not.

“Out front,” shouted Halman.

The Emperor raced down the stairs and out the front the door. Halman stood gazing down at a live hellsoul. The creature was on its back staring up at Halman. It had no legs to rise and attack. The Torak walked over to it and stared down.

“I carry the Sword of Torak,” declared the Emperor. “It has the ability to end your miserable existence. Shall I put you out of your misery?”

“What are you waiting for?” spat the hellsoul. “Kill me.”

“Not until you answer my questions,” retorted the Emperor. “When will the invasion begin?”

“I have no knowledge of that,” snarled the hellsoul. “Just kill me and be done with it.”

“I am the Torak,” declared the Emperor. “Were you specifically targeting me?”

“I will tell you nothing,” growled the creature.

Emperor Marak turned to Halman. “Continue your search. Count the cloaks so that we know how many tried to attack us this night. It was a great deal more than the six we encountered yesterday.”

“What are you waiting for,” snarled the hellsoul. “Kill me.”

“I think not,” replied the Torak. “You cannot die unless I kill you. I wonder what life will be like for you. You cannot stand or ride a horse. You cannot even crawl. The rest of your days will be confined to this very spot watching others come and go. I cannot imagine what a life like that will be.”

The hellsouls eyes clouded over with fear. It was not the fear of dying, but rather the fear of remaining alive. Emperor Marak turned and started to walk away.

“Stop,” shouted the hellsoul. “I will tell you what you want to know.”

Marak smiled inwardly and returned to stand over the creature. “Speak.”

“How do I know that you will kill me when I have spoken,” asked the hellsoul.

“Unlike the people of Motanga,” answered the Emperor, “I keep my word. Answer my questions, and you will die quickly.”

“Not all of us were sent to kill you,” the hellsoul stated without hesitation. “There are groups hunting for you along this road, but some of us have different missions. The six you spoke of ordered me and the others to join with them for this attack. Now kill me.”

“How may other groups are trying to kill me?” asked the Emperor.

“I don’t know,” answered the hellsoul. “I do know that you are a special target. There will be dozens of groups after you. There are thousands of us in all. Some of us have special targets. Others are free to strike at random. I really know little else. Kill me,” he pleaded as his arms rose in desperation.

The Emperor stared at the hellsoul’s wrist. There was a thumbprint seared on the inside of it. He pointed to it with the tip of his sword.

“What is this mark?” asked the Emperor.

“It is the mark of a hellsoul,” answered the creature. “It is the searing caused by Vand’s thumb during the ceremony. Ask me no more! We had a bargain. Kill me.”

Emperor Marak nodded and plunged the Sword of Torak into the creature’s chest. The empty cloak settled to the ground as a puff of smoke rose over it.

Chapter 6

Meliban

Halman was the first to come down the stairs in the morning. He stopped at the bottom of the stairs and looked around. The blood and gore from the previous night’s battle had been cleaned up. He heard noises coming from the kitchen and decided to investigate.

“Morning,” greeted the innkeeper of the Western Woods Inn. “You are up early.”

“And it appears that you have not slept at all,” replied Halman. “The common room is already cleaned for your guests. I am sorry that we brought these troubles upon you. Can I help with anything?”

“You already performed your greatest service last night when you protected my daughters rather than your lord,” replied Crawford. “You have my gratitude for life.”

“It was my lord who requested that I do so,” declared Halman, “although I was pleased that he did. How are the girls?”

“I have not woken them,” frowned Crawford. “I am afraid that last night was too horrible for them to understand. One of the reasons that I left the Kheri tribe was to isolate them from the deaths of tribal warfare. I guess that is not possible in these times.”

“No it isn’t,” agreed the Torak soldier. “They should have the satisfaction of knowing that their father is a fearless warrior and will protect them with his life. You performed well last night.”

“I am getting old,” grinned the innkeeper, “but I still know how to use a sword. Do you think more of them will come today?”

“I do not think so,” answered Halman. “It is my lord they are after. We will be on the road within the hour, so I think your life will return to normal.”

“Why is your lord so important to those creatures?” asked Crawford.

Halman went silent for a few moments as if weighing his answer before giving it. The innkeeper waited patiently as he sliced portions of clova for the morning meal.

“My lord is Emperor Marak of Khadora,” Halman finally stated. “We do not wish much word of his passing to be spread, but it is obvious that our enemy already knows.”

“The Emperor of Khadora?” gasped the innkeeper. “Mercy! I am honored to have served him and his people last night.”

“You did more than serve us,” smiled Halman. “You fought alongside us. It is a memory to be cherished.”

“Indeed,” the innkeeper nodded excitedly. “It is also exactly what I need to help the girls recover from their fright. They will be so excited to serve the Emperor of Khadora that they will forget the troubles of last night. Excuse me while I go and waken them.”

Halman smiled and returned to the common as the rest of the party was coming down the stairs. Gunta looked tired, and Halman realized that he probably stayed up the whole night. The group gathered at the same table that they had occupied the night before. There was not much talking as Halman brought mugs of coffee from the kitchen and placed them on the table before sitting down. A few minutes later Crawford raced down the stairs and into the kitchen. A short while later the two girls descended the stairs. They stared briefly at the travelers before whispering excitedly and running into the kitchen.

Both girls emerged from the kitchen carrying plates of eggs and clova slices. They very formally placed the plates in front of each of the travelers and then bowed low to the Emperor. Marak’s brow creased in confusion as he watched the performance. Halman’s lips curled upward in a smile as he watched the girls depart.

“The girls seemed to have recovered well from the incident last night,” remarked the Emperor. “I guess the Fakarans are built of hardy stock. Most Khadoran youngsters would still be hiding from the hellsouls.”

The girls returned with more plates and repeated the performance, ending with a low bow to the Emperor. This time Halman could not help but chuckle when they left.

“You will explain this, Halman,” the Emperor said. “What is going on?”

“I thought it would ease tensions to explain who you are,” admitted the Torak soldier. “It appears to have taken the girls’ minds off of last night. I hope you do not mind.”

Marak’s confusion quickly faded and was replaced with a smile. “You have talents that have not yet been discovered, Halman. Your discovery last night that decapitation can vanquish these creatures is but another reason of why I value your services so much. What do you think the chances are of finding another horse in this area?”

“You will not have much luck in that endeavor,” answered Crawford as he brought a pitcher of coffee to the table. “In a few month’s time your chances will be greatly improved, but not now. The people in these parts are farmers, and they have no horses to spare. Perhaps in Meliban you will have more luck.”

“Caldal and I can continue to ride double,” offered MistyTrail. “It is not a problem.”

The Emperor nodded, and the innkeeper retreated to the kitchen.

“We need to be more alert in our travels from now on,” announced Gunta. “There will certainly be more attacks on us before we reach Angragar.”

“Caldal and I can take turns scouting ahead,” offered Eltor. “We will not be mistaken for a Khadoran Emperor.”

“Don’t leave Mistake and me out of this,” interjected MistyTrail. “I am used to traveling unseen in a forest, and I am sure Mistake can as well.”

The Emperor smiled broadly as he pushed his empty plate towards the center of the table. “You have all shown your ability to be part of this group last night. We will ride with a forward scout from now on. Everyone who wants to scout will have a chance to do so. Now it is time to get on the road.”

The travelers rose and headed for the rear door of the inn. Emperor Marak extracted a small pouch of gold as he rose. He paused at the door to the kitchen on his way to the door. The innkeeper and his daughters had left the kitchen to watch the group leave. Emperor Marak handed the pouch to Crawford.

“You ended up with more work than you bargained for when you accepted us last night,” smiled the Torak. “I hope this will be enough to compensate you for your troubles.”

The innkeeper opened his mouth to protest, but Marak had already moved away and stood in front of the two girls. He bowed to the first girl and kissed her hand. He repeated the procedure for the second girl and then stood and smiled at the two of them.

“It was a memorable night for all of us at the Western Woods,” he said with a smile. “Remember what was good about it, and push the other thoughts away. As long as there are men in this world like your father, mankind will not lose hope in their future. Be well.”

The girls were giddy with excitement as the Emperor walked out the door. They rushed to the door to watch the Khadorans leave. Crawford exited the inn and put his arms around the girls as Halman led the procession out of the stables.

* * *

“Land ho!” shouted the sailor from the rigging, his arm pointing slightly to the starboard side of the bow.

“Stand ready,” Captain Mynor shouted to the small crew of the Sprite. “We are now in the enemy’s territory. Be ready for evasive action at any moment.”

The Sprite was the sleekest and fastest of Khadoran vessels. It carried a crew of only four besides the captain. It was a small ship built for speed and not for the heavy burdens of cargo. Captain Mynor stood at the helm and corrected his course slightly to starboard. Beside him, a member of the crew recorded the change in direction. The crewman kept a detailed log of the travels of the Sprite, and it would be up to him to chart the Island of Darkness as the captain circumnavigated it.

The other two members of the crew stood at the stern rail, one on each side of a barrel of oil. They carried bows and had scores of arrows readied to shoot at pursuing ships. If the Sprite were chased, the barrel of oil would provide for flaming arrows to keep the enemy at bay while the captain tried to outrace the pursuer.

Captain Mynor was excited at finding the Island of Darkness. He had plotted the course of the Khadoran ship that had sighted the sailboat carrying the elves. He had then used that information to chart a hypothetical course for the sailboat. Backtracking along that hypothetical course from Raven’s Point had brought the Sprite to its current position. Now that land had been sighted, the captain was thrilled. He knew the possibility existed that the Motangans would attempt to attack the Sprite and capture the crew, but Captain Mynor had other plans for the voyage. He was prepared to lure the Motangan vessels far out to sea and then outrace them back towards the island. No matter what happened, he was determined to properly place the Island of Darkness on the charts for Khadoran seamen.

* * *

Emperor Marak’s party rounded a bend in the trail and saw Eltor in the distance sitting stationary on his horse. The party immediately halted. Mistake swiftly wove an air tunnel and directed it towards Eltor.

“Speak softly,” she ordered the elf. “Why have you stopped?”

“There are several people in the forest between us,” Eltor answered. “They are on your left about halfway between us. They let me pass by, but I did not think I could turn around to warn you. I figured that you would stop when you saw me sitting here.”

Mistake repeated the elf’s words to the Emperor. The Torak used hand signals to order the party to dismount. They tied their horses to trees and huddled at the edge of the trail.

“MistyTrail,” ordered the Emperor, “I want you to swing around to the left to get behind those people. We need to identify them before we attack. Can you do that without being seen?”

“Easily,” grinned the Sakovan. “I will use an air tunnel to let you know who they are and how many there are.”

The Torak nodded as MistyTrail slipped into the woods. He turned to the Chula shaman.

“We need some type of distraction to keep their interest away from MistyTrail,” he said. “What can you do?”

“I can provide a distraction for her,” the Chula grinned, his whiskers dancing from the movement of his lips.

Without any further explanation, Axor slipped into the woods. Everyone was watching him as he slipped behind a tree. They were expecting to see him move further into the forest, but they never did. Instead, a large tiger moved silently through the trees towards the supposed position of the hidden people.

“Where did he go?” Caldal asked softly. “Does he know there is a tiger in the forest with him? He may get eaten before he distracts anyone. Perhaps I should go help him?”

“Remain here,” ordered the Torak. “A Chula shaman is very much at home in a forest. He will not be attacked by any tiger. Everyone ready your bows.”

The tiger moved slowly, its nose sampling the air with every step. Within a few minutes it had sighted the first of the humans. The tiger watched the human for several moments before circling behind the man. It saw three more humans as it crouched low among the underbrush. Suddenly, it smelled MistyTrail. The tiger moved deeper into the brush so she would not see it.

“I see four men,” MistyTrail reported softly through the air tunnel. “I cannot tell if they are hellsouls or not. What should I do?”

Emperor Marak thought for a moment before answering. “Stay hidden where you are. We are going to start moving forward to see what their intent is. If they attack us, attack them. Try to drive them onto the trail.”

“I shall do as you say,” replied MistyTrail.

“This is important, MistyTrail,” cautioned the Emperor. “Do not under any circumstances attack a tiger. Do you understand?”

“No,” admitted MistyTrail. “I don’t think there are any tigers in these woods, but if I see one I will not attack it.”

“That goes for all of us,” the Torak announced to those around him. “Mistake, inform Eltor of our plan. Also let him know about the tiger.”

Mistake nodded and wove an air tunnel to Eltor. She passed along the Emperor’s message. When she was done, the party mounted their horses. The Emperor waved his hand at Mistake and Caldal indicating that they should lag behind somewhat. Gunta and Halman moved to Marak’s left side to shield him from any attack. They rode slowly along the trail.

Suddenly a mighty roar was heard throughout the forest just as the attackers made their move. The tiger raced forward and leaped onto the back of one of the humans. Its powerful jaws opened wide and its teeth sunk deep into the man’s neck. The man screamed loudly as he fell to the ground, his hands trying to reach behind himself to grab the tiger. The tiger snapped the man’s neck and growled again. Several arrows were fired at it, but the tiger darted to one side. The arrows slammed into the fallen man. While the archers were reaching for more arrows, the tiger charged them with a mighty roar. Two of the men instantly turned and ran. The third tried frantically to nock his arrow as his eyes were focused on the charging beast. He failed.

The tiger leaped at the man, knocking him to the ground. The man’s arms grabbed the tiger and tried to hold his mouth away from him, but the tiger was too powerful. The tiger’s teeth snapped closed on the man’s throat. The man’s scream instantly died.

When the two attackers ran out of the forest, a hail of arrows struck them down. Emperor Marak leaped off his horse and ran towards the bodies. He unsheathed the Sword of Torak and brought it down on the first body. It disappeared in a puff of smoke. He repeated the procedure on the second body.

Suddenly the tiger appeared. It dragged a body out of the woods and dropped it on the road. It immediately turned and reentered the forest. Emperor Marak brought his sword down on the new body and watched it disappear.

“I do not believe this,” Caldal said as he watched the tiger reenter the forest. “Is that beast actually helping us?”

No one answered as MistyTrail dragged another body out of the forest and dropped it on the road. The Torak dispatched the hellsoul and sheathed his sword.

“That tiger is quicker than me,” frowned MistyTrail. “I already had the air tunnel woven when he suddenly attacked. I guess I should be thankful.”

“We should all be thankful,” smiled the Emperor. “Those of you who did not chose a sword for your weapon must get one. If decapitation is the key to vanquishing these creatures, you will need a weapon that can accomplish that. Knives and bows will not help to destroy them. That will only slow them down. We will go shopping when we get to Meliban.”

Unseen by the others, Axor walked out of the woods where his horse and MistyTrail’s were still tethered. He untied them both and walked along the road to rejoin the party. Caldal stared at the Chula shaman with questioning eyes. Axor ignored the gaze and handed MistyTrail the reins to her horse.

“We have expended enough time here,” announced the Emperor. “Let’s ride on.”

* * *

Rejji and Bakhai rode into the city of Meliban. Thousands of workers were moving to and fro as the city expanded outward. Rejji swelled with pride for the Fakaran people as he saw how far the development had progressed. The city center was fully developed, and the marketplace was filled with buyers and sellers. Everyone shouted and waved as they noticed the Astor riding through the city.

Rejji rode straight for the administration building. The brothers dismounted and tied their horses to the rail outside. They marched up the steps and into the building.

“Rejji!” greeted Marshal Wyant as he quickly crossed the entry foyer. “How was the trip from Taggot?”

“Gratefully uneventful,” answered Rejji. “I am hearing more and more tales of random murders, though. I witnessed one attempt in Taggot. A hellsoul tried to attack Adger. This does not bode well for our people.”

“No it doesn’t,” agreed Wyant. “We have had six deaths here in the last week. The people are getting quite nervous. We did receive a message from Khadora recently. They say that decapitation kills the hellsouls. I have not had a chance to verify it yet.”

“Find a way to verify it quickly,” advised the Astor. “You are joining Bakhai and me on a trip. I would like this issue settled before we leave.”

“Where are we going?” asked the marshal.

“Angragar,” Rejji replied. “Do not tell anyone. Emperor Marak and his people should be arriving at any time, if they are not here already.”

“They have not entered the city yet,” replied Wyant. “I would have known about it. Are they going with us?”

“They are,” confirmed Rejji. “There are eight of them coming from Khadora. Another four will be coming from the Sakova.”

“A large party,” Wyant responded with raised eyebrows. “What is the purpose of this trip?”

“There are several purposes,” explained Rejji. “One is the need to learn more about the prophecies that we must deal with. We must know as much about what is to happen as we can. How long will it take you to get ready?”

“Less than an hour,” answered the marshal. “I will have Yojji take over for me here.”

“I am sure you will have more notice than that,” smiled Rejji. “I imagine that the Torak’s party will want to rest overnight when they arrive.”

A tribesman ran into the building. He saw Wyant and ran over to him.

“A party of foreigners is approaching the city,” he reported. “We counted eight of them.”

“Go back and escort them to the inn across the street,” ordered Wyant. “I will wait for them there.”

The tribesman nodded and ran out of the building. Rejji shook his head and looked at Wyant.

“Do you keep track of everyone coming and going from Meliban?” he asked.

“Anyone who arouses any suspicion,” nodded Wyant. “Or special people,” he added with a grin. “I was informed of your arrival as well. The advance notice gave me time to get things cleared up before you arrived here. Shall we cross the street and wait for Emperor Marak?”

Rejji, Bakhai, and Wyant crossed the street and entered the Kheri Inn. The common room was huge and hosted dozens of long tables. Most of the tables were occupied with workers taking a break from the workday. Wyant walked up to the innkeeper, Tutman.

“Special guests are arriving in a moment,” the Marshal said softly. “There will be eight of them. Make sure that their every wish is granted.”

“It will be as you wish, Wyant,” nodded the innkeeper. “I will even prepare a special meal for them.”

Wyant turned and stared at the tables in the common room. “Should we get a table for our guests?”

“I would wait and let them choose,” answered Rejji. “If I know Marak, he would want the corner table, and it is already occupied.”

“Why the corner?” asked the Marshal.

“So his back is not exposed,” shrugged Rejji. “He never says much about security, but he is constantly thinking about it. Even the way he walks is subconsciously calculated to avoid being trapped. He is a very careful man.”

Wyant nodded and marched towards the corner table. The occupants looked up when he arrived.

“Marshal,” greeted one of the men. “Sit down and join us.”

“I am afraid that I cannot,” smiled Wyant. “I am with the Astor and need to discuss some things privately. I was wondering if I could talk you men into moving to a different table. We are expecting some others.”

“Rejji is here?” asked one of the men as he rose and turned to look. “I would like to say hello to him. I am done with my meal anyway.”

The other men nodded and stood up. Those who had not finished eating moved to another table while those who were finished walked towards the door and greeted Rejji. A serving girl immediately arrived at the now empty table and gathered the dishes. She came back and cleaned the table just before Gunta and Halman entered the room. Rejji broke off the conversation with the tribesmen and welcomed Marak to Meliban. Mistake hugged Rejji when she saw him. Eltor’s brow creased as he watched the affectionate embrace, but he did not say anything. Rejji guided the party to the corner table, and everyone sat down.

“Quite a city you are building here,” complimented the Torak. “You must be proud of your accomplishments.”

“I am proud for my people,” nodded Rejji. “They are the ones rebuilding Fakara. How was your trip?”

“I would like to say uneventful,” frowned the Torak, “but that would be a lie. We were attacked several times. We are getting better at avoiding the attacks, but I am afraid the family at the Western Woods became involved more than I would have cared for. We have avoided your string of inns since then.”

“Crawford?” asked Wyant. “Is he alright?”

“He is,” nodded the Emperor. “He and his girls were fine when we left, but he had a great deal of cleaning to do.”

“You have been camping then?” asked Rejji.

“We have,” answered the Emperor. “In fact, I would like to take a route towards Ghala that is not traveled much. Is that possible?”

“We could go up the Meliban River and through the Valley of Bones,” nodded Rejji. “There are no inns along that route. Is that what you want to do?”

“Yes,” replied the Torak. “I think we will be attacked no matter which way we go, but I prefer to keep innocents out of harm’s way.”

“Do these hellsouls know where Angragar is?” asked Wyant.

“I doubt it,” Marak replied. “I think they are just watching all of the trails for me.”

“Then I can be of help,” grinned Wyant. “I know the area along the Meliban River quite well. It is the area my tribe used to call home. I can take us along trails that will not be watched by anyone.”

“Excellent,” Emperor Marak replied as Tutman arrived with plates of food.

Each plate was filled with a wasooki steak, slices of clova, and a thin strip of fish. Two girls followed the innkeeper with several large bowls of vegetables.

“A meal fit for a king,” announced the innkeeper as he gazed at each of the visitors and tried to figure out what was so special about them.

His eyes hesitated on the hooded man, but Tutman finally shrugged and returned to the kitchen for more plates. When he returned, Emperor Marak smiled at him.

“Your service is the best I have had on this journey,” Marak said. “We would also like to have four rooms for tonight. I would like the rooms together, but with two on each side of the hallway. Can you accommodate me?”

“Of course,” nodded the innkeeper as he grinned because of Marak’s compliment. “I will give you rooms at the end of the hall so others do not disturb you.”

“Excellent,” smiled the Emperor.

“Introduce us to the rest of your party,” urged Rejji after the innkeeper had left.

Emperor Marak started introducing everyone to each other. Rejji shook his head and stared at MistyTrail when she was introduced.

“So Mistake does have a sister,” Rejji grinned happily. “That makes every step up the mountain to see the Sage worthwhile. I am so happy for both of you. I would like to talk to both of you after the meal if that is acceptable.”

“Acceptable?” balked Mistake. “I would be sorely disappointed if you had not asked. I have so much to tell you. Bring Bakhai with you. We can talk in our room.”

Both elves frowned at the turn in the conversation. Marak saw the tension building and continued the introductions by presenting Eltor and Caldal.

“Elves?” Rejji said with surprise. “Real elves? How can this be? I thought they were a people of ancient history. Where have they come from?”

“We come from the land of elves,” Caldal replied brusquely, refusing even to mention the name of Elvangar. “We will soon be returning there. We will be taking Mistake and Misty Trail with us. They are elves just like Eltor and myself. They have no place in the land of humans.”

A deep frown fell over Rejji’s face from both the tone of Caldal’s speech and the content of his statement. His mouth opened to speak and the Emperor abruptly stood up.

“While this is a magnificent meal,” he announced, “I am quite tired from the day’s journey. I am sure the rest of you are as well. Perhaps we should retire to our rooms and prepare for an early start in the morning. Wyant, some in our party are in need of swords. Can you pick some up at the marketplace for me?”

“We have quite an assortment in the administration building,” answered Wyant. “We can meet there in the morning, and each person can choose for himself.”

“Good,” the Emperor nodded curtly. “Let’s retire to our rooms.”

Halman and Gunta immediately stood up. Axor and the Fakarans did as well. The elves stared across the table at Mistake and MistyTrail and finally rose. They turned and walked away silently to get their key from the innkeeper.

“What is wrong with them?” frowned Mistake. “I thought Caldal’s attitude was improving, but he sounded quite put out. I wonder if the food does not agree with him?”

Chapter 7

Air Tunnel

“And that is what I have been doing since I left Fakara,” Mistake said as she concluded the tale of her adventures since leaving Ghala.

“You have had quite an adventure,” Rejji replied as he rose and walked around the small room in the Kheri Inn. “It is hard for me to imagine the Island of Darkness. I could not stand to live in such a place.”

“They plan to bring that culture here,” warned MistyTrail. “How can we possibly hope to defeat a million man army?”

“Fakara is much stronger than it used to be before Rejji took over the Free Tribes,” Bakhai pointed out.

“But it is still fractured,” countered the Astor. “The Jiadin are still scattered over much of the land. Fakara’s armies are half of what they could be.”

“You need to conquer the Jiadin,” suggested Mistake. “You cannot hope to defeat Vand’s armies with the Jiadin at your back.”

“I cannot even hope to defeat Vand’s armies with the Jiadin eliminated,” frowned Rejji. “If I try to eradicate the Jiadin now, all that I will accomplish is more death and destruction. The Free Tribes will be less of a force than they are now. I want a time of peace and prosperity in Fakara. These people deserve a break from the ages of warfare.”

“What they deserve and what you can give them may be two different things,” cautioned MistyTrail. “The Sakovans yearned for peace, but it could never happen until Omunga was conquered. Isn’t the Astor of Fakara supposed to be like the Star of Sakova? Didn’t Kaltara send you to free these people?”

“I don’t know what I am supposed to do,” Rejji admitted with a frown. “I opened the gates of Angragar. That is all that I have done.”

“You have accomplished much more than that, brother,” interjected Bakhai. “You have united the Free Tribes and begun the restoration of Fakara. No other person could have accomplished that. You destroyed Grulak’s army and halted the total domination of our homeland by Vand’s people.”

“What has Kaltara told you to do?” asked MistyTrail.

“Told me to do?” echoed Rejji. “What do you mean?”

“You haven’t spoken to Kaltara?” gasped MistyTrail. “Tell me that you are not serious. Have you talked to Kaltara?”

Rejji stopped pacing and stared at MistyTrail. “How am I supposed to talk to him?” Rejji asked.

“Through prayer,” explained the Sakovan. “You must to talk to Emperor Marak about this. How can you expect to know what to do if you have not asked Kaltara?”

“Has Kaltara spoken to Emperor Marak?” asked Bakhai.

“I am sure that he has,” nodded MistyTrail. “Kaltara has even spoken to me. Why wouldn’t he speak to the Astor?”

“Kaltara has spoken to you?” queried Rejji. “What did he say?”

“Many things,” MistyTrail said guardedly as she remembered the days she spent in prayer when Mistake had run away. “If he had not instructed me, I would not be here today.”

MistyTrail walked to the bed and sat down next to Mistake She lovingly put her arm around her sister and smiled.

“You two look so much alike,” Bakhai noted as he stared at the sisters. “I can’t imagine having the two of you around here. It will be interesting.”

“They won’t be staying,” frowned Rejji. “Didn’t you hear the elves earlier tonight. Mistake and MistyTrail are going away with them.”

“To Elvangar,” nodded Mistake as she stared at Rejji. “Why does that bother you so much?”

Rejji sighed and sat on the floor facing the women. “I don’t know,” he admitted. “I guess I always took your presence for granted, but since you have been gone, I have thought of you constantly. Not a day has gone by that I had not wished to see you by my side. Now you will be leaving once more. I will probably never see you again.”

“Nonsense,” smiled Mistake. “We are just going to see the land of the elves. It will be an exciting trip. Maybe you should come?”

“That is not possible,” replied Rejji. “The elves would not even name their homeland in front of me. There is no way that they would allow me to go.”

“How do you know that without asking them?” retorted Mistake. “Eltor and Caldal are good friends. They are quite eager to take MistyTrail and me there. Why wouldn’t they let you come too?”

“And that is the problem,” Rejji nodded sadly. “You call them good friends, but they wish to be more than that. Didn’t you see their reactions when you invited us up to your room? It was a look of hatred for Bakhai and me.”

“Nonsense,” Mistake shook her head. “Caldal just has trouble sometimes dealing with humans. He is getting over that. It must be your imagination.”

“They are in love with you,” interjected Bakhai. “At least they think they are. Even one who has not spent much time around humans can see that easily.”

“What do you mean by that?” asked MistyTrail with sudden interest.

“You are not aware of their feelings for you?” questioned Bakhai.

“No,” MistyTrail shook her head. “I meant the part about someone not used to being around humans.”

“Bakhai was raised by animals,” explained Rejji. “It is only recently that he has spent much time among the people.”

“Really?” the Sakovan said excitedly. “There is much that I would love to ask you. I have spent my life trying to understand how animals in the Sakova act so that I could mimic them. It is one of the tricks that I used to remain invisible while guarding the forest.”

“You two need to spend some time in the forest alone,” laughed Mistake. “I can just see MistyTrail trying to sneak up on Bakhai. I wonder who would win such a contest?”

“Bakhai, without a doubt,” answered Rejji. “He would have all of the forest animals spying on MistyTrail.”

“Can you really do that?” MistyTrail asked Bakhai. “Do the animals really tell you things?”

“They do,” nodded Bakhai, “but not as you might expect. Animals don’t think like you do, and each species is different, but quite a lot of information can be determined by what they say. I would certainly know where you were hiding in the forest, but I might not be able to tell if you were planning to attack or merely sleeping.”

“We must test this out on the trip to Angragar,” MistyTrail said excitedly.

“Speaking of the trip,” frowned Rejji, “it is getting quite late. We should all get some sleep before the dawn comes. We can talk more on the way to Angragar.”

Rejji and Bakhai said goodbye and slipped out the door of the room. Mistake waited a few minutes before talking.

“Do you really think Eltor is in love with me?” she asked MistyTrail. “He has never said so.”

“Nor has Rejji,” smiled MistyTrail. “I am not sure how Eltor feels, but Caldal won’t leave me alone. I think he would cry if Marak managed to get another horse for me to ride.”

* * *

Emperor Marak and his two shadows stepped out of the Kheri Inn and into the predawn streets of Meliban. Dozens of men were already moving through the streets towards the waterfront. The Emperor watched curiously as the citizens moved quickly but quietly. Across the street the door to the administration building opened. Marshal Wyant strode across the street and stood in front of the Emperor.

“You are up early this morning,” greeted the marshal.

“I had a good night’s sleep,” smiled the Torak. “Your city appears to waken early.”

“Only when a Khadoran ship comes to port,” replied Wyant. “We try to unload it as quickly as possible. The captains have told us that they must move with the tides until the harbor is dredged, so we oblige them.”

“I am sure that they are grateful,” Marak replied distractedly. “Do my ships still go to Ghala?”

“Only one a month now,” answered Wyant. “Ghala has become self-sufficient. The ships go there only for trading purposes now. Pretty soon the same will be said for Taggot and Meliban. Your mages have worked wonders with the fields and forests. Fakara’s future is bright today because of you.”

“I only gave help where it was needed,” replied the Emperor. “It is the Fakarans who should be credited with winning back their country. You have been a great help to Rejji. I am glad that you saw the light so early in the war.”

“Even that is partially due to you and your shadows,” Wyant chuckled as his eyes darted to Gunta and Halman. “I still remember that night that you saved me from the slavers’ caravan. I thought my life was over then.”

“Your life is what you make of it,” smiled the Torak. “You have chosen wisely. I know that Rejji depends on you a great deal.”

Marak turned and stared at the backs of the citizens as they moved towards the waterfront. He turned and touched Halman on the arm.

“Go speak to the captain of the vessel,” he ordered. “Tell him that I am in the city and that I don’t want him to leave without my authorization.”

Halman turned and ran towards the waterfront. Wyant stared with curiosity and then looked questioningly at the Emperor.

“I would normally be loathe to utilize one of my ships for personal reasons,” the Emperor explained without being asked, “but it sounds like there is no longer a great need to supply Fakara. I am thinking of using the ship to get to Ghala. It will save us from a long trek through unfamiliar territory, and it would not disturb the shipping schedule a great deal. Perhaps the next ship to Ghala would be a day late.”

“The shipping schedule to Ghala is not of great concern,” agreed Wyant. “It sounds like a good plan. I will round up Rejji and Bakhai so that we do not delay the ship’s departure.”

The Emperor watched the marshal turn and leave. He turned to Gunta and told him to awaken the rest of the party.

* * *

“Sails off the port bow,” shouted the sailor for the rigging. “Make that three ships running hard. They are coming this way, Captain.”

“Man the sails,” shouted Captain Mynor. “We are coming about.”

Two sailors left the stern rail and raced forward to trim the sails.

“Two more off the port beam,” shouted the lookout.

“What do you make of it, Magella?” the captain asked the seaman alongside him who was drawing lines on the chart that he had been creating.

“It is obviously coordinated,” answered Magella. “Five ships appearing at the same time is no coincidence. They are coming for us.”

“As I suspected,” nodded Captain Mynor. “If I were them, I would have a few more far behind us to close in when we turned to flee.”

“I agree,” stated the seaman. “Our best course is the open sea. We will have to abandon the charting for now and pick it up again later.”

“That will waste a few days,” frowned the captain. “The longer we hang around this Island of Darkness, the greater the risks to our ship and crew.”

“Three more sails astern,” shouted the lookout. “They are coming on full sail, Captain.”

“There you have it,” scowled the captain. “We have no choice but to run.” The captain waited until the sailors were ready to man the sails and then shouted, “Coming about now.”

Captain Mynor grabbed the wheel and started turning to starboard. The small craft turned sharply and headed for the open sea.

“Trim the sails full,” shouted the captain. “We are in a race here. Make her sleek.”

The Sprite moved slowly at first as the sailors worked to trim the sails for the new wind. Captain Mynor adjusted the course for maximum speed. By the time the Sprite was up to speed, the eight Motangan ships were quite visible.

“They picked the right wind to spring this attack,” commented Magella. “If we were lazy in watching out for them, they would already be upon us.”

“This is not a voyage where we can afford to be lazy,” replied the captain as he looked over his shoulder at the ships converging on the Sprite. “They are closer to us than I would have liked.”

“They still have the momentum,” frowned Magella, “but I don’t think they can gain any on us now. Not unless the winds change.”

“Give a look, Sean,” shouted the captain. “Tell me what is on those ships.”

“Barrels are lit, Captain,” shouted the lookout. “I see no catapults, but there are scores of archers on the bows.”

“No type of weapons other than the archers?” asked the captain.

“None that I can see, Captain,” replied Sean.

“What are you thinking, Captain?” asked Magella.

“I am wondering if these ships are typical of the ones that will transport the massive armies to the mainland,” mused the captain. “If so, a fleet of small attack ships might succeed in costing the Motangans a great deal of men. I have heard that the attack ships are capable of carrying a thousand men each. Can you imagine the small victory of even one of those ships going to the bottom?”

“It would be suicide for our crews,” frowned Magella, “but the thought is worth pursuing. If their entire navy crosses the sea unhindered, Khadora does not stand a chance of surviving. We would have to build special ships to have any chance of sinking those behemoths. Do you think the Emperor would invest in such a plan?”

“It was Emperor Marak who sent us on this mission,” the captain reminded the seaman. “He wants this island charted for some reason, although I am not privy to his plans. I think if we can present a plan, he will sign onto it.”

“First we have to complete the charting of the Island of Darkness,” frowned Magella as gazed over the stern at the Motangan vessels bearing down on them.

* * *

The officer stormed out of the interrogation room and slammed the door.

“I assume that your efforts failed again?” asked a hooded man as he walked to the closed door and peered through the small window.

He gazed into the interrogation room, which was really a large storeroom with a table in the center of it. Shelves, lined with hundreds of tins, bottles, and piles of cloth, lined the walls. In the center of the room, a young woman was strapped naked to the table. Leather straps bound her legs and arms.

“She is not going to volunteer the information,” replied the officer. “I have threatened her and offered rewards for her cooperation, but she denies that she is a mage. Is there any chance that we grabbed the wrong person?”

“Did she confirm her name?” asked the hooded man.

“She is called Rhoda,” nodded the officer. “Maybe our spies were wrong in selecting her.”

“More likely,” the hooded man smirked, “she requires an expert interrogator. Fortunately for you, I have arrived. Go get some sleep. I will have her talking before you awaken from your nap.”

The officer frowned, but nodded and left the room through a door to the corridor beyond. The interrogator opened the door to the storeroom and walked in. He made a point of closing the door loudly so his victim would know that she had company. He smiled inwardly as the young woman’s head turned in an attempt to see who was coming. The interrogator stood silently outside her field of vision for several moments before approaching the table.

“Ah,” smiled the interrogator as he stepped alongside the table and stared at the young woman, “what do we have here? You are Rhoda of Raven’s Point, aren’t you? I remember seeing you there.”

“You have been to Raven’s Point?” asked the young woman. “I do not remember you.”

“I would not have been wearing my hood,” laughed the interrogator. “How could you possibly remember me?”

“That must be why I didn’t recognize you,” frowned Rhoda. “Perhaps if you remove the hood, I will remember you.”

“It is not me that I wish you to remember,” smiled the interrogator. “What I want is your knowledge of magic spells.”

“I am not a mage,” Rhoda said hesitantly.

“Do not lie to me,” shouted the interrogator.

Rhoda shook with fear at the change of the man’s tone. She was not convinced that the man was Khadoran, but she knew that her plan of playing ignorant would no longer work. This man would not be as easily frustrated as the officer had been.

“I only know one spell,” lied Rhoda. “I don’t consider that being a mage. There are mages at Raven’s Point. You must have me confused with someone else.”

The interrogator exhaled as one would when considering the words of an opponent. Rhoda felt a small sliver of hope that she could confuse the man.

“What is the one spell that you know?” asked the interrogator. “I will know by your answer if you are telling me the truth.”

Rhoda frantically thought about the spells she knew and which of them could possibly be witnessed by non-mages. Weaving an air tunnel was the only spell she could think of that an ordinary person would recognize as magic. She had used the spell in front of many ordinary clansmen. If this man had truly been to Raven’s Point, that is what he would be expecting her to say.

“There is a minor spell called an air tunnel,” Rhoda replied. “It is mostly a trick to amuse children.”

“It is a spell used for communications,” corrected the interrogator. “Do not take me for a fool. Explain to me how it works.”

“You would not understand it,” protested Rhoda. “Only a mage could understand the spell.”

“Yet you claim not to be a mage,” retorted the interrogator. “If you continue to lie to me, your punishment will be extremely cruel.”

Rhoda’s naked body shivered involuntarily in reaction to the interrogator’s threat. She knew that she had been stripped naked to make her feel more vulnerable. She used her powers of concentration to calm her body so that the interrogator would not notice her fear.

“The mages said that I had the capability of learning it,” replied Rhoda after she had calmed down. “That only meant that I had the talent within me. I must not have much talent if they only saw fit to teach me that one spell. Still, I would have to explain it to someone who at least has the capability to understand it. If you have no magical talent, you will not understand.”

The interrogator’s hand rose and pointed at Rhoda’s right leg. Flames leaped from his pointed finger and struck the leg. Rhoda screamed as the fire burned into her flesh. Her body twitched uncontrollably as the pain grew more intense. She felt as if her leg would burn completely off. Rhoda continued to scream until she passed out.

Rhoda was not sure how long she had been unconscious when she awoke. She could still feel the searing pain where the fire had burned her leg, but the pain was localized.

“So you are back among the living,” sneered the interrogator. “Did you enjoy my demonstration of magical ability?”

Rhoda said nothing. She concentrated on ignoring the pain in her leg.

“If not,” continued the interrogator, “I would be more than happy to demonstrate it again, and again, and again. The choice is yours. You can cooperate and live, or you can be burned one small area at a time until you do cooperate. Frankly, I hope you decide to be stubborn for at least a little while longer.”

“What do you want of me?” cried Rhoda. “I have done nothing to you. Why do you seek to hurt me so?”

“I want to know how you create an air tunnel,” declared the interrogator. “It is a simple request.”

“And if I tell you?” asked Rhoda. “What is in it for me? How do I know that you will not pleasure yourself with continued burnings of my flesh?”

The interrogator smiled broadly, although Rhoda could not see his face. He knew that his little demonstration had paid off where the officer had failed.

“If you cooperate,” answered the interrogator, “life will be simple for you. You will be free to live in peace on the island. If you do have any talents, we might even train you to be productive.”

“I won’t be allowed to return to Raven’s Point?” asked Rhoda.

“No,” the interrogator shook his head. “At least not while it is still Khadoran. Perhaps afterwards you will be allowed to return, after we have destroyed it.”

Rhoda felt a tear roll down her cheek. She had suspected that she would never see Raven’s Point again, but to hear the interrogator admit it brought a feeling of hopelessness to her.

“And you will truly teach me more magic?” Rhoda asked. “Would you really do that? Or are you just saying that to please me now?”

“If you have the ability,” answered the interrogator, “you will be taught. We have the finest teachers in the world here. Of course, it will depend on your abilities. I can promise no more than that.”

“I appreciate the honesty,” Rhoda tried to smile. “And all that I have to do is teach you how to create an air tunnel?”

“That is all,” nodded the interrogator. “Let’s begin now.”

“Alright,” Rhoda decided. “I have little choice anyways, and you will teach me magic. I always wanted to be a great mage.”

“Yes, yes,” sighed the interrogator, knowing that her low level abilities would never be worth nurturing. “Explain it to me now.”

“You have to create a vortex of wind,” explained Rhoda. “You do this by rotating your hands in a rapid fashion. Your hands must rotate around a perceived axis that extends from the perpendicular of an imaginary line connecting your two elbows. Then as the wind begins to circulate…”

“Wait,” commanded the interrogator. “Stop. Slow down so I can picture what you are saying.”

“I am sorry,” apologized Rhoda. “I guess I am just excited about the chance of learning new magic.”

The interrogator nodded and Rhoda repeated her statements again, only slower. She watched as the man tried positioning his hands properly.

“No, no, no,” Rhoda shook her head. “It has to be perpendicular. Your hands are off at an angle. Let me explain it again.”

“Be more detailed when you explain the positioning,” scowled the interrogator. “I want to get this right.”

“It would be much easier to show you,” sighed Rhoda. “That is how I learned. It really is a simple spell. You should not be having trouble with it.”

The interrogator stared at the naked woman as if weighing the risks of unstrapping her.

“Okay,” sighed Rhoda. “Let’s try this again. Put your arms out perpendicular to your body.”

“Stop,” ordered the interrogator. “I will unstrap you. Show me how the positioning is set. Do not take advantage of my leniency.”

“That will be easier,” nodded Rhoda. “As for taking advantage of anything, I am hardly in the position to run away. I do not even know where I am.”

“Trust me,” grinned the interrogator as he undid the straps holding her arms down, “you will not be running anywhere. Your legs will remain strapped to this table.

“That is fine,” replied Rhoda as she held her arms up and rubbed the areas that had been in contact with the straps. “You don’t realize how tight those straps are until they are released.”

“Begin now,” instructed the interrogator.

“Alright,” nodded Rhoda as she lifted her arms perpendicular to her torso. “Watch my hands closely. See how my arms are perpendicular to my body? Put yours out just like mine. Good. Now cup your hands like mine.”

The interrogator watched her hands closely and saw the beginnings of a vortex forming.

“You should be able to see the winds circulating now,” Rhoda said. “Note the circulation pattern. It must always go in the same direction.”

The interrogator nodded as he watched the vortex grow. “How do you use it to communicate?” he asked.

“In a minute,” replied Rhoda as she concentrated on her spell. “First the vortex must be fully formed. Only then can it be directed to the proper target.”

Suddenly, the tall shelves of the storeroom began to vibrate. Items on the shelves bounced around and began to lift off the shelves. The interrogator did not notice the storm-like winds that were rotating fiercely around the room as he stared at the small vortex within Rhoda’s hands. Soon the articles on the shelves began flying around the room. Tins, bottles and piles of cloth circulated the room like a small tornado. When the tall shelves loudly snapped away from the walls, the interrogator’s head snapped up to discover what was happening.

“What is going on?” he demanded to know. “Is this part of the air tunnel?”

“Oh,” smiled Rhoda as she twisted her hands to make the tornado collapse in on itself, “did you want an air tunnel? I thought you wanted something much more powerful. I know that I am ready to die. Are you?”

The tornado spiraled inward as the interrogator’s mouth opened in horror. The first obstacle to strike was a small tin filled with nails. It smashed into his head with the force of a strong punch from a burly krul. The interrogator swayed from the blow as the tornado collapsed inward.

Rhoda watched with glee as the flying debris descended on her and the interrogator. She saw a sharp piece of broken shelf plunge into the interrogator’s body. She could barely hear his scream over the howling of the wind. Then she felt the articles striking her body. She closed her eyes and prepared to die.

Chapter 8

Qubari Jungle

The Khadoran ship slid alongside the dock at Ghala, the morning sun just rising over the eastern sea. Two old men stood apart from the dockworkers that were securing the ship’s lines. Rejji grinned broadly as he saw the two men.

“Plesy! Copi!” smiled the Astor. “How good to see you again.”

“I didn’t think you would dare show your face around here any more,” grumbled Copi. “You turned our village into a city and ran away.”

“Stop your grumbling, Copi,” chuckled Plesy. “The smile hasn’t left your face since Ghala mushroomed into a city.”

“Some things never change,” laughed Rejji as he marched down the gangplank and greeted the city elders. “How is Riktor? I thought he would be on the dock.”

“This ship is unscheduled,” Plesy replied. “My son is off hunting this week. He will be back in a few days.”

“Too many unscheduled ships these days,” groused Copi. “Another arrived just yesterday. Don’t those Khadorans know how to keep to a shipping schedule?”

Rejji flushed with embarrassment as Emperor Marak stepped off the gangplank and stood alongside him.

“We were scheduled to arrive this day to honor the death of one of the city’s founding fathers,” Emperor Marak replied brusquely. “Hasn’t the one called Copi died yet?”

Copi’s eyes grew wide and his mouth hung open as he watched Halman and Gunta come down the gangplank and flank the Torak. He returned his eyes to the Emperor’s face and saw Marak grinning broadly. There was a twinkle of mischievousness in the Torak’s eyes.

“Bah,” grumbled Copi. “Don’t do that to an old man. My heart can only stand so much.”

“Your heart looks like it has been caring for you well,” smiled Emperor Marak. “Tell me of yesterday’s ship.”

“It just dropped off four people,” replied Plesy. “A young woman who calls herself the Star of Sakova and three fellow travelers. She is staying at the Ghala Inn.”

“The old man is alright,” interjected Copi. “He has been demanding to hear all of the old stories of the village.”

“What Copi means is that he has found someone to sit and listen to him tell all of those old stories,” chuckled Plesy.

“Those stories are our history,” retorted Copi. “Temiker is wise to seek out such knowledge.”

“Temiker is wise,” smiled the Emperor as the rest of the travelers filed off the ship.

“Mistake! Bakhai!” greeted Plesy. “You are all back together again. I remember the day the three of you arrived at our small village.”

“That is one of my stories,” grinned Copi, “but I will save it for people who care to gain knowledge.”

Plesy gazed at the other passengers as they disembarked. He did a double take when MistyTrail walked onto the dock, but the man with the hood covering his head held the old man’s interest the most. As soon as the passengers were on the dock, the captain called for the gangplank to be removed. The ship was untied and started to depart.

“Everyone is staying then?” asked Plesy.

“No,” Rejji shook his head. “We will be leaving Ghala as soon as practical.”

“Then we must have a gala festival tonight,” Plesy said. “It is not often that the Astor and our favorite Khadoran lord come to call upon us.”

“He is the Emperor of Khadora now,” Bakhai interjected softly.

“If the Sakovans are well rested,” the Emperor stated, “I think we should leave immediately. We have a full day available to us. Why waste it?”

“No festival?” frowned Copi.

“Not this time,” Rejji smiled as he placed a hand on Copi’s shoulder. “Maybe we will have a new story for you when we return.”

“It better be a good one,” grumbled Copi, although his eyes betrayed his delight at the thought of another tale for his audience.

Rejji led the group to the Ghala Inn. When they entered the common room, the Sakovans were already seated at a table eating the morning meal. Rejji led the group to the table and introduced his party. Lyra introduced Temiker, DarkBlade, and LunarSigh. DarkBlade was an imposing figure. He towered over the Star of Sakova as he stood to greet the newcomers. His rugged face showed no emotion as he nodded slightly to each of the newcomers. He never said a word.

LunarSigh was short and fair. Her eyes twinkled with excitement as she said hello to each newcomer by name. She joined DarkBlade as he moved from the table in response to a nod from Lyra. The two Sakovans took their plates and moved to an adjacent table where they were joined by Gunta and Halman. The four elves joined them, leaving Lyra’s table for the others. The newcomers ordered a meal, and they all discussed the upcoming trip to the Qubari Jungle. Within an hour the group left the city of Ghala and headed towards the jungle.

* * *

Mobi halted the column when they came to a narrow footbridge crossing the deep gorge. The bridge was narrow and composed of old wooden slats. Two ropes ran across the bridge to use as handholds. The roar of a nearby waterfall made normal conversation impossible. Mobi shouted for the riders to dismount and tether their horses.

“The last part of the journey must be on foot,” Mobi instructed loudly. “We will cross in a single file. If you do not care for heights, I would advise against looking down.”

Mobi nodded to Rejji, and the Astor started the procession across the gorge. A great mist rose towards the bridge from the waterfall below. Rejji remembered the day he first crossed the bridge leading to the hidden Qubari city. He had looked down that day as well. Rejji halted momentarily and closed his eyes as the queasiness hit his stomach. He felt the bridge swaying beneath his feet. He inhaled deeply and opened his eyes. He continued walking across the bridge, but he no longer let his eyes wander from the opposite side of the gorge.

It took a while for the whole party to reassemble on the far side of the bridge. Mobi was the last to cross and immediately took the lead again. Within a few minutes, the jungle parted and the group emerged in the village of the Qubari. The Qubari guide led them along a long street towards the village center. Villagers flocked to the street and lined it to watch the procession of outsiders. Some of the outsiders had been to the village before, and the villagers called them by name. Each of the Qubari bowed low when the Astor walked by.

When they reached the center of the village, the tribal elders were already assembled. Rejji and Bakhai stepped forward and embraced their grandfather, Chief Dumo. Rejji introduced everyone while villagers spread blankets on the grass of the central square. The Qubari filled the blankets with food dishes and various drinks. After Chief Dumo and the head shaman, Yltar, greeted Emperor Marak formally, they embraced him as one might an old friend. They turned to Lyra and both Dumo and Yltar bowed formally.

“So you are the Star of Sakova,” smiled Dumo. “I have heard much about you. You are welcome in the land of the Qubari.”

“Thank you, Chief Dumo,” smiled Lyra. “This is quite an experience for me. I have heard stories of the Qubari, but no words can give justice to an actual visit. Thank you for your welcome.”

“You have come to visit Angragar?” asked Yltar.

“We have,” nodded Lyra. “I am not entirely sure of the purpose of our visit, but it has been commanded by Kaltara. Thank you for allowing us passage.”

“One does not argue with Kaltara,” grinned Yltar. “Our home is your home for as long as you need it.”

“I think Rejji needs to speak to Kaltara,” interjected MistyTrail. “I bet that is the reason for our trip to Angragar.”

Yltar stared at MistyTrail for a moment and shook his head. “While you are correct about the Astor needing a visitation, it is not Angragar that he must go to. Rejji is Qubari. He must seek Kaltara in our temple here. It is also not up to others to decide when he must do this. It is when Kaltara calls him that is important.”

“I was taken to Changragar by the Chula,” frowned Emperor Marak. “That was my awakening, but I was brought there by the Chula. Are you saying that it is different for the Astor?”

“Are you saying that the Chula were not motivated by Kaltara to take you to Changragar?” smiled Yltar. “Perhaps Kaltara has used the Torak to bring Rejji here for his awakening? It was said that Kaltara instructed you to go to Angragar, was it not?”

“Very clearly,” nodded the Torak. “The Star and the Astor were to accompany me.”

“And here you stand not a few hundred paces from our temple,” smiled the head shaman. “Mobi could have taken you directly to Angragar. Why have you come here?”

“I promised the elves that they would have proof of some things that I stated regarding their relations with humans,” answer Emperor Marak. “I understand that those records reside inside your temple.”

“You are correct,” responded Yltar. “So part of your trip is to specifically visit this temple in the company of the Astor. Is that any stranger than the Chula taking you to Changragar?”

“It is not,” chuckled the Torak. “Kaltara does indeed work in mysterious ways.”

“He does,” smiled Yltar. “Let us have some refreshments while we talk.”

Yltar extended his arm towards the blankets laden with food. The outsiders joined with the Qubari people in a festival. Qubari musicians played drums and flutes while other villagers continued to bring food to the square. The outsiders and the Qubari mixed well and many conversations were struck. Mobi and Voltak sat with Gunta and Halman and discussed the affairs of their very different cultures. Temiker, Axor, and Yltar sat to one side and discussed magic. Eventually LunarSigh joined their conversation. Marak, Lyra, and Rejji sat with Chief Dumo, elder Pulom, and elder Anderal. DarkBlade stood impassively behind Lyra, seemingly ignoring everyone. Wyant walked over to him and tugged on his arm.

“We should listen to what the warriors are talking about,” suggested Wyant as he pointed towards Marak’s shadows and the Qubari warriors. “I understand that our trip to Angragar will be extremely dangerous. We should know what is ahead of us.”

DarkBlade looked hesitantly across the green at the warriors and then back at Lyra. His hesitation to leave her side was obvious.

“There is no safer place for your Star of Sakova than in this village,” prodded Wyant. “She is surrounded by people who would die to protect her. Come.”

DarkBlade said nothing as he reluctantly allowed himself to be pulled from Lyra’s presence. Wyant led him over to the group of warriors. Mistake, MistyTrail, Eltor, and Caldal found themselves surrounded by curious Qubari villagers. They chattered nonstop as they inspected the ears of the elves and talked about the lost city of Angragar.

“As you can see,” Mistake said to Eltor and Caldal, “these Qubari recognize you for who you are. These are the people that the elves left behind to guard the lost city of Angragar. This whole Qubari Jungle was created by the elves.”

“How can you know that?” Caldal asked skeptically.

“It is true,” offered a villager. “The Qubari are descended from King Regis who reigned in the time of the elves. It is the job of the Qubari to maintain the jungle and guard the lost city of Angragar. That is our whole purpose for living. We are the guardians.”

“I thought the elves attacked Angragar,” scowled Caldal. “Now you are telling me that you guard the city for the elves? That makes no sense.”

“The elves were mistaken in their attack,” explained an old man. ”They were tricked by Vand’s people into thinking that Angragar had attacked their homeland. King Regis finally discovered what had happened. He got the elves to stop the attack and discuss the problem. That is when the truth became known. The elves are friends of the Qubari. You are honored guests here.”

“I do not remember my studies that well,” frowned Eltor. “I remember about the attack on our homeland by ships from Angragar, but none of what you are talking about. If what you say is true, why are we taught that the humans are our enemies?”

“I can not speak to what you are taught,” frowned the old man, “but the records of the temple are very detailed. If you are allowed to read them, you will learn the truth about relations between Angragar and Elvangar.”

“You know the name of our homeland?” gasped Eltor. “I purposely avoided any mention of it, and I know that no one else spoke of it either.”

“Of course we know,” smiled the old man. “The Qubari have a special magical talent that is not know elsewhere. It is the ability to communicate with animals. It was taught to us by the elves, therefore some among them must have this ability as well. Am I right?”

Eltor nodded with surprise. “You are correct,” he stated. “I cannot imagine that any human would know that. I would like to see those records inside the temple.”

“I cannot imagine an elf here in the jungle created by elves that would question the good relations that we had over many centuries before the end of Angragar,” declared a woman. “The elves were long our allies. They were tricked into attacking Angragar, but we do not hold that against them. Why would they hold it against us?”

A loud gong sounded and everyone’s attention turned to Chief Dumo. The Qubari chief stood with his arms raised high for silence. He waited patiently for the crowd to simmer down.

“The festival will continue,” Dumo declared, “but our guests have business within the temple. I ask all of our guests to gather at the temple.”

The outsiders separated themselves from the villagers and moved towards the temple. Chief Dumo stood on the steps and waited for them along with Yltar and the elders.

“The Astor has requested access for all of you to the ancient archives of our temple,” declared Dumo. “I caution you to be careful in your search for information. Many of our scrolls and books are very old and fragile. They have not been preserved as the ones in Angragar have been. The village elders and I will be available during your search. If you have any questions at all, please ask them.”

Heads nodded respectfully as Dumo led the group into the temple. They wound their way through the corridors of the temple and entered a huge room filled with bookshelves and stands of scrolls. The room was immaculate.

“The books are in order by year,“ explained Dumo. “While that will make it chronologically correct, it may cause hardships if you are interested in a specific subject. Yltar has tremendous knowledge of our writings. If you are looking for something specific, he can point you to the right area. Please be careful.”

“Where will we find writing concerning the elves and their relations to humans?” asked Caldal.

“I will show you to those tomes,” volunteered elder Pulom. “They are among the earliest tomes. There has been no contact with the elves in many generations.”

“What of the preaching of Vand?” asked Emperor Marak. “Are there any volumes here that would address that so that we can see how he thinks?”

“Most of those would exist in the libraries of Angragar,” answered Chief Dumo. “By the time of the creation of the Qubari Jungle, Vand was the known enemy of the righteous. If there are any other questions, let us know.”

It was obvious that Dumo was not thrilled by a large group of outsiders pawing though their most precious artifacts, but he was resigned to it. He was mildly pleased when the outsiders did not immediately grab for books. Instead they stood in a circle and discussed what they would look for and how they would coordinate their activities. Rejji separated himself from the group and approached Dumo and Yltar.

“Everyone thinks that I need to speak to Kaltara,” Rejji said nervously. “How do I do that?”

Chief Dumo smiled broadly, and Yltar put his arm around the Astor. The head shaman led the Astor out of the library and along a corridor to the center of the pyramid temple. Just off the center of the temple was a doorway three steps higher than the other doors. Yltar stopped outside it.

“This door leads to the prayer room,” declared the head shaman. “There is little beyond the door, but a small round room. It is a holy place of meditation. I will not enter it with you, for it is your desire to speak to Kaltara. I will wait outside for your return. Is there anything else that you wish to know?”

“Yes,” Rejji nodded nervously. “What do I do inside?”

Yltar smiled benevolently. “As head shaman, you would expect me to know the answer to that question, but I do not. I have been inside the chamber many times during my lifetime. I have issued many prayers to Kaltara during those visits. He has never spoken to me. I have often felt his presence, and I almost always emerged feeling invigorated and fresh, but not a word was ever heard by me, but then again, I am not the Astor.”

“I am confused,” admitted Rejji. “I have never prayed before, and it sounds like not much happens. How will I know when it is time to leave? What should I pray about?”

“It is said that inside this chamber, Kaltara lives and breathes,” explained Yltar. “You may not see him, and you may not hear him, but you should speak to him as if you stood before him. As to what you should ask, speak from your heart. Ask him for direction in those areas where you feel you need it. Ask for answers to questions that trouble your soul.”

“But if he does not answer,” frowned Rejji, “how will I receive my answers?”

“You may not receive any answers,” replied Yltar, “or you may and not know it. Even if he does not speak to you, you may find you now have the answers that you sought within yourself. Be at ease, Astor. While you may not know Kaltara, be assured that he knows you. Go and commune with God.”

Rejji nodded and inhaled deeply. He climbed the three steps and opened the door. He stepped into a perfectly round chamber and shut the door. When the door closed, it sealed off the torchlight from the corridor outside. The room was completely black. Rejji could see nothing. He reached for the door to open it a crack to allow some light in, but the door refused to open.

Rejji did not panic. He assumed that Yltar had locked the door so that Rejji would not immediately turn around and leave. He silently thanked the shaman for his act because Rejji thought he might have left if he had opened the door. Rejji walked blindly forward until he felt as if he was in the center of the chamber. He stood there silently for several minutes as he tried to think of what to say. Finally, he opened his mouth.

“Kaltara?” Rejji asked meekly. “Are you here?”

There was no response. Ordinarily Rejji would have felt very foolish for his actions, but he had heard about Emperor Marak’s visit to Changragar. While the Torak had not explained what had happened, he did tell Rejji that Kaltara did indeed exist. God had talked to the Torak.

“Kaltara,” Rejji tried again, “I seek your guidance. I have been told that I am the Astor, but I truly do not know what that means. Tell me what you would have me do? How am I supposed to serve you?”

Rejji felt suddenly warm and elated. He could understand the warmth as he was in an enclosed chamber and very nervous, but he was at a loss to explain his happiness.

“It is my warmth that you feel,” boomed a voice from above Rejji. “It is my joy. You come to me as nervous as a new bride, and yet you ask only how you can serve me. You are my Astor indeed.”

Rejji’s heart beat furiously, and he swallowed hard. His mouth turned dry as he tried to think of what to say next.

“Do not be dismayed by your lack of knowledge of the Astor,” the voice said soothingly. “The Astor is who you are, and you are who the Astor is. There is no set of rules to govern your actions. There is only a goal. You are the shepard of the Qubari and the Fakarans beyond the jungle. Gather my people. Care for my people. Prepare my people to defend your God. That is the Astor.”

“And how do I do that?” asked Rejji.

“Have you not already begun?” replied Kaltara. “Do not half the people already cling to you?”

“Half?” gulped Rejji. “Do you mean the Jiadin are your people, too?”

“Are they not Fakarans deserted from the Evil One?” asked Kaltara. “Unite my people, Astor. Make them strong, for the Time of Cleansing is soon upon you. All will be needed to survive the forces of evil.”

“I shall do as you command,” promised Rejji.

“So you shall,” replied Kaltara. “In a few days’ time, you will journey to the ancient city of Angragar along with the Star and the Torak. Cleanse that city of the unholy, for Angragar is to rise again. Once more Angragar shall have a holy king to rule over the land before the Fortung Mountains. Open the city gates and bring my people inside. Renew her harbor and her great buildings, for the jungle shall fall away from her walls and be no more. Do that, and I shall reside within that great temple once again.”

“I will see it done,” promised the Astor. “Angragar will rise anew. That is my pledge to you.”

“No, Astor,” replied Kaltara, “that is my gift to you and my people. Your pledge is to defeat the evil.”

“Vand has an army of over a million,” Rejji said nervously. “How can I hope to defeat him?”

“How can you afford to fail?” countered Kaltara. “All that is good and holy rides on the shoulders of the Three. Where man has created a false god, man must redeem himself by destroying the usurper. The task belongs to the Three.”

“Then we shall be victorious,” Rejji said with more hope than conviction.

“We shall see,” Kaltara said without emotion. “Sleep now for there is much that you must learn.”

Rejji felt a weariness flow through his body. His eyes closed without bidding, and his knees grew weak. He dropped to the floor and fell on all fours. A heavy weight pushed him downward until he was prone, his face flush against the cold stone of the floor.

Suddenly, the room burst into blinding brilliance. Disjointed visions swam before his eyes. He saw the ancient city of Angragar, as it must have appeared in its heyday. It boasted a magnificent harbor with ships waiting to dock to unload their exotic goods. Well-dressed citizens moved to and fro throughout the city. He saw King Regis on the thrown in the palace. He saw a young Vand in the throne room petitioning the king for power.

The visions started flying past his eyes at a frantic pace. He saw the turmoil caused by Vand’s people as they tried to disrupt the rule of King Regis. He saw the elves attacking the city, huge siege engines hurling burning embers into the city, people screaming and fleeing for their lives. He saw the masses of citizens flee the great city, leaving it an empty hull. He saw the ground erupt into blossoming plants and grow skyward as they twisted and tangled together.

The scenes ripped by at an ever-increasing rate until everything was one big blur, but he knew that he would remember even the scenes that sped by too fast to recognize. Unexpectedly, everything went black.

Chapter 9

Words of Kaltara

“It sure looks as if elf relations were just as the Qubari say they were,” MistyTrail said. “Over the past few days we have read story after story about how good the relations between the humans and the elves were. How can you still insist that humans are you enemy?”

“It is our law,” Caldal retorted stubbornly. “Obviously these Qubari accounts are not telling the whole story. Why would the human libraries document whatever it is they did to the elves to cause my people to hate humans?”

“Or something happened to sour the relations after these tomes were written,” suggested Eltor.

“According to Yltar,” interjected Mistake, “there have been no further relations with the elves. It is as if the elves just disappeared from this world.”

“There is no sense to continuing this argument,” sighed MistyTrail. “The facts are plain enough for anyone to see. If you still want to hate humans, that is your problem, not mine. Humans raised me as one of their own. They would never forsake me because of some law or any other reason. True friends do not begin to hate you because someone else says that they have to.”

MistyTrail turned and stormed out of the temple library.

“What is wrong with her?” scowled Caldal. “She acts like the elves are not entitled to laws of their own. She should realize that our laws are what have kept the elves from being attacked by humans. They are not something that we can abandon just because we want to.”

“Perhaps she feels as she does because she is human,” offered Mistake. “After all, there is only your word that we are elves. Maybe we are the enemy that you search so hard for.”

“That is nonsense,” retorted Caldal. “Anyone could see that you are both elves. Do you think Eltor and I would be taking you to Elvangar if we were not positive that you were elves? We would never take a human to our homeland.”

“And what makes you think that we would want to go with you to a land where humans are reviled?” countered Mistake. “I have had the misfortune of knowing many evil humans, but there are many that I also consider my friends. Your insistence that all humans are evil is getting quite tiresome. Perhaps it is best that you return to Elvangar and prepare to defend your own land against Vand. Surely, that is better than having to suffer any longer among the evil humans.”

Mistake also turned and stormed out of the library. The elves stood staring at the empty doorway for several silent moments.

“Nice going,” sighed Eltor. “Why didn’t you just slap both of them in the face?”

“Do not blame me for their hotheadedness,” retorted Caldal. “I am merely stating what is the law. We cannot just decide that the law is wrong whenever we feel like it.”

“An interesting comment from one who talked me into passing the Barrier Islands,” countered Eltor. “We easily chose to discard that law when we felt like it. Didn’t we?”

“That is not the same,” Caldal sighed in frustration. “We were looking for a little excitement, not betraying our people.”

“And excitement we did find,” quipped Eltor. “So much excitement that we had to be rescued by Mistake and MistyTrail. And how have we rewarded them? We have told them that we were taking them back to Elvangar, whether or not they wanted to go. We have told them that their friends are our enemy, even though the humans have done everything they could to help us. They have taken us into their confidence. They have armed us and protected us. They have let us be as one of their own.”

“I truly can find no fault with the humans so far,” admitted Caldal, “but that is not the point. You must know that the Emperor seeks to learn the location of Elvangar. That is why he has acted so nice towards us.”

“And did he tell all of the other humans to be nice to us?” prompted Eltor. “Did he tell the Qubari to welcome us and let us browse their library? Did he tell the Sakovans to treat as friends? Or the Fakarans that joined us in Meliban? Face it, Caldal, what we were taught about humans is incorrect.”

“Everything we were taught about humans was validated on the Island of Darkness,” replied Caldal. “There we saw the true face of humans. Here we are seeing a facade.”

“These humans are the enemy of the ones on Motanga,” Eltor pointed out. “They are opposites, yet you still want to paint them all with the same brush. Just as all elves are not of one mind, so too is this true with humans. While some humans are obviously our enemy, I no longer believe that is true of all. I am going to talk with Mistake to see if I can appease her. I do not want to think of leaving her behind with Rejji when we return to Elvangar. I suggest you think a great deal about your stance regarding humans. It would be a shame for MistyTrail to remain behind with Bakhai.”

Eltor moved silently out of the library, but a couple people watched him leave. At the far end of the library, Temiker tapped Axor on the arm and nodded to the departing elf.

“What do you make of these elves?” the Alamar mage asked.

“They are young and confused,” shrugged the Chula shaman. “They do not yet understand that the future of the elves rides with those chosen by Kaltara, even though those chosen are not elven.”

“Why do you suppose that the elves have decreed that the humans are the enemy?” asked Temiker.

“I am not sure that they have,” replied Axor. “We have only the word of two young confused elves as a guide. I would not take their views as being definitive of the true nature of elves. I would suspect that seclusion for the elves has been a necessity, but that is a far cry from being an enemy.”

“I suppose that you are right,” nodded Temiker. “I should spend more time wondering about these ancient spells than the relations with the elves. Have you found anything more on how the jungle was created?”

“Yes,” nodded Axor, “but not the actual spells. I suspect that the elves did not share those spells with the Qubari. Still, there are some very interesting spells that are put forth in here. I am anxious to experiment with some of them.”

Caldal slammed the book closed and placed it back on the shelf as he watched Temiker and Axor talking at the other end of the library. He marched out of the library, rehearsing words in his head that would soothe his fragile relationship with MistyTrail. He exited the temple and entered the central park. He saw Eltor near the center of the park, but he could not locate MistyTrail He walked towards Eltor as his eyes scanned the park for the Sakovan elf.

“Have you seen MistyTrail?” Caldal asked softly when he reached Eltor and Mistake.

“She went off in the woods with Bakhai,” Mistake replied curtly.

“Which direction did they go?” Caldal asked Eltor.

Eltor nodded silently in the direction towards the bridge, and Caldal took off running. Villagers stared as the elf ran through the streets of the city, so Caldal slowed to a fast walk. He was sure that he would be able to sneak up on the couple and discover what they were talking about.

Deep in the woods, MistyTrail and Bakhai were separated. They had each gone in different directions upon entering he woods and marched for a count of one hundred. Now the trick was to be the first to discover the other’s hiding place. MistyTrail used her speed and quick reflexes to dash from tree to tree in pursuit of Bakhai. The Qubari stood quietly behind a tree and listened to the animals. He smiled, as he was able to chart MistyTrail’s progress by the shouts of alarm from his animal friends. Squirrels darted away from the human intruder and chattered noisily. Birds took to the upper branches of the trees and alerted their brethren. Bakhai grinned and planned a reception for MistyTrail when she arrived.

Suddenly, Bakhai heard another disturbance in the animal world. He frowned as he realized the paths of the two forest intruders were converging. He began to worry that some animal might be stalking MistyTrail. He started to move towards the disruption.

MistyTrail paused and stared at the chattering squirrel. She frowned as she realized that Bakhai would be able to determine her location by the alarms of the animal world. Her situation was not the same as it had been in the Sakova. She reversed her course and moved a hundred paces in a different direction. Then she tossed a small stone as hard as she could towards her previous position. She smiled when the birds squawked and flew away from where the stone landed.

The racket of the birds also caused Caldal to stop abruptly and listen to the sounds of disturbance. That is when MistyTrail spotted him. She frowned as she wondered what the elf was up to. Instantly putting Bakhai and the game out of her mind, MistyTrail began to silently follow Caldal.

Caldal began to feel uneasy in the foreign woods. He had been in a hurry to spy on MistyTrail and Bakhai, and now he felt as if eyes were watching him sneak through the trees. He stood and abruptly turned around, but no one was there. When he turned back around, Bakhai stood before him with an arrow nocked.

“I thought you were a large animal,” Bakhai smiled thinly. “Are you lost?”

Caldal frowned and looked behind Bakhai for MistyTrail.

“Where is she?” asked Caldal. “I was told that MistyTrail went for a walk in the woods.”

“Actually,” replied Bakhai, “I am looking for her myself. Is there a message that you want me to convey to her when I find her?”

“No,” Caldal glared at the Qubari. “I will tell her myself.”

MistyTrail was behind a tree a few dozen paces behind Caldal. She grinned and stepped into the open.

“What is the message?” she asked.

Caldal turned abruptly and stared at MistyTrail. He blushed as he realized that MistyTrail had been following him, but his mood soon turned away from embarrassment to anger. His fists tightened and his lips pressed tightly together. He felt like a fool. He was about to open his mouth when a loud gong sounded.

“It is a call to the square,” announced Bakhai as he placed his arrow into his quiver. “It must be about Rejji. Come. We don’t want to miss it.”

Rejji had not been heard from in three days since he had entered the prayer chamber. Yltar had held a vigil outside the door and had prohibited anyone from entering. The trio turned and raced back to the village. When they arrived, the square was packed with villagers. Bakhai pushed his way through the crowd, leaving MistyTrail and Caldal stranded on the outer fringes of the assembly. In the center of the square, Yltar stood beside the Astor waiting for the crowd to assemble. When the commotion had died down, the head shaman nodded to the chief.

“Did he talk to you?” asked Chief Dumo.

“He did,” nodded Rejji. “He did more than just talk. He showed me visions of how things were, and how they will be. He showed me so much, that I do not know where to begin.”

“Did he confirm you as Astor?” asked the Torak.

“He did,” nodded Rejji. “More than that. He instructed me to accompany you and the Star to Angragar. We are to cleanse the city of the unholy hellsouls that inhabit it.”

“All of them?” asked Chief Dumo. “Mobi says that there are hundreds of them. If only two of you can kill them, that sounds very dangerous.”

“Anyone can kill them,” interjected the Torak. “We have learned that decapitation will vanquish a hellsoul. Still, it will be a dangerous trip. The spears of the Qubari are ill suited to such a challenge.”

Chief Dumo snapped his fingers at Voltak. The warrior nodded and ran off. He returned in just moments carrying a long, wicked-looking spear with a sharp blade on the end of it rather than the pointed tip, which the Qubari normally use.

“These will be the weapons that the Qubari will carry into battle inside Angragar,” he declared.

Emperor Marak smiled and nodded in appreciation.

“We are not just to kill the hellsouls,” Rejji continued. “We are to resurrect the city of Angragar.”

“Resurrect it?” questioned Yltar. “How do you mean?”

“I mean the city will come alive once more,” answered Rejji. “It will be the dwelling place of the Qubari and more. It will once again be the capital city of Fakara.”

“But it is shrouded in the jungle,” frowned Chief Dumo. “You cannot expect Fakarans to tramp through this jungle to get to Angragar. The creatures in it would kill them.”

“The jungle will no longer protect Angragar,” declared Rejji. “Kaltara said that the jungle would fall away from the city. When Angragar is restored, Kaltara will dwell within its temple.”

Gasps of shock rippled through the villagers. The pronouncement meant that their lives would change forever. Gone from their lives would be the village and the protective jungle around it. They would move into a city that had not been inhabited in thousands of years, and they would share that city with the outsiders. Many of the villagers frowned at the thought of abandoning their homes.

“Opening up Angragar,” protested Wyant, “would allow the Jiadin a target that might cause them to reunite. The tribes have long sought the golden city of Angragar. While those loyal to you would no longer seek to seize the treasure, the Jiadin would. Surely there must be another way?”

“The Jiadin are part of us,” declared the Astor. “They must be brought into our fold. Kaltara was quite clear on this.”

“How are you going to accomplish that?” asked Wyant. “They are bitter enemies of the Free Tribes.”

“I do not know,” admitted Rejji, “but it must be done.”

More questions were shouted from the audience, but Rejji shook his head and raised his hands to silence the questions.

“There is too much to divulge to do so right now,” Rejji said. “I am hungry and must eat. Dwell upon what Kaltara has said and plan for what we must do.”

Yltar and Chief Dumo escorted Rejji through the crowd and into an open courtyard in the palace. Emperor Marak, Lyra, Wyant, and Bakhai followed. Chief Dumo snapped off commands on the way to the courtyard and villagers raced to prepare a meal and bring it to Rejji.

“You are hesitant to divulge the rest of what Kaltara told you,” Yltar said softly. “Why?”

Rejji frowned and started eating the bread that had already been brought to the table. His eyes scanned those who were present before he spoke.

“Kaltara says that I am the descendent of King Regis,” the Astor said. “When Angragar is restored, he expects me to be king of all the land before the Fortung Mountains.”

“And you have a problem with that?” asked Chief Dumo. “You should feel honored. The Qubari already follow you as the hand of God. Most of the Fakarans worship you as the one who united them and brought them food. What is the problem?”

“I do not know,” confessed Rejji. “I do not see myself as a king of anything. It seems wrong to me.”

“Kaltara is never wrong,” smiled Lyra, “but I know how you feel. I felt the same when I was declared the Star of Sakova. I felt as if God had made a mistake, but I grew to know better. People need a ruler to give them direction. Often those rulers take advantage of their high position and act not in the best interests of their people. I have seen it in Omunga, and you have seen it under Grulak. Kaltara’s pronouncement is not so much an accolade to you, but a gift to the people. He knows that you will rule wisely with the best interests of the people always as your goal. The people will look at you and see a king, but Kaltara will look at you and see an obedient servant.”

“Lyra is right,” interjected Emperor Marak. “None of us sought high office for the fame and glory. I often think that I would be happier living with the Chula in simplicity, but there is work to be done, and I cannot walk away from it. Our peoples must be prepared to defend themselves. Ask yourself this question, if one person must rule over Fakara, who should that person be? As loyal as some of your people are, can you think of one who would not be tempted to take advantage of the situation?”

Rejji frowned as he dwelled on the Torak’s words. Those who were closest to him were rejected almost immediately. As supportive as he had been, Bakhai would turn from such pressure and return to the wild. Mistake is about to leave Fakara once more to go live with the elves. Chief Dumo had a habit of seeing things in too narrow a view. Even Wyant had come to help Rejji only after turning from a life of looting and pillaging the defenseless.

“Almost everyone would succumb to basic human greed in such a situation,” interjected Yltar. “If not greed, then the fame would go to their head. Do not think poorly of those you cross off the list of those who might be eligible,” smiled the head shaman. “People are not perfect. We all have faults although we tend to hide them most of the time. Kaltara is guiding you and using you as a tool. He will keep you from becoming vain and seeking riches. Do not fight our God.”

“I won’t fight it,” conceded Rejji. “I think the worst part of his pronouncement is what others will think of me. Because others would love to be in such a position, they will think that I have connived my way into power.”

“Some will think that,” agreed Emperor Marak. “That is inevitable, but it means nothing. Kaltara has chosen you because he knows that you will act for the benefit of the people, not yourself. Accept it and move on.”

Nods and encouraging murmurs went around the table. Finally Rejji nodded in acceptance.

“I will do what Kaltara commands me to do,” declared the Astor. “I may not like some of the demands, but I will carry them out regardless.”

“How are the Qubari going to accept the move?” Wyant asked Chief Dumo. “They did not appear to be happy with the pronouncement.”

“They are not happy about it,” agreed Dumo. “I cannot blame them. We gave up our lives in Angragar and were banished to this jungle as protectors of the ancient city. We were not happy with the change then either, but we obeyed. We will obey this time as well. Can the same be said for the Fakarans?”

“I was wondering that myself,” shrugged Wyant. “We have lived pretty much as nomads since the beginnings of our memories. The tribes have adjusted well to Rejji’s plans to rebuild the country, but Angragar will be different. The tribes have no real feel for Kaltara. We do not know of him. When they learn that Rejji is making decisions based upon visions from some god, they may revolt. They are not a very religious group.”

“They need to learn about Kaltara,” suggested Lyra. “He is their only hope of survival. I have the same problem with Omungans, and I am sure that the Torak is in the same position in Khadora. How do we get our people to know God?”

“An excellent question,” mused Emperor Marak. “It could be done over time by constructing temples and enabling priests, but we have no time for that. My hands are full just trying to get the clans to train together. We don’t have much time.”

“Perhaps that is the reason for Kaltara’s call for the Three to go to Angragar,” Rejji said as he finished a bowl of stew. “He spoke to me about the need for us to go Angragar within a few days. I suspect that he has something to say to all of us.”

“I had that feeling as well when he told me to organize the trip,” nodded the Torak. “Perhaps we should ask this question of Kaltara when he speaks to us.”

“Were those few days from when you woke up?” asked Yltar. “Or was it from when you first entered? You were inside for three days.”

“It was before I slept,” answered Rejji, “but I do not think the timing matters much. He knows that the three of us are here in the jungle. He knows our destination. The timing will be up to us.”

“Is there any reason to wait?” asked Lyra. “I am anxious to see this painting that was described to me.”

“We need a plan,” answered Emperor Marak. “We are tasked to kill hundreds of hellsouls. While the army of the Qubari may well be needed for this task, I am loathe to send hundreds of warriors into the city without a viable plan.”

“My men will fight valiantly,” Chief Dumo declared. “We will scour every street and every building to make that city safe for our families.”

“I have no doubts about the abilities of your warriors,” smiled the Torak. “I have seen them in action. I am concerned with so many people entering the city at one time. I think there would be many deaths, and the Qubari will be needed to fight the evil. We should discuss this before we depart.”

“Could we make it to the temple and slowly eliminate the hellsouls one at a time?” asked Rejji. “They do not seem to want to enter that building.”

“That might take a long time,” frowned Emperor Marak, “and time is not on our side. However, your question brings a thought to mind. If a small group of us entered the city and let it be known that we were in the temple, a larger force could then enter the city and attack them from behind.”

“A trap,” Wyant nodded enthusiastically. “I like it. The small group stays in the temple long enough to make sure that all of the hellsouls gather around the building. Then the Qubari warriors attack from behind. It would be a slaughter.”

“That does sound like a good plan,” nodded Chief Dumo. “We will need to keep the gates of the city open to allow the Qubari army in, but that will not matter. Any hellsouls trying to sneak out will be vanquished by my men.”

“When can we all be ready?” asked Rejji.

“Tomorrow morning would be fine,” answered Chief Dumo. “Who will be in the small group?”

“I think twelve would do,” replied Emperor Marak. “It is large enough to draw their attention, and yet small enough to keep together if we have to make haste. How about the Three, and three more chosen by each of them? That would give us twelve.”

“That conveniently coincides with your instructions for the size of an escort in the first place,” grinned the Star of Sakova. “Did you have this all planned before you left Khadoratung?”

“I had a vision of it before I left,” conceded the Torak. “In fact, I knew who you would bring before you told me their names.”

“What else did you see?” Yltar asked with suspicion.

“I do not believe that my visions are absolute,” retorted Emperor Marak. “Just because this one has turned out to be accurate so far, does not mean that the visions are an unimpeachable picture of the future.”

“You saw death in your vision,” accused Yltar. “Didn’t you? Who dies?”

“It is not something that I will discuss,” declared Emperor Marak. “I cannot say for certain that I saw death in the vision. Let us leave it at that.”

Chapter 10

Angragar

The Qubari army halted outside the gates of the ancient city Angragar. Hundreds of Qubari warriors with wicked-looking spears, which sported long sharp blades, lined the road on both sides. Rejji led the chosen twelve up to the gates. MistyTrail, Mistake, Eltor, and Caldal followed.

“See the ruined buildings,” Mistake said to Eltor. “They are unchanged after thousands of years. You can still see the boulders that the elven siege machines threw over the walls.”

“The boulders are there,” conceded Caldal, “but that does not verify that elves put them there. They could just have easily come from human sieges engines.”

“Be quiet, Caldal,” MistyTrail said irritably. “I have heard enough human bashing for one lifetime.”

Caldal looked shocked at the reprimand, but Eltor shook his head knowingly. He reached for Mistake’s hand and held it. She turned and looked at him questioningly.

“I do not like the thought of you going into the city without me,” Eltor said softly. “I would like to guard you. Do you think the Astor would allow it?”

“I have not been chosen to go into the city,” frowned Mistake. “I will be staying here with you.”

“But I thought you were one of Rejji’s chosen?” replied Eltor.

“Not this time,” sighed Mistake. “Bakhai and Mobi will go in as they did last time, but Wyant will be taking my place. I guess Rejji feels it is necessary that one of the Fakaran tribesmen see the city. I wish he had chosen me.”

“Perhaps he has not chosen you because he does not want you hurt?” countered Eltor. “You are close to him, aren’t you?”

Mistake looked into Eltor’s eyes and saw fear in them. It was not the fear of being at Angragar that she saw. It was the fear of losing Mistake to another man. She smiled sympathetically.

“We are close,” admitted Mistake. “Rejji and I met when his village was destroyed by Jiadin bandits. They killed everyone except Rejji. We have been through a lot since then, Eltor. We were captured by the tribes and sold into slavery in Khadora. We were captured and sentenced to die by the Qubari. We met the Sage of the Mountain and flew on the back of a dragon. We were together when Angragar first opened to Rejji’s touch. Yes, we are close. I know that is not the real question that you want answered, but I have no answer to give you for the other question.”

“Do you mean that you do not know if you care for him?” asked Eltor. “Or is it that you do not know if he cares for you?”

“I am not sure of either,” admitted Mistake. “As it stands, we are extremely close friends, maybe more, but I don’t know. I feel confused every time I think about it.”

“Is there any hope for me?” asked Eltor. “Do I fit into your future plans at all?”

“I can’t answer that,” sighed Mistake. “I have grown rather close to you as well, Eltor, but I sometimes wonder what that feeling really is. Am I just excited to know an elf? Am I just thrilled to be thinking about a trip to Elvangar, the land of the lost elves, or is it something more personal? I just don’t know. I am confused.”

“I understand,” Eltor nodded and smiled weakly. “There are no conditions to my offer to take you to Elvangar. I want that known up front. If you do decide to come with us, I will not take that as any commitment to me. I want you to be happy, whatever path that may be. I will even understand if you chose to remain behind here. Even though you are an elf, you have the right to choose your own life. I will try to respect your decision.”

“Try to?” asked Mistake.

“Well, yes,” grinned Eltor. “If you decide to stay and do not marry Rejji, I might be forced to form an elven raiding party to come and kidnap you.”

Mistake laughed and squeezed Eltor’s hand. “Thank you for saying what you did, Eltor,” she smiled. “I know that it must have taken a lot of courage to say those words. It shows that you truly care about me. I shall never forget them.”

“They are going in,” MistyTrail said excitedly as she pointed to Rejji approaching the massive gates. “I wish Lyra had chosen me. It is so exciting.”

The Astor approached the gates and turned to make sure that everyone was ready. He then turned and placed his hand on the gates. They swung open at his touch. The twelve chosen walked through the gates. Rejji turned and looked at the Qubari army on the other side of the gates. He fought the temptation to touch the gates again and make them close. Leaving them open just seemed wrong to him, but he turned and joined the others.

Emperor Marak took the lead with Gunta and Halman flanking him and a step behind him. Axor followed close behind the Emperor. Lyra, Rejji, Bakhai, Temiker, and LunarSigh formed the middle of the procession. Behind them came Mobi, DarkBlade, and Wyant.

“We will try to get to the temple with as little fighting as possible,” announced Emperor Marak. “If we must fight, everyone stay together. Our goal is the temple, not to see how many we can kill.”

The Torak led at a moderate pace. He did not try to hurry, but neither did he dally. He proceeded at the fastest pace that would allow for stealth from each of the members of the group. They advanced over six blocks before the first hellsoul was sighted.

“Three blocks off to the right,” Gunta said softly. “It was a single hellsoul.”

The Torak merely nodded and continued at a steady pace. Just before the intersection two blocks later, Marak held up his hand and gave the signal for hellsouls. The group tensed. The Torak marched into the intersection and immediately swiveled to face his left. Gunta moved swiftly to stay on Marak’s right, while Halman slowed to avoid showing himself.

Three hellsouls shrieked and charged. The Torak stepped forward and sliced into the lead hellsoul. He disappeared in a puff of smoke. Gunta repeated the procedure on another hellsoul by decapitating him with one stroke. Halman stepped around the corner and struck at the third hellsoul, which was trying to attack Marak from the side. The hellsoul went down under Halman’s strike, but the head was not totally severed. Halman stepped forward and completed the task, sending up another wisp of smoke. The Torak immediately turned and continued the path toward the central square. Gunta and Halman resumed their places.

“This is almost identical to the last time we were here,” frowned Gunta. “Would they use the same strategy each time?”

“No,” answered the Torak as he nodded ahead. “They are more ready than they were the last time.”

The street in the distance was already clogging with hellsouls. Shrieks echoed from every direction, and more than one member of the group muttered an oath under his breath.

“We are turning to the left at the next intersection,” Emperor Marak declared loud enough for the whole group to hear. “Close up the group now, and be prepared for a quick stop as soon as we are out of sight.”

Everyone moved forward until the group was compact. Emperor Marak turned left at the next corner and stopped when he felt there was enough room for everyone. As soon as he stopped, he turned around.

“Turn around and reform,” ordered the Torak. “This will not be much of a diversion, but it will gain us a few blocks.”

Halman moved to the corner and peered around it as the group reformed into their original positions. They stood silently for a moment until Halman waved the group forward.

Emperor Marak led the group out of the side street and continued marching across the wide boulevard. After he had gone an additional block, he turned to the left onto another wide avenue that paralleled the original one. There were no hellsouls in sight.

“They will wise up soon enough,” Gunta commented softly.

“I know,” replied the Torak. “Let’s take each block as we can. This avenue is the one that runs directly in front of the temple.”

They made three more blocks before the hellsouls managed to discover where they had gone. Shrieks rang out from their left as they passed through another intersection. Halman looked to his left and saw a large crowd of hellsouls moving towards them.

“The bulk of them are no longer before us,” Halman reported softly. “They are off to our left.”

“There will be more ahead of us,” replied the Torak, “but be ready for anything.”

They made two more blocks before a worried voice came from the rear of the procession.

“There is a large group following us,” Wyant reported loudly. “Very large.”

“And there are some at the next intersection in front of us,” added the Torak as he felt his sword warming in his hands. “I can feel them. We may need the help of you in the rear to get out of this.”

Mobi immediately turned and ran up behind Halman. DarkBlade understood the move. He also went to the left and advanced, but not quite as far. He kept pace alongside the middle of the procession, making sure the Star of Sakova was protected. Wyant remained the sole rear guard. As the Torak stopped into the intersection, he saw a large group of hellsouls coming towards him from the left.

“Stay on the lead, Gunta,” ordered the Torak as he separated from the group and claimed the center of the side street.

As Halman moved into the intersection, Marak edged slightly to the right to make room for him. They guarded the left flank of the procession as Gunta kept the group moving forward. The hellsouls attacked.

The Torak swung his long sinuous blade back and forth as he continued to edge to the right. Puffs of smoke rose rapidly as the Sword of Torak ripped through the hellsouls. Alongside Marak, Halman chose his swings carefully. His long sword reached out and decapitated hellsouls as they approached. Mobi soon joined him with his long spear slashing into the hellsouls. He aimed for the neck, but he struck so swiftly that some hellsouls fell to the ground with their heads intact. Whenever he could, he slashed at the necks of the fallen hellsouls as well as the advancing ones.

Suddenly, brilliance lit the air. Axor tossed a light blade at the charging hellsouls. He aimed it at shoulder height. The blades of light ripped into the hellsouls, several columns of smoke drifted upward at the same time.

“Excellent,” shouted Temiker as he watched the display. “It does not matter much how the heads come off.”

“Aim neck high,” cautioned Axor as he released another light blade, “And don’t strike our own men.”

“Marak!” shouted Gunta as he saw the crowd of hellsouls forming in front of him, “I need you.”

The Torak looked over his shoulder and saw DarkBlade moving into the intersection. The group was half way through the intersection. With a final slash at the nearest hellsoul, the Emperor turned and ran towards the front of the procession. Halman immediately moved to the right, as did Mobi. Temiker turned and sent a light blade streaming past Wyant and into the group of hellsouls that were following them. Several puffs of smoke appeared and the hellsouls hesitated in their approach. LunarSigh joined Axor by sending light blades into the side street.

“Warriors forward,” instructed Lyra as she saw the group in front of them. “Leave the side street to the mages.”

Halman and Mobi dashed forward. DarkBlade faded back to join the procession alongside Lyra before moving forward. With the warriors out of the way, the mages sent light blades streaming into the side street. The hellsouls broke and ran. The humans turned to attack those behind them, but that group had stopped following them.

At the front of the procession, Marak raced back to the lead spot just in time to help Gunta with the first of the hellsouls. The procession halted as the two warriors tried to stop the creatures from advancing. Halman, Mobi, and DarkBlade soon appeared and formed a united front across the avenue. As soon as the five warriors were in place, the Torak called for them to advance.

Four long swords and a spear lashed into the crowd of hellsouls as the group began moving forward again. DarkBlade’s vicious severing of heads soon earned the admiration of the other warriors who had faced the hellsouls before. For several minutes the five warriors pushed into the mob of creatures, lopping off heads with almost every stroke. The swords of the hellsouls were too short for them to effectively defend themselves. The long two-handed swords struck before the creatures could do any damage. After several minutes, the hellsouls turned and ran.

“How is the rear?” the Torak shouted as the hellsouls retreated from in front of him.

“They are being cautious,” Wyant shouted back. “They are still following us, but not closely.”

“Do you carry Sakovan stars?” the Torak asked DarkBlade.

“I do,” the Sakovan warrior answered.

“Get some ready,” instructed the Torak as he sheathed his sword. “You too, Gunta and Halman. They will not vanquish these creatures, but they will buy us time as we approach the temple.”

The warriors sheathed their swords and filled their hands with Sakovan stars. Mobi kept his spear ready. Marak could see the temple a little over a block away. There were only a few hellsouls visible, but he knew that the open plaza would be filled with them.

“The temple is the large building on the right coming up,” Marak said loudly. “Rejji, I want you to lead the group up the steps and inside the building. You will run as soon as the way is clear. Make sure the mages are with you. They can cover for the warriors when we have to retreat.”

The Torak heard Rejji giving orders to the mages and turned his attention to the approaching plaza. He was thinking so much of what might await them in the plaza that he did not feel the warming of his sword. A hellsoul leaped out of a doorway on the left of the procession. DarkBlade immediately spun and threw a Sakovan star at it. It struck the hellsoul in the center of its forehead. Mobi raced towards it before it had completed its fall to the ground. His long spear sliced cleanly through its neck. As the empty cloak fell to the ground, Mobi returned to his position. DarkBlade smiled and nodded at the Qubari warrior.

As the procession reached the plaza, Emperor Marak ordered the warriors to wheel to the left, leaving a path to the steps of the temple open. Axor tossed a light blade across the plaza at the hellsouls that were heading toward the group. The spell sliced into the bodies, but none were decapitated. Several of the creatures fell to the ground.

Loud shrieking filled the plaza as the group emerged from the avenue. The Torak tossed a Sakovan star at the closest creature. As the hellsoul collapsed to the ground the other warriors started throwing stars. Rejji broke into a run and raced towards the steps of the temple. Lyra, Bakhai, LunarSigh, Temiker, and Axor raced after him. Wyant joined the warriors as they moved slowly to their right, edging closer to the temple.

Rejji ran up the stairs and pushed the doors of the temple open. Bakhai raced through the doors, his long spear ready for anything that might already be inside. As Lyra and LunarSigh ran up the stairs, a hellsoul stepped out from behind a column supporting the porch roof. Rejji turned and slammed his staff viciously into the hellsoul. It struck the hellsoul on the side of the head. The creature disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Axor was the next to arrive. Instead of entering the temple, he stood alongside the door. Temiker, panting from exertion finally climbed the steps and stood on the opposite side of the door. Rejji turned and followed Lyra and LunarSigh into the temple.

Axor gazed across the plaza as the warriors continued to inch closer to the temple. Four of the warriors threw Sakovan stars whenever a hellsoul tried to approach. Wyant and Mobi stood ready to dispatch any creatures that came closer.

“Now we provide the distraction,” Axor said softly to Temiker. “Are you recovered enough for this?”

“I will live,” retorted Temiker as he inhaled deeply. “It has been a long time since I had to run. Let’s do it.”

Axor nodded and tossed a light blade over the heads of the warriors. Temiker followed the example a little further to the right. Both light blades tore into the hellsouls, sending body parts flying in a mist of tissue and bone.

“Now,” shouted the Torak. ‘Retreat swiftly to the temple.”

The Torak stuffed the stars into a pouch and drew his sword. Gunta and Halman followed suit and flanked the Emperor. Wyant, Mobi, and DarkBlade turned and ran several dozen paces before stopping. DarkBlade pulled his sword and shouted a word to the Torak. The three Khadorans turned and ran past the other three warriors, stopping at the base of the steps of the temple and turning to protect the retreat.

Two more light blades flew into the plaza. More gore misted into the air along with a few puffs of smoke. As the other three warriors raced up the stairs, the Khadorans turned and followed them. When everyone had entered the temple, the doors were slammed shut. There was some debris inside the door that had been used on a previous visit. Bakhai and Rejji pushed a long table up against the doors and began piling things on top of it. Lyra grabbed an old torch and snapped her fingers. A flame danced on the end of her fingers and she applied it to the torch, illuminating a small area in the entry foyer. Others scrambled to find other torches and light them from Lyra’s. Soon the entry foyer was illuminated.

“Gunta, Halman,” ordered Emperor Marak. “Search the building. Make sure that we are alone.”

Each of Marak’s shadows took a torch and disappeared. Everyone else settled down to calm their nerves while they waited.

“Those hellsouls do not appear to be very fast,” commented Wyant. “It was not as dangerous as I thought it might be.”

“They do not depend upon speed,” replied the Torak. “They kill by mass numbers and poison.”

“Poison?” frowned Wyant.

“One touch of their blade can bring death,” replied Mobi. “Our first trip here we lost Grank and almost lost Voltak. Both were superb warriors. “Grank died in the palace from a head wound, but Voltak only had a small cut on his hand. It would have killed him if we had not rushed out of the city and transported him to the village for healing.”

“We were fortunate today,” added the Torak. “While they discovered us early, they did not appear to understand our movements.”

“You made them think we went the other way,” grinned Mobi. “That was smart. You come up with new tricks each time we come here.”

“Never being predictable is a good way to stay alive,” interjected Axor. “The Chula learned that early.”

“Why did we enter the city so late in the day?” asked LunarSigh. “Wouldn’t it have been better to enter at dawn? We will be stuck in this temple all night.”

“That is what we want,” answered Rejji. “The hellsouls now know that we are in the temple. They will gather other creatures from all over the city. We want as many to come to the plaza as possible so that the Qubari army can attack them in a group.”

* * *

“This waiting outside the city is frustrating,” complained MistyTrail. “Do they expect us to actually sleep out here while the gate is open? Those creatures could come out at any time.”

“We should have been taken into the city,” nodded Eltor. “Why wait until morning when we could be reading in the library of the palace. Those records are the ones that supposedly tell of the relations between the humans and the elves.”

“I know how you feel,” frowned Mistake. “I feel left out, too. I have survived Angragar before. There is no reason that I should be out here.”

“Except you now have elven friends,” Caldal pointed out. “Perhaps you are being punished because of us. They probably don’t want us to have too much time to peruse the library. Maybe those records don’t really exist. I am sure that they will find some excuse to keep the elves out of the city in the morning when the army enters.”

“They will not keep us out,” Eltor shook his head. “Do not make such foolish statements. They have no reason to exclude us, and even if they wanted to, we are elves. We could sneak in without being heard or seen.”

“We are elves, aren’t we?” Mistake grinned mischievously.

“Uh oh,” frowned MistyTrail. “I have seen that look in your eye before. What do you have planned?”

“We could use the time wisely in the library,” shrugged Mistake. “We are quiet and know how to move unseen. I also happen to know exactly where the temple is. I bet we could sneak in there unnoticed while Marak is leading the others. They would attract all of the hellsouls while we dash to the temple.”

“But they have already been gone for a while,” MistyTrail pointed out. “We could never catch them.”

“Emperor Marak moves slowly and cautiously,” grinned Mistake. “He does not just dash into the city and run for the temple. He methodically marches down the street daring the hellsouls to attack. We could do it.”

“How would we even get into the city?” asked Caldal skeptically.

“The gate is open,” shrugged Mistake. Entering is no problem.”

“The gate may be open,” agreed MistyTrail, “but the Qubari will not let us go in. They have orders to wait until morning.”

“Orders have never stopped me before,” Mistake grinned broadly. “Get ready to go. I will get us through the gates.”

MistyTrail, Eltor, and Caldal looked at each other questioningly as Mistake moved close to the gate. The Qubari warriors stationed there suddenly stiffened. Mistake turned her back to them and began talking.

“Of course everything is fine here,” Mistake said loud enough for the warriors to hear. “Yes, the gate is still open. No, not a single hellsoul has been seen yet. How about inside where you are?”

The Qubari frowned and stared at Mistake. Voltak moved closer to her and looked past her to see if she was talking to someone he could not see.

“MistyTrail is still here,” continued Mistake. “Yes, yes, Eltor and Caldal as well. What? Are you sure? Well, I could ask them if they would join you. Order them? I understand. Yes, I remember the way to the temple. All right, I will get the three of them and go through the gates immediately. Where should I meet up with you? All right. Yes, I remember the way. All right. We will leave immediately.”

“What is this all about?” Voltak asked with concern.

“The elves,” Mistake replied. “The Torak wants the elves to meet him at the temple. MistyTrail and I are to escort them.” She turned towards the elves and called loudly, “MistyTrail, Eltor, Caldal. Come here quickly. There is no time to waste.”

“But no one is supposed to go through the gates until morning,” protested Voltak as Mistake’s three friends came running. “Those are the orders.”

“I heard the orders,” nodded Mistake, “but I cannot refuse the Torak. I dare not try to contact him now so that you can speak to him yourself. He was practically whispering to me. I suspect there might be hellsouls nearby. My voice might give away the Torak’s position. Are you sure you want me to try an air tunnel to him?”

“No,” Voltak said nervously. “Do not endanger them with an air tunnel. I do not like this change in plans, but I will not put your life above the Astor’s. I hope you know what you are doing.”

“I do,” smiled Mistake as she stepped through the gates and waved her three friends through.

Voltak shook his head and turned away from the gates. He spoke to another Qubari warrior and told him to keep watch on the gates while he grabbed some food. Voltak marched back along the road several hundred paces to where the campfires were burning. He grabbed a bowl of stew and sat down to enjoy it.

The elves had been gone around five minutes before the first hellsoul appeared. It saw the open gates and shrieked loudly. Soon, a large group of hellsouls gathered and stared at the Qubari warriors. The jungle fighters all became alert, their long-bladed spears gripped in their hands. They waited for the hellsouls to attack.

All at once the hellsouls charged. Qubari warriors stood in the open gates and slashed with their spears. The first wave of creatures was sliced quickly. Several puffs of smoke rose and even more creature bodies dropped to the ground, only to arise again. The Qubari warriors did not have sufficient room between the gates to swing their long spears, so warriors shoved the spears instead. While that did little to vanquish the hellsouls, it did keep any of them from escaping. Eventually the creatures realized that they could not escape. They stood just outside the range of the spears and stared at the Qubari.

Unexpectedly, one of the hellsouls picked up a rock and threw it. It struck a Qubari warrior in the head. The hellsouls shrieked in victory and scrambled to pick up stones. One of the Qubari warriors hurried forward, his long spear threatening the closest hellsouls. He grabbed one of the gates and swung it shut. Another warrior saw what the first was doing and pulled shut the other gate. Once the gates were closed, the creatures dropped their rocks. Slowly the crowd dissipated until there were no hellsouls left. Voltak came running along the road to see what the commotion was.

“That was close,” exhaled one of the Qubari warriors who had closed the gates. “If they started throwing stones, they might have gotten out. We should have brought shields with us.”

“There is only one problem with your actions,” sighed Voltak as he stared at the closed gates. “You closed the gates. How are we supposed to get through them in the morning?”

“We will tell the Astor that we need them reopened,” shrugged the warrior.

“And how will you do that?” asked Voltak. “Do any of you know how to make an air tunnel?”

“Mistake does,” answered a warrior.

“So she does,” frowned Voltak, “but she entered the city a few moments ago. We have a problem. Our Astor is expecting us to attack the hellsouls in the morning. We are not going to be able to do that.”

Chapter 11

Best Laid Plans

Mistake led the elves along the wide boulevard leading to the central plaza. She saw a hellsoul appear a dozen blocks ahead of her and dashed to the side of the street. The others quickly followed her lead.

“Do you think it saw us?” asked MistyTrail.

“I don’t think so,” replied Mistake, “but we must be more careful. If Emperor Marak is drawing all of the hellsouls to this avenue, we might be better off approaching the temple from a different direction.”

“But we will not catch up to the other group if we detour,” Eltor pointed out.

“Did you see anyone ahead of us?” scowled Caldal. “I think Mistake has underestimated the speed with which the humans move. We are not going to catch up to them.”

“Do you wish to return to the gates?” snapped Mistake. “I do not need anyone to follow to reach the temple, but if you are afraid, I will escort you back so you can wait outside.”

“Let’s not fight,” sighed MistyTrail. “We all agreed to go to the temple. Let’s just do it. Lead the way that you feel is best, Mistake.”

Mistake nodded and hugged the buildings as she worked her way up to the next intersection. She looked both ways before turning to the right onto a narrower cross street. The elves moved silently along the narrow street until they came to the next intersection. Again Mistake peered around the corner, but she quickly ducked back.

“There are several of them,” she whispered. They are still quite a few blocks away.”

“Can we get across the avenue without them seeing us?” asked Eltor. “I don’t much care to be on this small street with hellsouls on both sides of us.”

“I think we can,” Mistake nodded. “Perhaps one at a time is safest. They might notice four of us quicker than just one.”

“You go first, Mistake,” suggested MistyTrail. “I will go last.”

Mistake peeked around the corner again. She inhaled deeply and then dashed across the broad avenue. Eltor stepped up next and repeated the procedure. Caldal and MistyTrail soon followed.

“They seemed pretty intent on something in the other direction,” remarked Eltor. “I don’t think any of them saw me.”

“I saw flashes of light when I crossed,” offered MistyTrail. “I think it was magical in nature, but I can’t be sure.”

“That would mean the humans ran into a battle,” frowned Caldal. “It would be rather dangerous for us to come up behind the hellsouls if the humans are attacking them.”

“Caldal is right,” MistyTrail said begrudgingly. “We have no chance of catching Emperor Marak at this point. Let’s find a path that is free of hellsouls and make our own way to the temple.”

Mistake agreed and led the way along the narrow street. At the next intersection only two hellsouls were visible. The elves repeated their method of darting across the avenue one at a time. By the time they reached the fourth broad avenue, the sky was beginning to darken. Still Mistake could make out the forms of hellsouls blocks away.

“We will have to cross this one, too,” frowned Mistake.

“That seems to bother you,” Eltor pointed out. “Why?”

“The second avenue led directly to the temple,” answered Mistake. “Each avenue that we cross is taking us farther away from our goal. We are doing a lot of traveling without getting any closer.”

“Perhaps,” shrugged MistyTrail, “but not if our goal is to reach the temple safely. I do not mind going out of our way if it decreases our risk. Lead on.”

The elves continued moving through the ancient city while the sky grew dark. Each broad avenue seemed to have at least one hellsoul on it, although they remained many blocks away.

“How many blocks have we traveled?” Mistake asked. “I have lost count.”

“I am not sure,” replied Eltor, “but the last four avenues were not as broad as the first ones. I think we are moving into a lesser area of the city.”

“We need to move along one of these avenues,” sighed Mistake. “How can there be so many hellsouls? I expected them to be gathered in the plaza by now, but we keep seeing them on each avenue.”

“Perhaps we should find a place to sleep for the night,” suggested MistyTrail. “The hellsouls are going to be awfully hard to see in the dark.”

“Sure,” retorted Caldal. “We can just choose a building and curl up for some sleep and a nice dream. How could you even think of sleeping in this city?”

“Continue as you have been doing,” Eltor urged Mistake. “You have kept us safe so far. I have faith in you.”

Mistake smiled at Eltor and then stuck her head around the corner. She held up one finger and then dashed across the intersection. When the rest of the elves had joined her, Mistake ran along the narrow street to the next intersection. She smiled when she did not see any hellsouls.

“Finally,” she grinned. “This avenue is clear. We are going to turn to the left and travel as a group. Keep to the sides of the street.”

Mistake stepped around the corner and led the group along the avenue. They had progressed six blocks before Caldal halted suddenly in the center of the intersection.

“What are you doing?” Eltor whispered loudly to his friend. “Get out of the street.”

Caldal pointed towards the right excitedly and then ran to catch up to Eltor.

“They have ships,” Caldal reported with enthusiasm. “I saw the masts when we crossed that last street.”

“So they have ships?” replied Eltor. “What of it?”

“I saw the masts,” Caldal said excitedly. “The wood should have decayed ages ago if this was really a closed city. I think we are being tricked.”

“Everything in Angragar is preserved,” Mistake declared. “Nothing has changed since the closing of the gates. There was not even dust in the temple when I was there.”

“That is impossible,” scowled Caldal. “No wooden ship can last for thousands of years. It is just not possible. I want to investigate those ships.”

“Caldal,” scolded MistyTrail, “will you stop acting like the humans are trying to trick you? You are beginning to make no sense with your ramblings.”

“If we show you the ships,” posed Mistake, “will you finally believe all that we have been saying? I am willing to detour if it will end this nonsense.”

“If you can prove that they are thousands of years old,” Caldal promised with skepticism, “I will finally believe you.”

“Then it is worth the detour,” sighed Eltor. “I, too, am growing tired of this conversation.”

Caldal frowned at his friend, but Mistake merely nodded and retreated to the last intersection. She turned towards the distant masts. There did not appear to be any hellsouls in this section of the city and the run to the harbor was quickly accomplished. When they finally arrived, the elves stood in shock.

The harbor area was fairly open, with a wide wharf running for many blocks. All sorts of ships were docked, their lines as solid as new. Several more ships were anchored offshore.

“You cannot tell me that this is thousands of years old,” Caldal said triumphantly. “Even the dock lines look new.”

Eltor tapped his friend on the shoulder and pointed towards the mouth of the harbor.

“Look quickly before the light fades entirely,” Eltor said. “You can see a swath of jungle blocking the exit to the harbor. Just where do you suppose these ships sail to?”

Caldal followed Eltor’s gaze and saw the jungle stretch across the water. The harbor was a harbor no longer. It was but a lake. Caldal sighed with resignation and hung his head in defeat. The elves walked slowly along the wharf, staring at the ancient vessels. Suddenly, Eltor stopped and stared at two particular ships.

“Look at this, Caldal,” he said excitedly. “This is a perfect specimen of an ancient elven trading ship. I have seen drawings of such a vessel.”

“So have I,” Caldal admitted with awe, “and the smaller one is obviously elven as well.”

“Yes,” nodded Eltor. “It was used either for couriers or scouts. I would love to sail such a vessel. Could you imagine actually sailing in that?”

Caldal just smiled and nodded enthusiastically.

“I am uncomfortable standing in the open like this,” frowned MistyTrail. “Have we seen enough of the harbor now?”

Mistake looked questioningly at Eltor and Caldal.

“Yes,” replied Caldal. “I am sorry for my attitude earlier. I just could not imagine such a sight as we have seen. It is a miracle to have a city preserved in this fashion. Let’s go to the temple. I really do want to read about the truth of our relations with humans.”

MistyTrail smiled at Caldal as Mistake led the group off the wharf and onto a narrow street heading towards the city center. Night claimed the sky as the small group made their way towards the temple. Mistake slowed down considerably because she could not see well enough to determine where the hellsouls were. She could hear distant shrieks, but she could not actually see anything. Suddenly, she stopped short. The rest of the group tensed and drew their swords.

“What is it?” whispered MistyTrail. “Do you see one? Where is it?”

“No,” Mistake whispered back. “I just realized the error of my ways. Emperor Marak will have the door to the temple barricaded to stop the hellsouls from getting in. We will have to bang loudly on the doors with our backs open to the entire plaza. That would be suicide.”

“There is only one door?” gulped Eltor. “What are we to do now?”

“I don’t know,” admitted Mistake. “I should have thought about this sooner.”

“Are we close to the temple?” asked MistyTrail.

“I think so,” nodded mistake, “But I am not sure. I believe the shrieking is probably coming for the plaza. If we are not close, we will be soon. What are you thinking?”

“An air tunnel,” suggested MistyTrail. “If there is enough of a gap in the door, or if there are windows, we can get a message inside. They can open the doors for us.”

“There are balconies,” Mistake said with a glimmer of hope. “Rejji and I stood on one and watched the hellsouls. The Torak just might post a sentry there during the night. It is worth a try.”

Mistake led the group towards the sounds of shrieking. The noise was constant and growing louder with each step. It began to grate on the nerves of the elves. Suddenly, a hellsoul leaped from a doorway as the group was passing. Mistake had already passed by, so the creature swung at closest person. The sword struck Eltor’s shoulder, and the elf leaped away. Caldal and MistyTrail gasped in horror as they brought their swords up. The hellsoul attacked quickly.

The creature swung its sword at Caldal, hitting the elf’s blade. Caldal tried to push the hellsoul backward as the blades clashed. The hellsoul turned its blade and ran it down along the elf’s sword. He nicked Caldal’s hand with his blade, causing the elf to drop his sword. Caldal dove away from the creature in a roll and came up on his feet several paces away. MistyTrail and Mistake both threw knives at the creature. Both knives struck killing blows and the hellsoul fell to the pavement, its sword clattering loudly on the street. Eltor raced to the body and decapitated it. It disappeared in a puff of smoke. Caldal walked over and picked up his sword. Mistake swallowed hard and stared at the wounded elf.

“It is nothing,” braved Caldal. “Just a scratch. Maybe we should not hug the buildings so much.”

Mistake nodded silently and moved away from the buildings as she led the group forward. She said nothing about the incident. MistyTrail sensed a problem. She moved forward until she was right behind Mistake.

“What is the matter?” she whispered.

Mistake did not answer. MistyTrail moved alongside her sister and repeated the question.

“Hellsoul blades are poisoned,” Mistake whispered. “Caldal will die if we don’t get him to a healer. Is there anything that you can do?”

“I can heal wounds,” offered MistyTrail, “but I know little about poisons. If I heal his wound, won’t the poison be sealed inside of him?”

“I know less about healing than you do,” frowned Mistake. “We need to get him to the temple. We have no time to waste.”

Several blocks later, Mistake halted again. The elves gathered around to find out why they were stopping. The shrieking was quite loud and moving figures could be barely seen in the distance, although it was too far to identify them.

“I think that is the back of the temple,” Mistake declared as she pointed to a tall building a block away. At least it looks like it, and the figures moving in the distance are probably in the plaza beyond the temple.”

“Let me try an air tunnel,” offered MistyTrail. “There is something that might be a window a story above the ground.”

“It looks like a balcony,” offered Eltor. “Didn’t you say that you stood on a balcony?”

“I did,” nodded Mistake, “but that was in the front of the temple. I think you are right though. It does look like a balcony. Try it, MistyTrail.”

While the other three stood guard with their swords drawn, MistyTrail wove an air tunnel. She aimed for the balcony and was able to extend the air tunnel into the building, but not very far.

“It is blocked,” frowned MistyTrail. “If there is anyone there, they have not answered me.”

“What now?” asked Eltor. “Do we really pick a building and bed down for the night? We can join up with the others in the morning.”

“No,” Mistake said worriedly. “We have no time to lose. We must do something now.”

Eltor and Caldal looked at Mistake questioningly. She appeared to be very nervous, and neither of them had expected that.

“What?” asked Caldal. “What are you not telling us? Are the hellsouls going to come looking for us?”

Mistake did not reply. She turned from the elves and stared at the moving shapes barely visible blocks away. MistyTrail sighed and grabbed Caldal’s uninjured hand.

“You wound must be treated right away,” MistyTrail said to Caldal.

Mistake turned and glared at MistyTrail. “Why are you telling him? Isn’t it bad enough being surrounded by hellsouls? Now you have to tell him this?”

“It is only a scratch,” protested Caldal. “It does not even hurt.”

“The blade was poisoned,” explained MistyTrail. “I cannot deceive you, Caldal. You will die if we don’t get help immediately.”

“I will go to the front of the temple,” volunteered Eltor. “I will bang on the door and let them know that we need help.”

“No,” Mistake said a little too loudly. “You will die if you do that. This is why I did not want to mention it. Both of you will now offer to throw your lives away so gallantly. Just stop and think. We will find a way out of this without any heroics.”

“I have an idea,” MistyTrail said excitedly.

“What is it?” Mistake asked quickly, welcoming the change in topic.

“We may not be able to get an air tunnel into the temple,” MistyTrail explained, “but there are many other places where we can reach with air tunnels. Between us, we know practically every place that Marak or Lyra would attempt to communicate with. We can notify all of them of our plight. If either the Torak or the Star attempts to communicate with anyone, they will learn of our location and situation.”

“I like it,” grinned Mistake. “I will start with the Qubari village, Khadoratung, Fardale, and Ghala.”

“I will begin with StarCity and Alamar,” nodded Mistake. “Be quick about it as they may only communicate once this night.”

* * *

The Torak, the Star, and the Astor stood before the large mural in the temple in Angragar. Lyra stood staring at her likeness with disbelief. Marak stood to one side, slightly amused, and Rejji shook his head in wonder.

“I swear that the sword was not there before,” Rejji said. “I paid more attention to the Torak and myself, but I am positive that the Star held no weapon.”

“Well she certainly does now,” smiled Emperor Marak. “It looks like a fine rapier, too. I wonder if it will found here in Angragar.”

“Do you have any skill with a sword?” Rejji asked the Star of Sakova.

“Some,” Lyra answered without taking her eyes from the painting. “I used to practice swordplay with the students at the academy. My father, of course, strictly forbade it, but I was a fair hand at it. I gave Syman and Antello a good fight. Still, I am not in the same company with Sakovan warriors. If we find it, I will have to practice.”

“We will find it,” smiled the Torak.

“You seem to be enjoying this,” Rejji said to Marak. “What is so funny?”

“We are three individuals who do not take well to taking orders from others,” chuckled the Emperor, “yet here we are dancing to Kaltara’s tune, and quite willingly I might add. He does not tell us what to do on a daily basis, yet he guides our every step. Do you not find that amusing?”

“I have not really thought about,” admitted Rejji. “Are you saying that we are puppets?”

“Not at all,” clarified the Torak. “Just the opposite, actually. We are strongly independent. In fact, I think we may be causing Kaltara to constantly revise his plans because we do not act as we are expected to. I have no doubt that your recollection of the painting is the same as mine. Lyra held no sword in the painting before this day.”

“But you did have the Sword of Torak,” responded Rejji.

“I already possessed it,” nodded Marak. “In the painting you held the staff, which you left Angragar with. Now Lyra holds a fine rapier, which I guarantee she will actually hold before she leaves this city. In a way, the mural is prophetic. I would not be surprised to see it change again in the future.”

“Where will I find this rapier?” asked Lyra. “And what am I supposed to do with it?”

“I suspect that it will have the capability to vanquish hellsouls,” answered the Torak. “What else it might do is a mystery to me.”

“We will look for it in the king’s treasure room,” stated Rejji. “If it is not there, we will search the entire city.”

“After we vanquish the hellsouls,” interjected the Torak. “It is too late to search the city tonight, and in the morning the army will arrive. After that we will search until we find it.”

“What is the plan for the morning?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“At dawn some of us will depart from the temple,” answered Emperor Marak. “Specifically, the three of us must be among those to leave. I think we should bring the mages along as well.”

“And not the warriors?” asked Rejji.

“No,” replied Marak. “They will just get in the way. I think we saw today that the light blade, properly aimed, is a devastating weapon against the hellsouls. That is why the mages must join us. They will protect us while the army advances against the enemy’s rear.”

“That sounds dangerous,” Lyra commented. “I am not so concerned about myself, as I have Kaltara’s cylinder to protect me, but the others do not.”

“It is dangerous,” nodded the Torak. “Just getting to the center of the plaza may be dangerous as well. We will discuss it in detail later. Let’s grab a bite to eat while the food is warm.”

The Three turned and left the room. Lyra turned and stared one last time at the prophetic mural as they left. They walked back to the entry foyer where the rest of the group were having a warm meal cooked by Mobi.

“This is great,” commented Wyant. “I can’t recall ever tasting anything like this. What is it?”

“Monkey,” smiled Mobi. “I am glad that you are enjoying it. The taste is mostly attributable to the herbs and spices that are used. You are probably not familiar with most of them. They grow only in the jungle.”

DarkBlade’s eyebrows rose, but he did not say a word. Mobi looked up and saw the others had returned from viewing the mural.

“Did you notice the change?” asked the Qubari warrior.

“We did,” nodded Lyra. “We will search for the rapier when the hellsouls are vanquished. May I have some of the monkey?”

Mobi grinned and readied a portion for the Star of Sakova. He watched her expression closely as she sampled it. He smiled when he saw her nod of acceptance. Gunta came down the stairs and sat near the fire. He helped himself to a portion of the meal.

“What is happening out there?” asked Emperor Marak.

“There are thousands of them,” frowned Gunta. “Much more than the last time we were here.”

“They sense that the battle for Angragar is upon them,” responded the Torak. “They will all gather to defeat us. I worry for the Qubari army. It will be hard to defeat the hellsouls without some casualties. It is a shame to die to something that is already dead.”

“Do not worry for the Qubari,” offered Mobi. “We are reclaiming Angragar. We could perform no finer service for Kaltara. Those that die tomorrow will be honored for ages to come.”

Rejji frowned at Mobi’s words and sampled the food. He also sat on the floor and urged the Torak to eat. Marak nodded and helped himself to some food. He stood as he ate, staring at the closed doors of the temple

“If you are planning on contacting your home tonight,” Lyra prompted, “you should do so soon. After the meal we are retiring to the library to begin our search for information. You know that we will be there until morning. LunarSigh or I would be happy to weave an air tunnel for you.”

“A good thought,” nodded the Torak, “but I communicated previously today. Thank you for the offer.”

Lyra’s face was puzzled at Marak’s answer. He had not asked her to create an air tunnel, and he had brought no Khadoran mage with him. She wondered if Mistake or MistyTrail had helped him.

“Was there any pressing news?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“The murders continue,” frowned Emperor Marak. “The hellsouls have been found in every major city of Khadora, and some of the more remote areas as well. Less of them are escaping now that we know how to vanquish them, but their very presence terrorizes the populace. I must begin thinking about returning to Khadora to address the problems before the lords decide to keep their armies home to protect themselves. I must succeed in training all of them.”

“Cannot the Lords’ Council take care of that?” asked Lyra.

“There are good men on the Lords’ Council,” replied the Torak, “but they do not get the attention of the lords the way that the Emperor does. It will take pressure from me to get some of the lords to comply, but I am determined to do exactly that. It will get done. Shall we go to the library now and see what awaits us there?”

The group rose and started heading for the library. Mobi offered to stand guard at the door while the others read. Lyra caught up to her people and spoke softly to them. DarkBlade and LunarSigh nodded and turned around to stay on guard with Mobi.

Chapter 12

The Library

“I have something here,” announced Temiker as he turned away from the bookshelf in the library of the temple in Angragar.

“What have you got?” asked the Torak.

“Vand was a high priest in Angragar,” Temiker reported. “He was well respected at one time, but something changed him. He became deathly ill. He managed to survive, but he was different when he returned. He started preaching about there being more than one god. That riled King Regis somewhat, but no action was taken. The real trouble started later.”

“What was the real trouble?” asked the Astor.

“He became very secretive,” continued Temiker. “At the same time, numerous unexplained murders were occurring in Angragar, mostly of powerful and influential people. Those influential people just happened to be the very ones who were warning the king about Vand. King Regis had him investigated. While nothing could be proved, it was suspected that Vand was creating supernatural beings. The creatures could not be killed.”

“Hellsouls,” interjected the Star of Sakova.

“Exactly,” nodded Temiker. “Vand was exiled from Angragar. He tried to appeal to King Regis for several years, but to no avail. That is when the real trouble started. Vand began his own following outside of Angragar. He told of visions that he had from the gods. He issued prophecies. He talked openly about overthrowing King Regis. His following was small at first, but then demons began to appear in Angragar. The people were panicked. It seems that Vand had prophesized that the demons would come to Angragar to punish the people for turning away from Vand. Thousands flocked to him.”

“That is when the people fled from Angragar?” asked Wyant.

“No,” Temiker shook his head. “Angragar was a very large city. While thousands fled, many more remained. Still, King Regis recognized a threat to Angragar in Vand. He ordered forces to attack Vand and scatter his people from around the city. Vand was driven far to the west. That is all that this tome reveals.”

“I wonder what turned this priest to evil?” mused Axor. “It must have been something very powerful to turn a high priest away from Kaltara.”

Unexpectedly, LunarSigh and DarkBlade rushed into the room. Everyone turned to see what the commotion was.

“There is trouble,” announced LunarSigh as she tried to catch her breath.

“Calm yourself,” Lyra said soothingly. “What is the trouble?”

“The elves,” answered the Sakovan mage. “They are outside the temple right now.”

“What elves?” Emperor Marak asked with a sense of urgency. “Explain what you know.”

“MistyTrail and the others,” answered LunarSigh. “I was contacting StarCity as Lyra directed. They told me that they had a message from MistyTrail. She and three others are outside the temple in Angragar and cannot get in. One of them is wounded and poisoned.”

“If we open those doors right now,” warned Axor, “we will have our battle far too soon. We will never be able to close them again until the hellsouls are completely vanquished.”

“Mistake may be rebellious, but she is not foolish,” replied the Torak. “She will be well hidden from the hellsouls. I may be able to go out and find the elves without alerting the entire population of hellsouls.”

“I know where they are,” interjected LunarSigh. “Or at least where they were when the spoke with StarCity. They said they were one block behind the temple. They tried to use an air tunnel to contact us, but were unable to. That is why they contacted StarCity.”

“Gunta,” the Torak asked, “isn’t the balcony that we used to escape the last time in the back of the temple?”

“Second level,” nodded Gunta. “I will get some rope.”

The Torak nodded as Gunta ran out of the library. Marak signaled to Halman and marched out of the library. Halman followed.

“We will need a healer for the wounded one,” declared Rejji. “Can you heal, Lyra?”

“I can,” Lyra nodded, “but LunarSigh is much better versed in healing than I am. Let’s clear off that table.”

As Temiker and Axor moved to clear the table, DarkBlade moved close to Lyra and whispered in her ear. The Star turned and stared into the Sakovan warrior’s eyes. She nodded slowly and seriously. DarkBlade turned and ran out of the library. He raced up the stairs and towards the rear of the temple. He searched frantically for the balcony and only found it when he saw Gunta open a door and enter a room. He followed Gunta and found Emperor Marak and Halman standing on the balcony.

“I cannot see you, Mistake,” Emperor Marak said. “Can you see me?”

“We can barely make out the balcony from here,” answered Mistake’s voice. I will get closer.”

“No,” Marak replied quickly as Gunta tied the rope to the balcony. “When you move you will have to carry the wounded one. I want people on the ground to protect you during that. Describe where you are.”

“The wounded one is Caldal,” answered Mistake. “There is a street running under your balcony. To your right is another street. If you were to drop from the balcony and turn to the right, then left at the intersection, we would be at the next intersection. Does that help?”

Marak stared into the darkness. He located the corner that Mistake was describing, but he could not see the elves.

“Halman down first,” ordered the Torak. “Gunta second, and I will come last. Halman, secure the first intersection when you get down. Gunta and I will travel to the elves.”

Marak turned and saw DarkBlade behind him. He frowned. “DarkBlade, would you summon Axor? I would like someone up here that can cast a light blade in case things go very badly below.”

“I am taking your place down there,” DarkBlade stated calmly. “I have already discussed this with the Star. We cannot afford to lose you before the battle in the morning. The Torak, the Star and the Astor must be present tomorrow in the plaza.”

Marak stared at DarkBlade and shook his head, but Gunta smiled.

“Welcome to the team, DarkBlade,” smiled Halman. “I am going down now.”

Halman stepped over the railing and grabbed the rope. He silently lowered himself to the ground and immediately checked the surrounding area for hellsouls. Seeing nothing, he shook the rope several times and moved off towards the closest intersection. Gunta grabbed the rope next while Marak wove an air tunnel to the library to summon Axor. DarkBlade followed Gunta down the rope, and together they moved silently to the intersection.

Gunta and DarkBlade moved out into the street leading to the next intersection. They could hear occasional shrieks behind them coming from the plaza, but they could not see anything moving. As they approached the next intersection, they heard MistyTrail’s voice.

“It is DarkBlade and Gunta,” she said softly. “Get ready to leave.”

Gunta saw the elves at the corner. He moved quickly to bend and scoop up Caldal and throw him over his shoulder. DarkBlade drew his sword and urged the other three elves to head for the balcony. Mistake ushered Eltor and MistyTrail forward and then moved towards the balcony. The elves reached the corner where Halman stood guard. The Torak warrior immediately led the trio to the waiting rope and urged to them to climb swiftly.

As DarkBlade was escorting Gunta and the wounded Caldal towards the balcony, a loud shriek came from somewhere close. Whether Gunta and Caldal presented a large enough silhouette to be seen, or some light reflected off of DarkBlade’s sword, they would never know, but half a dozen hellsouls charged out of the darkness.

The three elves were already up the rope or on their way. Halman drew his sword and stepped away from the rope to help defend against the hellsouls. DarkBlade turned and stood alongside Halman as Gunta continued to the rope. Gunta gently dropped Caldal to the ground and tied the rope around him.

“Pull it up,” shouted Gunta as hundreds of loud shrieks came from the plaza.

Halman and DarkBlade attacked the first six hellsouls, knowing that hundreds more were running towards them. Gunta stepped forward and pulled his sword. The six hellsouls were quickly dispatched, their empty cloaks falling to the street.

“Gunta, go,” commanded DarkBlade. “Make it swift, friend. There will be too many to fight in a moment.”

Gunta did not argue. He grabbed the rope as it was dropped back down from the balcony.

“I foresee a problem,” Halman said as they watched the hellsouls charge around the corner in front of them. “Who will protect the last of us?”

“I will tell you after Gunta and you succeed in pulling up the rope with me hanging on it,” answered DarkBlade. “Go.”

There was no time to argue with DarkBlade’s stubborn stand. Halman turned and ran to the rope as he sheathed his sword. He grabbed the rope and started climbing. He heard the sounds of fighting below, but he dared not look. DarkBlade backed towards the rope as the horde of creatures approached. He swung viciously at the first to reach him, the creature’s head flying to one side before turning to smoke.

“Grab the rope,” shouted Halman.

DarkBlade swung two more times before freeing his left hand from the hilt of the two-handed sword. He reached up and wrapped the rope around his left wrist several times before shouting that he was ready. As he felt the rope start to rise, DarkBlade slashed out with his sword, slicing two hellsouls across their midsections. The hellsouls died, but were not vanquished. Their bodies fell to the ground, tripping those behind them. The hellsouls shrieked and lashed out with their short swords. DarkBlade felt numerous sword hits on his boots before the rope was pulled beyond the reach of the creatures.

After DarkBlade reached the balcony, the party hurried down to the library where Caldal was placed upon the table. LunarSigh immediately focused on the poisoned hand while Lyra cast general healing spells. Temiker and Axor crowded around the table and aided in the healing.

“Will he live?” Eltor asked softly as he watched the mages.

“He has four of the best mages in the world working on him,” Marak smiled encouragingly as he looked at the slash mark on Eltor’s shoulder. “He will be fine. You need have no worries for Caldal. What about you? I see you also took a hit.”

“The armor that you gave me protected me,” replied Eltor. “I apologize for all the trouble that Caldal and I have caused you. You have been generous and honest with us at all times, and yet we have been ungrateful. I promise to behave better from here on out. I am sure that Caldal will as well.”

“Apology accepted,” smiled the Torak. “As for Caldal, he appears to be more skeptical than you are. He will learn the truth eventually. I suppose he is a bit like Mistake was in the early days.”

Hearing her name mentioned, Mistake nudged MistyTrail and nodded towards the doorway. Mistake and MistyTrail tried to slip out of the room. Emperor Marak strode purposely towards the door to cut them off. He grabbed each of them by the shoulder and stopped them from leaving.

“Some elves have more explaining to do than others,” the Torak said harshly. “Why are you within the city walls?”

“It is my fault,” admitted Mistake. “I guess I felt left out by being made to stay outside the city. I also wanted Caldal and Eltor to see this library. I know that the truth about the elves must lie in here somewhere.”

“Another day would not have been such a hard burden to bear,” scolded the Emperor. “You endangered a lot of people with this foolish plan of yours. I want you to think about that. DarkBlade was moments from lying on that table beside Caldal. Or worse, he might not have been fit for the table.”

“I am sorry,” sobbed Mistake as she turned to gaze at DarkBlade. “I won’t do it again. Ever.”

Emperor Marak shook his head and chuckled inwardly. “I will believe that when I see it,” he stated. “Spend some of your energy going through the books here. It will keep you out of trouble.”

Caldal started to stir and the Torak let go of the elves. He walked to the table and stared at Caldal. The elf opened his eyes and looked up to see many faces staring down at him.

“He will be fine,” smiled LunarSigh. “The poison did not have a chance to spread far. I have removed it. A little rest and he will be good as new.”

“I have something,” Wyant said excitedly. “This volume speaks of Vandegar. Evidently, Vand set up his own kingdom in opposition to Angragar. He created a massive temple and declared that the gods had accepted him as one of their own. He claimed to be a god.”

“That has been already mentioned,” declared the Torak.

“But there is more,” continued Wyant. “He enabled priests in his name and sent them into Angragar to gather the people of King Regis. He made many prophecies during this time. All of them dealt with the fall of Angragar. With each prophecy, more citizens of Angragar left the city and moved to Vandegar until Vand’s city was actually larger than Angragar.”

“I never heard of city ruins near the temple of Vandegar,” frowned Rejji. “I heard that it is located near a lake on a vast desert plain. Nobody has ever mentioned a city being anywhere near the temple.”

“When Vand had stolen all of the people that could be scared into leaving,” continued Wyant, “he tried to attack the city, but he was repelled. He actually tried numerous times. King Regis would sometimes attack his armies while they marched across the mountains. Vand was never successful in breeching the walls of the city. It is said that this incensed Vand to the point of madness.”

“He keeps getting worse,” sighed Temiker. “It is as if he had a mental illness of some kind.”

“Or just couldn’t stand the taste of rejection,” scowled Emperor Marak. “He sounds like one who is overly impressed with himself.”

“His new religion suddenly turned very dark,” Wyant said. “He started human sacrifices and the drinking of human blood. Those who tried to turn away from him became victims. It was forbidden to say anything against Vand. The slightest misstatement meant death.”

“I believe your analysis is correct, Marak,” nodded Lyra. “It may be a way to distract him. Vanity is his weakness.”

“Exactly,” agreed the Torak. “Now we must find some way to use it against him.”

“It was around this time that Vand started building his secret navy,” continued Wyant. “He sent spies into Angragar and spread rumors that the elves would attack Angragar. After the rumors were spread, he prophesized the same thing. He said that the gods would cause the elves to attack Angragar for turning their backs on him. It gained him nothing. Those who had stayed in Angragar no longer believed a word Vand said.”

“The elves would never attack without provocation,” interjected Eltor. “I bet Vand used his navy to make it look like the elves attacked.”

“Not exactly,” Wyant shook his head. “He made one more prophecy before things heated up. He said that after the elves attacked, the gods would slay every last person left in Angragar. Those that refused to confess their foolishness and immediately bow to Vand after the elven attack would be crushed by the gods in a very painful way.”

“This man is sick,” snarled Temiker. “His whole life is devoted to hatred.”

“Eventually,” nodded Wyant, “Vand sent his armada to sea. His ships hoisted the flag of Angragar, not Vandegar. With the false flags flying, they mercilessly attacked the elven coastal cities. While Vand knew that he could not defeat Angragar, he knew that the elves could. He was right. The elves attacked Angragar with vengeance. The only thing that saved the city was the unexpected surrender by King Regis. Rather than fight the elves, he gave up and submitted. When he spoke to the elves, they began to understand how Vand had engineered the whole thing. The elves agreed to leave in peace, but it was too late.”

“Why was it too late?” asked Axor.

“The last prophecy that Vand had issued caused fear among the people,” explained Wyant. “Once the elves had begun their attack, all of Vand’s word rang true with the citizens. When the elves stopped the barrage, the people fled the city. In the end, there were only a few thousand left in the city, and many of them were Vand’s spies. King Regis gathered the few hundred remaining citizens that still worshipped Kaltara. He planned to march them out of the city and call upon Kaltara to destroy Angragar. That is the end of the tome.”

“But Kaltara did not destroy the city,” commented Rejji. “Instead he sealed it, imprisoning Vand’s spies inside.”

“And the elves, seeing their complicity in the fall of their ally, decided to protect the city from falling into Vand’s hands,” added Bakhai. “So they created the jungle to hide it.”

“And left the people under King Regis to guard it forever,” nodded Rejji. “That is who the Qubari are today. They are the faithful who remained to the end.”

“So it is all true,” Caldal said softly from the table. “It was not really Angragar that attacked the elves. Why have we been taught that Angragar attacked us? Surely the elves that created the jungle would know the truth?”

“Perhaps that was close enough to the truth to deal with the matter,” suggested Temiker. “Think about it. When the elves left these shores, they could not know if Angragar would fall to Vand’s people. They had done their best to hide the city, but that does not mean that Vand would not succeed in obtaining his goal. He had already done the impossible by getting two allies to fight one another.”

“But we could have been taught that it was Vandegar that attacked us,” argued Eltor, “and not Angragar.”

“To what purpose?” asked Temiker. “Vand’s ships raised the flag of Angragar when they attacked. They could easily do so again. If the elves still thought of Angragar as an ally, they would leave themselves open to being fooled again. Their teachings make perfect sense to me. They had been viscously tricked by the humans when all they wished was to not be involved in our internal squabbles. It is no wonder that there have been no relations with the elves since.”

“Did Vand’s people hate the elves?” asked Caldal.

“There is no record of anyone hating the elves,” sighed Temiker. “Not even Vand. Vand merely used the elves to gain that which he sought. By all records that I have seen, the elves were allies and good trading partners of the humans. That is why no one believed Vand’s prophecy until it actually happened. They could not imagine the elves ever attacking. They were friends.”

“But on Motanga…” Caldal began.

“Are humans who worship Vand,” interrupted Eltor. “Vand may not have hated the elves back then, but I suspect that he does now. We hid Angragar from him and halted his quest to conquer what he sought all of his life. In the very moment of his final victory, we thwarted his plan to seize Angragar. I believe Emperor Marak is correct. Vand’s armies will be coming to Elvangar when he finishes with the humans here.”

“You must all think of me as a fool,” Caldal nodded sadly. “I have fought you every step of the way in my secure knowledge that I knew that humans were evil. I can not even imagine why you risked your lives to save me.”

“Because the elves are still our friends and allies,” smiled Emperor Marak, “even if you don’t want to be. Your queen may decide not to help us, but that will not diminish our friendship towards you.”

Caldal smiled weakly at Emperor Marak.

“Some of us should get some sleep,” suggested Axor. “Tomorrow will be a stressful day.”

“An excellent idea,” agreed Lyra. “Where should we rest?”

Wyant went to put his tome back on the shelf and his hand snagged something metal. Unexpectedly, the bookshelf moved slightly. Marak caught the movement out of the corner of his eye. He moved quickly to the bookshelf and pulled on it. It swung away from the wall.

“Hand me a torch,” demanded the Torak.

Rejji hurried over and handed a torch to Emperor Marak. Lyra brought another torch as the Torak stepped into the room concealed behind the bookshelf. Rejji and Lyra crowded in behind him. The Three stood there staring at the strange sight before them. There were three doors on the far wall. Over each door was a symbol. They were the symbols of the Star, the Torak, and the Astor. Over the door with the symbol of the Star, was long, slim rapier. Its handle sparkled blue in the torchlight.

“The Rapier of the Star,” Marak said with surprise as he reached up and grabbed it. “It is not in the palace after all.”

The Torak handed the rapier to the Star. Lyra smiled as she took the sword and wrapped her hand around its hilt.

“It feels so light,” Lyra remarked. “I wonder if it merely ceremonial?”

“I would suspect not,” advised the Torak. “I think you will find it a potent weapon capable of vanquishing hellsouls. I doubt that a gift from Kaltara can be broken.”

“What are the doors for?” asked Rejji. “There appears to one for each of us.”

“I am not sure,” frowned Emperor Marak, “but I would advise caution. This room is extremely small. The three of us fill it. Why would there be three more doors leaving it? It does not appear to be a normal path to anywhere. Let me try opening one.”

Emperor Marak opened the door with the sign of the Torak above it. He leaned through the door and stuck the torch through to see what lie beyond. He stared uncomprehendingly at a blank wall.

“There is room for me to step in and nothing else,” Marak reported as he stepped out and closed the door. “Let me try the others.”

Emperor Marak tried the Star’s door next. It was the same as his. The Astor’s room was also the same. He closed the doors.

“It makes no sense to me,” Marak scratched his head. “The only thing that I can think of is a hiding place, but that makes no sense. The three us could easily hide in this small room without going through another door. Even if we couldn’t, why label our doors? I am baffled.”

“At least we found the Rapier of the Star,” smiled Lyra. “We would have searched far and wide in this city and not found it if not for Wyant’s movement.”

“Yes,” Marak nodded distractedly as his mind refused to leave the mystery of the doors. “Maybe Axor or Temiker can make something of it. Let them be the only ones to know about this for now. At least until we understand what we have found. We should move out of here and let them in.”

The three servants of Kaltara stepped out of the small room. Everyone looked at them questioningly.

“We found the Rapier of the Star,” grinned Emperor Marak as he slid the bookshelf closed. “Other than that it is an empty room. Return to the entry foyer and get some sleep. It will be a long day tomorrow.”

Most of the people started moving out of the room, but Axor remained and stared questioningly at the Torak. Lyra moved casually to Temiker’s side and tugged on his sleeve. He acknowledged the Star with a slight nod and stood still while the others filed out of the room. Marak had to verbally dismiss Gunta and Halman before they would leave, but finally only the Three remained with the two mages.

“There are doors in the small room behind the bookshelf,” Marak explained to the mages. “I do not understand their purpose, but I feel certain that they have one. Take a look and let us know what you think.”

Chapter 13

The Plaza

Temiker stepped out of the small one-person room and shook his head at Axor. He closed the door with the symbol of the Star above it.

“I checked the walls for hidden latches,” frowned Temiker. “I could find none. The room does not appear to have any use. Perhaps it was a safe-keeping room of some kind?”

“I don’t think so,” replied the Chula shaman. “In our readings so far, there has never been a Star, Torak, or Astor before. Why would they need storage rooms? We must be missing something.”

“Try the Torak’s door,” suggested Temiker. “Maybe you will find something that I could not.”

Axor opened the door with the symbol of the Torak above it. He entered the small room and stood silently for a moment.

“Hand me the torch,” Axor said.

Temiker handed the torch to the Chula shaman. Axor held the torch close to the back wall and ran his free hand over the surface. He repeated the procedure on each of the small side walls and found nothing. He shook his head in puzzlement.

“Maybe it is some type of mechanism that is only activated with the door closed,” shrugged Temiker.

Axor nodded and pulled the door closed. He repeated his check of the surfaces of the walls and found no difference in them. He sighed in frustration and opened the door.

“It is no different with the door closed,” he said to Temiker. “Take the torch and check on the door with the Astor symbol above it.”

Axor held the torch out for Temiker to take, but Temiker did not take it. Puzzled, the Chula shaman stepped out of the door to find out what Temiker was doing, the Alamar mage was nowhere in sight. In fact, the door to the library was closed. Axor frowned with concern. He wondered why Temiker would abandon him, and why he would close the secret door behind the library shelf. Knowing that the closed door could mean possible trouble in the library, Axor moved silently to the latch that would open the door behind the bookshelf.

The Chula shaman slowly eased the door open a crack. A bitter cold wind invaded the enclosed space. His senses on alert, Axor pushed the door open a little further so that he could slide his body through the gap. He stepped into the library, his eyes opening wide as he stared at the empty shelves and rotted fragments of wood. The room was freezing cold. Axor recognized the room, but he couldn’t bring himself to believe what he was seeing. He moved cautiously through the old library and along the corridor beyond it. Only when he stepped completely outside the temple did he believe the truth of his discovery.

The Chula shaman ran back into the temple and raced to the library. He moved behind the bookshelf and gently closed the secret door. He turned and reentered the door under the symbol of the Torak, pulling the door closed behind him. When he reopened the door, he heard Temiker’s voice.

“I thought you had fallen asleep in there,” Temiker grumbled sarcastically. “Did you discover anything?”

“More than you can imagine,” Axor said with wonderment. “The doors are portals.”

“Portals?” questioned Temiker, all traces of humor instantly gone. “Portals to where?”

“The Door of the Torak goes to the sacred temple in Changragar,” announced Axor. “I can only assume where the others go, but my guess would be to the temples in StarCity and the Qubari village. Is it not strange that each of these temple are built amazingly identical?”

“I did notice the similarities between this temple and the one in the Qubari village,” nodded Temiker, “but I have never been in Changragar. Are you saying that you exited that room into a different land?”

“That is exactly what I am saying,” Axor nodded enthusiastically. “I know Changragar very well. It was no illusion. I walked out of the temple onto the holy grounds. The freezing air alone would convince me of its location. Changragar is high in the mountains. Even the air is thinner there. It was not an illusion.”

“Perhaps we should try the other doors,” suggested Temiker. “Let us know for sure where they come out.”

“I would advise caution,” Axor shook his head. “The temple at Changragar is isolated and empty. The other two are not. For us to appear in the temple in StarCity would announce these doors to the world. I do not think that is wise. We should inform the Three and let them decide upon what is to be done.”

“You are right,” nodded Lyra’s uncle. “Let’s tell them.”

The two mages unlatched the lever behind the bookshelf and stepped into the library. Lyra, Marak, and Rejji waited to hear what had been discovered. Axor explained what he had done and where he had gone.

“We explored no further,” Axor concluded. “We felt that you should decide who tests the doors.”

“I will test the Door of the Star,” declared Lyra. “Seldom is the temple occupied at night, and even if it is, I can demand secrecy from whoever is there.”

“I can do the same,” nodded Rejji.

Emperor Marak waited with the two mages while the Star and the Astor disappeared behind the bookshelf. A few minutes later, Lyra and Rejji returned.

“It is as you suspected,” Lyra stated. “I can step right into StarCity from this temple. It is most amazing.”

“And the Qubari village,” interjected Rejji. “What is the purpose of these doors?”

“Did anyone see either of you two?” asked Emperor Marak.

Rejji and Lyra shook their heads.

“So all three temples are empty right now,” nodded the Torak. “Axor go back to Changragar, but instead of returning here, use one of the other doors. Determine where you are and then use the third door before returning here.”

“You want to see if the three doors all lead to the same place?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“Exactly,” nodded Marak. “If that is the case, that means that the three of us can meet in any of the locations whenever we want.”

Axor nodded and disappeared behind the bookshelves.

“That also means that Kaltara expects us to need that capability,” frowned Lyra. “Those doors were not put there merely for convenience. What would cause the need for such portals?”

“I am not sure,” frowned the Torak. “We must give this a great deal of thought. I feel as if Kaltara is trying to tell us something here, and we are not understanding it.”

“Each door leads to its respective temple,” Axor declared as he stepped into the library and closed the bookshelf. “To return here, one must use the door for the temple that they are currently in.”

“This is something that we must think about later,” declared Rejji. “It will be morning in a few hours. We must get some sleep before dawn.”

Marak and Lyra nodded, and all five of them moved to the entry foyer and bedded down for the night.

* * *

Morning came early for the Star of Sakova. Lyra rose and wiped the sleep from her eyes. Wyant was on sentry duty. He saw her rise and immediately got a mug of coffee for her.

“Any problems during the night?” Lyra asked.

“Not a one,” answered Wyant. “Should I get the rest up?”

“You should make some fresh coffee first,” Lyra said as she took a sip of hers. “I am going to the prayer chamber for a few minutes. Get them up as soon as the coffee is ready. It will be light soon.”

Wyant nodded as Lyra took a torch and headed for the prayer chamber. Once inside the chamber, the Star of Sakova knelt in prayer. She prayed for strength during the coming conflict, and for wisdom concerning the use of the doors. When she was done, she returned to the entry foyer. Everyone was up and moving about.

“How do we approach this confrontation today?” Lyra asked Emperor Marak.

“Temiker, Axor, and LunarSigh are upstairs on the balcony now,” answered the Torak. “Temiker is creating a fog that will encompass the entire plaza. Axor and LunarSigh are using air tunnels to broadcast their voices far to each side of the temple. The intent is to draw the hellsouls between here and the center of the plaza off to both sides so that we can march up the center without getting killed.”

“Good,” nodded Lyra. “In the center of the plaza we will create the diamond?”

“Yes,” nodded Marak. “As we discussed in the village, you will face the palace, while LunarSigh faces this temple. Temiker will face the city gates, while Axor will face away.”

“A diamond of mages,” smiled the Star of Sakova. “The hellsouls will not be able to approach from any angle.”

“Exactly,” nodded the Torak. “Rejji and I will stand in the center of the diamond. If any Hellsouls do reach the mages, we will strike out at them.”

“And our warriors will not come into play until the Qubari army has the hellsouls on the run?” questioned Lyra.

“Correct,” agreed the Torak. “They are to provide cover for our retreat should something go terribly wrong. I do not expect that will happen, but we always need a contingency plan.”

“I agree,” nodded Lyra. “May the hellsouls finally find peace today.”

The three mages descended the staircase and gathered by the front doors.

“The fog is in place,” declared Temiker. “As best we can tell, there are no hellsouls between us and the center of the plaza.”

“But we must be quick,” added Axor. “They will not pursue the false voices that we broadcast for long. They will drift back to the plaza.”

“Let’s do it,” Lyra said.

Mobi and Wyant moved the table from in front of the doors. Gunta and Halman opened the doors and immediately drew their swords. Emperor Marak drew the Sword of Torak and stepped through the doors. Lyra followed with the Rapier of the Star firmly in hand. Rejji went next, the Staff of the Astor warm to his touch. Axor and LunarSigh were last, and Halman closed one of the doors completely, while Gunta closed the other door leaving a crack through which they could watch the plaza.

The Torak walked steadily with his long two-handed sword stretched before him. He counted his paces as he walked so that he could determine the approximate center of the plaza. Lyra followed, still fascinated by the warm glow that her rapier was giving off. The sounds and shrieks of the hellsouls were all around the army of six.

The Torak stopped when he felt that he had reached the center of the plaza. Lyra stepped past him, facing the palace that stood across the plaza from the temple. Rejji stood alongside the Torak, while Temiker turned to the left and took one step forward, facing the gates of the city. Axor took a step to the right and faced away from the gates, while LunarSigh turned around and faced the way that they had come.

“Are we ready?” whispered Lyra.

Five almost silent whispers replied in the affirmative as everyone but Lyra dropped to the ground and flattened themselves. Lyra cast a spell and the blue cylinder of protection rose up into the sky, its blue light muted by the fog. She quickly cast another spell, and the cylinder filled with violently rotating air. As the wind whipped around her, Lyra closed her eyes and felt the power surge within her. When she could no longer stand the tearing of the wind ripping around her, the Star of Sakova released both spells.

The blue cylinder instantly blinked out of existence, and a tremendous rush of wind blasted away from her. The magical fog was instantly blown away, along with thousands of hellsouls. While the fog was completely dissipated, the hellsouls were not. The creatures were smacked against the buildings surrounding the plaza and tossed down the avenues for some distance.

The five people accompanying Lyra jumped to their feet. The air around the plaza was clear. Horrid shrieks filled the air as the first hellsouls climbed to their feet.

“Here they come,” stated Lyra. “Show them the mercy of a complete death.”

The Star of Sakova threw the first light blade, its magical blades expanding as it traveled towards the hellsouls. The light blade tore into the hellsouls at neck level. A column of smoke rose from those decapitated, while others fell to the ground with lesser wounds. Axor, Temiker, and LunarSigh threw their own light blades, and soon the hellsouls were dying in every direction, yet still they charged. The shrieking rose to a horrendous level and a mad frenzy ripped through the creatures. It appeared as if the more that died, the greater their need to attack.

“They are closing in on us,” fretted Rejji. “The light blades can’t kill them all.”

“Where is the army?” Marak asked out loud. “They should be engaging from the rear now.”

Suddenly, a thrown stone struck LunarSigh in the temple. She cried out in pain as she fell. Everyone turned in time to see her fall. Those inside the temple also saw the Sakovan mage fall. DarkBlade slipped out of the doors and drew his sword. He raced into the plaza, slicing down hellsouls from behind with swings of his sword as he ran to rescue LunarSigh.

“We are doomed now,” Rejji said. “The army is not coming, and one point of the diamond is dead. We cannot stop this attack. We should flee.”

“Hold fast,” commanded Emperor Marak as he sheathed his sword and stepped over LunarSigh’s body.

The Torak began unleashing light blades at slight angles to either side of the charging Sakovan warrior.

“You know magic?” Rejji blurted out.

Everyone turned to see what Rejji was talking about. They saw the Torak throwing light blades at a feverous pace. Axor grinned broadly, and Temiker smiled and shook his head as they both continued attacked the hellsouls. Lyra only nodded as if she was not surprised. The Torak looked beyond DarkBlade and saw the rest of the warriors charging out of the temple.

“Our warriors are coming,” Marak announced. “We need to make the diamond bigger to accommodate them inside. Lyra, stay where you are. Axor and Temiker, step forward six paces when you get a chance.”

The Torak continued to throw light blades as he stepped six paces forward. As the warriors got closer, he had to angle his light blades more to the sides to avoid hitting them. He frowned when he saw hellsouls filling in the gap behind the warriors, but there was nothing that he could do about it. DarkBlade finally reached the diamond. He sheathed his sword as he passed the Torak and knelt beside LunarSigh.

“She is alive still,” the Sakovan warrior announced. “I will take her to the temple.”

“No,” Marak said quickly. “Your path back is already closed. Ready your bow to kill those that come close.”

“But that will not vanquish them,” objected DarkBlade.

“No,” replied Marak, “but it will slow them down some. If you see any with rocks, kill them first. The Qubari army is not coming. We must destroy them all. Instruct the others when they arrive.”

DarkBlade nodded and grabbed his bow. He looked towards the temple and saw his fellow warriors following in his path.

“I thought I was coming alone,” frowned DarkBlade. “I did not mean to cause all of us to be out here.”

“It is done,” replied the Torak. “Let us make the best of it.”

The rest of the warriors ran into the diamond, and DarkBlade instructed them to use their bows. The warriors kept close watch on the charging hellsouls. When one point of the diamond was failing to keep up with the charge, the archers focused on that area.

MistyTrail knelt beside LunarSigh and began healing the wound on her temple, while Mistake stood with knives in her hands incase any hellsoul managed to get too close. Halman and Gunta flanked Emperor Marak, while Eltor and Caldal flanked Lyra. Mobi and Bakhai shadowed Rejji, while DarkBlade and Wyant kept close to Axor.

“We are holding our own,” Lyra stated, the exertion obvious from her tone, “but nothing more. Is there no end to these creatures?”

“Not many are choosing to flee this time,” replied the Torak. “I suspect that they are aware that this is the end.”

Suddenly, LunarSigh opened her eyes. She recognized the feeling of healing magic and smiled up at MistyTrail. She looked around to get her bearings and then rose to her feet. She saw the Torak in her original position and shook her head in surprise.

“I can relieve someone,” LunarSigh announced. “Where am I needed?”

“Just join in wherever you can,” answered Lyra. “Your help might be just what we need to finish this.”

The battle dragged on until there was no longer a stream of hellsouls filing into the plaza. Puffs of smoke rose throughout the plaza and hung in the air as if a thousand campfires had just been extinguished.

“No more towards the palace,” Lyra said joyfully as she turned to help Temiker’s side of the plaza. “LunarSigh, aid Axor. We can work our way around towards the Torak, clearing the plaza as we go.”

“Some are fleeing,” Marak warned as the final tide of hellsouls broke. “This battle is almost over.”

Indeed, the remnants of the charge turned and fled from the plaza. Everyone let out weary sighs.

“I am glad that part is over,” Marak said amidst the silence. “We need to find out what happened to the Qubari army. They can be useful in taking care of those creatures that managed to escape.”

Mistake immediately wove an air tunnel to the city gates. She spoke to Voltak and discovered that the gates were locked. Everyone listened to what had happened the night before.

“You will have to open the gates again,” Marak said to Rejji. “You will need an escort. Choose whoever you want.”

The Astor looked around at all the weary faces. He did not have the heart to ask any of the warriors to escort him. He knew they were all exhausted, although not as badly as the mages.

“Mistake and MistyTrail will escort me,” Rejji announced. “Their blades may be short, but they are fresh and fast.”

“Are you sure?” asked Mobi. “You must be protected.”

“I am sure,” nodded Rejji. “We will move swiftly while the hellsouls are still looking for places to hide. On the way back we will have the entire Qubari army to protect me. Do not worry.”

The Torak grinned as Rejji, Mistake and MistyTrail left and ran towards the gates of the city.

“They will do fine,” he smiled. “Let us regroup in the temple. We need rest.”

The group returned to the temple. They closed the doors but did not barricade them. As everyone sat and relaxed to restore their energy, Lyra walked over and sat next to Marak.

“Why have you hidden your magical talents?” she asked.

“I am from Khadora,” explained the Torak. “Do you really think any of the Khadorans would have followed a mage? They were not ready for that.”

“I understand,” nodded the Star of Sakova, “but there are others that you could have told.”

“I could have told you,” agreed the Emperor, “but I chose not to. I did not wish to deal with remembering whom I had told and whom I had not. It has been my most closely guarded secret. Not even Halman and Gunta knew.”

“Goodness,” replied Lyra. “I did not realize that there was anything that they did not know about you.”

“They do not yet know that I am half Chula,” the Torak revealed.

“Will that matter to them?” asked Lyra.

“Not any more,” smiled Marak. “Nor will the fact that I am a mage. In the beginning, any of this knowledge about me could have caused things to turn out very differently, but now it does not matter any more. The Khadorans must accept the Chula. Perhaps the knowledge of my ancestry is what will make people realize that they need to unite. I do not know.”

“Your use of magic can still remain hidden,” offered Lyra. “Everyone here will remain quiet, except perhaps for the elves, but they will leave soon. I doubt that they will ever return.”

“I hope they do return,” replied Marak. “We will need all of the help that we can get in the coming times. As for my magic remaining secret, I do not have to even ask anyone here not to mention it. I am sure they will not talk about it unless it is already known. I am not sure that it needs to be secret any more, though. It almost feels good for the secret to be ended.”

“I can understand you having the ability,” probed Lyra, “but how did you develop the skills required? Someone must have been teaching you.”

“I have had tutoring over the years,” admitted Marak. “Slaves were the first to teach me. They had no reason to spread the word about my abilities. Lately the Chula have been teaching me. They truly know more about me than anyone. I have always felt that my secrets have been safe with them, more so than my Khadoran followers. The Chula have never let me down.”

“Nor will the Sakovans,” smiled Lyra. “They know that you have been sent by Kaltara as I have.”

“You are blest with the Sakovan people,” the Torak replied. “I have always felt at home in their midst.”

“The vision that you saw regarding Angragar,” asked the Star of Sakova. “Did it come true?”

“It did,” nodded Marak, “and for the better. I saw LunarSigh fall in my dream. I could not tell if she was mortally wounded. I am quite pleased that she was not.”

“Why did you not mention it?” asked Lyra. “Couldn’t we have had a chance to change the vision?”

“We might have,” frowned the Torak, “but at what cost? What if we managed to save LunarSigh, making the vision inaccurate? Would you have been struck down instead? Or myself? Or Rejji? I intentionally watched out for LunarSigh during the battle, making sure her sector was always covered. Yet I had not anticipated a thrown rock. Trying to alter the outcomes of visions is something that we need to talk seriously about. Is Kaltara showing us what must be, or is he offering us a chance to be prepared to alter our fates?”

“A good question,” Lyra frowned in thought. “Were I in your position, I am not sure what I would have done. My first impulse would have been to eliminate LunarSigh from the group, but you present a valid question about the wisdom of doing that. As it turned out, the outcome was quite pleasing. Had I substituted someone else for LunarSigh, who is to say what might have happened out there?”

“For the visions to be of help to us,” nodded the Torak, “we must discover the effects of altering them. I would prefer to experiment with a situation that is less dangerous than the one we just went through.”

“I agree,” replied Lyra. “What is our next step?”

“The Qubari army must search out the last of the hellsouls,” answered Emperor Marak. “Angragar will not be habitable until that is accomplished. Then you, Rejji, and I must enter the prayer chamber here. I have no idea what happens after that.”

“It will be in Kaltara’s hands,” smiled Lyra as she grabbed the Torak’s hand and squeezed it. “I just know that he has brought us together for a noble purpose. We will accomplish whatever he tasks us to do.”

Marak gazed into Lyra’s eyes and smiled broadly. “We will accomplish much together,” he grinned. “Perhaps even more than Kaltara has planned on.”

“Who can say what Kaltara has planned?” Lyra grinned as she put her head on Marak’s shoulder and closed her eyes.

Chapter 14

Love is in the Air

Emperor Marak walked out of the temple and wrapped his arms around himself. The cold bitter wind lifted his cape high as he crushed the frost underfoot. Marak kept his numb ears tuned to the sounds around him as he walked towards the narrow canyon. The wind intensified in the canyon until it felt as if an arctic gale had descended upon him. He pushed the cold out of his mind as he continued through the short canyon. He actually felt warmer when he emerged on the barren wasteland of the mountaintop. He stared down at the trees towering up from below, his eyes searching for any movement. He knew the Chula were down there, but he could not see any of them. He stood and waited.

His ears detected a very soft padding on the stone-covered trail. He walked to the edge and smiled when he saw a Chula coming up the trail. Riding a sleek black jaguar, the Chula came ready to attack. Only when he recognized the Torak did the Chula ease his battle stance.

“What is the Torak doing at Changragar?” asked the Chula warrior. “We were not told that you were up here. How may I serve you?”

“I need a message delivered to Tmundo,” replied Marak. “Changragar is a temple for Kaltara. It must be maintained as one.”

“It is no longer used,” countered the Chula warrior. “The Chula worship wherever they are.”

“It will be used once again,” declared the Torak. “It is to be maintained. Its rooms are to be furnished, its libraries filled with books and scrolls, its kitchens made to heat food. Replace that which is missing. Fix that which is broken. Paint what needs to be painted.”

“The message shall be delivered,” promised the Chula warrior. “I am sure that Tmundo will immediately do what is necessary. Does this mean that we must come to Changragar to worship now?”

“No,” the Torak shook his head. “The Chula are free to worship Kaltara wherever they exist, but Changragar is our monument to Kaltara. It is to be treated as such. Changragar is to be something that the Chula are proud to call their own. That is my message. Deliver it promptly.”

“It shall be as you command,” replied the Chula warrior. “Do you need a cat to ride? I will get you one before I return to the village.”

“I have no need for one,” answered the Torak.

The Chula warrior frowned with confusion. He turned the jaguar and began riding down the trail. He constantly turned to see if the Torak was still there. Emperor Marak shook his head with a slight smile and returned to the temple. He made his way to the small room behind the bookshelf and returned to Angragar. When he entered the library, Rejji and Lyra were waiting for him.

“How did it go?” asked Rejji.

“It is so cold there,” Marak replied rubbing his hands up and down his arms. “I wish the Chula had built their temple in a more hospitable area. Other than that, it went well. The poor Chula warrior will have a hard time explaining that the Torak sent the message, when Tmundo knows that I am at Angragar. I would love to see his face.”

“Will Tmundo believe the messenger?” asked Lyra.

“He will,” nodded Marak. “Even if the messenger ends up thinking that he only saw a vision of me, Tmundo will see that my words ring true. The state of Changragar is an embarrassment. Tmundo will change that.”

“Mobi returned while you were gone,” stated the Astor. “The city is clear of hellsouls. The army has searched every street and every building. There are no creatures left.”

“Are we sure?” asked Emperor Marak.

“As sure as we will ever be,” answered Lyra. “I walked around the city this morning with my rapier. I felt no warming of its hilt.”

“I did the same last night,” nodded Marak. “Good. Now we shall move on to the prayer chamber. I have a feeling that Kaltara will know if the city is not safe for the Qubari to return to.”

The Three walked out of the library to the entry foyer where the rest of the group was camped. They checked to make sure that there were no important developments requiring their attention before heading to the prayer chamber. They stepped inside and closed the door.

Once the door was closed, the prayer chamber was completely dark. Marak reached out grasped the hands of Lyra and Rejji and led them to the center of the round room. Together they kneeled in the dark.

“The Three come to you in prayer,” the Star of Sakova said.

“Give us guidance in what is to come,” added the Torak.

“So we may serve as suits Kaltara’s needs,” completed the Astor.

Suddenly, the room shook violently. The Three clung to each other’s hands as the tremors continued for several minutes. Unexpectedly, the shaking stopped and the room filled with an eerie glow. The round walls turned to visions of the city of Angragar. The buildings looked refurbished and people walked the streets. The Three turned and stared at the moving images.

“You have not disappointed me,” boomed a voice. “The Three are as one. Angragar has been restored this day and the whole world knows about it.”

The vision changed to that of a foreign city. An imposing pyramid temple rose over the city, its steps littered with bodies dressed in bright red uniforms. As the Three watched, the bodies rose and looked about in panic. They dusted off their uniforms and reformed their ranks and continued marching down the steps.

“The Island of Darkness,” Marak gasped softly.

“Yes, Torak,” boomed the voice. “The temple of the usurper. He now knows of Angragar. Your work is almost complete in Angragar. Find the Pit of Death and seal it. Only then will Angragar be truly safe. When this is done, disperse and gather the followers. The Time of Cleansing is soon upon you.”

The vision winked out and the room returned to darkness. The Three waited some time before they realized that Kaltara was not going to say anything further. They rose and left the chamber. Outside the chamber, Temiker, Mobi, and Axor waited.

“The city is open,” announced Temiker. “The jungle no longer surrounds it. The harbor is open to the sea, and the gates to the city are wide open. What does it mean?”

“It is time for the Qubari to move in,” declared Rejji. “Send word, Mobi. The Qubari have a new home.”

Mobi bowed and hurried off.

“It felt like an earthquake,” stated Temiker. “Did you feel it inside?”

“It was felt all over the world,” answered Lyra, “but it was not an earthquake. It was the hand of Kaltara.”

“We need to get back to the library,” stated Marak. “We must find references to the Pit of Death. Tell everyone to gather in the library.”

Temiker turned and left. Axor walked with the Three to the library. Soon the library was full as everyone began searching the tomes for any reference to the Pit of Death. Marak saw the elves in the corner talking among themselves. He walked over to them.

“Angragar is born again,” he stated. “The time for you to return to your homeland has arrived. I trust that you will deliver my words to your queen. I hope she receives them favorably.”

Eltor and Caldal looked at each other with disbelief. They smiled and shook their heads.

“Do you mean it?” asked Eltor. “We are free to go?”

“You have always been free to go,” smiled the Torak. “I have stated so before.”

“We didn’t believe you,” Caldal said frankly, “although I am no longer surprised by your words or actions. I have learned how wrong I have been. You are a man of honor. I thank you for all that you have done for us. Your words and more will be delivered to Queen Alycia. That is my pledge to you.”

“Thank you,” smiled the Torak. “I ask no more of you.”

“I have more to ask of you,” Eltor said hesitantly. “We would like to take Mistake and MistyTrail with us. We also need a ship. There is an old elven scout ship in the harbor. May we borrow it?”

“The ship is yours,” declared Emperor Marak. “As for Mistake and MistyTrail, I cannot give them leave to travel with you.” Marak smiled as he saw the frowns come over the faces of the elves. He continued, “They are not slaves to me or anyone else. They are free to do whatever they want. If you desire permission to take them to Elvangar, it is them that you must ask.”

Both elves grinned broadly. They bowed to Emperor Marak and raced to the far end of the library where Mistake and MistyTrail were searching for the Pit of Death.

“We are leaving this day for Elvangar,” Eltor said excitedly. “Will the two of you come with us?”

Mistake and MistyTrail looked at the elves with disbelief. They knew eventually they would be forced to make this decision, but it still shocked them. Mistake looked across the room and saw Emperor Marak looking her way. He smiled in a fatherly fashion when he saw her looking and then turned to the bookshelf and picked out a tome to read. Mistake looked up at Eltor and nodded slowly.

“I would like that very much,” she said. “I need some time to say goodbye to friends here. Where should I meet you?”

“Remember the small elven scout ship?” asked Eltor. “Emperor Marak has given it to us. We will be getting it ready for the voyage.”

“MistyTrail?” Caldal asked attentively.

“I go where my sister goes,” MistyTrail replied. “We are inseparable. I too must say my goodbyes. We will meet you at the docks.”

Caldal grinned as he and Eltor turned to leave the library. As they walked out the door, Mobi reached out and grabbed Eltor by the shoulder.

“Where are you going?” asked Mobi.

“We are going to the docks to ready a ship to return to Elvangar,” replied Eltor. “We have the Torak’s leave to do so.”

“Yes, but where are you going?” Mobi persisted.

“I do not understand the question,” frowned Eltor.

“Do you know where Elvangar is?” asked Mobi. “Do you know your stars?”

Eltor and Caldal looked at each other with confusion, but it was Eltor that answered.

“We are not sure where it is,” Eltor admitted. “I do know my stars, but a starting direction sure would be helpful. I am sure that we will find it eventually.”

Mobi grinned and handed a piece of paper to Eltor. The elf studied the diagram for several moments before looking at Mobi questioningly.

“We have always been friends of the elves,” shrugged Mobi. “Why would we not know where they lived?”

“If the humans have known all this time,” frowned Caldal, “why haven’t they come to Elvangar?”

“For the same reason that elves have not come to Angragar,” answered Mobi. “There was a break between our worlds. We agreed that we could never coexist until Angragar was awakened. That was the pledge made between the elves and the Qubari. That time has come. Travel safely, elven friends of the Qubari.”

Across the library, Mistake tugged gently on Rejji’s arm. The Astor turned and looked questioningly at Mistake. She took his hand and led him out of the library. Bakhai and MistyTrail followed for a short distance and then disappeared as they entered an empty room in the temple. Mistake and Rejji continued out of the temple and sat on the steps outside the door.

“I am leaving for Elvangar today,” Mistake said to Rejji.

“I suspected as much,” Rejji nodded sadly. “Emperor Marak asked me if it was alright to give the elves a ship to sail home in. Will you ever return?”

“Of course,” Mistake promptly replied.

Rejji looked skeptical, and Mistake sighed.

“I really don’t know,” Mistake finally said. “I have no idea about who I really am, Rejji. I have to go there to learn if I am really an elf. I don’t know if I belong in this world or that one. If I don’t go, I will never know for sure.”

“I understand,” Rejji nodded. “I would probably do the same if I were in your boots. I hope that things work out the best for you, whatever you decide. You are a very special person. I hope you know that.”

“Only to you,” smiled Mistake. “Before I met you, people couldn’t wait to get rid of me. I have never had anyone care for me.”

“You never let anyone get close enough to try,” Rejji smiled thinly. “You messed up with me I guess.”

“You will always be special to me, Rejji,” Mistake said with a tear forming in her eye. “I don’t know what else to say.”

Mistake wrapped her arms around Rejji and hugged him tight. They embraced for a long time saying nothing until Mistake finally withdrew and kissed Rejji. Tears rolled down her face as she turned and ran towards the docks.

When she reached the docks, Eltor, Caldal, and MistyTrail were already there. MistyTrail was loading several packs of rations onto the ship, while Caldal was up the mast checking the lines. Eltor helped Mistake aboard. He saw the tear stains on her cheeks, but he said nothing. Caldal suddenly shouted and pointed. Eltor looked towards the city and saw the crowd marching towards the ship. He watched in amazement as all of the humans lined the dock.

“It wouldn’t be a proper voyage without a proper farewell,” Rejji smiled weakly as he approached the ship.

Rejji thrust his arm towards Eltor. Eltor grasped the hand and Rejji pulled the elf close to him.

“Have a safe voyage, Eltor,” Rejji said softly. “Please take care of Mistake and her sister. Make sure that no harm comes to them.”

“I will make sure that she remains safe,” promised Eltor. “I hope we meet again. Although I have learned much about humans on this trip, I want to learn a great deal more. We have much in common.”

Rejji smiled thinly and released Eltor’s hand. Caldal dropped to the deck and announced loudly that they were ready to cast off the lines. Halman and Gunta moved swiftly and removed the lines from the dock. They tossed them onto the ship as Mobi gave the ship a hard shove. The elven ship drifted away from the dock as Caldal hoisted a sail. The humans waved farewell. The wind filled the sail and Eltor manned the rudder. A few minutes later the elven ship reached the mouth of the harbor.

* * *

“Take him to the Chamber of Horror,” snapped Vand. “I will not stand for such incompetence in my midst.”

The soldiers dragged the man from the throne room. Suddenly, the whole building shook. People in the throne room were thrown to the floor, but Vand remained firmly in his throne. The tremors lasted for a few minutes before they subsided. Aakuta helped Lady Mystic to her feet.

“What was that?” Aakuta asked. “An earthquake?”

“Not an earthquake,” snapped Vand as he rose and began pacing irritably before his throne. “That was not an earthquake. Angragar has awakened. Summon my generals,” he shouted. “Get them here now!”

Lady Mystic coyly reached for Aakuta’s hand. Aakuta turned to look at Lady Mystic. She nodded her head slightly towards the exit. Aakuta subconsciously nodded in return.

“Lady Mystic!” Vand shouted as they started to work their way out of the throne room.

Lady Mystic dropped Aakuta’s hand and turned and bowed to the Emperor.

“I want you to take over the interrogation of the Khadoran mage,” shouted Vand. “I want their communication magics broken.”

“She has not healed yet,” frowned Lady Mystic. “We will get nothing out of her in her current condition. The fools interrogating her damaged her greatly. She almost died. It will take time.”

“We are out of time,” yelled Vand. “Those fools have awakened Angragar. They do not know what they are doing. They must be stopped.”

“I will do what I can with her,” promised Lady Mystic.

“I don’t want promises,” shouted Vand. “I want results. If you cannot heal her enough to interrogate her, find me another Khadoran mage. I will have the knowledge of the air tunnel and a way to disrupt it. Leave me.”

Lady Mystic bowed low and moved swiftly to the exit. Aakuta followed right behind her, but she did not stop until she was downstairs in her room.

“What was all that about?” asked Aakuta. “What is going on?”

Lady Mystic paced for several moments before answering.

“Angragar is an ancient city on the mainland,” explained Lady Mystic. “It is the city where Vand originally got his powers. Since those days, Angragar has been sealed and hidden.”

“Sealed and hidden?” echoed the dark mage. “I do not understand.”

“Nor should you,” sighed Lady Mystic. “Vand was human at one time,” she explained. “He was a noble priest serving the god Kaltara. He became ill one day and when he recovered, he was never the same. He was thrown out of Angragar. It became an obsession with him ever since to rule the ancient city. He tried everything to conquer it, and failed each time. His last plan was to incite the elves to destroy the city. Somehow the elves and the city’s ruler put things together and realized what was going on. The city was magically sealed and hidden from everyone. Vand sent hundreds, no thousands, of people over the years to find it. None of them were ever heard from again.”

“But what does awakening mean in regards to this city?” asked Aakuta.

“It means that the enemy has found the city and unsealed it,” continued Lady Mystic. “That could only have happened if Kaltara is alive and working to destroy the other gods. The fact that it has awakened before our invasion means that Kaltara is winning. Vand will be in a rage for days. That is why I tried to get you out of his presence.”

“Get me out of his presence?” echoed Aakuta. “Why me in particular?”

“Because he thinks you are the enemy,” sighed Lady Mystic. “I have tried to tell him that you are no such thing, but he does not listen. He is convinced that you are working for Kaltara.”

“Incredible,” Aakuta replied. “Why would I work for some god that I do not even know?”

“Hmm,” mused Lady Mystic. “You sound so sincere, but I have to admit to having my own doubts about your sincerity.”

“Then why have you saved me from his wrath?” scowled Aakuta. “You make no sense. Vand is crazy if he thinks I even know this Kaltara, and you are starting to think just like him.”

“Why shouldn’t I think like him?” Lady Mystic said softly. “I am his daughter.”

“His daughter?” Aakuta said with shock. “You are Vand’s daughter?”

“Do you think that I am a high priestess because of my startling looks?” retorted Lady Mystic. “Only the fact that I am Vand’s daughter has kept you alive so long.”

“Why are you sticking up for me?” Aakuta asked softly.

“For a smart man, you are fairly unobservant,” replied the high priestess. “Why do you think I keep you around?”

Lady Mystic’s recent change in behavior flashed through Aakuta’s mind. He shook his head and sighed as he realized that she was right. He had been rather unobservant. Looking back it was clear that she was developing feelings for him. The quiet walks alone had grown more frequent and longer in duration. Physical contact had increased, even if it was as innocent as leaning on his shoulders or holding his hand. His mind raced as he tried to analyze his situation.

“I hope it is because you feel about me that same way that I feel about you,” Aakuta answered. “You know that I would do anything for you. Is that the reason that you are protecting me? Do you love me, Lady Mystic?”

“Love,” sighed Lady Mystic. “I never thought that I would hear that word in the same sentence as my name. I feel so foolish.”

“There is no need for you to feel foolish,” Aakuta said soothingly as he embraced Lady Mystic. “I was so afraid that any advances towards you would be taken the wrong way. You can’t imagine how thrilled I am to finally be able to say the truth to you.”

Lady Mystic held Aakuta for several moments and then pushed him away. She walked to the table and sat down. Aakuta followed her, his brow puzzling with concern. He sat across the table from her.

“There is still only so much that I can do for you,” warned Lady Mystic. “Vand might well allow a traitor in his midst for years, as long as he feels in control, but the awakening of Angragar may well change that. Vand will feel very out of control now. He will try to hurry the preparations for the invasion. He will become testy and irritable very frequently. You will not want to be around him much.”

“Then I shall stay away,” declared Aakuta. “I have no desire to enrage him.”

“If you stay away,” Lady Mystic shook her head, “he will become even more suspicious.”

The two mages sat in silence for some moments before Lady Mystic rose and started pacing again.

“There is one chance for you to stay out of his sight,” Lady Mystic said, “even if for only a little while.”

“What is it?” asked Aakuta. “I will do anything to avoid his temper right now. Over time I am sure that I can convince him that I am not the enemy he thinks I am.”

“Vand has a burning desire to learn about air tunnels,” declared Lady Mystic. “We sent a ship to the mainland some time ago. We brought back a young specimen, but she refused to share her knowledge. A special interrogator was sent for. I am not sure what happened, but the room was destroyed when we found them. The interrogator was dead. The young girl was almost dead. She has been in a coma for sometime now. Vand wants her healed and interrogated.”

“Bringing someone out of a coma is not easy,” frowned Aakuta, “especially if you want her to divulge specific information. The slightest miscalculation and you will destroy the knowledge that you are seeking.”

“Precisely why I have been advocating taking our time with her,” nodded Lady Mystic. “That is no longer an option. Vand has ordered me to take charge of her from the interrogators.”

“I can understand Vand’s urge to hurry this,” frowned Aakuta, “but that will not insure success. If she dies we will lose the chance to interrogate her.”

“She is expendable,” shrugged Lady Mystic. “If she dies, there is another solution to the problem. We can send another ship and grab another mage.”

Aakuta pondered the problems for a moment. He rose and walked across the room before turning to face Lady Mystic.

“I could go and obtain another mage,” offered Aakuta. “Surely that would show Vand that I am loyal?”

“He would never let you leave this island,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “Your only chance is to get the girl healed and get her to divulge the information needed about the air tunnel.”

“Where is this girl?” asked Aakuta with a sense of resignation. “And what can you tell me about her?”

“Her name is Rhoda,” replied Lady Mystic. “She is originally from the Raven’s Point estate in Khadora. She is as stubborn as a wasooki, and almost dead. She is kept in a storage room in the basement of the temple. I will take you there.”

Lady Mystic led Aakuta down to the basement of the temple. They marched along a long corridor towards the rear of the temple. As soon as they passed the short corridor to the Chamber of Horror, Lady Mystic stopped and produced a key. She unlocked the door and handed the key to Aakuta. The dark mage stuffed the key into a pouch and entered the room. A young woman was spread out on a table. Her arms and legs were strapped to the table.

Aakuta walked to the young woman and stared at her. Welts and bruises covered her entire body. Large red areas were obvious from some recent healing magic.

“We healed her enough to keep her alive,” offered Lady Mystic. “She had several large wounds, and the organs were hanging out. She would have died otherwise.”

“Why did you not heal the rest of her?” asked Aakuta.

“The interrogators did not want to waste the magic,” shrugged Lady Mystic. “She will die as soon as we have the information that we need. Why bother with healing her completely?”

“To give her hope,” frowned Aakuta. “If she knows that she will die, she will tell you nothing. You should fire your interrogators.”

“You can do better?” Lady Mystic asked with raised eyebrows.

“Certainly,” Aakuta said confidently. “The only problem is trying to rush it, but given the time, I will get everything you want to know out of her.”

“You won’t have a great deal of time,” warned Lady Mystic. “Vand’s patience will run out sooner or later. Get her to talk. I don’t want to have to choose between you and my father.”

Chapter 15

The Asylum

Lyra woke early, but not as early as some others in the temple of Angragar. She poured herself a cup of coffee and nodded to the Qubari soldier that was on sentry duty. She became curious when she noticed that Emperor Marak was absent from the room, even though Gunta and Halman still slept peacefully. She walked over to the sentry.

“Where has the Torak gone?” she asked softly.

“He went up the stairs some time ago,” shrugged the warrior. “I did not ask where he was going.”

Lyra nodded and turned away. She went casually to the stairs and climbed them quietly. At the top of the stairs she looked around and saw no one. She turned towards the front of the temple and continued to walk quietly. Eventually, she heard Marak’s voice and headed towards it. She found the Torak standing on the balcony overlooking the plaza. He was talking into an air tunnel. She smiled and waited several paces away for him to finish his communications. Although she had no intention of prying, she could not help hearing his side of the conversation.

“Give Captain Mynor my congratulations,” Emperor Marak said. “I want copies made of his chart immediately. I also want him to head up the construction effort on the ships that he has proposed. As for where the ships are best stationed, I will discuss this with the Star and the Astor. I think there are ports in their lands that are best suited for it.”

Lyra wondered what they would need ships for. She hoped that Marak was not planning an invasion of the Island of Darkness. That would surely be suicide.

“On the other issue,” Marak continued, “I want every mage warned, particularly those who live along the coast. Mages in the coastal areas are to have armed escorts wherever they go. They are never to be left alone. If they are threatened in any way, kill the aggressors if you must, but ensure the safety of those mages. I also want scouts along the coast. Devise some type of plan that covers the areas around the estates first. Then try to find a way to expand it to uninhabited areas.”

Emperor Marak went silent for several minutes. Lyra tried to hear what the other person was saying, but she could not.

“I understand the problems,” Marak continued. “Just try your best. It is vital to keep Vand from learning about the air tunnels. As for my return, I am not sure yet. Much is happening here, and I cannot afford to leave until certain things are accomplished. I will talk to you again tomorrow. If anything urgent develops, contact me immediately.”

The Torak dropped the air tunnel and stood leaning on the railing and staring down at the plaza. Lyra walked forward and leaned against the railing, She wrapped her arm around his arm and stood quietly.

“You need to contact StarCity today,” Marak said softly. “Vand is trying to capture mages that might divulge how the air tunnels work. If he succeeds, we will lose the only advantage that we have over him.”

“You did not even look at me,” frowned Lyra. “How did you know who it was?”

Marak turned and smiled at Lyra. “You were standing behind me since I discussed Captain Mynor’s charting of the Island of Darkness,” he grinned.

“How did you know?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“A warrior’s instinct lets him know when he is being watched,” shrugged Marak. “As to your identity, I recognized your fragrance.”

“I should have known,” smiled Lyra. “What will charting the island accomplish? And what was that about building ships?”

“Charting the island is essential,” explained the Torak. “We now know exactly where it resides, and where the fleets are being assembled. From that we may be able to guess how he will attack, although a guess is all that it will be. As for the ships, Captain Mynor has suggested a fleet of small maneuverable vessels to attack the Motangan fleet when it does attack. I think the idea has great merit. I have ordered the building of some ships, but the most likely places to use them may well be in the Sakova or Fakara. We will discuss it with Rejji later on today.”

“And the problem with mages?” prompted Lyra.

“Vand kidnapped one of my mages from Raven’s Point,” answered the Torak. “He has tried to get Rhoda to divulge the workings of the air tunnel. He has failed so far. If he continues to fail, he will attempt to kidnap another mage. We must try to stop him from doing so. We cannot afford to lose the air tunnel until we develop something better.”

“Where do you get all of this information?” asked Lyra. “How can you possibly know what Vand is doing on the Island of Darkness?”

“Fisher is an incredible man,” answered Emperor Marak. “I have wondered the same thing, but I know that Fisher will not divulge his sources. All that I know is that Fisher has a spy on the Island of Darkness. His information so far has been extremely accurate.”

“From the stories that MistyTrail told me about her journey there,” replied Lyra, “that spy must be extremely brave. The Island of Darkness is a very dangerous place to be.”

“And the danger of that place is coming home to us,” frowned the Torak. “Let’s go to the library. The rest of the group should be getting up soon enough. I am anxious to find this Pit of Death.”

When they reached the library, Axor and Temiker were already there. They started searching the volumes of tomes for any references to the Pit of Death. Over the next hour, others came to the library and aided in the search. The library remained silent for hours as everyone devoured texts in the search. Finally, Bakhai called for everyone’s attention.

“The Pit of Death was a mythical place in Angragar,” Bakhai announced. “It was a place of healing of last resort. Those citizens who were near death went there with hopes, however small, of regaining the life that was slipping from them. It is said that those who did not die often went mad and wished that they had died.”

“Does it say where it was supposedly located?” asked Rejji.

“No,” frowned Bakhai. “It only mentions that there was a place called the Asylum that some feared might actually be the Pit of Death. Others scoffed at the idea.”

“I read something about the Asylum,” Temiker said excitedly as he put down his book and ran his finger along the shelf looking for a different tome. “It was a healing place for the terminally ill.”

Everyone waited anxiously while Temiker picked a book and began flipping pages.

“Here it is,” Temiker said. “The Asylum was a small shop in the northern section of the city. It sold elixirs and potions and also boasted of subterranean chambers that held special healing powers. Citizens had called for the closing of the shop as many customers had reportedly gone insane after going there.”

“Mobi,” ordered the Astor, “have your men scour the northern section of the city. Find this shop called The Asylum.”

Mobi nodded and ran out of the library. Everyone else continued reading in case the shop could not be found. A while later, Mobi returned.

“We have found the shop,” he reported. “I posted sentries around it, but warned them not to enter without permission.”

“You are wise, Mobi” complimented the Star. “We should approach this Pit of Death cautiously.”

Everyone filed out of the temple and followed the Qubari warrior to the northern section of the city. The Qubari shaman Yltar was already there and waiting.

“Yltar,” smiled Rejji. “What are you doing here?”

“I escorted the first group of citizens to resettle Angragar,” answered Yltar. “When I heard that something exciting had been found, I decided to see what is happening. I cannot describe the feeling of walking through the gates of Angragar. It is like a dream coming true. For thousands of years the Qubari have waited for this day. Chief Dumo is bringing another group in a few hours. What is all the excitement about?”

“We have been command by Kaltara to seal the Pit of Death,” answered Rejji. “We believe the subterranean chambers below this shop is that place.”

“The Pit of Death is mythical,” frowned Yltar. “It is the supposed home of Dobuk, the Fallen One.”

“Who is this Dobuk?” asked Rejji.

“In the beginning,” the shaman explained, “Kaltara allowed those that were holy and faithful to rule portions of his domain. Dobuk was one of those, but he chose to defy Kaltara and seized rule of all domains for himself. Kaltara learned of this deceit and punished Dobuk. He was transformed into a hideous demon that none could gaze upon and remain sane. He was banished for all time and named the Fallen One. He has vowed revenge upon Kaltara.”

“Could Vand be this Dobuk?” asked Bakhai. “Is that how he has managed to live for thousands of years?”

“More likely,” Temiker shook his head, “is that Vand is being driven by Dobuk. The records that we read indicated that Vand fell ill and sought treatment. Afterwards, he was a changed man. Perhaps he met Dobuk under this shop.”

“We must tread carefully here,” warned Axor. “If to gaze upon this demon can cause insanity, one of us must be chosen to go first. The one cannot be one of the Three. They will be needed to defeat Vand.”

“I will go first,” offered Mobi. “Kaltara will protect me.”

“Kaltara is already protecting us in a way,” Axor shook his head. “We have been warned about the potential danger before we descended into the Pit of Death. Still, I think the person that goes first should have the capability of magic to detect any traps that may be waiting for us. I will go first.”

“That is acceptable,” Marak said after looking to Lyra and Rejji for any signs of disagreement. “The Three will accompany Axor below. The rest of you should wait up here.”

Lyra lit a torch and handed it to Axor. The Chula shaman stepped into the shop, and the Three followed him. He found a flight of stairs leading down, and slowly led the way. Beneath the shop was a cellar. Racks of potions and elixirs filled the cellar, and Axor searched for a while before finding another set of stairs heading down. The next level down was roughly hewn from rock. It was more like a cave than a cellar. There were several rows of stone benches around a pool of bubbling mud.

“Bathing in mud used to be a cure for certain ailments,” commented Lyra. “Do you think this is the Pit of Death?”

“I think we need some sure sign that we have found it,” remarked the Torak.

Axor nodded and started probing the nooks and crannies of the cave. He disappeared around the corner of an aberration in the rock wall and called to the others.

“There is a door here,” Axor declared. “It has the symbol of a skull above it. It reminds me of the doors behind the library wall just a bit too much for comfort. Should I open it?”

“Wait,” Marak shouted. The Torak turned to Rejji and Lyra and spoke softly, “There is a danger in going further, but also a danger in not exploring. What do you two think?”

“Is there a possibility of letting Dobuk into Angragar by opening the door?” asked Rejji.

“I think there is,” answered Lyra, “but one has to wonder where the door leads to.”

“If it does lead to Dobuk,” mused Marak, “why does he not use it to let Vand return and conquer Angragar?”

“Perhaps he does not want Vand to return to Angragar,” shrugged Lyra. “How much misery could Vand cause by capturing an empty city? Especially one that is isolated from everyone and hidden in the jungle?”

“You mean that Vand is a plaything for the demon?” asked Rejji.

“Perhaps,” nodded Lyra. “Dobuk must derive pleasure by inducing suffering. He has driven Vand into a frenzy to attack us and destroy us. What does Dobuk gain from the capture of Angragar?”

“Right now he would gain little,” nodded Marak, “but in a little while, it will once again become the capital of Fakara. Maybe that is why Kaltara has ordered it sealed. Perhaps by sealing this portal, we will force Dobuk to remain where he is.”

“And where is he?” asked Rejji. “We have no idea.”

“I do have an idea of his location,” countered Emperor Marak. “I believe that he resides in the temple on the Island of Darkness.”

“What leads you to believe that?” asked Lyra.

“My spy reported that something lived in the temple that Vand was required to visit once a day,” explained the Torak. “It is something that Vand fears. It makes sense to me that it could be Dobuk.”

“That would make sense,” nodded Lyra. “What else would Vand fear except Dobuk and Kaltara, and I doubt that that Vand visits Kaltara daily.”

“This could also be an opportunity,” Marak continued. “If this door leads to the temple on the Island of Darkness, our troops could attack through it and strike the head of our enemy. We might be able to end the invasion before it begins.”

“No,” Lyra replied emphatically. “The door would lead to the presence of Dobuk. Our armies would be instantly turned into ghouls for the Fallen One. Besides, if we merely kill Vand, Dobuk will choose another to lead the attack. I cannot agree to such a plan.”

“Lyra is right,” nodded Rejji. “While it is tempting to sneak through and attack Vand, the potential cost is much too great. We have no idea what awaits us on the other side of that door.”

“That is something that I can find out,” offered Axor.

“Not you, Axor,” Marak shook his head. “You cannot be allowed to go any further.”

“If you think that you are going through that door, Marak,” threatened Lyra, “you had better think again. I will not allow it.”

Marak smiled at Lyra and shook his head. “That is not what I was thinking, but I did not expect such assertiveness from you.”

Lyra blushed when she realized that her hand was on the hilt of her rapier. She removed her hand and shook her head with embarrassment.

“What exactly did you mean?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“Let’s assume that whoever walks through that door will have their mind taken over by Dobuk, as you suggested would happen to the army,” explained Emperor Marak. “If that is true, we cannot afford to send anyone who has intimate knowledge of our plans. We certainly cannot send anyone who knows how to use an air tunnel.”

“I agree,” Axor nodded. “I was not thinking of the potential problems. Still, we must know what lies beyond the door.”

“Not necessarily,” countered the Torak. “What we need to know is if our assumptions are valid as to whether the door is similar to the ones in the temple. If it is similar, it will lead to a small closet requiring the closing and opening of the door to go anywhere. If it is as I have described, we do not need to know where it will lead. We merely need to seal it.”

“Yet it could lead to yet another section of this cavern,” stated Rejji. “So we need to open this door before we seal it. And we need someone who has little knowledge of our plans to do it. Is that where we stand?”

“That is the situation,” nodded the Torak. “That someone is likely to face death, either by the hand of Dobuk, or by my hand. I will not allow an agent of Dobuk to come back through that door, even if it one of our own.”

“The only source of volunteers is the Qubari,” frowned Rejji. “Everyone who came with us already knows too much. I will speak to Yltar.”

Rejji turned and ascended the stairs out of the cavern. He climbed to the ground level and exited the shop. The Astor explained the problem to Yltar, and the head shaman selected a warrior after a moment of thought. He spoke in whispers to the Qubari warrior for several minutes before escorting him to Rejji.

“This is Panka,” Yltar said to Rejji. “He is willing to offer his life for the Astor.”

“Are you sure, Panka?” Rejji asked as his throat constricted with the thought of what he was asking this man to do. “There is a great chance that you will die this day.”

“I am sure,” Panka declared. “To die in the service of the Astor is an honor for the Qubari. My Uncle Yltar will care for my mother if I am stricken. I can ask for no more.”

Tears started to well up in Rejji’s eyes, and he turned away from Panka. He started walking into the shop as he heard Yltar speak.

“Follow the Astor, Panka,” Yltar said loudly. “He will show you what to do. Know that your name will honored forever in the memories of the Qubari.”

The Qubari warriors shouted Panka’s name as he followed the Astor into the shop. Rejji led the way down to the mud pool and introduced Panka to the others.

Marak bowed to the Qubari warrior and then placed his hands on the man’s shoulders.

“Your bravery is commendable, Panka,” smiled the Torak. “I hope that you have many more chances to demonstrate it, but this day is a test of it. There is a door around the corner. One who does not have the knowledge that we possess must open it. We want you to open it and describe what you see.”

“That is all?” asked Panka.

“That is all,” nodded the Torak as he wondered if he should explain more or let the Qubari remain brave in his innocence, “but it involves great danger.”

“I do not want to know anything further,” Panka declared. “It is better if I just obey your instructions. Where is this door?”

“Around this corner,” pointed Axor.

Panka walked around the corner and opened the door. The Torak drew his sword and motioned the others to get behind him.

“It is a small room,” Panka called from around the corner. “There is nothing in the room. What do I do next?”

“Close the door and return to us,” Rejji said as he sighed. When Panka emerged from around the corner, Rejji smiled at him. “You have shown your bravery, Panka. I want you to be one of my personal guards.”

“Do you mean like the two that the Torak has?” Panka asked with excitement. “I am to be one of the Astor’s shadows?”

“Yes, Panka,” smiled Rejji. “I could not ask for anyone as loyal and brave as you are. Return to the surface for now.”

Panka bowed low to Rejji and excitedly climbed the stairs. Rejji exhaled loudly.

“I hope that I never have to ask someone to do something like that again,” the Astor declared. “It did not feel right to me.”

“Yet you are offering your life to Kaltara in the same vein,” smiled Marak. “Panka will serve you well. Find another with such qualities and train them well.”

“Well,” interjected Lyra, “we have the information that we need. Now we must seal this pit forever.”

“And how will you do that?” asked Axor. “Tremendous force will be needed for such a feat. We are two levels below the ground. I cannot imagine how many mages will be required for this, or how much time it will take them.”

“It is time to return to the surface,” announced the Star of Sakova. “Rejji, have everyone move out of the northern section of the city.”

Axor looked at the Star of Sakova as if she were crazy. Rejji merely nodded, and Marak actually smiled. They climbed the stairs and emerged on the street. Rejji started snapping off orders to the Qubari warriors and the others who had gathered to see what would happen.

“Can I stay and watch?” Marak asked Lyra as everyone began to leave the area.

“Can you create a shield around three of us?” asked Lyra as she looked at Rejji.

“I can,” nodded Marak.

“Good,” nodded Lyra as she started walking away from the shop. “I think you and Rejji should be here. Call him over while I prepare.”

Marak waved Rejji over and explained that they were staying. He erected a shield to surround the three of them where Lyra had chosen to stand, which was almost a block away from the shop.

Lyra closed her eyes and said nothing for a long time. Rejji and Marak did not speak, but the Torak saw Lyra’s skin begin to ripple. He watched with concern. The Star’s arms rose, the fingers of her hands intertwined to make one fist. The skin of her arms no longer rippled. Instead her flesh resembled more of a series of waves crashing upon the beach. Marak could not imagine the magnitude of the power that was building within the young mage.

Unexpectedly, a tremendous burst of power shot from Lyra’s hands. The air thundered as it split apart from the speeding projectile. Marak stared at the distant shop. His mouth opened in awe as the building suddenly disappeared. It did not cave in nor collapse. It simply disappeared, a huge cloud of dust rising skyward. The rest of the buildings on the block rocked and slowly collapsed in on themselves.

Showers of dust began to drift down from the sky. Lyra staggered and leaned on Marak as she grabbed his arm for support. The Torak stepped behind Lyra and wrapped his arms around her. Her body was shaking with exhaustion, and Marak shouted to Rejji to get LunarSigh. Rejji turned and ran as Marak eased Lyra down to the street and sat beside her.

It was several minutes before Lyra opened her eyes. Several more minutes passed before Rejji returned with LunarSigh. The Sakovan mage immediately began casting spells on the Star of Sakova.

“She is just exhausted,” commented LunarSigh. “There is no damage to her. She will be better in a few minutes.”

Marak rose and paced back and forth, his eyes constantly torn between the damaged block of buildings and the Star of Sakova. A few minutes later, Lyra groaned. Marak turned and knelt by her side. He took one of her hands and held it between his. Lyra smiled up at him. After a few minutes, Lyra said that she wanted to get up. Marak rose and pulled her to her feet. She was still a little unsteady, but she pointed to the destroyed block.

“Let me see what is left,” Lyra said. “We must make sure that it is sealed.”

Marak wrapped his arm around Lyra and guided her towards where he thought the shop had been. Most of the block of buildings had been reduced to fine rubble, but the shop area had been turned into a deep depression covered by thick glass. The glass still glowed red and seemed to flow into ever crack and crevice below it. Lyra smiled and nodded in satisfaction.

“How did you do that?” asked Rejji as he and LunarSigh arrived.

“I didn’t,” answered Lyra. “Kaltara did. Cover the block with grass and trees. Let a pleasant park dedicated to Kaltara grow over this site. It is no longer the Pit of Death.”

“Is it safe for the others to return?” Rejji asked. “I am sure that the thunder has them worried. They will want to see what has been done.”

Marak scooped Lyra up into his arms. He started carrying her away and called over his shoulder to Rejji.

“The people may return,” shouted the Torak. “Instruct them to create the park.”

“I can walk you know,” Lyra smiled up at Marak.

“You have done enough for one day,” Marak smiled back. “You are going to relax for the rest of the day, and I going to stay by your side to make sure that you do. Do not try to dismiss me.”

“That thought never even crossed my mind,” grinned Lyra. “Carry me away.”

Chapter 16

Alamanda

A long string of islands, like hopping stones across a pond, appeared off the bow of the ancient elven scout ship. MistyTrail roused Mistake from her nap and pointed to them. Mistake sat up and stared at the islands.

“Those must be the Barrier Islands,” Mistake said as she peered over the bow rail. “It doesn’t look like anyone lives on them. Are we getting close to Elvangar?”

“I don’t know,” shrugged the Sakovan warrior as she nodded towards the stern. “I suspect that we might be. Eltor and Caldal have been arguing for over an hour.”

“What about?” asked Mistake.

“I am not sure,” replied MistyTrail, “but I think it has to do with the trouble they are going to be in when we get to Elvangar. I guess they hadn’t really thought much about it until they were actually on their way home.”

“What do you think it will be like?” asked Mistake. “Elvangar I mean. Eltor and Caldal have talked so little about it that I do not know what to expect.”

“I have no idea,” frowned MistyTrail. “Part of me is curious to discover it, but another part of me is anxious about it. If the elves are forbidden from passing these Barrier Islands, how will we ever get home?”

“Home,” Mistake echoed forlornly. “I never really had a home. I envy the life that you have had. Do you miss it?”

“I do,” MistyTrail admitted after a long pause. “I would not leave your side to return there, but I do think about my friends often. It was a home.”

“I didn’t give the Sakova a fair chance,” frowned Mistake. “I am sorry for the way I acted while I was there. Perhaps we will return there someday. Let’s go see what Eltor and Caldal are arguing about.”

Mistake and MistyTrail moved to the stern. Eltor and Caldal stopped talking when they saw that they had company.

“Don’t stop arguing on our account,” said Mistake. “We want to listen in and see where our future lies.”

“We weren’t arguing,” retorted Caldal.

“Yes, we were,” argued Eltor. “They may not understand what we are discussing, but they have a stake in this decision as well as we do.”

“What were you discussing?” asked MistyTrail.

“Our approach to Elvangar,” answered Eltor. “There are two ways that we can go home. One is safe, but will lead to immediate capture by the elders. The other is more dangerous, but will allow us to see our friends and family before we give ourselves up.”

“Perhaps we can help you talk this through,” suggested Mistake. “Tell us of the two approaches.”

“Elvangar has only one approach from the sea,” replied Caldal. “There is a magical entrance through the jungle to the Gates of Elvangar.”

“The Gates of Elvangar are not really gates,” interrupted Eltor. “There is a narrow channel that passes through a towering cliff. That channel is called the Gates of Elvangar. Sentries are always posted atop the cliffs, and they see every vessel approaching. After we pass through the channel, we will be immediately seized and hauled before the elders.”

“Can’t you sail to someplace other than the docks?” asked Mistake. “Is the harbor so small that you will not be able to?”

“The harbor is huge,” replied Eltor, “but we will not be free to sail anywhere. Two armed ships will meet us, one on each side. They will lash our ship to one of them and tow us to a dock. If we try to deviate from the course, or jump overboard to swim somewhere else, they will kill us. That is why we will not be able to talk to anyone before we are imprisoned.”

“The other approach is by foot,” frowned Caldal. “We would have to abandon this magnificent ship along the coast and then trek through a dangerous jungle. There is a good chance that we would not survive to get to Elvangar.”

“We would survive,” interrupted Eltor. “We have been in jungles before and survived. Besides, we would reach our village before the elders knew that we had returned.”

“There are no guards to stop you?” asked MistyTrail. “That sounds rather lax for a people who cherish their isolation.”

“There are guards,” nodded Eltor, “but they are guards from our village. They will capture us and then send a runner to the city. The elders will send guards to take us away. Still, we will have a few hours to greet old friends and let them know that we are alright.”

“That means a lot to you, doesn’t it, Eltor?” asked MistyTrail.

“It does,” nodded Eltor. “We are likely to be imprisoned for some time. It is the only way that we will have to say goodbye to those we love.”

“And you want to just give yourselves up, Caldal?” asked MistyTrail.

“It is the right thing to do,” nodded Caldal. “We have broken the law. I think we should eagerly surrender and ask for mercy from the elders. If we enter through the jungle, it will appear that we were trying to sneak back into Elvangar and hide our transgressions from the elders. I doubt that any mercy would be extended towards us.”

“What will happen to MistyTrail and me?” asked Mistake. “We haven’t broken any laws yet.”

“You will be hailed as heroes,” replied Eltor. “Or special guests. I am not sure which.”

“Heroes?” frowned Mistake. “Why?”

“Because you rescued us from the Island of Darkness,” explained Eltor. “You are heroes. You are also special because you are elves born in a foreign land. The elders will have many questions for you. You will probably dine with the queen on more than one occasion.”

“Regardless of our method of entry?” asked MistyTrail. “People sneaking into the Sakova were never warmly welcomed.”

“Another reason to give ourselves up,” frowned Caldal.

“I don’t think it matters,” argued Eltor. “It will be obvious that we brought Mistake and MistyTrail to Elvangar. How we decide to enter will have no reflection on them.”

“I have to agree with Caldal,” volunteered MistyTrail. “If Elvangar is similar to the Sakova, it is best to be upfront and get it over with. It removes all doubt about your sincerity and your willingness to face up to your punishment.”

Eltor sighed and hung his head. He stared at the floorboards and said nothing. Mistake’s lips pressed tightly together as she watched him.

“I think it is important for Eltor to say goodbye to his friends and family,” Mistake declared. “The jungle may be dangerous, but we have faced danger before and persevered. It is not like he is trying to avoid his punishment. He is just using his free time wisely before he is sentenced.”

“That brings us back to a stalemate,” Caldal shook his head. “How will we decide this?”

“What is there to decide?” asked Mistake. “We are all going to end up in the same place. MistyTrail can sail with Caldal through the Gates of Elvangar. I will trek through the jungle with Eltor. We will meet in the city, and everyone will be happy.”

Eltor brightened considerably and took Mistake’s hand. He looked up and smiled at her. Caldal smiled and nodded.

“So it shall be then,” Caldal declared. “To each his own.”

“I cannot leave Mistake,” frowned MistyTrail. “I promised.”

“You are not leaving me, MistyTrail,” smiled Mistake. “We are going to the same place, but by different routes.”

“You will only be apart for a day,” added Eltor. “Set course for Alamanda.”

Caldal nodded happily and complied. The ship turned slightly as the Barrier Islands grew small behind them. Several hours later, a coastline came into view. They watched as the land drew closer. Several tiny white spots ran along the coast, visible only because they contrasted with foliage of the jungle behind them.

“What are they?” asked Mistake as she pointed to the white areas.

“Ancient elven cities,” replied Eltor. “At one time the elves lived along the coast as well as the interior. That was before the attack by Angragar.”

“Vand,” frowned Mistake.

“Vand,” agreed Eltor. “The ruins stand as a testament to the elven need to remain isolated. We are forbidden to live outside the jungle ring that surrounds us. Oh, how I would love to live on the coast with my ship anchored in front of my house. That can never be, though.”

“Is Alamanda one of the ruins?” asked MistyTrail. “Is that where we are heading?”

“It is the most famous of the ruins,” nodded Eltor. “It is famous not for being attacked, but as the birthplace of Kieran. Only one elf escaped the slaughter that day. It was a young lad named Kieran. He ran all day to carry the word of the attack by ships flying the flag of Angragar.”

“And for this his name is remembered after thousands of years?” questioned Mistake.

“No,” Caldal shook his head. “He is not remembered for his heroic feat. In fact, he is not remembered because of Alamanda, but Alamanda is remembered as his birthplace. Kieran is revered as the greatest elven magician to have ever lived. He was but a student when the attack destroyed the city. He grew up to be not only a great magician, but also the king of the elven people.”

They watched silently as the ruins grew larger. Eventually, Eltor ran to the bow as the ship entered a small natural harbor. He pointed to something unseen, and Caldal steered away from it.

“There are still remnants of stone pillars underwater,” Caldal said as he answered the unasked question. “It is best to avoid them. We have sailed into this harbor many times before. It is our favorite overnight spot when we go fishing.”

Caldal slid the ship onto the beach. Eltor jumped off and dragged the anchor onto the beach and set it. He returned to help Mistake and MistyTrail off the ship. Caldal jumped down and the four of them walked along the beach. Eltor spotted a raft and pointed to it. He ran towards it with Caldal on his heels. Mistake and MistyTrail walked towards them.

“It is crude,” remarked Caldal as he gazed at the simple raft.

It had a mast of sorts and a tattered sail still flapping in the gentle breeze. Fish skeletons littered the roughhewn deck.

“What do you make of it?” asked Eltor. “I have never seen such a sight here before.”

“Nor I,” agreed Caldal. “I suspect that it just washed up here. It is hard to imagine anyone sailing the seas on it.”

“It would be fine for along the coast,” mused Eltor. “Maybe we should secure it. After we give up the elven scouting ship, we won’t have a boat any more. At least we could sail along the coast on it.”

“Along the coast would be fine,” nodded Caldal as if he had another thought entirely. “We will talk about it later. Let’s build a fire and cook a meal.”

Mistake and MistyTrail explored the ruins while Eltor and Caldal built a fire and cooked a meal. The ruins were not much to look at. There were no partially formed buildings to investigate. Instead all that was left of the city of Alamanda were piles of sun-bleached rocks. Some piles were higher than others, but it was not an interesting walk. They returned to the beach.

The four adventurers ate a warm meal and relaxed on the sand. Caldal spent some time cleaning up the abandoned raft and then returned.

“Why did you bother?” asked Eltor. “The sea is only going to reclaim it soon.”

“I don’t think so,” grinned Caldal. “I think the elders will reclaim it.”

“The elders?” frowned Eltor. “Why would they ever bother?”

“Because it is what MistyTrail and I are going to sail through the Gates of Elvangar tomorrow,” he replied enthusiastically. “What we arrive on will be confiscated by the elders as part of our punishment. Why give up the scout ship when we can offer up an old raft?”

“And we can moor the scout ship here at Alamanda,” Eltor nodded excitedly. “That is brilliant. When our punishments have been fulfilled, we will find the ship here and claim it.”

“Exactly,” nodded Caldal.

“Won’t someone else discover it in the meantime?” asked Mistake.

“I don’t think so,” answered Eltor as he pointed along the beach. “Down there is the outlet of a small river. We can drag the ship up the river and hide it in the jungle foliage. No one will ever find it unless they know where to look. It will still be there when we want it.”

The four adventurers talked for a couple of hours while the sun disappeared and the stars came out. They slept on the beach and woke with the first rays of dawn. Eltor and Caldal walked the elven scout ship along the beach and disappeared into the jungle. MistyTrail stared at the old raft with disdain.

“Having second thoughts?” chuckled Mistake.

“I have seen better rafts in ponds,” frowned MistyTrail. “The people who built it were not very skilled in woodworking. I wonder which trip will be more dangerous?”

“I imagine that they will both be interesting,” replied Mistake. “I think it is important for each of them do as they wish. Don’t worry, sister, we will be together again tomorrow.”

MistyTrail sniffed and hugged Mistake. When Eltor and Caldal returned, MistyTrail broke the embrace and rose. Caldal offered his hand, and MistyTrail took it.

“Tomorrow,” MistyTrail smiled thinly as Caldal led her towards the raft.

Eltor and Mistake watched as the small raft left the harbor and turned along the coast.

“She will be fine,” consoled Eltor. “Let’s get started so we are not late to the village.”

They climbed over the rocks of the ruined city and slid into the jungle. Eltor led the way while Mistake followed several paces behind. The trail was narrow, nothing more than a game trail leading deeper into the jungle. Mistake marveled at how much the jungle was like the Qubari Jungle, and yet unlike the jungle on the Island of Darkness. She noticed the same plants and animals as the Qubari Jungle. She soon realized that the jungle was probably created with magic as the Qubari jungle had been. That was the difference. The jungle on the Island of Darkness was probably a natural jungle.

“Are there tyriks in this jungle?” Mistake asked Eltor.

“A few,” nodded Eltor, “but do not worry about them. They do not inhabit this area of the jungle. Wild boars and large cats are the main troubles that we will face. I will be ready for them.”

“And snakes?” asked Mistake as she saw a long, fat snake hanging from a moss covered tree.

“Oh, yeah,” nodded Eltor. “And snakes. I forgot about them. Caldal and I use to play in the jungle when we were younger. It has been some time since we have been through here. After we learned to sail, we spent much time doing that rather than hiking.”

“You played in the jungle as youngsters?” frowned Mistake. “Why?”

“Because it was there,” shrugged Eltor. “There were older kids who protected us, and we never went very far. Whenever we went to the coast, we had a very large group. The animals are not foolish. They avoided the large groups, so we were pretty safe.”

“Is there any chance that you can sneak into your village without getting caught?” Mistake asked after several hours of silent walking.

“None,” Eltor shook his head. “Elvangar is very well protected. It has always been so.”

“Since the attack of Vand,” corrected Mistake.

“Yes,” conceded Eltor, “since Vand. I wish Vand had never lived. I now know that humans and elves once lived in peace. I wish it were still so. The people who raised you are honest decent folks. I think they have much in common with the elves.”

“Well,” replied Mistake, “not actually the people who raised me. They were despicable people. Well, the woman was anyway. The man died when I was young. But I don’t think they were typical of humans. I used to think that they were, but I have learned different since. I imagine the elves are much the same. There must be good and bad elves?”

“There are,” nodded Eltor. “Why else would we need laws and prisons? We will talk about it after we leave the jungle. I must remain vigilant for now.”

A short while later, a figure grabbed Eltor as he walked past a large tree. The elf turned to stare at his attacker. The creature was as large as an elf, but it was not an elf. It had smooth leathery skin and an odd orange tuft astride its head. Its ears were sharp and pointy, and its mouth was as small as a button. Eltor frowned at the strange creature. It did not appear to be threatening even though it had grabbed him. It mostly held him close while it sniffed the air around him. Suddenly, the creature opened its mouth to speak.

“Elf, Tokak!” yelled the creature. “I have an elf!”

Eltor saw the button of a mouth open to a wide cavern of long sharp teeth. The creature’s eyes gleamed with excitement, and spittle sprayed the elf. Eltor screamed and tried to back away, but the creature’s hold was too strong. Its sharp teeth descended towards Eltor’s neck.

“Tiny!” shouted Mistake. “Put Eltor down immediately.”

The creature turned to stare at Mistake, who had just appeared on the trail. Its mouth instantly closed to a button, and its forehead creased in confusion. Slowly, it released its hold on Eltor. The elf scrambled backwards until he was alongside Mistake. He started to pull his sword.

“Leave it sheathed,” Mistake warned softly. “Tiny is a friend. Aren’t you, Tiny?”

“I remember you,” Tiny said, still frowning with confusion, “but that was a different place.”

Suddenly, the ground rumbled. Mistake knew what was coming, but Eltor did not. She took his hand calmly and squeezed it.

“Be polite,” she warned Eltor. “The mother is coming.”

Eltor tried to calm himself as he watched the huge creature push her way through the underbrush. Tiny looked expectantly and grinned as the massive troll emerged from the bushes and blocked the trail.

“Elf, Tokak!” grinned Tiny. “I smelt it real close. It is elf.”

Tokak’s large bulbous nose sniffed the air. Her large ears flapped, and her eyes stared at Eltor.

“Hello, Tokak,” Mistake said as she spread her lips in a broad smile. “How did you and Tiny get across the sea?”

Tokak seemed to notice Mistake for the first time. Her eyes shifted to the female elf and she shook her head.

“You said that you were not an elf,” Tokak said accusingly. “There is no fire to mask the smell this day. You are elf.”

“I didn’t know anything about elves before,” replied Mistake. “How could I possibly have known that I was one? I was raised by humans.”

Tokak did not reply. Her mouth yawned open, and Eltor twitched at the sight of massive sharp teeth. The huge troll seemed to be weighing some unasked question. Mistake decided to interrupt before the troll came to a decision.

“You have not greeted me as a friend,” sniffed Mistake. “Tokak declared that we would be friends for life. Doesn’t Tokak honor her word?”

Tokak frowned and stared at Mistake. Slowly she nodded her head.

“Mistake is a friend,” declared Tokak. “She will always be our friend, Tiny. You may not eat her.”

“I caught the other one,” pointed Tiny. “He is elf, too. Can I eat him?”

Tokak grinned broadly and nodded.

“Wait!” shouted Mistake. “Eltor is my friend. I would be very hurt if you ate my friend. Then we would not be friends anymore, and Tokak said we would always be friends. Therefore, you cannot eat Eltor.”

Tiny pressed her lips tightly together and began stomping her feet on the ground. Tokak frowned in confusion. She looked from Mistake to Eltor and back again.

“You are trying to trick Tokak,” the large troll said.

“I am just being friendly,” insisted Mistake. “A friend of a friend is a friend. Now Eltor is your friend, too. How did you cross the sea? And why?”

The troll seemed to accept the argument as she sighed, “Tyriks spread too far in the other jungle. Tiny almost ended up in a web. We could not stay there any more. Tokak built a raft and came here. No tyriks here. Tiny is very happy.”

“Many elf smells here,” Tiny nodded her head enthusiastically. “I like it here.”

“Hunting elves is dangerous,” warned Mistake. “There are thousands of them here. Eating them may cause them to hunt you down. I would not like to see that. I don’t want my friends hurt.”

“Thousands?” Tiny echoed gleefully.

“Elves are a delicacy,” shrugged Tokak. “Too many is not good for trolls, but they are tasty. We will be careful.”

“Right,” Mistake nodded as she swallowed hard. “Well, we need to get going. Maybe I will come back and visit if that is alright with you?”

“Mistake is a friend,” smiled Tokak. “You come back, and we will eat together.”

Mistake pulled Eltor along as she moved cautiously past Tokak.

“Mistake bring elf snack when she returns,” shouted Tiny. “No bring friends.”

Mistake and Eltor moved swiftly along the trail. When they were a decent ways beyond the trolls, and long out of sight, they began running. They ran for half an hour before Eltor stopped to catch his breath.

“So that is where the raft came from,” Mistake said.

“I cannot believe that you talked our way out of that,” Eltor shook his head. “Their teeth would slice right through our bones. Where did you meet them?”

“The first day we were in the Qubari Jungle,” answered Mistake. “Rejji, Bakhai, and I were asleep. Bakhai had set a trip wire around our camp. Tiny stumbled over it. We were trying to revive the little one when the mother showed up. They are really quite nice once you get past their desire to eat you.”

“I think that I will stay away from the jungle from now on,” replied Eltor.

“How much farther to go?” asked Mistake.

“Just a little bit,” answered Eltor. “If I shouted right now, we would have company soon. In a few minutes of walking, the guards will notice us. We might as well get this over with.”

Eltor turned and began walking along the trail. Mistake followed at a distance in case something else jumped out and grabbed Eltor. A few minutes later, Mistake thought she saw movement out of the corner of her eye. When she looked back at the trail, Eltor stood facing two heavily armed elves. She walked forward to stand beside her friend.

“You have long been feared dead,” smiled one of the guards. “You are in trouble, but we welcome you home. Who is the female?”

“She is my friend,” answered Eltor. “Her name is Mistake, and I owe my life to her. She rescued me from the Island of Darkness.”

“Then she is welcome in our village,” nodded the guard. “Come and visit while the elders are informed of your return to Elvangar.”

The guards led Mistake and Eltor out of the jungle and into a glade. The villagers watched with curiosity as the visitors were escorted into the village. Mistake gazed about and wondered where the village was. She saw children running around and playing, and older people walking to and from a well. Eventually she looked up. The homes of the elves were built within the stately trees of the glade. They were hard to notice unless you were looking for them. They seemed to blend into the canopy.

A rope dropped from one of the homes. Two young male elves a little younger than Eltor slid down the ropes and rushed to greet Eltor. He greeted them fondly. Soon, others appeared and a crowd welcoming him home surrounded Eltor.

Chapter 17

Morada

MistyTrail sat on the raft with her legs wrapped around the mast. It was the only dry spot on the entire raft. Caldal did not seem to mind the water washing over his feet as he steered the craft. He had his boots tied around his neck and whistled as the waves constantly shoved the raft.

“Here we go,” Caldal called as he turned the raft towards the coast.

MistyTrail gazed at the coastline and thought that Caldal might have been in the sun too long. The thin strip of beach before the jungle was unbroken, yet Caldal was heading for it. MistyTrail hugged the mast and braced herself for the crash that she knew was to come.

Suddenly, the beach was gone. The jungle was far to each side of her as the raft floated along a wide canal. She stared ahead and saw a cliff in the distance. As they got closer, the cliff towered above them. A narrow passage was cut straight through the rock of the cliff. MistyTrail gazed upward at the tops of the cliff. She could see nothing up there, but she was sure that Caldal had told the truth. There were assuredly elves up there watching the raft approach the narrow channel.

As the raft entered the narrow defile, she felt the wind roar through it. The sail filled and Caldal moved swiftly forward. He adjusted the sail to make it smaller and then returned to the tiller. The raft moved swiftly through the channel, and as Caldal had predicted, two ships were waiting for them.

Each elven ship had a score of archers ready to fire. Caldal came forward again and lowered the sail completely. He had already prepared a line and tied it to the bow of the raft. Now he lifted the coil of rope and held it high so that the elves could see it. One of the elven ships came close, and Caldal tossed the coil of rope to one of the seamen. The seaman secured his end of the line to the stern of his ship. Caldal sat down alongside MistyTrail.

“Soon we will be at the docks,” Caldal sighed as he watched the second elven ship pull in behind the raft. “Do not make any threatening moves. The guards may demand your weapons. If they do, surrender them all. You have broken no laws yet. Do not start now.”

MistyTrail nodded and gazed about the harbor. The harbor was large, and many sailing vessels were anchored in it. The city appeared to wrap completely around the harbor with docks almost everywhere. Beyond the docks she could see portions of tall buildings, but the trees were abundant and blocked the view of most of them.

“It looks larger than I thought it would be,” MistyTrail commented. “What is it called?”

“Morada,” answered Caldal. “It is the capital city of Elvangar. It is the home of the queen and the elders. It is fairly large, comparable to the Khadoran cities that we went through. I have never felt comfortable in it.”

“Why not?” asked MistyTrail.

“I am a village boy,” answered Caldal. “In Etta, we live in the trees and know most of the other people in the village. Here most people are strangers to me, and they live in buildings on the ground. I just prefer the village.”

“I find large cities exciting,” replied MistyTrail, “but I do not think that I would enjoy living in one. I like the open country and living under the stars. StarCity was fine, but that was because I knew everyone there I guess. What will happen to me here?”

“You will probably be taken to see Queen Alycia,” shrugged Caldal. “Remember to tell her what Emperor Marak wants her to know. He is a good man and deserves an answer from the elves.”

The raft bumped against the dock where a squad of elven soldiers waited for them. Caldal and MistyTrail stepped onto the dock, and the soldiers immediately took their swords and Caldal’s bow.

“Who are you, and where are you from?” asked one of the soldiers.

“I am Caldal, and I am from the village of Etta,” answered Caldal. “I violated the law by sailing past the Barrier Islands. I am here to surrender. The woman is not from Elvangar. She saved my life after I was captured on the Island of Darkness. Her name is MistyTrail. She has not violated our laws.”

“Follow me,” the solder said as he turned and walked away from the dock.

Caldal took MistyTrail’s hand and followed the soldier. The rest of the soldiers followed them. MistyTrail gazed at her surroundings as they marched through the city. Morada was a beautiful city. Trees were everywhere and parks were abundant. The streets were spotless, and the people well groomed. Citizens did look to see whom the soldiers were escorting, but they were polite with their curiosity. They neither glared nor scowled at MistyTrail.

The group entered a stone plaza and then a building off the plaza. Caldal and MistyTrail were told to sit and wait while the soldiers continued to stand guard around them. A few minutes later, Caldal was called away. MistyTrail sat silently, trying not to stare at the soldiers. A long time passed before Caldal returned. He sat next to MistyTrail.

“We must wait until Eltor and Mistake are brought in,” Caldal said softly to MistyTrail.

“There is to be no talking,” one of the soldiers said harshly.

Caldal nodded and stared at the floor.

* * *

Most of the villagers sat around Eltor as he told the story of what happened to him and Caldal since they left the village. He had just reached the part where Mistake and MistyTrail had helped him rescue Caldal from the Chamber of Horror when the elven soldiers arrived. Eltor frowned because he knew that the messenger could not have possibly run that fast to Morada. Still, there was nothing for him to complain about. He would have to finish the story later.

Eltor and Mistake rose. The soldiers took their swords and Eltor’s bow and ordered them to follow the lead soldier. It was late in the day when they finally reached Morada and met up with Caldal and MistyTrail.

The four adventurers sat silently until Caldal and Eltor were ordered to follow a soldier. They were marched along a corridor and shown into a large room. At one end of the room was a long table. The twelve Elders of Elvangar sat behind the long table, and Eltor and Caldal were led to a spot in front of it. Soldiers stood on both sides of them.

“You are accused of violating the laws of Elvangar,” stated Malid, the Head Elder. “Caldal, you have already stated your guilt. What say you, Eltor? Are you guilty?”

“I am,” nodded Eltor. “I intentionally sailed beyond the Barrier Islands. I have returned to Elvangar to accept my punishment.”

“Accept your punishment?” asked the elder. “It is my understanding that you snuck into the village of Etta, while Caldal entered Morada and immediately confessed. How is that surrendering?”

“I surrendered to the guards in Etta,” replied Eltor. “They immediately sent a runner to Morada. I was awaiting an escort when the soldiers showed up.”

The elder looked perplexed. He summoned a soldier and whispered in his ear. The soldier nodded and withdrew from the room.

“Why did you not return with Caldal?” Malid asked.

“I suspected that my punishment would keep me from my friends and family for some time,” answered Eltor. “By surrendering at Etta, I had a small amount of time to say goodbye to those I love before being sentenced. I assure the elders that escaping justice has never entered my mind. Caldal and I have been through a terrible ordeal since leaving Elvangar. We are thrilled to be back in our homeland, even if it means punishment.”

The soldier returned and whispered in the elder’s ear. Malid nodded and stared blankly at the two accused elves.

“It is said that you were imprisoned on the Island of Motanga, Eltor,” continued Malid. “Is this true?”

“It is,” Eltor nodded. “We sailed too close to the island and were captured. We were forced to work in the shipyards. Caldal and I tried to escape. We were caught. I was sent to work the mines, while Caldal was sent to the temple for torture and death.”

“And yet here you are,” frowned the elder. “How is that?”

“I was rescued from the mine by two female elves,” explained Eltor. “Their names are Mistake and MistyTrail. They are being held outside this room.”

“I know about them,” scowled the elder. “Tell me of Motanga.”

“They rescued me from the mines,” frowned Eltor. “I told them that I could not leave the island without Caldal. They agreed to help get him out of the temple. The three of us snuck into the temple and rescued Caldal from the Chamber of Horror. We evaded their patrols and creatures and managed to sail away from the island without being captured.”

“Creatures?” asked one of the other elders. “What type of creatures?”

“They are called kruls,” answered Eltor. “The best description that I can offer is this. They stand at least twice our height, some thrice. They resemble giant apes, yet they have the ability of speech. They are incredibly strong. I believe them to be magical beings.”

“And this is what inhabits Motanga?” asked another elder.

“No,” Eltor shook his head. “Humans inhabit the island. The leader is known as Vand. Anyone who sails near this island is captured and put to work. There are hundreds of elves imprisoned there. Humans, too.”

“Hundreds of elves?” scoffed Malid. “How is this possible? Not that many elves have gone missing.”

“Some of the elves were born on Motanga,” replied Eltor. “There are several generations of elves living there. Their ancestors may have been captures years ago.”

“Did you say Vand?” asked an elder. “Did I hear you correctly?”

“Yes,” Eltor nodded exaggeratedly. “He is reportedly an ageless magician of the dark arts. He takes new bodies over the course of time, but it is said that he is immortal. He is the leader of the Island of Darkness.”

The elders were obviously alarmed. They ignored Eltor and Caldal and whispered excitedly among themselves. Finally, the Head Elder broke away from the whispering group.

“We must know everything that you can remember about Motanga,” declared Malid. “This information is vital to Elvangar. Because of the information that you bring, your punishment will be less than normal. The fact that you both willingly surrendered is also to your credit. You will be required to report here each day to talk about Motanga until we have gotten all of the information that we can get. You will be housed in the prison until your sentence is completed.”

“There is more that I must tell you,” Eltor said. “We also traveled to Khadora and Fakara. Emperor Marak has asked us to deliver a message to Queen Alycia.”

“Khadora?” frowned Malid. “Fakara? These names mean nothing to me. Who is Emperor Marak?”

“He is the leader of Khadora,” explained Eltor. “He thinks that Vand is going to attack him and his neighboring countries. He has asked for help from the elves.”

“Are these countries on the Island of Motanga?” asked Malid.

“No,” Eltor shook his head. “When we escaped from Motanga, we sailed to Khadora. It lies to the west of Motanga. We spoke to the ruler there. He was most gracious to us. We promised to carry his message to the queen.”

“You told this human about Elvangar?” gasped Malid. “Tell me that is not what you just said. You know our laws.”

“We told him nothing about our homeland,” protested Eltor. “We told him neither the name nor the location of Elvangar, yet it was obvious that we were not human. This man is an honest and generous man. His country is faced with ruin when Vand attacks him, and he believes that Vand will attack us when he is done with Khadora. He wishes to join forces with the elves to defeat the evil.”

“This is most serious,” Malid shook his head. “Being captured by humans was obviously beyond your ability to protest, but these other humans you have willingly conspired with. That is against our laws. This is a matter that must be taken to the queen. Your sentence for now will remain as I have stated, plus you are banned from setting foot on a ship for a period of five years. This sentence may be severely modified after a review with the queen. Take them away.”

Soldiers seized Eltor and Caldal. They were taken to the prison and stripped and given prisoner uniforms. The cell door was slammed shut.

“I am sorry, Caldal,” apologized Eltor. “I know that I made things worse, but I had to deliver the message.”

“You did no different than I would have done,” consoled Caldal. “They must know of Emperor Marak and his plight. Joining with him is the right thing for the elves to do. I would not worry about it. The message will be delivered to the queen, and that was our goal. They may punish us for delivering it, but it was still the right thing to do. It will work out alright.”

“Plus we can bring it up every day during the interrogations,” nodded Eltor. “When they discover how great a threat Vand really is, we will be heroes.”

* * *

“Is it possible that Vand still exists?” asked the elder Volox. “Do you think these adventurers are making up stories?”

“They are not fabricating anything,” Malid shook his head. “They may have been fooled by someone else, but those boys were telling the truth. The interrogations over the next few days will tell us much. What bothers me is this Emperor Marak.”

“Why does he concern you more than Vand?” asked Volox.

“Because it was obvious that Eltor thought well of him,” explained Malid. “We all know that humans exist, just as they have existed for ages. We are prepared to defend our homeland against them, so rulers like Vand pose no additional threat than they did already.”

“But humans like Marak carry an additional threat,” nodded Amber, another elder. “One whose sweet talking can convince an elf of his human sincerity is a graver threat than the one who sails to Elvangar with ships loaded with warriors.”

“Precisely,” nodded Malid. “It was obvious that Eltor was taken in by this man. What are we to do with the women? They are elven, but not of Elvangar. I do not think that we have ever faced this situation before.”

“They have not broken any laws that we are aware of,” replied Volox. “It is hard for us to do anything but accept them as citizens.”

“We can’t send them back to where they came from,” Amber pointed out. “That would divulge the location of Elvangar.”

“No,” agreed Malid, “they must stay at Elvangar forever, but they do not even know our ways. It is like suddenly finding that you have grown children that you never knew about.”

“I say that we find them homes with families that would be willing to host them,” offered Volox.

“They are old enough to be on their own,” scowled Amber. “They are not children.”

“Perhaps not,” countered Volox, “but they are like children in our society. They are going to need someone to teach them our ways. Why not a family that is willing to teach them? Do you have a better idea?”

“That sounds fine to me,” Malid declared as he sought to end the discussion. “I must report to Queen Alycia about this matter. Why don’t you find them homes, Volox? It is your idea after all.”

Malid left the chamber to visit the queen. The rest of the elders moved off at a leisurely pace. Volox rose and walked to the entry foyer where the girls were being held. He walked into the room and stood silently staring at them for several minutes. Finally, he sat down next to MistyTrail.

“Which one of you is Mistake?” asked Volox, “and which is MistyTrail?”

“I am MistyTrail,” the Sakovan replied. “Are Eltor and Caldal alright? I mean do you know what their punishment will be?”

“The boys are fine,” smiled Volox. “Their punishment for sailing past the Barrier Islands is probably the most lenient that the elders have ever handed out for that offense.”

“That is wonderful,” smiled MistyTrail. “They really are good men.”

“You like them, do you?” smiled Volox as he watched the girls nod. “I understand that you two were born someplace other than Elvangar. That presents the elders with a bit of a problem. You are elves, but you do not know our laws and our customs. We have come up with a way to make you feel more at home. You are going to live with an elven family for a time. They will answer all of your questions and see that you know everything that you need to know. It will also allow you a chance to meet some of us while the boys are serving their sentence. Is that agreeable to you?”

“I think that I would like that,” nodded MistyTrail.

Mistake frowned and stared at Volox for a moment. His brow creased with concern.

“You spoke as if you were one of the elders,” Mistake stated. “Is that true?”

“You are perceptive,” chuckled Volox. “Pardon my manners. I am Volox, an elder of Elvangar. So many people know me that I forget my manners sometimes. I do apologize.”

“I am pleased to meet you, Volox,” Mistake said as the frown left her face. “MistyTrail and I both thank you for your interest in our welfare. I think both of us living with a family would be good for us.”

It was Volox’s turn to frown as he realized what Mistake was demanding. While the girls were willing to live with hosts, they demanded to be kept together. That would make his task that much harder.

“Very well,” the elder nodded. “It is too late today to find you a home. I will take you to my house for the night. Tomorrow we will find a home that will accept both of you.”

Volox rose and Mistake and MistyTrail did as well. He waved the soldiers away and led the girls out of the building. The walk through the city was pleasant as Volox pointed out buildings and landmarks along the way. The elder stopped in a park-like setting and grabbed a rope hanging alongside an old oak tree. He flipped the rope and a wooden platform slowly descended.

The platform had no railings, only a sturdy wooden frame created by four posts, one in each corner. Above the cage, the wooden posts curled to meet in the center. A rope leading upward was attached on top of the center. Volox ushered the girls onto the platform. He started pulling on the rope that had been hanging alongside the tree. The platform rose slowly. It was obvious that the old man was having difficulty pulling the platform up. MistyTrail smiled and gently took the rope from Volox.

“I would think that in any culture,” smiled MistyTrail, “it is permissible for the young to share the burden. Mistake and I can pull the rope.”

Volox grinned and bowed graciously to the girls.

“I manage it fine for myself,” he explained, “but I had not thought about the extra weight. Thank you for offering.”

“It is the least that we could do,” smiled Mistake as she helped pull the elevator up. “You are sharing your home with us.”

The platform rose smoothly and was aligned with a wooden floor when it reached the top. Volox stepped off and moved away from it.

“Let me inform my wife that we have guests,” the elder said. “It is best if I do not surprise her too abruptly.”

Mistake gazed at the beautiful home in the tree while Volox disappeared into it. The structure of the home took advantage of the natural form of the tree and appeared to belong there. Volox returned and ushered the girls into the house. An elderly woman smiled broadly and came over to greet each of the girls.

“Welcome to our home,” the woman said. “I am Anija. It has been some time since we have had a young one here. I hope you don’t mind sharing a bed? We only have two sleeping rooms.”

“Not at all,” smiled MistyTrail. “Mistake and I are sisters. My name is MistyTrail. We are grateful for your hospitality.”

“Sisters,” grinned Anija. “I should have known. You look so much alike. Come help me in the kitchen. I am preparing the evening meal. Which of you is the older?”

“We don’t know,” answered Mistake. “We did not grow up together. It is only recently that we found each other.”

“Oh that is sad,” Anija replied. “Sisters should grow up together. One of you slice up the carrots. The other can boil some water.”

MistyTrail pulled a knife and began slicing the carrots. She looked around the kitchen and nodded in appreciation. It was one of the nicest kitchens that she had ever seen. It was hard to imagine that it was in a tree. It even had a real stove of its own.

“Your home is beautiful,” remarked MistyTrail. “Does it sway at all when the wind blows?”

“Oh no,” chuckled Anija. “We are in the lower part of the tree. It would take quite a gale to make this place sway.”

Mistake and MistyTrail continued to help as directed by Anija. When they were all done, the girls carried the meal into the eating room. MistyTrail noticed that the table was set for five. She frowned in confusion. At that moment there was a knock on the door. Volox walked to the door and opened it. A tall muscular elf with an array of weapons hanging from his clothes stood in the doorway. Volox embraced the man and ushered him in.

“This is our son, Tamar,” introduced the elder. “He is a high officer in the army. We are quite proud of him. Tamar, the one on the left is Mistake, and the other is MistyTrail.”

“Strange names for elves,” Tamar commented as he nodded at each of them. “Am I interrupting?”

“Not at all,” smiled Anija. “Your father probably forgot that you were coming over tonight, but I didn’t. There is plenty for all of us. Sit.”

Tamar nodded and stripped off most of his weapons. He walked around the table and embraced his mother before sitting down.

“Are these the two foreigners that arrived today?” asked Tamar as they started eating.

“We do not discuss such things at home,” scolded Volox, “but yes. I was hoping that you might test them for weapons. I could not help but notice how strong they appear to be. Will you do it?”

“As long as I can find the time,” nodded Tamar, “but you know that I have little of it. The queen has been quite demanding lately. I understand that she just ordered a doubling of the guards. I do not know where I will find the men.”

“Well,” nodded Volox, “do what you can. We need to find the girls a place to stay tomorrow. I will let you know where they end up.”

“Why not let them stay here?” asked Tamar. “You have my sleeping room available, and I know that mother would love the company.”

“That is what I tried to tell him earlier,” interjected Anija. “They are fine young girls. They are very polite and helpful. I would enjoy having them around.”

“I am not sure that it would look right,” frowned Volox. “I am an elder. Some would say that the girls are getting special treatment. That is not the best way for them to start their new life in Elvangar.”

MistyTrail was smiling at the comments, but Mistake’s face held a heavy frown.

“We are never going to be allowed to leave Elvangar again, are we?” she asked.

“Why ever would you want to leave?” asked Volox. “Elvangar is the sweetest place in the world.”

“That is an elder’s way of saying no,” translated Tamar. “Secrecy is the most important defense of Elvangar. No one is allowed to leave.”

Chapter 18

Queen Alycia

Queen Alycia approached the long table and stared down at the map. Her fine brown hair flowed down her back past her waist. It swayed like tall grain in a gentle breeze every time the queen moved. The queen’s face was the image of elven perfection, large brown eyes, high cheekbones, a slightly pointed nose, and perfectly formed lips. Her pointed ears rose through her fine hair.

“Remember that this is from their memory,” Malid said as he tapped the map, “although we believe it to be highly accurate. The one called Eltor appears to have a good memory where maps are concerned. He is now working with the charters to produce a map of Motanga.”

“And you think this map truly depicts the land of legends?” asked the queen.

“Angragar is right here,” pointed the Head Elder. “I have taken the liberty of checking the ancient scrolls to find the old sailing routes to Angragar. They match the location fairly well.”

“This troubles me greatly, Malid,” sighed the queen. “Dealing with the humans in Angragar cost our people greatly the last time. There is no way that I will allow that to happen again. You must learn all that Eltor and Caldal told the humans. We have to know how much this Emperor Marak knows of Elvangar.”

“The boys have said that they told the humans nothing,” replied Malid. “I tend to believe them. Besides, if they knew the location of Elvangar, we would have found their ships off the coast by now. Surely they would reconnoiter Elvangar before attacking it.”

“I do not expect the humans to immediately attack us,” retorted Queen Alycia. “First they will come with offers of friendship, then trade, and finally conquest. Our history tells us so. We will not be fooled again.”

“The offer of friendship has already been extended,” replied Malid. “Emperor Marak sent a message with the boys. He wishes elven help in defeating Vand’s armies. He has stated that Vand will surely attack Elvangar when he is through with the humans.”

“Then the only hope for the humans is to defeat Vand,” declared Queen Alycia. “There will be no elven help for them. If Vand does turn to Elvangar after defeating the humans, he will be weak and vulnerable. I would rather fight him in a war to the finish than be deceived by humans one more time.”

“What if Vand turns towards us first?” asked the Head Elder.

Queen Alycia moved away from the table and walked to the railing. She leaned on the railing and gazed down at the city of Morada. Her eyes followed the citizens below as they moved about the city on errands. Slowly her gaze drifted to the harbor and the Gates of Elvangar in the distance.

“The one thing that would surely make Vand strike out at the elves,” she said over her shoulder, “is if the elves had already aligned with the humans to defeat him. I will not give him that excuse. Elvangar was rebuilt to be defended, and defended it will be. Our armies will not march on foreign soil. That is my last word on this subject. Do you understand?”

“Perfectly,” Malid frowned as he bowed low to the queen’s back. “There is one other item, if I may?”

“Speak,” replied the queen.

“The two foreign girls have requested an audience with you,” stated Malid. “What shall I tell them?”

“The foreign girls?” snapped Queen Alycia. “Who do they think they are? They are not even part of Elvangar, and they think they have the right to speak to the queen?”

“They do not know our ways,” shrugged Malid with a frown. “They are being tutored by Tamar. Perhaps he led them to believe that they could speak to you. He does so himself quite often.”

“Tamar is a leader of our army,” the queen said, spinning around to face the elder. “As such he has the right to bypass the elders in time of emergency.”

“In times of an emergency that is true,” retorted the elder, “but such is not the case right now.”

“A time of emergency is when I declare it,” countered Queen Alycia. “My fears about the humans are strong enough reasons to abandon protocol. Tamar will continue to report to me daily until I decide otherwise.”

“As you wish,” frowned Malid.

“Why is Tamar wasting his time with those foreigners?” the queen asked. “He has much more pressing business to take care of.”

“He spends an hour every day with them,” Malid reported. “I understand that the girls are quite talented in many ways. Their archery skills were practically nonexistent when they arrived. Now they perform as well as seasoned troops. And that is only one area of their improvement.”

“I will not have Tamar wasting his time on them,” replied the queen, her voice rising in anger. “Inform him immediately that the lessons are to stop. There are more important tasks awaiting his time.”

“It shall be done,” bowed the Head Elder as he backed his way out of the queen’s presence.

* * *

Mistake and MistyTrail dashed across the park-like grass and raced for the rope alongside the old oak tree. Tamar raced from the opposite direction. Mistake grabbed the rope and swung on it just as Tamar’s hand reached for it.

“Too late again,” laughed Mistake. “You will never beat me home.”

“I even took a shortcut unknown to you,” laughed Tamar. “Even MistyTrail would have beaten me to the rope. I must be getting old.”

“I would have had to push Mistake out of the way,” laughed MistyTrail. “That would not have been very sisterly.”

“Old?” Mistake frowned as she let go of the rope. “You can’t be much older than us.”

“Probably not,” smiled Tamar, “although I must have a few years on you. It is hard to tell without knowing your ages, but I left boyhood some time ago. Let’s get washed up for the meal. Mother would not be pleased if we arrived at the table as we are.”

MistyTrail whipped the rope to allow the platform to descend. When it reached ground level, they all stepped on. Tamar grasped the rope and swiftly hauled the platform upward. MistyTrail stood and stared at Tamar. She admired his form as his muscular arms powered the elevator up into the tree. When the platform reached the upper level, Tamar turned and saw MistyTrail staring at him. She quickly looked away.

Mistake led the way to the door of the elder’s house. She opened the door and shouted that she and MistyTrail were home. Anija immediately came out of the kitchen, an apron covering her skirt.

“Welcome back,” smiled Anija. “The meal is almost ready.”

She saw Tamar walk in behind the girls. She grinned broadly.

“Are you staying for dinner again?” asked Anija.

“If there is enough,” grinned Tamar. “I just happened to be in the area.”

“I am sure,” chuckled Anija. “That happens most frequently these days. There is always enough at my table for you, son. Go get cleaned up.”

While everyone was getting cleaned up, Volox arrived home. He walked into the kitchen and kissed Anija. She turned and stared at him with concern.

“What is the matter?” she asked.

“Nothing that cannot wait until later,” replied Volox. “Is Tamar coming for dinner again today?”

“Should today be any different than any other day since the girls moved in?” smiled Anija. “The three of them are getting washed up now.”

Volox nodded and left the kitchen. A few minutes later, Mistake and MistyTrail skipped into the kitchen to see if they could help. Anija handed them plates of food to take to the eating room. The family sat down to eat.

“How have you girls been getting on with people?” Anija asked casually. “Have you met any new friends?”

“Not really,” frowned Mistake. “People tend to avoid us. Occasionally someone will say hello, but most people will alter their path to avoid us.”

“That is probably because you are staying with an elder,” replied Volox. “I did warn you about that. They do not feel as if they can approach you. They do not know your status.”

“It is because they are foreigners,” interjected Tamar. “It has nothing to do with where they are staying. Word has spread about the troubling news brought back by the boys. Many people blame Eltor and Caldal for going astray. Their attitude towards the girls is part of that. They are seen as foreigners to be avoided.”

“That is not right,” frowned Anija. “I certainly hope that my son straightens out those misguided fools.”

“He cannot afford to,” Volox interrupted before Tamar could answer. “Tamar is an officer of the queen. He must speak as if he speaks for her.”

Tamar frowned and looked at his father as if Volox knew something that was not being shared.

“How are the girls doing with their lessons?” asked Anija.

“They excel at most things that I teach them,” Tamar reported happily. “Their ability with knives was superior before they arrived, but their archery has greatly improved. They still need much work with the sword, though. They do not do well in close quarters.”

“If one is good enough with a bow and knives,” grinned Mistake, “she would never have to fight in close quarters.”

“That can never be taken for granted,” Tamar replied sternly. “You must be prepared in all skills.”

“Or in none,” interjected Volox.

Tamar frowned again and stared at his father. “What do you know that you are not sharing, Father.”

“It is mealtime,” shrugged Volox.

“So you know of something official then?” asked Tamar.

“We will speak of it outside after the meal,” replied Volox.

“If it concerns the girls,” replied Tamar, “then it affects our family. It can be spoken of here and now. Those are your own rules.”

“They are visitors,” declared Volox.

“They are family,” Anija and Tamar said in unison.

“Not for much longer,” scowled Volox. “Very well,” he sighed. “The queen is greatly disturbed with your private lessons. She has sent word that they are to be stopped immediately.”

“Sent word how?” asked Tamar. “I speak with the queen everyday.”

“And that is another problem,” Volox continued. “It seems that your meetings are grating under Malid’s skin. Queen Alycia has demanded that they continue, but that may well pit you against Malid in the future. You must be careful in this, Tamar. She gave word to Malid who gave it to me. The lessons are to stop immediately.”

“I will speak to the queen in the morning,” stated Tamar. “I will explain the need for the lessons.”

“You will do no such thing,” Volox said sternly. “If you defy the queen, your career is over. My own status as an elder is in danger here. So far she has not learned that the girls live here, but it is only a matter of time.”

“Why should that matter?” asked Anija.

“She sees them as foreigners,” sighed Volox, “and she is not quiet about her feelings. It is no small wonder that people shun them on the streets.”

“This is not fair,” protested Tamar. “I would stand up to the queen on this, and damn my own career, because I feel that I am doing what is right, but I cannot and will not jeopardize your position. Why does she feel this way?”

“We do not want anyone to suffer because of us,” interrupted MistyTrail. “Mistake and I will leave tonight.”

“You are going nowhere,” Anija said with authority. “Volox, I will not allow this to happen. These girls are elves. They have every right to enter Elvangar society. If the queen thinks differently, she is wrong. You will tell her so.”

“I will cease to be an elder if I confront her on such a topic,” warned Volox. “While I am willing to give up my status and this home by telling the queen that she is wrong, to do so for such a trivial reason is foolish. There are other homes where the girls can live. That is what I should have done in the beginning. The queen can do nothing to harm the girls because they have not broken any laws. If they live in the home of a normal family, and are not privately tutored by a high officer in the army, they will never come to the queen’s attention again. I will find a new home for them in the morning.”

“But…” Anija began.

“Father is right,” Tamar interrupted. “I suspect that this started when I passed along the girls’ desire to meet with the queen. I should have known better. I will try to find a lesser officer to continue with the lessons.”

“I can’t imagine the queen being so busy that talking to her would offend her,” frowned Mistake. “We will move to another home. I think it is for the best. As for lessons, I would prefer to learn some magic if that is possible. That would ease the problem with Tamar teaching us.”

“Magic?” questioned Volox. “Do you have abilities?”

“A little,” nodded Mistake. “MistyTrail knows more than I do. She can heal people sometimes. Even if we are not good at it, it would take our minds away from these problems.”

“Finding a magic tutor in Morada will be impossible,” frowned Tamar. “They already have too many students to deal with. It is better that I find another soldier to continue tutoring you.”

“There was an old mage in Etta,” shrugged Mistake. “He did not seem busy to me. He spent several hours doing tricks to make the children laugh while we listened to Eltor telling his tale.”

“Garl is a crazy old man,” scoffed Volox. “He is not even considered a true mage. There is a reason that he has a lot of time on his hands. No one would choose to be his student. He was kicked out of the Society of Mages. You do not know what you are asking.”

“Is Etta the village that you and Eltor went to when we arrived in Elvangar?” asked MistyTrail.

“Yes,” nodded Mistake. “It is the village where Eltor and Caldal lived. It is small and primitive, but the people there did not shun me.”

“It would get them out of the queen’s eye,” offered Tamar. “I might be able to take a day off here and there and come out and tutor you.”

“It is not a bad idea,” brightened Volox. “The girls would be safe there. I fear that once the queen sets her sights on them, she will try to cause them trouble. It would be better for them to be out of sight.”

“And when the queen has decided to forget about them,” smiled Tamar, “we can quietly bring them back here.”

Anija smiled, but tears were forming in her eyes. “Let the queen forget them quickly,” she said as she wiped her eyes. “I quite enjoying having them here. They have become like daughters to me.”

* * *

The soldier in the brown and white uniform of the Morgar clan peered into the darkness from his perch in an old tree. He was sure that he heard the noises of rigging slapping in the wind, but he could not see the ship. He quietly dropped out of the tree and moved through the trees to the edge of the beach. He squatted down and let his eyes scan the horizon, looking for the absence of stars. After a few minutes, his eyes began to feel weary from focusing on nothing. He blinked and refocused. He thought he saw a star blink out, but he was not sure. He stared again, and excitement grew as the star reappeared. He moved his focus to another star group and waited. He nodded when the new group of stars disappeared. A moment later they reappeared, and he heard the rigging again.

The soldier slid back into the woods and raced along the trail to the Morgar mansion. He ran straight into the mansion and into the Marshal’s suite. He banged loudly of the door to the sleeping chamber. The Morgar marshal opened the door and stared at the soldier with sleepy eyes.

“I am pretty sure that there is a ship off the coast,” reported the soldier. “I could not see it, but I heard it. Something is moving out there that is blocking the stars.”

“Well done, soldier,” nodded the marshal. “Alert the cortain on duty and tell him that I authorized his deployment. I will be along shortly.”

The soldier ran outside the mansion and found the cortain. He passed along the marshal’s message. The cortain quietly summoned his three squad leaders and snapped off curt instructions. Within moments, sixty men were quietly sneaking into the forest along the coast. They readied their bows and stood silently behind trees as they waited for something to happen.

Long minutes passed by as the men waited in the darkness. Suddenly a splash of water was heard above the noise of the surf. The clan soldiers tensed. Shapes appeared along the beach, and some of the Morgar soldiers watched the dark-clad men pass by on their way towards the mansion.

The cortain stood in the middle of the long line of his men in the forest. He counted six shapes pass by. He waited to see any more were coming, but he did not wait long. He knew if there were stragglers that his men further along the line would get them.

“Now!” shouted the cortain.

A hail of arrows flew out of the woods, and the six dark-clad men fell as one. Morgar soldiers immediately raced out of the woods, their swords drawn and held high. The six bodies were quickly decapitated. The cortain walked along the beach until he met the marshal.

“Six bodies accounted for,” reported the cortain.

“Did any go up in smoke?” asked the marshal.

“No,” answered the cortain. “This group was normal.”

“What about the ship?” asked the marshal.

“Never saw it,” answered the cortain. “Some of the men heard it, but it never beached.”

“Keep a squad out there until morning,” ordered the marshal. “I will take no chances with our mages. I must report this to Emperor Marak.”

* * *

Rhoda stood before Aakuta and dropped her robe. The dark mage ran his fingers over the red blotches on her skin and nodded.

“Turn around,” commanded Aakuta.

Rhoda obediently turned around and Aakuta checked her back.

“You are healing well,” Aakuta said. “I have to go upstairs for a while. Hide the robe and get up on the table. I have to strap you down in case someone comes by.”

Rhoda rolled up the robe and stuffed it in a drawer. She climbed up on the table and rolled over onto her back. She put her arms by her side and waited to be strapped down.

“Remember to feign unconsciousness if anyone enters,” advised Aakuta as he tightened the straps over her arms and legs. “I will not be able to help you if it is discovered that you are awake.”

“You cannot protect me forever,” Rhoda replied. “I was prepared to die before. I am still ready. Kill me now and be done with it. I do not want to endure again what has already passed.”

“Be patient,” advised Aakuta. “You are a courageous young woman, not someone to be sacrificed. I will figure a way to get you out of here. Speak no more.”

Aakuta checked the room for any sign that the patient had recovered. Satisfied that nothing was amiss, he opened the door and stepped into the corridor. He closed the door and locked it as he gazed along the corridor at the door to the holding cells. Aakuta hurried upstairs to Lady Mystic’s chambers. She smiled broadly as he entered.

“Right on time,” greeted Lady Mystic as she ushered the dark mage out the door and locked it. “I was just about to step out the door.”

“We are so close in makeup that our timing is as one,” smiled Aakuta. “What is the purpose of today’s session?”

“What is the purpose of any of them?” shrugged Lady Mystic. “Vand wants to express himself. That is reason enough to attend. Have you made any progress with the girl?”

“I have made progress in healing her wounds,” shrugged Aakuta as they climbed the stairs, “but not with information. I cannot interrogate someone who is unconscious.”

“Vand will not be happy,” frowned Lady Mystic as they reached the doors to the throne room. “Perhaps he will be occupied with something else.”

As they entered the room, it quickly became obvious that the session had already started. In fact, it appeared to have been going for some time. Two guards were already dragging out the body of a seaman.

“Ah, the great interrogator has arrived,” Vand snarled as he saw Aakuta and Lady Mystic enter. “Tell me, Aakuta, have you discovered the secret of the air tunnel yet?”

“Not yet,” sighed Aakuta. “Your last interrogator caused great damage to the girl. As I said last time, it is best to grab another Khadoran mage. Getting anything out of this one will be a long shot.”

“It might be easier if you try harder,” snapped Vand.

“I am doing the best that I can,” Aakuta replied in an annoyed tone. “The girl should have died during the last interrogation. The fact that she still lives is miraculous. I have been healing her wounds so that when she does awaken, I will be able to get the information out of her.”

“You have to heal her to talk to her?” questioned the Emperor.

“If I want her to cooperate,” nodded Aakuta. “Were she to awaken in her damaged state, she would welcome death. That is not conducive to getting what we want to know. Of course I am healing her. I want her to cling to life desperately. If I cannot threaten her with something that she holds dear, how then can I expect her to divulge the information? I still advise the capture of at least one more Khadoran mage. It would be quicker than dealing with this one.”

“We have been trying to get another,” shouted Vand as his eyes glared at Aakuta. “Each and every time we send a ship to grab another, there is a trap waiting for them. How do you suppose that is happening?” he asked accusingly.

Aakuta shrugged and stared back at Vand, “Perhaps you have a spy in your organization? How do you expect me to know?”

“A spy?” mocked the Emperor. “In my organization? How rich. Yes, Aakuta, there is most definitely a spy in my ranks. Do you know what I do with spies?”

“I know what I would do,” Aakuta answered seriously. “I would make an example of him so that there would never be another spy. I would make him suffer greatly and publicly.”

“There are some thing that we agree on,” sneered Vand, “but not very many. You are that spy, Aakuta. I have felt it from the very first day that you arrived. You are as phony as a worshipper of Kaltara. So that now that we agree on the type of punishment that you deserve, how about we get down to specifics. How should you be punished?”

Vand sat poised in his throne. It was obvious to Aakuta that the Emperor was just waiting for him to make a move to protect himself. The slightest sign of offensive or defensive magic would result in sure death.

“You seek to punish me for the works of others?” retorted the dark mage. “Ask yourself this. When have I been privy to the sailing schedules of your ships? Who could have possibly told me what estates on the mainland you planned to kidnap mages from? There is no possible way that I am your spy. Oh, I agree that you have one. I think that goes without saying, if you are stepping into multiple traps, but you are looking in the wrong quarter. I have been loyal to you since before I set foot on this island. If you truly want a Khadoran mage, I will get you one. I had no trouble in the past getting whatever I wanted in Khadora. Their magic is weak.”

Emperor Vand stared questioningly at Aakuta. Lady Mystic cleared her throat and caught the Emperor’s attention.

“What he says is true,” volunteered Lady Mystic. “He has not been present in any of the planning sessions. Whoever is spying on you, it cannot be Aakuta. He simply did not have the information to use against your people.”

Vand stared at Aakuta for a moment longer before waving at him dismissively. The dark mage immediately turned and left the throne room. He waited outside the room for Lady Mystic as he tried to calm his nerves. He knew that he would not be able to keep up his charade much longer.

Chapter 19

Etta

Tamar stopped at the edge of the elven village of Etta. Mistake and MistyTrail stopped alongside him. The officer stared across the glade and shook his head.

“What is the matter?” asked MistyTrail.

“There is nothing the matter,” replied Tamar. “Seeing Etta just brings back memories of my childhood when I lived in a village like this one. It is far different than living in Morada. There are no shops, or healers, or libraries. There is nothing here but a few shacks. Perhaps this was not such a good idea after all.”

“You grew up in a village?” asked Mistake. “I thought your father was an elder, a man of great importance. He has such a fine home.”

“My father became an elder because he received respect for his thoughts and deeds,” replied Tamara. “We were a poor family living in a simple village before he was chosen to be an elder. The queen owns his fine home. When Volox ceases to be an elder, he will lose it. He will have nowhere to live.”

“That is why he didn’t want us staying with him,” surmised Mistake. “He should have just said so. We would not want to endanger him or his career.”

“Fair enough,” sighed Tamar, “but moving you to this village is a mistake. Let’s turn back. I will find a decent home for you in Morada. These shacks do not even have water in them. I am sure that the wind blows right through them.”

“No,” replied MistyTrail. “I want to stay in Etta. You may be right about the quality of the housing, but Mistake said that the people here welcomed her. That is far more important in my mind. With the exception of you and your parents, I did not feel as though I belonged in Morada.”

“I agree,” Mistake interjected enthusiastically. “Just leave us, Tamar. It is better that it does not appear as though we were banished to this village.”

Tamar frowned. He stared at the village and then at the girls.

“Go,” chuckled MistyTrail as she hugged Tamar. “We will be fine. Give our regards to your parents. Tell them that we are happy and well.”

“And come visit when you get time,” grinned Mistake.

Tamar shook his head with uncertainty, but he eventually turned and walked away. Mistake and MistyTrail watched him leave and then turned towards the village.

“Are you sure this is a good idea?” asked Mistake. “The villagers were nice to me, but they were excited to see Eltor return. Without him around, they may not be as nice. In fact, they may see us as the reason the boys are in prison.”

“These are simple people,” declared MistyTrail. “I look at them and see Sakovans or Qubari. They will look at us as outsiders for a while, but they will judge us by our actions and nothing else. If we must live in Elvangar, this is as fine a place as we can find.”

“Plus it has the advantage of being close to the hidden ship,” Mistake nodded vigorously. “Maybe when we tire of it here, we can sneak back to Fakara.”

“No way,” laughed MistyTrail. “I am never sailing with you again. Let’s go to the well and see if we can meet some villagers.”

On the way to the well, Mistake saw an old man sitting on a rock, smoking a pipe. Lazy curls of smoke rose above the man’s head. Mistake tapped MistyTrail on the arm and nodded towards the old man.

“That is the magician,” Mistake said. “Let’s go talk to him. Maybe he will know a family that we can stay with.”

Mistake and MistyTrail turned and walked over to the old man. He did not look up or acknowledge them in any way. Mistake and MistyTrail sat on the grass in front of him and said nothing. After a silent stretch of minutes, the old man sighed.

“Have you never seen a pipe before?” he groused. “Run along and play with the other children.”

“We are hardly children any more,” retorted Mistake. “Do you not remember me? I came through the jungle with Eltor a while ago.”

The old man looked up and stared at the girls. He nodded in recognition.

“Can’t hardly tell the two of you apart,” grumbled the old man. “Which one have I met before?”

“Me,” said Mistake. “MistyTrail is my sister. My name is Mistake. You met me when Eltor and I came through the jungle.”

“You just said that,” retorted the old man. “Do you think I am old and senile?”

Mistake frowned, wondering if she should have gone to the well instead. MistyTrail started laughing softly.

“What are you laughing about?” grumbled the old man.

“Your act,” replied MistyTrail. “You remind me an old Sakovan friend. I am sure that if you had a cane, you would threaten to beat us with it unless we left you alone.”

“A cane?” smiled the old man. “That is not a bad idea. Yes, I could use a cane. Sakovan? I have not heard of that village. Where is it located?”

“It is not a village,” answered MistyTrail. “It is a large country a long ways from here.”

“A country, eh?” the old man replied with interest. “I haven’t heard of it anyways. So you are foreigners then?”

“We are,” nodded MistyTrail. “We have come to Etta to find a family to live with. We would like you to teach us magic.”

The old man took the pipe from his mouth and looked at the girls with a new interest. MistyTrail saw a slight sparkle in the man’s eyes.

“There is no family to take you in here,” the old man stated. “Everyone here is poor. They feed the mouths they have and no more. What makes you think that I can teach you magic?”

“I saw you doing magic for the children,” interjected Mistake. “I know that you can do it.”

“Aye, I know magic,” the old man said as he pointed to Mistake with the end of his pipe. “I asked what made you think that I could teach YOU magic.”

“I am not sure,” frowned Mistake. “I have been told that I have some slight abilities, but MistyTrail knows more. She healed my leg on the Island of Darkness. Surely, you can try to teach us.”

“Island of Darkness, eh?” echoed the old man. “Sounds like you two have done some traveling. You might even have a good story or two in you.”

A woman from the village walked over and stood before the old man. She put her hands on her hips and stared at him.

“Garl,” the woman said with motherly authority, “put that pipe out. You know that you should not be smoking. You think you are sneaking off here to light up, but we can smell your pipe up in the trees. Put it out now.”

The old man grumbled and tapped his pipe on the rock. The burning bocco fell to the ground and he reached down and scooped dirt over it. Only after the pipe was properly extinguished did the woman turn around and leave.

“Are pipes not allowed in Etta?” asked MistyTrail.

“They are allowed,” grumbled Garl. “Just some people stick their nose in other people’s business.”

“Then why did you put it out?” asked Mistake.

“Slari is nothing if she is not persistent,” sighed Garl. “She will stand here all day and complain if I continue to smoke. It is more pleasant around here if I put it out and wait for her to disappear.”

Garl fell quiet and stared at the ground again as if there was no one around him. Eventually, Mistake rose and stared across the glade.

“I guess we will have to sleep in the open,” Mistake said to MistyTrail.

“We have done it before,” nodded MistyTrail as she rose.

“That is it?” grumbled Garl. “How am I supposed to believe that I could actually teach either of you anything if five minutes is the limit of your interest?”

“Our interest is sincere,” replied MistyTrail, “but we would never force ourselves upon anyone. If you are willing to teach us, you will find that you have our complete attention. Will you do it?”

Garl stood up and stared at the girls. He started walking towards the glade and turned around to see the girls still standing by the rock.

“Come on,” he grumbled. “Do I have to teach the two of you how to walk, too?”

MistyTrail grinned and immediately started following Garl. Mistake hesitated, wondering if she could put up with the man’s demeanor. She shook her head and followed her sister. The old man walked clear across the glade to an old tree. His arm rose and his fingers wiggled in the air. A ladder made of rope fell out of the tree and hung from some unseen place.

Garl grabbed the rope ladder and started climbing up. MistyTrail and Mistake followed him. At the top of the ladder was a fairly large platform with a very small shack upon it. Garl opened the door to the shack and walked in.

“There are only three rooms,” Garl said. “This room is for sitting and talking and anything else you might want to do besides sleep. The room on the right is mine. Never enter it. The room on the left is for storage. You will have to find someplace to put the things that are in there, but that is where you will sleep.”

Mistake pushed the door open and peeked into the storage room. It was loaded with an odd assortment of junk. The room was so small that Mistake wondered if she and MistyTrail could even sleep side-by side after the junk was carted out.

“Where are we to put your belongings?” asked Mistake.

“You will find room for them,” shrugged Garl. “Be careful with them. They are precious. You two get settled in. I am going for a walk in the jungle. Maybe I can smoke in peace there.”

The old man left and Mistake shook her head as she surveyed the room full of junk.

“What is all this stuff?” she asked. “There are some books that look like they were tossed about. Look, a coconut. Why would he keep a coconut in his house? And bird feathers? This man is crazy, MistyTrail.”

“That is what Volox said,” chuckled MistyTrail. “I have an idea. Let’s gather and sort his belongings. We can bring them into the main room for now. Then we can get some bedding down.”

“Bedding?” frowned Mistake. “You have got to be kidding. We can’t sleep side-by-side in there without bedding. Add in all of this junk, and we are better off sleeping outside.”

“He is testing us,” countered MistyTrail. “He has given us a seemingly impossible task. I plan to find a solution.”

“What kind of solution?” asked Mistake. “Shove all the junk in his room and see if he notices?”

“No,” laughed MistyTrail. “I think we could make bunks in here, like the Khadorans have. If we create three bunks on top of one another, we can sleep in the lower two and arrange his belongings on the upper one. It would be cozy.”

“Cramped you mean,” frowned Mistake. “Alright, we can get wood easy enough in the jungle. We might even be able to hang some of his junk from the walls and ceiling. I hope this isn’t just a trick to get us to clean his shack.”

“It will be fun,” MistyTrail chirped. “He even has some tools in amongst this junk. Let’s get started.”

Mistake and MistyTrail moved the old man’s belongings out of the small room. They organized it by shape and size to get an idea of the space required for it before heading for the jungle. Mistake cut some branches up for posts and runners, while MistyTrail gathered vines, moss, and gigantic leaves from some type of plant that she had never seen before.

Some of the village children found them in the jungle and asked them what they were doing. When the girls answered, they found that they had lots of help to carry things to the base of Garl’s tree.

Mistake and MistyTrail worked through the day without stopping. When they were done, they had bunks made from stout braches and moss-filled mattresses made of leaves. All of Garl’s belongings were either hung up or arranged on the top bunk. When they heard the old man coming up the ladder, they closed the door to the small room and waited in the common room.

“There has been an awful lot of traffic below my tree,” grumbled Garl. “Are you holding a party up here?”

“We had some children carry things for us,” answered MistyTrail. “They did not come up the ladder.”

“Good,” nodded Garl as he started to open the door to the small room. “I like my privacy. I just stopped back to get some more bocco.”

“It’s on the top bunk,” offered MistyTrail.

Garl opened the door and stood staring into the room for several minutes. Finally, he entered and took a tin from the top bunk. He filled a small pouch with some bocco and placed the tin back in its proper position. He turned and smiled at the girls.

“You are resourceful and hard working,” he declared. “Tomorrow we will see if you have any magical talent. Come along. I have a duck burning over a fire. You must be hungry.”

* * *

The two Kamaril cortains stood staring at the Kamaril soldier who was standing apart from the others.

“Do you know him well?” one of the cortains asked the other as he nodded towards the odd soldier.

“I have never seen him before,” replied the second cortain. “Why do you ask?”

“I first noticed him this morning,” replied the first cortain. “He seemed dazed and confused at the morning meal as if he was unaware of the custom here on the Kamaril estate. My curiosity caused me to talk to him. He claimed that he was in your corte, yet you say that you do not know him. Is that possible?”

“No,” scowled the second cortain. “I know each of my sixty men personally. Let us go talk to him together. Something does not smell right.”

The two Kamaril cortains marched towards the odd soldier. When he saw the officers approaching, the man tried to merge into the crowd of soldiers. One of the cortains shouted for everyone to halt. The group of soldiers immediately stopped what they were doing. The grounds grew silent. The two cortains walked into the crowd of soldiers, the men parting to let the officers pass. They stood before the odd soldier and stared at him. The man fidgeted but did not speak.

“You do not belong here,” stated the first cortain. “Remove your wristbands.”

The odd soldier looked around nervously. His hand started moving towards the hilt of his sword. The curiosity of the crowd of Kamaril soldiers turned to suspicion as they watched the man’s reaction. Another soldier’s hand streaked forward and removed the odd soldier’s sword from its sheath. Several other solders instinctively drew their swords and pointed them towards the odd soldier. The odd soldier slowly removed his wristbands and dropped them on the ground. The first cortain grabbed the odd soldier’s arm and twisted it until the wrist was bared and pointing upward. The crowd gasped at the thumbprint on the man’s wrist.

The hellsoul yanked his arm back and reached for a knife on his belt. Several swords competed for the killing blow as the soldiers around the man swung at his neck. The man’s head flew into the crowd, and the body fell to the ground.

“I want every soldier to immediately return to your barracks,” shouted the first cortain. “You are to remain in the barracks until your cortain gives you permission to leave. Move it.”

The Kamaril soldiers turned and ran to their barracks. Within moments the grounds were empty except for officers and the body of the hellsoul. The marshal of the Kamaril clan came racing out of the mansion. He ran to the body and the two cortains standing over it.

“What is going on?” asked the marshal.

“We discovered a hellsoul in our midst,” reported the first cortain. “I have ordered all men to their barracks. Any man not assigned a bunk in the barracks will be discovered quite soon. I think we should inspect the wrists on every man, one at a time.”

“He did not disappear in a puff of smoke,” noted the marshal.

“No, he didn’t,” agreed the first cortain, “but he bears the mark on his wrist.”

“He also does not belong on this estate,” added the second cortain. “He claimed to be in my corte, and I know that he was lying.”

“Very well,” nodded the marshal. “Check every soldier and everyone else on this estate. I will not stand for any hellsouls among us. Well done, Cortain.”

* * *

Emperor Marak watched the stocking of the shelves in the library of the temple at Changragar. He even helped with the work so that he could personally place the books nearest to the hidden latch. Satisfied that the secret had been maintained, the Torak turned and exited the library. He walked out of the temple and saw scores of Chula hauling supplies through the narrow canyon towards the temple. Tmundo saw the Torak and walked over to him.

“You are taking a great interest in Changragar,” stated Tmundo. “With all that is happening in Khadora, I wonder about your reasoning. Why is Changragar so important all of a sudden?”

“The real question,” the Torak retorted, “is why has it been neglected for so long. The spirit of Kaltara lives within Changragar, yet it has been allowed to deteriorate over the ages. Are not the Kywara the protectors of the holy places?”

“We have protected the Golden Gates, the Sacred Lake, and Changragar for centuries,” frowned Tmundo. “No flatlanders have ever seen them and lived, except for you.”

“You may have protected them from flatlanders,” countered the Torak, “but you have not protected them from the ravages of nature. The condition of Changragar is a disgrace to the Chula. The Qubari and the Sakovans have kept their temples pristine. Do the Chula have less faith in Kaltara?”

Tmundo hung his head in shame as he realized that the Torak was correct. Fortunately for the head of the Kywara tribe, Axor appeared from the temple and joined the small group.

“Do not place all of the blame on Tmundo,” advised Axor. “He has followed in his father’s footsteps, and his father in those before him. The Chula tribes were fragmented by the flatlanders, unlike the Sakovans of the Qubari. Only the Kywara had the physical closeness to reach the holy places, so the Chula learned to worship Kaltara wherever they were. The actual holy places became less important to us. Kaltara did not.”

The Torak sighed and laid a hand on Tmundo’s shoulder. “I am sorry, Tmundo,” he said softly. “There are many reasons to restore Changragar. I will explain them all in due time. What brings you up here?”

“I bring messages from Khadoratung,” answered Tmundo. “More and more hellsouls are being discovered, many before they could strike. There is confusion why some disappear in smoke while others do not. The last killed was a Kamaril soldier. The man had the thumbprint under his wristband, but his body did not disappear.”

“That is something that was bothering me, too,” admitted Axor, “but I think that I understand it now. The thumbprint is indeed the mark of a hellsoul, but the bearer can very well be a normal human being. I believe that the first death of a hellsoul initiates the magic of rebirth. When he arises he is, from that point on, only a spiritual being.”

“So if he is decapitated before he becomes a spiritual being,” nodded the Torak, “he merely dies and will never experience the rebirth?”

“Exactly,” agreed Axor. “The six that were killed near the Morgar estate fit that description. Each body was found to have a thumbprint. I assume that it was their first death.”

“That makes sense,” replied the Torak. “It is still disturbing that these hellsouls are able to infiltrate our armies. Our very customs are their disguise. If we did not wear wristbands as part of our uniforms, the hellsouls’ chances of discovery would be greater.”

“You are the Emperor of Khadora,” Tmundo pointed out. “Issue a decree eliminating the use of wristbands. The hellsouls must be discovered before the attacks begin.”

“I will make it so,” nodded the Torak as he saw Fisher coming through the small canyon. “If you two will excuse me for a moment?”

Marak walked towards the canyon and greeted Fisher. He steered the spy away from the path of Chula carrying materials to the temple.

“Quite the restoration project that you have going here,” smiled Fisher. “You are becoming more Chula than the Chula themselves.”

“Perhaps,” smiled Marak. “What news do you have for me?”

“I finally have a name of the head spy from the Island of Darkness,” grinned Fisher. “His name is Clarvoy. He is a master of disguises from what I have heard.”

“You sound envious,” chuckled Marak. “How do you get this information?”

Fisher frowned and immediately checked to see if anyone was within hearing range.

“You know that I have been good about not prying on your sources,” declared the Torak, “but things are going to become very critical very soon. I must have confidence in your reports.”

“I understand,” nodded Fisher. “I wish that I could give you confidence on my source, but I cannot. In fact, I do not know the source of my information.”

“How can that be?” asked Marak. “You have told me just about everything that Vand is doing. None of your information has shown to be false. I expected a very high source within Vand’s organization.”

“It may well be,” shrugged Fisher. “I have been getting my information from a mage at Raven’s Point. Originally it was from the mage Rhoda, but she was eventually kidnapped. Now Polema tells me what she hears.”

“Polema?” echoed the Torak. “Who is she?”

“Rhoda’s replacement at the Raven’s Point estate,” explained Fisher. “This all began some time ago. One day there was a note waiting for me at Fardale. The note was short. It said that I was desperately needed at Raven’s Point. I went there, and Rhoda approached me. She heard a voice speaking to her almost every night. It was always the same voice. At first she thought that she was going crazy.”

“Crazy?” echoed Marak. “Is she hearing people talking that do not know she is listening? Or is the contact more direct?”

“More direct,” answered Fisher. “There is somebody on the Island of Darkness working against Vand. He sought out an air mage that would listen to him. After many failed attempts, he found Rhoda. He made her write everything down and told her to contact me. I set up a way for her to contact me if she ever needed to. She did so whenever she heard from the stranger.”

“And now Polema does the same?” asked Marak.

“Exactly,” nodded Fisher. “After Rhoda was kidnapped, the information flow was turned off. I returned to Raven’s Point and spoke to Rhoda’s replacement. I explained to her what Rhoda had been doing and asked her to do the same. A week later the first message came in. She has been receiving them ever since.”

“Any idea as to the identity of the spy on the Island of Darkness?” asked Emperor Marak.

“None,” frowned Fisher, “and that bothers me. I am always skeptical of free gifts. If I become too dependent on this one source of information, I could be tricked at a crucial time. That is precisely why I am willing to divulge this source to you. It has been exceedingly accurate so far, but who knows about the future.”

“You are wise beyond your years,” smiled the Torak. “Can Polema contact the spy?”

“No,” Fisher shook his head. “The air tunnel pressure is maintained to make it one way. She can only listen. I thought about sending air tunnel messages towards the island, but that would risk destroying the one source that we have. It is not a wise idea at this time.”

“I was afraid that you would say that,” frowned the Emperor. “The one piece of information that you have not obtained is the timing of the attack. I would like to know that.”

“I will see what I can do,” frowned Fisher, “but do not expect it any time soon.”

Chapter 20

Council of Elders

The Council of Elders met in the city of Morada in Elvangar. The twelve wise men of the elves discussed the information gleaned from Eltor and Caldal.

“At last we have what I feel is full disclosure of the travels of Eltor and Caldal,” declared Malid, the Head Elder. “The testimony highlights the dangers still existing in the world beyond the Barrier Islands. There is a war brewing in the human world. That war may find its way to Elvangar. What will this council suggest to the queen regarding our security?”

“What is there to suggest?” asked Amber. “Humans are constantly warring. Caldal spoke of the many different armies in Khadora alone. This is not something the elves need to be involved in. We should suggest nothing.”

“I disagree,” declared Volox. “We are not just talking about a war that the humans will be engaging in. We are talking about a war to end the world, as we know it. From what I have read, this Vand has over one million men in his army. The best estimates that Caldal could supply on the number of Khadoran troops are abysmal. Vand will sweep right over Khadora and into Elvangar. Is it not in our best interests to at least make contact with the humans to determine the level of threat to Elvangar? Surely that can be done without divulging the whereabouts of our homeland.”

“The humans already know where Elvangar is,” pointed out Vitalora. “Perhaps many of you missed it in the transcripts, but Caldal mentions that the Qubari gave him directions to the Gates of Elvangar.”

“Where is this?” demanded Malid. “I do not remember reading any such thing.”

Vitalora leaned closer to Malid and shuffled through his papers. He found the transcript of the interrogation and pointed to it. Malid read it out loud.

“The Qubari warrior handed Eltor a chart to the Gates of Elvangar,” read Malid. “When questioned how he had known the location of the elves, the warrior responded that they had always been friends of the elves. Why shouldn’t they know where their friends lived?”

“All the more reason to make contact with the humans,” stressed Volox. “Now that they know where we live, there is no risk in determining the danger to our homeland.”

“Negotiations are a waste of time,” Malid shook his head. “Queen Alycia has already declared that the elves will not aid the humans in their war against Vand. She considers the subject closed.”

“What the queen considers closed is not the topic of discussion before this council,” stated Vitalora. “We are assembled here to determine what our advice should be to the queen.”

“You are out of order,” scowled Malid. “How dare you say that the queen’s wishes are not to be considered in this council? She has the authority to remove any elder who is unfit for the job.”

“Would an elder be unfit if he informed the queen of her obligations?” Vitalora asked brusquely.

“The only obligation of the queen is to lead the people of Elvangar,” interjected Amber. “Do you declare that you know more about this situation than Queen Alycia herself knows?”

”That is exactly what I declare,” stated Vitalora, “and if the Head Elder will allow me to speak, I will enlighten the rest of you.”

“You are standing on the edge of a precipice, Vitalora,” frowned Malid. “Speak what is on your mind, but be aware that your statements will be heard by the queen.”

“Excellent,” Vitalora nodded curtly. “I was afraid that my statements would not be recorded so that the queen could feign ignorance of them.”

“Enough!” shouted Malid. “I will not stand for such talk in this chamber. Speak your piece and then sit down.”

“There is another section of the interrogation that members of this council have passed over,” began Vitalora. “Or perhaps it was not passed over, but the significance of the event did not penetrate our thick skulls. You will notice towards the end of the interrogations that Caldal describes the earthquake that rocked the world, but in the transcripts from Eltor, it was clearly not an earthquake. He mentions that it was said that Angragar was reborn.”

“So what?” asked Amber. “We felt the earthquake here in Elvangar. It obviously was a large one. The words they use to describe it are of little importance to us.”

“I agree,” nodded Malid. “The humans are so immersed in finally restoring Angragar that they think everything that happens is somehow connected to it. I do not see where you are leading.”

“Then allow me to continue,” said Vitalora. “The phrasing used gnawed at me. I was sure that it meant something specific, but it has been many years since any us of studied ancient history. So I went to library and researched Angragar. There are many references to it throughout our literature, poems about the death of civilization and such. Most of us remember Angragar as the human civilization that attacked the elves.”

“We remember,” nodded Amber. “It was a barbaric attack from our closest friends. That is the very reason that we now know that humans are not to be trusted. Our whole civilization is built on avoiding humans precisely because of Angragar. You did not need to go to the library to rediscover that. You only had to ask any school child.”

“If my desire was to know as much as a school child,” retorted Vitalora, “I assure you that I would have stopped looking at that point. I next went to the royal vaults for further research. This is where I found out how far our society has allowed itself to be deceived.”

“Deceived? Echoed Volox. “What do you mean? Is what we were taught about Angragar not the truth?”

“It is not the whole truth,” answered Vitalora. “Elvangar was indeed attacked by humans flying the flag of Angragar.”

“That is enough research for me,” interrupted Malid. “You just admitted that our human friends attacked us. There is nothing else that matters to this discussion.”

“I admitted no such thing,” retorted Vitalora. “The vessels that attacked us were not from Angragar. That mattered little at the time. The elves immediately set out to take revenge on the humans. We sent our armies to attack Angragar. We besieged the city and began destroying it with our siege engines. The human monarch, King Regis, surrendered to our forces. Only then did we discover that we had attacked an innocent people.”

“Innocent people?” asked Volox, the pained expression on his face was clearly evident. “What do you mean?”

“The ships that attacked us were flying false colors,” continued Vitalora. “The attacks on Elvangar were a deliberate attempt to foment war between Angragar and us. We obliged Angragar’s enemy. When the error was discovered, we made a pact with the humans of Angragar.”

“What was in this pact?” Amber asked anxiously.

“Kaltara had King Regis lead his people out of the city of Angragar,” Vitalora said. “Once the true believers were out of the city, Kaltara sealed it. The elves of Elvangar then created a jungle to hide the city from the enemies of Kaltara. The pact we made with the humans was that we would remains friends, but we would no longer meet one another. It was said that when Angragar was reborn, then the elves and the humans would reunite to vanquish their common foe.”

“Common foe?” questioned Malid. “And who would that be?”

“Vand,” declared Vitalora.

“The Vand of old?” asked Amber. “Or the Vand of new?”

“The are one in the same,” stated Vitalora.

“The same?” questioned Amber, his brow creasing in confusion. “Are you daft? Angragar was thousands of years ago. While the elves have managed to be ruled by the same family for that great span of years, I do not believe that the humans are capable of such loyalty. Perhaps someone has resurrected the title Vand for his own use, but I cannot believe that there is an ancestral connection to the Vand of old.”

“I am not talking about ancestry,” corrected Vitalora. “Vand is not a title of a human ruler. Vand is an individual, although I hesitate to call him human.”

“I am also confused,” admitted Volox. “Are you trying to say that the Vand that threatens the humans at this very moment is the same individual that threatened Angragar thousands of years ago?”

“And the same Vand that sent ships to pillage the coast of Angragar,” nodded Vitalora. “I point you to page five of Eltor’s interrogation. He mentions that the Emperor Vand is immortal. Rumors abounded that he takes the body of another every so often, having last done so only four months before the capture of Eltor and Caldal.”

“I take it that as nothing more than scary rumors to keep the captives in fear,” Malid shook his head. “When put together with everything else the boys told us about the Island of Darkness, it was just more nonsense to control the masses.”

“I took it the same way,” admitted Vitalora. “It was not until I started research on Angragar that I changed my mind. What truly convinced me that Vand is the same man that attacked Elvangar are the Prophecies of Kieran.”

”Where do they come into all of this?” asked Amber.

“As you know,” answered Vitalora, “Kieran was a young man at the time of the attack. His own city of Alamanda still lies in ruins along the coast. He was the only survivor of that attack, and it was his word that the ships bore the banner of Angragar. At the time he was a mage student, not even tested, yet he was selected to accompany the war ships sent to eradicate Angragar. While he was in the land of humans, Kieran had a series of visitations from Kaltara. Those visitations have come to be known as the Prophecies of Kieran.”

“I remember something about them,” nodded Volox. “Kaltara spoke of future heroes who would stand against the evil and restore order to a world of chaos. It was said that the prophecies vaulted Kieran into prominence despite his young years.”

“I do not doubt it,” agreed Vitalora, “because Kieran was quite young when he became king. I went deeper into the royal vault and found copies of the Prophecies of Kieran. They spoke about a Time of Calling in which three heroes would arise to carry Kaltara’s banner. Those heroes were the Torak, the Star, and the Astor. Do those names sound familiar to any of you?”

“From the interrogations,” gasped Amber. “Those are the names that Eltor used to name some of the humans.”

“I recall that Emperor Marak was also referred to as the Torak,” nodded Volox. “Could they have adopted those names because of their historical context? Perhaps there were human texts that copied the Prophecies of Kieran?”

“I suppose that is possible,” smiled Vitalora, “but that supposes that Kaltara was fooled by those humans, too. I say that because, according to the Prophecies of Kieran, the ancient city of Angragar shall not be unlocked until the Astor reclaims it. Angragar is indeed reborn, fellow elders. The Time of Calling is upon us.”

“What now do we propose to the queen?” asked Volox. “If the prophecies of Kieran are the truth, then Kaltara is calling upon the elven people to join in the human struggle against an ancient and evil foe that has brought death to both of our peoples.”

“The queen will not accept this,” frowned Malid. “She was quite clear that the issue was closed.”

“She has no choice,” countered Vitalora. “Even the queen must bow to the will of Kaltara. God is clear in what he expects of the elven people. To refuse God’s call at this time is to force the elven people to disavow Kaltara.”

“I stand with Vitalora on this,” vowed Volox. “I think the old texts are clear. We need to tell the queen that Elvangar must make contact with the humans. I ask for a formal vote.”

“I disagree,” stated Malid. “I think you raise some interesting points, Vitalora, but they are not conclusive. I will, however, call for a vote on this matter.”

The vote was taken with eight elders demanding that the queen contact the humans. Two elders abstained, and two voted to dismiss that matter until more information was studied. Malid and Amber were the elders who voted to dismiss the issue. Although he had voted against it, Malid was obligated to present the proposal, speaking for the victors of the vote. The meeting adjourned, and the Head Elder went directly to see the queen.

“What is it, Malid?” asked Queen Alycia as she stared over the railing at the people moving through the city.

“I bring a proposal from the Council of Elders,” declared Malid. “It entails sending envoys to the humans.”

“I said that matter was closed,” shouted the queen as she whirled around to face the elder. “I do not want to hear any more about it.”

“I am obligated under the law,” protested Malid. “The Council has taken a vote. I must present it to you.”

Queen Alycia fumed as she strode around in circles on the platform above the city. Finally, she returned to the railing, her breathing returning to normal.

“Speak of your proposal,” she ordered, “but be quick about it.”

Malid sighed and began to relate the discussion of the Council. He tried his best to be objective and present the position of the majority. When he finished, he stood silently waiting for a response.

“What was the vote?” the queen asked calmly.

“Eight for,” answered Malid. “There were two abstentions.”

“Who voted against it?” asked the queen.

“Amber and I voted against it,” answered the Head Elder. “I suggested that the idea required more study. I was not persuasive enough.”

“It needs no further study,” declared the queen. “I think things are perfectly clear.”

“Then shall the elders nominate a group to make the contact?” asked Malid.

“Certainly not,” replied Queen Alycia. “There will be no contact with the humans. That is the law. What was the sentence imposed on the two boys?”

“They have been forbidden from using ships for five years,” answered Malid. “They were also sentenced to prison for an undefined period to allow us to completely interrogate them. The interrogation is over. They have been released.”

“Released?” shouted the queen. “And I was not even told?”

“It was hardly a matter that required such a lofty review,” frowned Malid. “You certainly appeared to be satisfied with their sentence at the time it was given.”

“That was before the Council turned against me,” scowled the queen. “Those boys spoke with humans. They should be punished with death. Maybe that would end all of this nonsense about contacting our enemies. Those boys make it sound like the humans are so wonderful. Well, they forget our history. Humans are evil. Never again will the elves suffer the humans. Not while a descendent of Kieran sits on this throne.”

“What’s done is done,” sighed Malid. “They are just boys.”

“No, Malid,” scowled the queen. “They are not just boys. They deliberately broke the law. Their foolishness can have grave consequences to our people. Already their words are turning the Council of Elders against me. I will not have the populace wanting to reestablish contact with the humans. This situation needs to come under control immediately. I want those boys rearrested. I don’t care how you do it, just do it. They will not be allowed to walk freely among the people spreading their tales of deceit. Who were the main supporters of this proposal?”

Malid fidgeted. While he was extremely loyal to the queen, he also had a duty to the Council of Elders. He could almost smell the suggestion that was coming next.

“Who were they?” demanded the queen. “Tell me now.”

“Vitalora and Volox spoke for the proposal,” sighed Malid. “None of the others even spoke.”

“I want them off the Council,” stated the queen.

“That is within your powers,” frowned Malid, “but I would advise against it. It would be seen as intentionally interfering with the Council. The people would lose all respect for the government.”

“If I intended to dismiss them outright,” retorted the queen, “I would not need to be mentioning it to you. Find some reason for me to dismiss them, some reason not associated with this foul proposal.”

“I…” began Malid.

“That is all, Head Elder,” snapped the queen. “Tend to your duties. They are many and varied, and you do not have any free time to spend here chatting.”

Malid exhaled loudly as he nodded perfunctorily and left. The queen stood at the railing watching her people go about their lives, completely unaware of the impending doom that the troublemakers would bring down on them. She heard the door open behind her. She listened to the military footsteps as they approached. She turned around with a smile on her lips, which disappeared as soon as she saw Rattal.

“Where is Tamar?” asked the queen.

“He is going out of the city for the day,” reported Rattal. “I have brought the readiness reports for you.”

“And where is he going?” asked Queen Alycia.

“He did not say,” shrugged the officer. “He is my superior. I do not question him.”

“And I am your queen,” declared Queen Alycia. “From now on, you are to provide a service to me. This service, if properly performed, will boost your career tremendously. This service is also strictly confidential. Do you understand?”

“I am merely a servant of my queen,” grinned the officer. “I value her over all else.”

“Excellent,” smiled the queen. “I think you will go far. Your first task is to report the movements of Tamar. I want to know everything about whom he meets and where he goes. Do you understand?”

“Perfectly,” grinned the officer. “Is that all you require of me?”

“I shall have more tasks for you in the future,” promised the queen. “You are, after all, a rising star in the army.”

* * *

“Let me see it grow,” grumbled Garl, “and don’t rush it. I want to eat it for the evening meal. We are a poor village, and you must learn to waste nothing.”

MistyTrail nodded and concentrated on the seedling. She closed her eyes and bowed her head as she cast the spell. Alongside of her, Mistake was casting the same spell, but on a different seedling. Garl watched closely. He smiled as the dirt moved, and the stalk started to rise. Both plants grew at about the same rate, and the old man nodded in satisfaction that the girls were not rushing it.

“Rushing a spell is the surest way of failure,” declared Garl. “I am glad to see that both of you have learned that lesson. It is one that keeps a majority of students from succeeding.”

MistyTrail opened her eyes and smiled as ears of corn sprouted on the new plant. She looked over at Mistake’s plant and saw the same success.

“That is much easier than I imagined,” MistyTrail smiled cheerfully.

“Of course it is easy,” scowled Garl. “Why do you think you are learning it so soon? The hard stuff comes later. Well, Mistake? You are quiet today. That always causes me to be suspicious about your thoughts.”

“I am just amazed,” smiled Mistake. “I never really thought that I could do magic. I went along with this for MistyTrail’s sake. You have taught us to do so much, but this is the first spell where the result sort of jumps out at you.”

“Well the other spells are just as important,” replied Garl. “Sometimes you cannot see the results of your labor as vividly as you can right now. You must remember that elven magic is all about life in its many forms. Sometimes it is the physical form like this spell, but the others are no less important.”

“You mean like healing?” asked MistyTrail.

“Sometimes you can see the effects of a healing spell,” nodded Garl, “but other times you cannot. Healing is not just physical. It can be mental or emotional as well. Or you could be healing the internal organs which are unseen by your eyes. You saw some of that yesterday when you made the children unusually happy. The children here are really neglected by our government. The villagers are considered less of a citizen than the city dwellers, unless it comes to war. While we don’t acknowledge it openly, all of us suffer some bouts of depression from time to time. The children are no different. They have dreams and want to be heroes when they grow up, but they know that is unlikely for a villager. Your spells yesterday temporarily healed their depression. That is why they were so happy.”

“But Volox was a villager,” MistyTrail pointed out. “Now he is an elder and his son is an important officer. Why does living in a village matter?”

“There are exceptions,” sighed Garl. “Volox is a good man. The king saw his talents and gave him opportunities. Volox accepted those opportunities and conquered them. That is why he was able to overcome his villager status.”

“So if he could,” shrugged Mistake, “why can’t anyone?”

“For one reason,” frowned Garl, “the king is no longer. The queen does not share the same views that the king did. She sees the villagers as almost outside of Elvangar. She accepts them as elves, but the people she cares for are the city dwellers. To her, they are the elves of Elvangar. Had Volox arisen today, he would remain a villager until his dying days.”

“That doesn’t sound right,” frowned Mistake.

“It isn’t,” shrugged Garl. “One of you run and get my pipe. I need a smoke.”

MistyTrail and Mistake exchanged glances. They shook their heads in unison.

“Smoking is bad for you,” declared MistyTrail. “Slari made us promise to keep it away from you. She says it will shorten your life.”

“Bah,” grumbled Garl as he stared at MistyTrail. “That women is a pain. I should teach you some dark spells just to practice on her. Run and get my pipe.”

“Ow,” scowled MistyTrail as her hands went to her head. “What are you doing? That hurts.”

Mistake looked at her sister with confusion. The old man had not moved, and yet she was blaming Garl for something. Garl frowned heavily and turned his gaze to Mistake. Seconds later Mistake yelped and glared accusingly at the old man.

“Whatever you are doing,” threatened Mistake as a knife slid into her hand, “you will stop it right now. You will not hurt me or my sister.”

Garl shook his head and stared at the two girls. His eyes grew wide and his mouth hung open.

“I am sorry,” Garl said breathlessly. “What did you feel?”

“It was like two hands pressing on my brain,” answered MistyTrail. “Like you were squeezing it. Why did you do that?”

“It is not normally harmful,” frowned Garl. “It is a simple compulsion spell. I find it most curious that you both felt it. One of you run and fetch my pipe, and I will show you how to cast it.”

“It sounds like just another way to get your way,” scowled Mistake. “It was probably just a hurting spell so that we would obey you.”

“No,” Garl said with unusual sincerity. “It was truly a compulsion spell, but one that must never be used on a descendent of Kieran. I will teach it to you.”

“Then we can repay you for the pain,” grinned MistyTrail.

“I am afraid that you could,” frowned Garl. “You see, I am a descendent of Kieran as well. In fact, only descendents of Kieran can use this particular spell. It was developed by the master himself.”

“Does that mean that we are related?” asked MistyTrail.

“In a way,” nodded Garl, “but I would not put too much importance on that. Kieran lived thousands of years ago. There are many branches of his family tree.”

“Yet you were surprised,” frowned Mistake. “If there are so many, why were you surprised?”

“Lineages in Elvangar are very important,” explained the old man. “Just about every descendent of Kieran is well known, yet you two are not. It makes me want to know more about just who you two are.”

Chapter 21

Return to the Mountain

“How will we know if have learned this spell?” asked MistyTrail. “We cannot use it on each other to find out.”

“Not without causing pain,” answered Garl as he sat on the rock and smoked his pipe. “You can try it on a villager later. None of the other villagers are descended from Kieran. We will do it together so that I can assess your abilities.”

“You seem to know a great deal about magic,” remarked MistyTrail. “Why is it that you were cast out of the Society of Mages?”

Garl squinted at MistyTrail as if trying to determine how much she knew. He sighed and waved his hand in dismissal.

“The Society of Mages are a bunch of windbags,” Garl stated. “They like to act as if only the best and most creative are accepted into their ranks, but the truth is that they are afraid of anyone who thinks differently. I am quite happy to be apart from them.”

“But why were you kicked out?” pushed Mistake.

“He offended the queen,” replied Slari as she approached, hands on her hips. “I thought you two would stop him from smoking that nasty pipe? Put it out, Garl. You know it will kill you.”

“Would that be so bad?” quipped Garl. “I think I am going to smoke this pipe until it is done. Why don’t you run along, Slari? I think I hear one of your children being eaten by those trolls that moved into the jungle.”

Slari turned around and stared into the jungle in horror. Garl’s lips curled up slightly as if enjoying a private joke. Suddenly, a child hollered near the jungle, and Slari ran off.

“That was not a nice thing to say,” frowned Mistake. “What if Tokak really did eat one of the children? You would not be smiling then.”

“So you know one of the trolls?” asked Garl as his eyebrows rose in surprise.

“I know them both,” nodded Mistake. “They are really nice people when you get to know them. How do you know them?”

“I walk in the jungle each morning,” replied Garl. “I do not think the trolls will eat the children. In fact, I am pretty sure of it.”

“How can you be so sure?” asked Mistake. “Tiny has a voracious appetite.”

“That she does,” chuckled the old man, “but they like elves for their intelligence more than the taste. I convinced them that elven children are rather stupid, and that it takes a good number of years before they get smart.”

“Why didn’t they eat you?” asked MistyTrail.

“I am too old,” chuckled Garl. “I told them that I had already forgotten more than they knew, so eating me would make them stupid.”

Mistake started laughing, but MistyTrail frowned.

“Why do the elves allow the trolls to live in the jungle if they eat elves?” the Sakovan asked. “Surely the guards could kill the trolls?”

“I am sure that they could,” nodded Garl, “but that does not mean that they should. The trolls are intelligent beings, and elves do not take another’s life unnecessarily. Besides, the trolls have not eaten a single elf since they arrived. I think it may be more of a game with them than anything else. I doubt we taste very good compared to a nice hog.”

A sound from the nearby forest trail alerted MistyTrail to someone approaching. A knife slid into her hand as she turned to see who was coming. Mistake stood alongside MistyTrail and waited. A moment later, they relaxed. They saw Tamar escorting Eltor and Caldal to the village, and smiles split their faces.

“You are not in prison anymore?” MistyTrail asked happily.

“No,” smiled Caldal. “We are not allowed near any boats, but we are free. We have come home to Etta.”

Mistake grinned mischievously and stared at Caldal. Suddenly, Caldal rushed forward and hugged MistyTrail as if they were long lost lovers. MistyTrail dropped her knife and frowned in confusion.

“I am sorry,” apologized Caldal as he embarrassingly broke the embrace. “I don’t know what came over me.”

MistyTrail heard Mistake chuckling under her breath and turned to face her sister with an angry glare. Garl coughed and both girls turned to him. He shook his head and rose from the rock, tapping his pipe empty.

“I have tasks to attend to,” Garl declared with a twinkle in his eye. “We will meet again later to continue our discussion on the complications of using serious magic for trivial reasons.”

Mistake’s face immediately dropped its smirk as she realized that a lecture was forthcoming when next she met the old man. Garl nodded and turned towards the village. The girls turned their attention to their arriving friends.

“I took the opportunity to escort these young lads,” stated Tamar. “I wanted to see how you two were doing out here.”

“We are doing well,” smiled MistyTrail. “We are staying with Garl, and he is teaching us magic.”

“We even learned that we are descended from the famous Kieran,” added Mistake.

“Are you?” frowned Tamar. “Have you discovered your family then?”

“No,” MistyTrail shook her head. “It is just a spell that only those of the Kieran line can learn. How are things at home?”

“You two are missed,” smiled Tamar as he extracted a small sack from his pack. “Anija sent a sack of cookies for you. Unfortunately, I can’t stay long today, but I will arrange to visit another day. I spent the better part of the day getting Eltor and Caldal out of prison.”

“We thank you for your efforts,” smiled Eltor. “I was afraid that we would never get out of there.”

“Will you stay and share the cookies?” asked MistyTrail as she bent down and picked up her knife.

“No,” smiled Tamar as he handed the sack to Mistake. “They are for you. I will be back. Abayo.”

“Abayo,” Mistake and MistyTrail said in unison.

“How did you meet Tamar?” Caldal asked MistyTrail. “He is a high officer in the army.”

“We stayed with his parents in Morada,” explained MistyTrail. “They are very nice people. Let’s go to the village. I am sure that your family and friends will want to learn that you are home.”

In the bushes not far away, an elven officer watched Tamar depart and the others head for the village. He waited until everyone had left before continuing to follow Tamar.

* * *

Rejji and Wyant stopped at the abrupt edge of the mountain trail that used to lead to the summit of Mount Kiator. Wyant leaned slightly forward and stared downwards at the pile of rubble a thousand feet below him. He shook his head and leaned back.

“You would never survive that fall,” Wyant declared. “So this is where you, Bakhai, and Mistake evaded the Jiadin. The three of you are lucky to be alive today. I cannot imagine trying to get into that cave with a bunch of Jiadin chasing me. Are you sure that you want to go through with this?”

“I have to give it a try,” Rejji nodded as Mobi and Panka arrived and dropped the rope and metal hooks on the narrow path. “Besides, I will be harnessed. I will not reach the bottom if I fall.”

“That is where you need to go?” asked Mobi as he pointed to a small cave opening in the side of the sheer cliff above the broken section of the trail.

“Yes,” Rejji replied. “Get me in there, and I will do what I have come to do.”

“Be eaten is what you will accomplish,” frowned Wyant. “I am not real happy with this plan of yours.”

“I must at least try,” responded the Astor. “Your task will be just as hard. I don’t know if any of this is going to work, but we must find some way to get the Jiadin to join the Free Tribes. Do you have a better plan?”

“I don’t have any plan,” Wyant conceded.

“Then help Mobi and Panka get me into this harness,” replied Rejji.

The Qubari warrior fitted the harness around the Astor while Wyant hammered metal spikes into the side of the mountain. Mobi tossed a large metal hook into the cave opening and pulled on the attached rope to set the hook. The ropes from the hook and the spikes were secured to Rejji’s harness. When they were all done, Rejji was protected from falling to his death. A rope stretched from the wall above his head to the hook embedded in the upper portion of the mouth of the cave, which was slightly below the level of the destroyed trail.

“You will have an easy time of getting into the cave,” declared Mobi, “but it will be harder to get you back up here. Do not cut the harness off when you enter the cave. Untie it.”

Rejji nodded and inhaled deeply. He walked to the edge of the precipice and grabbed the overhead rope with both hands. He pulled on it as hard as he could and nodded when the spikes did not pull out of the mountain. Steeling his courage, Rejji stepped off the edge of the trail. His body swung precariously for a moment before he exhaled.

The Astor moved along the rope slowly, passing one hand over the other as he continually progressed towards the cave opening. Within a few minutes, his feet were able to touch the floor of the cave. He used that leverage to propel his body further into the cave. Mobi sighed with relief when Rejji stuck his head out of the cave and waved to his friends on the broken pathway.

Rejji methodically untied the harness and stepped out of it. He moved to the back of the cave and found the small passage. Dropping to his hands and knees in the darkness, Rejji crawled into the small tunnel. Memories flashed through Rejji’s mind as he navigated the small tunnel. When the tunnel enlarged enough for him to stand, he shook his head in wonder at how the world had changed since his last visit to the cave.

The tunnel widened a great deal and a soft glow of light emanated from around a bend in the tunnel. Rejji started whistling loudly as he walked towards the bend. He trembled with fear as he thought about what he was going to do, but he tried to keep that fear out of his whistling. As he rounded the bend, he saw the dragon staring at him.

“Myka!” greeted Rejji as he bow exaggeratedly. “Imagine finding you here.”

“I must get that hole fixed,” snarled the dragon. “I thought I told you never to come back here. You did not bring the baby maker with you I hope?”

“No,” Rejji replied as he continued to walk towards the dragon. “Mistake has gone to the land of the elves to be with her kind.”

“Well, you should have gone with her,” retorted the dragon. “Now I will have to eat you or you will continue coming here. You will probably try to bring friends with you the next time.”

“Actually,” smiled Rejji as he halted in front of the dragon, “my friends are outside the hole. I told them that you do not enjoy company. They will wait out there for me to return.”

“They will have a long wait,” huffed Myka as smoke curled from her nostrils, “because you are never returning to them.”

“I have an offer to make to you,” Rejji continued, ignoring the dragon’s threat.

“An offer?” balked the dragon. “Do humans go through life with dirt in their ears? Did you not just hear me say that you are my next meal? There is nothing that you can offer that I cannot eat right now.”

“There is something,” shrugged Rejji as he felt the trembling cease. “I can offer you a life of excitement and fun.”

“You?” Myka belched fire that singed the hairs on Rejji’s arm. “I do not need a human to have excitement. I make my own excitement. You are just trying to talk your way out of being eaten.”

“Myka,” sighed Rejji, “why would I go through all the trouble of coming up this mountain and risking my life to enter that hole in your cave just to talk my way out of being eaten? Do you think I just happened to come here by accident?”

“Foolishness is more like it,” retorted Myka. “You should have known better. Why did you come?”

“I want you to hunt humans,” grinned Rejji.

“You want me to eat your enemies?” asked Myka as her brow creased in confusion. “Why should I help you in such a way?”

“I don’t want you to eat them,” Rejji shook his head. “I want you to herd them. Like a shepherd.”

“Do I look like a shepherd to you?” balked the dragon. “You really are quite deranged. I wonder if eating you would be bad for me?”

“Look,” explained Rejji. “I have need of your services. I have a plan that I think you will find exceedingly exciting, and there is a bonus in it for you. I will set aside a whole herd of wasooki for your pleasure. My people will care for the wasooki and breed them continually until you feel that your payment has been fulfilled. Will you listen?”

“You expect to buy my services?” Myka asked with disbelief. “Did I hear you correctly? I am a dragon, not a mercenary.”

“Big fat wasooki,” grinned Rejji. “Not scrawny Fakaran wasooki. We imported them from Khadora. There must be hundreds of them.”

“Hundreds of them?” echoed the dragon as her tongue flicked out of her mouth. “What do I have to do?”

“You will really enjoy this,” Rejji said excitedly. “Let me explain.”

* * *

Back in Angragar, Rejji and Wyant stood in the plaza before the Temple of Kaltara. The Qubari people moved through the plaza on errands much like they had done in the Qubari village, but they were no longer clothed in breechcloths. The Qubari had settled in homes and adopted the garments of their ancestors. Colorful robes and dresses passed in every direction as the Qubari scurried around and prepared Angragar to once again be the capital of Fakara.

“Quite a change in this city,” noted Wyant as he held the reins to his horse. The tribes are going to like it here.”

“I sure hope that they do,” replied Rejji. “You have a long hard ride ahead of you. Are you sure that you know exactly how I want this done?”

“Positively,” nodded Wyant. “Word of the dragons will be spread clear across Fakara within the week. The woman and the children of the Free Tribes will begin arriving here even before then. Will that be enough time for the Qubari to get the city ready?”

“Angragar will be ready,” promised Rejji. “Just make sure that the Jiadin get the message that I want them to hear.”

Wyant nodded and mounted his horse. Rejji stood and watched the marshal ride out of the plaza. Chief Dumo approached Rejji after the marshal had left.

“Your plan is crazy,” Dumo declared humorously. “That is why I like it.”

“I will like it if it works,” frowned Rejji. “We are running out of time, and I have no other plan to gather the Jiadin to me. What is this I hear about caretakers remaining in the jungle?”

“That is what I wanted to talk to you about,” Dumo replied. “While most of the Qubari are adjusting well to the return of Angragar, some families want to remain in the jungle. I do not think it is a bad idea. While the jungle has fallen away from Angragar, what remains of it is still vast. It might be wise for some Qubari caretakers to remain in our old village. It would ensure that our ways are never lost.”

“Unless the caretakers forget who they really are,” frowned Rejji. “They may cease to be Qubari.”

“Never,” promised Chief Dumo. “For thousands of years we never forgot. In fact, I would like to send future children to live in the jungle for a season. I think it would help them understand who the Qubari are. It would also keep the ties between the village and Angragar strong. It requires your permission.”

“The Qubari have remained faithful to Kaltara,” nodded Rejji. “I cannot refuse the request. I leave it up to you to make sure that the binding of the two peoples remains in place.”

“I shall see to it,” nodded the Qubari chief. “Who knows when having men in the jungle may help us in the coming struggle?”

* * *

Upon his return to Morada, Tamar saw his father and several other elders sitting in a park. He turned from his path and joined the group.

“It makes absolutely no sense to me,” complained Vitalora. “The scrolls are clear about it. This is definitely the Time of Calling. There can be no doubt about that. How can she ignore it?”

“Queen Alycia can act how she wishes,” shrugged Volox. “The Council of Elders is advisory only. We cannot force her to do what is right.”

“What has happened?” asked Tamar.

“The ancient scrolls state that the awakening of Angragar will happen in the Time of Calling,” explained Tamar’s father. “At that time, the elves are commanded to rejoin with their human brethren, but Queen Alycia refuses. She will not allow even cursory contact with the humans.”

“She has always been steadfast against contact with humans,” shrugged Tamar. “Why do you expect her to change now?”

“She has not always been this way,” retorted Vitalora. “It is only since the loss of the king that she has been so set in her ways.”

“The humans killed the king,” interjected another elder. “How can you blame her for hating them?”

“I am not trying to blame her for anything,” sighed Vitalora. “I feel her pain over that tragic incident. No woman should have to endure such pain, but she is our queen, not just any woman. She has a duty to lead the elven people as best she can. She cannot ignore the Prophecies of Kieran.”

“And what do you propose to do about it?” asked Amber. “She is under no legal obligation to believe in the Prophecies of Kieran. Were those prophecies codified into law, then you would have a point, but they were not.”

“But clearly we all believe in them?” retorted Vitalora. “Kieran was the greatest mage in history. His ascension to the throne of Elvangar started a dynasty that has lasted thousands of years. How can his most crucial writings be ignored?”

“They are not law,” shrugged Amber. “She is a Kieran, and you are not. That makes the prophecies more hers than yours. She can believe them or not as she sees fit.”

“Yes, she is a Kieran,” scowled Vitalora, “as are others in this land. Maybe the throne belongs to one who is not Kieran. At least then we could follow Kaltara’s will.”

“There are many Kierans in Elvangar,” interjected Tamar. “Even the foreign girls are descendents of Kieran. I don’t think lineage is the question here. I think the queen just needs to see the importance of the scrolls. Perhaps we should take them to her.”

“How?” snapped Vitalora. “She no longer gives audiences to just anyone. Any audience must be approved by Malid, and he is not about to allow it.”

“Why wouldn’t he?” asked Volox. “I know that he does not entirely agree with us on this matter, but Malid has always been fair in carrying out the duties of the Head Elder. We should ask him. Amber, you know him best. Would you arrange it?”

“I think it best that those who feel strongest should address it,” refused Amber. “I will find Malid and tell him that you wish to talk to him. That is all that I will do.”

Amber turned and strode out of the park. The other elders continued to discuss the problem. Volox pulled Tamar away from the others.

“I know that you see the queen frequently,” Volox said softly. “Would it be possible for you to feel out the queen on this matter?”

“I can try,” sighed Tamar. “Actually I missed a meeting with her today because I took the boys out to the village. She is likely to be angry with me. Maybe if I waited a day or two before bringing it up?”

“That will be fine,” nodded Volox. “We will try going through Malid first, but I fear that will fail.”

“But you just said that it would work,” Tamar replied with confusion. “Why such a sudden change?”

“The way Amber reacted has me puzzled,” confessed Volox. “When I asked him to approach Malid, I expected an immediate agreement, yet Amber acted as if I had struck him across the face. Something is going on here that I do not understand.”

“Something devious?” asked Tamar.

“I do not know,” admitted Volox. “Malid and Amber were the two dissenters on this issue before the Council, yet Amber chose to discuss it with us today in a congenial atmosphere. Why then would he suddenly change his attitude and run away? It makes no sense to me.”

“Unless Amber’s presence was for a purpose different than everyone else’s,” posed Tamar. “Were I you, I would be cautious with what I said in his presence until I learned more about what is happening.”

“Your advice is sound,” nodded Volox. “I think it is time for me to go and eat anyway. Will you join me and your mother tonight?”

“I would love to,” Tamar shook his head as the other elders began to disperse, “but I have been negligent in my duties today. There is much work waiting for me back at the office. I will come by tomorrow night.”

Volox smiled and embraced his son. Tamar watched his father leave the park and then turned and headed along a city street. He stepped into an inn and ordered a simple meal. He finished it quickly and went on his way.

As Tamar entered the courtyard of the fort he saw a dozen soldiers hurrying out. He paid no particular attention to the detail and made his way to his office. There on his desk was a pile of papers awaiting his attention. He sighed heavily and began going through them. After an hour spent reviewing the papers, Tamar pushed his chair back and rose. As he left the office he saw a small group of officers at the end of the hall. They were talking softly, but excitedly. His mind filled with curiosity as he slowly approached the group.

“What is happening?” asked Tamar.

“You haven’t heard?” retorted one of the officers. “An elder was arrested for treason tonight.”

“Treason?” echoed Tamar. “What elder would be foolish enough to spout treason?”

“It was Vitalora,” replied the officer.

“When did this happen?” asked Tamar. “What did Vitalora say that was treasonous?”

“It was about an hour ago,” answered the officer. “Vitalora stood in a park right here in the city and proclaimed that a Kieran should not sit on the throne of Elvangar. He was planning a rebellion. Can you imagine that? One of our own elders plotting an overthrow of Queen Alycia.”

“No, I can’t imagine that,” frowned Tamar. “If you will excuse me?”

Tamar’s mind raced with fear, but he controlled his outward appearance. He left the fort and subconsciously checked behind him as he entered an alley. The hair stood up on the nape of his neck as he saw someone duck around the corner behind him. Tamar’s mind immediately switched to military mode. He mentally marked the person following him as an enemy and employed his training to lose the tail.

Tamar took an overly circuitous route, which involved a number of sharp turns that afforded him with an excellent view of his backtrack. Only when he was positively sure that he had lost his follower, did he approach his father’s house. Instead of using the platform, Tamar climbed the tree and remained low to the platform when he knocked on the door. Volox answered the knock and peered into the dark questioningly. He only looked down when Tamar hopped through the doorway.

“What are you doing down there?” asked Volox as he shut the door.

“Hiding from whoever is following me,” explained Tamar as he rose. “Something is going very wrong in this city. I think you should resign from the Council. Retire and go live in a village.”

“What are you talking about?” asked Volox. “Have you gone mad?”

“Perhaps,” sighed Tamar, “but they arrested Vitalora tonight.”

“Vitalora?” echoed Volox. “Whatever for?”

“Treason,” answered Tamar. “Treason for words that you and I heard in the park earlier.”

“He said nothing treasonous,” scowled Volox. “All he said was…”

“That a Kieran should not sit on the throne of Elvangar,” finished Tamar. “I know, Father. I was there. Vitalora was not arrested for his words tonight. I do not know why he was arrested, but this game is being played for keeps. Your position on the Council is not worth your life.”

“What makes you think they will be coming for me next?” asked Volox.

“Because you and Vitalora agreed on what you were talking about,” explained Tamar. “Only the two of you were vocal in the discussion. Can you afford to take the chance? Retire.”

“I will not,” Volox declared as his body stiffened. “I will continue to stand for what I believe is right. If they want to hang me for that, then let them do so. I will not turn tail and run.”

Chapter 22

The Royal Vaults

Garl sat on a log at the edge of the glade where the jungle began. Mistake and MistyTrail were just inside the fringe of the jungle practicing the magical spells of accelerated plant growth.

“Enough,” called Garl. “Both of you have proved your prowess with such spells. It is time to return to the magic of mental healing.”

The sisters grinned with satisfaction as they exited the jungle and sat on the ground in front of the old man.

“This magic is fun,” declared Mistake. “I never even knew that I had any abilities. Do you think there are others who can do magic who do not even know it?”

“I am sure there are,” nodded Garl, “but I doubt any of them have the abilities that you two do. You both learn so quickly. I am surprised that your talents were not discovered earlier.”

“I was taught some magic in StarCity,” offered MistyTrail, “but I did not seem to have the abilities that others did.”

“What type of magic did they teach you?” inquired Garl.

“Fireballs and force bolts,” answered MistyTrail. “I was able to learn some healing, but not much else.”

“You are different from the humans who taught you,” sighed Garl. “Elven magic is of the light. It is the magic of nature in that it gathers life forces only. It sounds as if the humans gather the power of just about anything. I can see how learning some of those spells would be very difficult for you.”

Eltor and Caldal saw the girls and came racing across the glade. They slid to a halt and flopped down on the ground near the small group.

“Tayo,” greeted Eltor. “Do you have free time today? Caldal and I are planning a hike into the jungle to go exploring.”

“Tayo,” replied MistyTrail as she cocked her head as if pondering a new thought. “I find it interesting that the elves use the same form of greeting as the Sakovans. The Omungans never used it. Why did the Sakovans?”

“The Sakovans used Tayo?” questioned the old man. “That is strange for a human to use an elven greeting. I am beginning to become very curious about how you came to be raised by these humans. Tell me about it.”

“Maybe later,” Mistake smiled at the boys. “We need some more time on our studies today.”

Eltor and Caldal nodded and dashed into the jungle. Garl watched them leave and shook his head.

“If only they would put that energy to some good use,” he grumbled. “You both grew up in different lands you said. Tell me of your beginnings.”

“I don’t remember anything about it,” shrugged MistyTrail. “I grew up always believing that I was Sakovan. It was not until Mistake arrived looking for me that I actually learned of how I came to be a Sakovan. Some fishermen picked me up at sea during a terrible storm. They saved my life by giving up their own. I never even knew them.”

“These Sakovans adopted you and raised you as one of their own?” asked Garl.

“I was Sakovan,” shrugged MistyTrail. “I was one of them. Never did they hint that I was not.”

“Interesting,” mused Garl. “The Sakovans accepted an elven child without question. That is a better reception than the one from you own people. What about you Mistake?”

“My life was not as nice,” frowned Mistake. “I was also rescued from the sea by a fisherman. He took me home to his wife who hated me. He died not longer afterwards. His wife abused me and called me Mistake. I eventually ran away. I wandered for years, stealing food when I became hungry, sleeping in the woods or an alleyway. It was not until I met Rejji that I actually began to trust anyone.”

“Rejji?” echoed Garl. “A boyfriend?”

Mistake frowned, not at the question, but about her thoughts regarding the answer. “I like Rejji a great deal,” she nodded. “He has always stood by me no matter what I wanted to do. He is the Astor that opened Angragar.”

“The Astor,” mused Garl. “That name has not heard of since the Prophecies of Kieran.”

“Do these prophecies tell of a Star and a Torak, too?” asked MistyTrail.

“They do,” nodded Garl. “Why do you ask?”

“We know them all,” grinned Mistake. “I have seen the mural of them in Angragar. We were with them when the jungle faded away from the city.”

“We helped them vanquish the hellsouls of Angragar,” MistyTrail added excitedly.

Garl suddenly rose and began pacing. He shook his head and stared at the girls and then paced again. Just as suddenly as he rose, the old man sat back down on the log.

“I must go to Morada soon,” he declared. “Perhaps we can all go together.”

“I would prefer to stay here,” frowned Mistake. “There is nothing in Morada that interests me. Why do you want to go?”

“I want to reread the Prophecies of Kieran,” answered Garl. “I remember most of them, but I have to be sure of what they say. How did the two of you ever find each other?”

Mistake grinned and pulled her carozit from her pack. “The Sage of the Mountain gave me this magical carozit,” beamed Mistake. “It showed me how far away I was from MistyTrail. When you hold it upside down like this,” she demonstrated, “the balls touch, but that is only because we are so close. When we were apart, the balls would not touch.”

“A magical carozit?” mused Garl as he reached for the carozit.

Garl held the carozit upside down. The balls fell down but did not quite touch. He stared at the carozit for several silent moments before tears welled up in his eyes.

“What is it?” asked MistyTrail. “Do you have a relative nearby?”

“A sister,” nodded Garl. “She lives in Morada. I have not seen her in years. I must visit her when I go to the city.”

“Is the queen your sister?” Mistake asked with suspicion.

“Heavens no,” Garl shook his head. “My sister is around my age. She is near the end of her days. Yes, I must visit her when I go to the city.”

Garl handed the carozit to MistyTrail instead of Mistake. Mistake reached over to take it back and Garl’s eyes widened as the carozit was passed.

“Do not put it away yet,” urged Garl as he sat erect and wiped his eyes. “Hold it out between you and MistyTrail.”

Mistake frowned with confusion, but she obeyed.

“Put your hand on your sister’s,” instructed the old man. “I am sure that I saw the balls jump when you passed it to Mistake.”

MistyTrail placed her hand on Mistake’s hand. The balls immediately moved apart. Garl nodded enthusiastically.

“About the same distance apart as when I held it,” Garl said excitedly. “You can put it away now.”

“I do not understand,” frowned Mistake as she placed the carozit in her pack. “What does it mean?”

“I can only assume,” offered Garl, “but it appears that the carozit reacts to your closest living relative. For you that is MistyTrail, and for her it is you, but when you both put your hands on it, it indicates the closest living relative to both of you.”

“That means that we have family in Elvangar?” Mistake asked excitedly.

“As I understand it,” nodded the old man. “The distance appeared to be the same as for my sister who lives in Morada. Let me ask you some more questions.”

“Alright,” nodded Mistake. “Anything if it will help us find our family.”

“I cannot assure that,” replied Garl. “It is hard for me to understand how you both happened to be rescued from sea, but in two very different locations. When a ship sinks, it does not move very far. How can this be?”

“The Sakovans called it the Year of the Storm,” answered MistyTrail. “It was the fiercest storm ever remembered. Many people died both at sea and on the land. Many homes were destroyed.”

“Plus our homes were not that far apart,” interjected Mistake. “They are a tremendous distance by land, but by sea it is not all that great.”

“The Year of the Storm,” nodded Garl. “This just keeps getting more interesting with each bit of information divulged. I am leaving for Morada first thing in the morning. You may spend the day tomorrow playing with the boys or practicing what I have taught you. I will leave that choice up to you.”

“Perhaps we should go with you,” MistyTrail said. “If we have relatives in the city, we must find them.”

“No,” Garl said emphatically. “Finding your relative must wait for now. You will both stay in the village.”

“Why?” frowned Mistake. “A moment ago you were offering to let us accompany you. Why can’t we go?”

“I do not think it would be safe for you,” replied the old man. “There are some things that you must trust me on. This is one of them. You are not to leave the village until I return.”

* * *

“So you have decided to visit today?” glared Queen Alycia.

“I apologize for my absence yesterday,” bowed Tamar. “Something came up that I felt required my personal attention. I trust Rattal brought the reports?”

“He did indeed,” smirked the queen. “What could possibly have been so important that it required your personal attention?”

“There are some security issues in Elvangar that are murky and undefined,” answered Tamar. “Did you hear of the arrest of Vitalora last night?”

“Of course I heard,” frowned the queen. “An elder being arrested for treason is hardly something that would escape my notice. What does that have to do with my question?”

“It is one of the murky details that concern me,” Tamar replied as he tried to gauge how far to take the discussion. “I was a witness last night to Vitalora’s supposed treason. That elder is no more guilty of treason than he is of being a newborn. Vitalora was speaking passionately about the well being of Elvangar. He did not propose anything treasonous.”

“So you say,” glared the queen. “You will have your chance to testify at his trial. I am a little disappointed that you would admit to being a part of that treasonous discussion, Tamar. I have worked hard to keep your father’s name off of the arrest warrants because I care a great deal for you, but I cannot allow treason within Elvangar. The house of Kieran has sat on this throne for thousands of years. It will continue to do so. I suggest that you dwell on your position carefully.”

Tamar frowned as he realized that the arrest of Vitalora had the blessing of the queen. Her threat to his position and his father’s greatly disturbed the high officer.

“I request an immediate leave of my duties,” replied Tamar. “Perhaps I do need time to think things out.”

“Request denied,” scowled the queen. “You have been placed in a high position because you have skills to offer our people. You cannot walk away from those skills because you have let your mind become confused with the deranged ranting of an old man. You will continue with your duties, but you are instructed not to leave this city. Rather than traipsing off to remote villages to meet with foreigners, you are to prepare the defenses of Elvangar to withstand a human attack.”

“Denied?” protested Tamar.

“You are dismissed,” declared the queen as she turned away and strode out of the room.

Tamar stood staring at the empty room and shaking his head. He turned and stormed out of the room. He had learned several things that disturbed him. He now knew that the queen was having him followed, and he knew that the queen had authorized the arrest of Vitalora. There was something that the queen feared greatly, but he could not tell what it was. He was so involved in his thoughts that he did not see Rattal slip from around the corner and into the queen’s throne room.

As soon as Rattal entered the chamber, the queen entered from her personal quarters. Rattal bowed low to the queen.

“Tamar has been restricted to the city,” stated Queen Alycia. “If he tries to leave, have him arrested.”

“As you wish,” smiled Rattal.

“I also want a squad sent to Etta immediately,” she continued. “The law prohibits the false claiming of ancestry, and I intend to enforce it. I want the foreign girls arrested.”

“For falsely claiming their ancestry?” frowned Rattal. “Wouldn’t a more serious offense be worth waiting for?”

“What is more serious than conspiring to seize the throne?” asked the queen. “It was not just any ancestry they claimed for themselves. They claimed to be of the royal line of Kieran. What purpose is there to such a false claim unless they are working with others to overthrow the rightful queen and replace her?”

“I will see to it immediately,” assured Rattal.

“I also suspect Volox to be involved in this plot,” the queen continued. “See what proof you can establish.”

“But he is Tamar’s father,” Rattal pointed out.

“Tamar had a chance to protect him,” shrugged the queen. “He failed to do so. You have your orders. Carry them out.”

Rattal bowed low and exited the room.

* * *

Garl stood in the park across from the Hall of the Society of Mages. He watched the comings and goings of mages, some he remembered from years past, others he did not recognize. When he saw Jandra approaching the hall, he hurried across the park and intercepted him before he could enter the building.

“Garl?” Jandra greeted with surprise. “What are you doing in Morada? I thought you were banned from the city?”

“I am,” shrugged Garl. “Come across the street to the park with me. I need your help.”

“I am forbidden to speak with you,” frowned Jandra. “You know the rules.”

“You have already spoken to me,” grumbled Garl. “A little bit more won’t hurt.”

Jandra looked around nervously. He appeared anxious to enter the hall and put the old man behind him.

“I taught you everything that you know,” grumbled Garl. “The least you can do for me is hear me out. Come to the park.”

Jandra sighed and nodded reluctantly. “Make it quick,” he said softly. “I do not wish to be seen with you.”

Garl led the way into the park. He immediately cast an illusion around the two of them so that they would not be seen talking.

“What are you doing in the city?” asked Jandra.

“I need access to the royal vaults,” answered Garl. “It is very important.”

“You are not even allowed into the city,” Jandra shook his head. “If Karaza found out that you were here, your life would be forfeit. I cannot get involved. Whatever would you want in the royal vaults anyway?”

“The Prophecies of Kieran,” replied Garl. “I must reread them immediately. It has been too long for my old memories to remember them completely.”

“It’s out of the question,” Jandra shook his head. “Look, I feel bad about what happened to you, but I must abide by the rules of the Society. You are the one who inducted me into the Society of Mages. You impressed upon me the absolute need to adhere to the rules. How can you now ask me to break them?”

“I have a need that is more important to Elvangar than the Society of Mages,” retorted the old man. “My entry into the royal vaults must not be stymied by some foolish rules.”

“You would break the rules for selfish gains?” scowled Jandra. “That is not the Garl that I once knew.”

Garl sighed with frustration. He knew Jandra as a fine man and an accomplished mage, but he realized that he was losing the battle to gain his help. He decided to try once more before bending Jandra to his will.

“This is a matter of life and death for the elven people, Jandra,” Garl said. “You know that I left the Society of Mages without putting up a fight. I did so because it was in the best interests of Elvangar at the time. I act in the same vein today. You said that my life is forfeit if I am found in this city. That is true, yet I am willing to risk that for the elven people. Is that not enough to convince you of the importance of what I must do?”

Jandra stared at his old tutor for several silent moments. Finally he nodded.

“You must be disguised,” warned Jandra, “and not magically. The royal vaults will detect any magical disguises. Meet me outside in an hour. Do not be late, or I will be gone. I hope you realize the risk that I am taking for you, Garl?”

“I do, Jandra,” nodded Garl, “but the risk that you are taking is for Elvangar, not me. I will be there in an hour.”

Jandra turned and walked out of the illusion. Garl waited until his old pupil had entered the Hall of the Society of Mages before dropping the illusion and leaving the park. He quickly made his way to the School of Drama and slid in through a back door. He roamed the hallways quietly until he found an empty preparation room. He entered the room and silently closed the door. Less than an hour later, an old woman left the room and headed for the royal vaults.

The old woman hobbled along the streets of Morada. She dallied in a small park near the royal vaults until she saw Jandra approaching. She timed her approach to coincide with Jandra’s arrival and looped her arm though his as he approached the guards. Jandra looked briefly at the old woman and shook his head. He did not say a word.

As they stood in front of the guards, Jandra showed his credentials. The guards looked at them and then looked expectantly at the old woman.

“She is to take notes,” explained Jandra. “My hands have been trembling of late, and I cannot read my own writing.”

The guards nodded and Jandra led the old woman through the doors. They worked their way to the inner vaults where copies of the Prophecies of Kieran and other most important documents were kept. The old woman immediately scanned the shelves and pulled an old scroll down to read.

“What exactly are you looking for?” asked Jandra as his head swiveled to see whom else was about.

“It is better if you do not know at this point,” answered Garl. “I think this information could get people killed.”

“Killed?” balked Jandra. “Do you mean someone would murder me for knowing what is in those scrolls?”

“Murder, execution,” shrugged Garl. “There is little difference in the terms to the deceased. These are the original prophecies that Kieran made while in Angragar. I need the ones that Kieran made after he returned to Elvangar. See if you can find them.”

Jandra opened a large book that rested on a small table. He flipped through the pages until he came to what he was looking for. He tapped the entry in the book and returned to the shelves. He found the numbered slot and stared puzzlingly at it.

“The slot is empty,” Jandra said softly. “The scroll is not where it should be.”

“Karaza has been expecting me then,” frowned Garl. “There is only one other choice. We must get in to see the originals.”

“That is not possible,” Jandra shook his head vigorously. “It takes a royal decree to get into the innermost vaults. Even I do not have the power to let you in.”

Garl put the scroll back on the shelf. He turned and stared at the bars blocking the entrance to the innermost vaults and pondered how he could get inside.

“Leave the vaults, Jandra,” advised the old woman. “Pretend that you were never here today. Just go about your business as if it was a normal day.”

“The guards will have recorded my visit,” protested Jandra. “I do not like this turn of events. You are going to do something horrendously foolish and get us both arrested.”

“The responsibility will be mine alone,” promised Garl. “I will destroy the records of you coming here today before I leave.”

“But the guards will still remember me,” Jandra shook his head vigorously. “You can’t erase their memories, too.”

“I can and I will,” retorted Garl. “Go now. On your way out, tell one of the guards that I have fallen sick and that you are going to get a healer.”

“But…” protested Jandra.

“Go!” Garl shouted so loud that Jandra was afraid that it was heard all the way to the front doors.

Jandra turned and fled. He raced to the front of the building and told the guards that his helper had fallen ill and that he was off to find a healer. One of the guards left his post and ran to the inner vaults. Garl was waiting for him. He fixed the guard with a stare and immediately bent him to his will.

“Open the innermost vault,” ordered Garl.

The guard did not even hesitate. He took a key off of his belt and unlocked the metal gate.

“Wait here for me,” commanded Garl as he stepped into the guarded room.

Garl moved swiftly through the small room. He found the scrolls easily as they were among the oldest in the vaults. He carefully opened the scroll and memorized it. When he was satisfied that he could duplicate it later, he replaced the scroll on the shelf and left the room. He ordered the guard to lock the gate, and then told him to escort him to the front of the building.

The other guard saw his partner returning with the old woman. He looked questioningly for an explanation. Garl stared at the man and gave him none. With both guards under the compulsion spell, Garl took the ledger they used to record the names of people entering the vaults. He lifted the ink off the page that recorded the last entry and then put the ledger back in place.

Garl cast another spell upon the two guards that would jumble their memories of the last hour. He then dropped the compulsion spells. The guards blinked their eyes and stared at the old woman. They looked briefly at each other in confusion and then back at the old woman.

“Is this the library?” asked the old woman.

“No,” answered one of the guards. “This is the royal vault. The library is across the park and a block to the left.”

“Thank you,” smiled the old woman as she turned to leave.

“Where did she come from?” one of the guards asked the other. “Did you see her arrive?”

“I wasn’t paying attention,” replied the other guard.

Garl smiled and hurried away. He made his way to the library and requested writing materials. Finding a place to sit that was out of sight of everyone, Garl duplicated the scroll that he had memorized. Only after the scroll was duplicated did he take the time to read it with an understanding mind. His brow creased deeply as he began to understand what was going on in Elvangar and the danger that the elves were in. Kieran had seen in it clearly in his vision, but even he could not see the ending of the drama that was about to unfold in the land of the elves. One thing was exceedingly clear to Garl. He had to race back to Etta to protect the twin sisters. If the queen got her hands on them, the elven people were doomed.

Chapter 23

Tales of Long Ago

The door burst open to the small room that Mistake and MistyTrail slept in. Soldiers quickly filed in and threw cloth sacks over the heads of the sisters. Despite their muted protests, their hands and feet were bound. As the bound bodies were passed out of the room, the bunk beds collapsed, strewing Garl’s belongings all over the floor.

The bodies were lowered by rope and placed in the back of a wagon. By the time the villagers, who had been awakened by the noise, had gathered below the trees, the wagon was already leaving the glade. Eltor raced to Garl’s house and climbed up the rope. He saw the front door wide open and entered anxiously. When he saw the destruction of the girls’ room, a rage built inside him. He raced out of the house and jumped to the ground.

“They have taken Mistake and MistyTrail,” he shouted. “We have to stop them.”

“They were soldiers,” replied Slari. “You cannot stop them.”

“But they didn’t do anything wrong,” protested Eltor. “Why should they be arrested?”

Caldal said nothing. He climbed the rope to his house and threw down his pack. Eltor looked questioningly at his friend as Caldal jumped down from the platform.

“Get your pack,” ordered Caldal. “We are going to Morada.”

“What for?” asked Eltor. “Didn’t you hear that they were soldiers? We can’t do anything, and we are forbidden to leave the village.”

“I don’t care,” retorted Caldal. “We got them into this mess; we are going to get them out of it. Have you forgotten how they risked their lives to save us?”

“I have not forgotten,” Eltor replied as he ran to his tree and climbed the rope.

Eltor grabbed his pack and jumped down to stand next to Caldal. The villagers looked at the two boys with fear and anxiety. Caldal’s mother came down and handed a small sack to her son.

“Be careful,” she said with tears in her eyes. “Try to do nothing to bring attention to yourselves. We want you both to come back safely.”

Caldal nodded and hugged his mother while Eltor waved to his. The villagers stood and watched until the boys exited the glade.

* * *

Tamar knew he was being followed again. His shadow was good at his trade, but not good enough. Tamar accepted the challenge without making any moves to indicate that he had detected the follower. For a while Tamar took delight in making stops that would frustrate the shadow. He entered an inn and sat comfortably drinking ale while he imagined his follower wondering if Tamar had darted out the back door. He went to the library, looped around the tables and casually exited the building. He smiled inwardly as his shadow had to run to catch up.

Finally tired of making his shadow’s life miserable, Tamar headed towards the harbor. He entered a sailors’ tavern and immediately exited through the rear door into a seldom-used alley. He quickly pressed his back against the wall behind the open door and shoved the door shut. Moments later the door opened cautiously. Someone peeked out the door and saw an empty alley. As the shadow opened the door further to exit the building, Tamar lunged at the door, slamming it with as much force as he could muster. He heard the man’s body fall and quickly stepped around the door.

He stared briefly at the unconscious form of Rattal. Tamar shook his head in disgust as he bent down and searched Rattal’s body. He removed a pouch of gold and took Rattal’s sword. Rattal’s sword was special to him. It had been a gift from his father and was engraved near the hilt. Tamar stuck it through his belt and moved swiftly along the alley. He made several quick turns and dropped the stolen sword in another alley. He knew someone would find it and try to sell it. He hoped that it made the attack on Rattal appear to be a robbery. Tamar was not ready to let Rattal know that he knew who was following him.

Tamar hurried across the city. He took a circuitous route to make sure that no one else was following him before he approached his father’s tree. He climbed the tree and knocked on the door. This time when Volox opened the door he stepped out of the way quickly so that Tamar could slip in.

“What have we come to when honest elves must sneak around the city for fear of being followed?” asked Volox as he shook his head.

“What we have come to, Father,” sighed Tamar, “is a very dangerous world. It is more dangerous for you than you can imagine. Queen Alycia is the one who ordered the arrest of Vitalora.”

“The queen?” gasped the elder. “That is hard for me to swallow.”

“You are on her list, Father,” Tamar said, “as am I. I caught the person who has been following me tonight. It is one of the officers under my command. An aggressive officer named Rattal.”

“Is he dead?” Volox asked with concern.

“No,” Tamar shook his head. “I made it look like a robbery. He will suspect it was me, but he cannot state that it was. Besides, I do not think he will want to brag about his failure to follow me. The queen has restricted my travels to Morada. I cannot leave the city without the fear of imprisonment.”

“This is not the way Elvangar treats respected officers,” frowned Volox.

“Or elders,” added Tamar. “Something is terribly amiss in Elvangar. I think it revolves around the two foreign girls, but I am not sure yet what is happening. I do know that the queen threatened your freedom today. I want you to rethink your position on retirement.”

“Your mother and I have already talked about it,” replied Volox. “We have always been dedicated to the good of Elvangar. We cannot stop now just because someone threatens us. We are staying right here. I am an elder and will carry on my life as an elder should.”

“I was afraid that you would say that,” frowned Tamar. “Do you have any idea why the queen is acting as she is?”

“Other than the fact that she hates humans?” asked Volox. “I think things changed when Eltor and Caldal brought Mistake and MistyTrail to Elvangar. Whatever that signifies to her, she obviously fears that something has changed and the humans are going to attack us. I am sure that it is fear that is driving her to such extreme measures.”

“Why does she hate humans so much?” asked Tamar. “I mean, everybody knows that she does, but no one knows why.”

“Oh many of us know,” sighed Volox as he sat at the table. “You were much too young at the time, but it all dates back some years ago to a royal family outing. The king, queen, and the princesses went on a family cruise together. It was to celebrate the anniversary of their wedding.”

“There were royal children?” asked Tamar.

“Oh yes,” nodded Volox. “Twins in fact. They were but babes when the ship left port. A tremendous storm appeared out of nowhere when they were out near the Barrier Islands. The king was an excellent sailor. He decided to outrace the storm, but the path of the storm took him past the Barrier Islands. The king sailed on into the night to avoid the deadly storm. That is when the humans struck.”

“Struck?” echoed Tamar. “What did they do?”

“The humans rammed the king’s vessel amidships,” related Volox. “It broke in two. The queen watched as her daughters floated away on the bow. She was stuck on the stern which was rapidly sinking.”

“And the king?” asked Tamar.

“Ah,” sighed the elder, “that is the worst of all. He landed not in either section of the ship. He was plastered to the bow of the human vessel. He never had a chance. The storm blew in so quickly that the stern section had not even sunk by the time the winds arrived. It was only a stroke of fortune that the queen was saved. Another elven ship was also blown off course by the mighty storm. They heard her cries and rescued her. She ordered the crew to search for the king and the princesses, but it was to no avail. Not even the wreckage of the bow could be found, and the storm threatened to sink the rescue vessel.”

“So they brought the queen back safely?” prompted Tamar.

“They did but it was quite an ordeal,” nodded the elder. “The storm was the greatest ever recorded. It took them days to return to Morada. During that time, the queen refused to eat or sleep. She just kept staring off into the distance. She was like a stricken animal when the ship returned to port. It took the Society of Mages a month to restore her to good health. Her first decree as queen was to ban sailing past the Barrier Islands. The second was to never speak to a human.”

“I cannot imagine living through such an experience,” frowned Tamar. “Not only to lose your husband, but your children as well. That is a bitter herb to swallow. It is easier for me to understand her moods with this knowledge.”

“Yes, it is,” Volox nodded sympathetically. “I imagine the sight of two young foreign girls coming to Morada might have touched off some inner feelings. They are probably around the same age as her poor lost daughters.”

“Sweet Kaltara!” exclaimed Tamar.

“What?” Volox asked, his brows rising questioningly.

“Those are her daughters,” Tamar proclaimed. “By Kaltara’s grace they survived the great storm.”

“Inconceivable,” Volox shook his head. “Perhaps I did not explain the fury of the storm with sufficient description. It was a monster of a storm the likes of which has never been seen before or since. They could not have survived.”

“Then how do you explain their Kieran ancestry?” asked Tamar. “The Kieran line is the most stringently charted line in all of Elvangar. Where else would they fall in such a chart other than the princesses?”

“They are Kieran?” asked Volox. “How could you possibly know this?”

“They said so themselves,” Tamar said excitedly. “Don’t you remember me saying so in the park when you and Vitalora were arguing about the queen?”

“No,” frowned Volox, “I do not recall you saying it, but it was a tense conversation. How could they possibly know their ancestry?”

“I do not know,” admitted Tamar, “but I believed them. No one in the village contradicted their claim. Why would they lie? We must tell the queen immediately.”

“No,” Volox said emphatically. “Let me think about this for a minute.”

“There can be no proof of such a claim,” offered Anija as she brought some hot drinks to the table. “Were Mistake and MistyTrail to proclaim that they were the lost princesses, the queen would see it as an attempt to steal the throne. You must learn to think before you act, Tamar.”

“Who was present when the girls made this claim?” asked the elder.

“Eltor and Caldal were there,” answered Tamar. “I was just escorting them to the village. Mistake and MistyTrail were with the old mage, Garl.”

“Garl himself is a Kieran,” noted Volox. “I wonder if he could have put such thoughts into the girls’ heads?”

“I thought you said that there were generations of elves living on the Island of Darkness,” interjected Anija. “They could be from any of those families.”

“No,” Volox shook his head. “The girls were not from Motanga. They did rescue Eltor and Caldal from the island, but only after they were shipwrecked there themselves. Both girls grew up in the land of humans. There should be no elves living there at all.”

“None?” asked Anija.

“None that the boys’ testimonies pointed to,” shrugged Volox. “I don’t know. This is a sticky situation. How does one prove their ancestry? And if they can prove that they are Kierans, should they? It could put their lives in danger with the way the queen is acting now.”

“I think the girls should be moved to an undisclosed location until we figure this out,” suggested Tamar. “There is too great a risk to them as it stands now. I do not want to see them harmed.”

“You are restricted to the city,” Volox pointed out. “I am not. In the morning I will go to Etta and collect the girls. I will take them somewhere safe and then we can figure out what to do with them.”

“Stay with us tonight, Tamar,” offered Anija. “We can discuss this a while longer before Volox goes to bed. I will make up the girls’ room for you.”

Anija stopped as she realized what she had said. Tears rolled down her cheeks as she went off to make the room up for Tamar.

* * *

“Someone is coming,” whispered Eltor. “Hide.”

Eltor ducked into some shrubs while Caldal hid behind a tree. Eltor peered into the moonlit night to see who would show up on the path. A distant figure appeared. It stopped walking and stood silently for a long time. Suddenly, the sky lit up brilliantly. Eltor shielded their eyes from the brightness. When Eltor looked back at the trail, the figure was gone.

“What are you boys doing out here in the night?” grumbled Garl. “Are you becoming robbers now?”

Eltor and Caldal spun around and saw the old man standing on the trail behind them. Eltor wiggled out of the shrubs and Caldal moved away from the tree.

“Soldiers came and took Mistake and MistyTrail,” reported Eltor. “Caldal and I are going to Morada to rescue them.”

“Rescue them, are you?” smiled Garl. “At least your hearts are in the right place. I passed a wagon hours ago. I wish I had known then whom it carried. You will not succeed in rescuing them. I am sure that the girls will be watched very closely.”

“They rescued me out of the temple of Vand on the Island of Darkness,” retorted Caldal. “The prison in Morada can’t be that hard.”

“They will not be just regular prisoners as you two were,” frowned the old man. “If Caldal was watched closely in the temple, would you have been able to free him?”

“No,” Eltor admitted after a moment of hesitation. “I guess we were very lucky, but we have to try. Why would they be arrested anyways? They have done nothing illegal.”

“It is not what they have done,” scowled Garl, “it is who they are.”

“What do you mean?” asked Eltor. “They are Mistake and MistyTrail. What do you mean who they are?”

Garl silently stared at the two boys for a long time without answering. The boys began to fidget while the old mage tried to measure the worth of telling them the truth. Finally he sighed and wrapped an arm around each of their shoulders in the manner of teammates.

“Mistake and MistyTrail are the lost daughters of Queen Alycia,” Garl said conspiratorially. “This is a secret that must remain among us. Their real names are Alahara and Alastasia. I do not know which is which.”

“Princesses?” gasped Caldal. “How can this be? They are foreigners.”

“They are elves of royal blood,” corrected Garl. “They may have grown up in foreign lands, but they are the heirs to the crown.”

“But why would they be arrested then?” asked Eltor. “None of this makes any sense.”

“Some of it does,” frowned Garl, “but not all of it. I have not figured out yet if the queen truly knows their identities.”

“Of course she doesn’t,” insisted Caldal. ”If she did, they would not have been arrested.”

The old man did not reply and Caldal began to frown deeply.

“She wouldn’t arrest her daughters, would she?” he asked.

“I don’t know what our queen is capable of,” admitted Garl. “One thing I am sure of, we must go to Morada and aid them in whatever way we can. I expect the two of you to do exactly as I instruct you. This is no time for taking chances on foolish bravado. Can I trust the two of you?”

“We will do as you instruct,” promised Eltor.

Caldal nodded exaggeratedly, and Garl accepted their vows. Garl took his arms off the boys and started walking towards Morada. Eltor and Caldal followed along.

* * *

The soldiers pulled the wagon up to the rear of the prison. They grabbed the bodies of the girls and carried them inside. A guard opened a sturdy metal door and the girls were carried into a cell. The soldiers took the girls’ belt knives and slashed the ropes that bound their hands together. Before Mistake could get the sack off of her head, the door had slammed shut.

“I would have liked to have seen what is outside that door,” whispered Mistake. “They were not very efficient at searching us.”

“Perhaps they don’t expect us to live long,” frowned MistyTrail as she untied her feet. I am beginning to get a poor taste in my mouth for Elvangar. Even the humans that didn’t like us treated us with more dignity than I have seen in this land.”

“True,” sighed Mistake. “Even as a slave I was never carried with a dirty sack over my head. What do you suppose happened to cause them to arrest us?”

“Maybe Garl was arrested in the city?” shrugged MistyTrail. “Maybe he said we were going to try to escape and return to the Sakova?”

“Garl would never do that,” sighed Mistake.

“I know,” agreed MistyTrail. “I just can’t think of any possible reason for arresting us. Do you think it is illegal for foreigners to learn elven magic? Maybe that is it. Yes, Garl was arrested and said he had to get back to give us magic lessons, but that is forbidden.”

“Nice try,” Mistake shook her head. “Although,” she added thoughtfully, “the sacks and binding of our hands is what you would expect to see if they knew they were arresting mages. Maybe it does have something to do with our learning magic, but Garl would protect us. I cannot see him ever bowing down to anyone. He does what he thinks is right.”

“Well,” posed MistyTrail, “maybe we should concentrate on what to do to get out of here instead of wondering why we are here.”

“I am sure that I could pick the lock on the door,” assured Mistake, “but we have no idea what lies beyond it. Let’s wait until they bring us a meal or something. Be alert when it happens and try to see as much of what is outside as you can.”

“At least our room was so small that we had to sleep with our packs,” MistyTrail said as she rummaged through hers for a bite to eat.

Mistake brightened as she watched MistyTrail rummage through her pack. She reached into her own pack and extracted the carozit.

“Give me your hand,” Mistake said to MistyTrail as she turned the carozit upside down.

MistyTrail placed her hand over Mistake’s and watched as the balls separated barely enough to slip a piece of paper between them.

“We are close,” Mistake said. “Our relative is in this city, probably only blocks away from us. I wonder what he or she is doing right now?”

“Probably sleeping,” frowned MistyTrail. “We might want to do that ourselves. If we do escape out of here, we will not have time to sleep along the way.”

The girls curled up on the cold stone floor and went to sleep. A few hours later MistyTrail heard a noise beyond the door. She quietly nudged her sister. Mistake sat up and listened to the noises. A key turned in the lock and the door suddenly swung open. A tall man in a white cloak walked in the door holding a torch high above him. The shadows distorted the man’s features, but his long black beard was obvious to both girls. He glared down at them as he placed the torch in a holder on the wall.

“Who are you?” asked the man.

“I am MistyTrail, and my sister is Mistake,” answered the Sakovan. “Why have we been arrested?”

“I will ask the questions,” snarled the man. “You have made statements that you are descended from Kieran. Is this true?”

“I am from Fakara,” Mistake said quickly before MistyTrail could answer. “I do not know what a Kieran is. May I ask your name?”

The man glowered at the girls for a moment before exhaling in frustration.

“You may call me Karaza,” declared the questioner. “Are you denying that you were overhead stating the you are descendents of Kieran?”

“I think whoever overheard us must be mistaken,” smiled Mistake. “We have no idea who our parents were. They died when we were quite small.”

The interrogator looked on with suspicion. He suddenly waved his hand, and Mistake felt a wooziness come over her. She closed her eyes tight and tried to will the feeling away, but it did not help.

“Have you ever said that you were descendents of Kieran?” asked Karaza.

“Yes,” replied Mistake.

“Mistake!” scowled MistyTrail. “What are you saying?”

The man waved his hand again and it was MistyTrail’s turn to feel woozy. She also fought the feeling, but she was incapable of doing anything about it.

“Who told you that you were descended from Kieran?” asked Karaza.

“Garl,” they answered in unison.

“And what leads him to believe this?” asked the interrogator.

“Our ability to cast a certain spell,” answered Mistake.

“It can only be cast by those of the Kieran line,” added MistyTrail.

“Do the names Alahara or Alastasia mean anything to either of you?” inquired Karaza.

“No,” Mistake and MistyTrail answered in unison.

“Are you aware that Garl is a criminal?” asked Karaza.

“We know that he was banned from the Society of Mages,” answered MistyTrail.

“Because he is a criminal,” declared Karaza. “If you allow his deceit to enter your minds, it will bring trouble for you. You are not of the Kieran line. He lied to you. Do you understand now?”

“No,” MistyTrail shook her head. “Garl is nice to us. He would not lie.”

“He lied to you,” shouted the interrogator. “You are not of the Kieran line. Repeat it. You are not of the Kieran line.”

“I am not of the Kieran line,” Mistake offered instantly.

MistyTrail’s mouth opened, but nothing came out. Karaza glared at her.

“Say it,” demanded the questioner. “You are not of the Kieran line. Say it.”

“I am not of the Kieran line,” came the sound from MistyTrail’s mouth.

“You are not to have any further contact with Garl,” declared Karaza. “Never again.”

“Does that mean that we are free to go?” asked Mistake.

Karaza shook his head and stared at Mistake. He frowned deeply at her question.

“You will be free to go when I decide that you may go,” he snapped. “I am not yet through with my questions for you, but I have enough for now.”

The interrogator rose and grabbed the torch. He left the room and the door slammed shut. Both girls shook their heads as the spell dissipated.

“What was that all about?” asked MistyTrail. “What happened to us?”

“He used magic to make us tell the truth,” explained Mistake. “It took me a while to understand what was going on. I guess we had already said too much to save Garl from the trouble that will now come his way.”

“I couldn’t answer his last question,” MistyTrail declared, “but he seemed to think I did.”

“I answered for you,” smiled Mistake. “My years of being a thief made the lie come easily to my tongue after I understood what he was doing to us. I just cast a small air tunnel to your head and answered for you. He would not have left until you promised something that your mind would not allow you to say.”

“What were those names he asked us about?” questioned MistyTrail.

“I do not know,” frowned Mistake, “but I got the impression that some one thinks those names belong to us. Alahara and Alastasia. They are pretty names.”

Chapter 24

The Royal Family

Karaza stepped into the throne room and bowed to the queen.

“What did you discover from them?” asked Queen Alycia.

“They were fed a line of nonsense from an old meddling fool that I once begged you to execute,” replied the head of the Society of Magic. “Garl convinced the girls that they were of the Kieran line. I am sure that he is plotting against you. He is probably aligned with Vitalora and the other renegade elder.”

“Volox,” supplied the queen. “So these girls believe that they are of the Kieran line?”

“Not any more,” smiled Karaza. “I convinced them that Garl was a criminal using them for his own ends. They will be no more trouble to you. I will visit them again later to ensure that they remain no problem to you.”

“They will be no trouble as long as Garl is eliminated,” replied the queen. “I should have acceded to your wishes many years ago, but Garl is a Kieran. It did not seem right to me.”

“I understand,” nodded Karaza, “but now he has shown his true colors. You must understand that we cannot tolerate his existence any more.”

“I do,” sighed the queen. “Find some reason to have him arrested. Make it a major offense.”

“With all due respect,” frowned Karaza, “he might try to use a trial to convince others that the girls are Kierans. It is best to just eliminate him.”

“Murder?” balked the queen. “I could not do such a thing.”

“The stealing of the throne of Elvangar is an act of war,” declared Karaza. “Do you not send soldiers out in wartime to eliminate the enemy?”

“But that is different,” protested Queen Alycia.

“It is no different,” advised Karaza. “Elvangar can be defeated by the attacking humans, or it can be defeated from within. Make no mistake about this; Garl is an enemy of Elvangar. He seeks to destroy your rule as much as the humans do. He is an enemy soldier. Eliminate him.”

“I see your point,” Queen Alycia hesitated.

“Not as strongly as you should,” pushed Karaza. “Every time Garl speaks to another elf, he poisons the people against you. If he is not killed quickly, he will strike you down even after his death. The words that he speaks to others will remain within them when he dies. They will act upon his lies as if they were truth, and it will be too late to expose him. He must die soon, or your throne is forfeit. I would be happy to arrange it for you.”

“Very well,” sighed the queen. “Do what must be done, but I do not want to know anything about it. His name will never be discussed between us again.”

“It shall be as you wish,” smiled Karaza as he bowed deeply.

No sooner had Karaza left then Malid entered through another door. He bowed before the queen.

“I heard that the foreign girls have been arrested,” Malid stated. “Am I to prepare a trial against them?”

“I don’t think that will be necessary after all,” answered the queen. “I plan to have a talk with them today. If they are open to reason, there will be no charges brought against them. What is the state of the Council of Elders today?”

“Things died down with the arrest of Vitalora,” replied Malid. “There have been no further grumbling or accusations. I think things will get back to normal.”

“Oh,” said the queen as one eyebrow rose. “Volox is no longer demanding that I send an emissary to the humans?”

“Not a word out of him,” smiled Malid. “I think the arresting of Vitalora took the wind out of his sails. Volox has been as meek a new fawn. I think we should delay the trial of Vitalora for a while just in case. If Volox acts up, I can threaten to expedite the trial.”

“I like the way you think,” smiled Queen Alycia. “Perhaps over time we can even get a confession out of Vitalora. It would be very helpful to keep everyone in line if he was forced to give it publicly.”

“I will work on that,” promised the Head Elder. “Is there anything on the agenda for the Council of Elders today?”

“I want the elders to review our preparations for war,” replied the queen. “I have been thinking that we might benefit from some advance notice of the human's attack. I would like the views of the elders on this topic.”

“Do you mean along the line of spies sent abroad?” asked Malid. “Or ships constantly patrolling the Barrier Islands? Things like that?”

“Yes,” frowned the queen, “but there will be no spies sent abroad. There will be NO contact with humans whatsoever. Not even spies. Perhaps signal fires from the Barriers Islands? We could station some men on them, can’t we?”

“We could,” nodded Malid. “They would be quickly overrun, but they would be able to warn us of an impending attack. We will look into it.”

“Good,” the queen replied dismissively. “Notify me when you have something for me to review.”

Malid bowed and backed out of the throne room. Queen Alycia walked to the railing and gazed down upon the citizens as they made their way to their places of work. She wondered if any of them truly appreciated what she was doing for them. They had no cares except doing their daily chores, while the queen was burdened with great responsibilities. Her thoughts drifted to the need to remarry. Even by elven standards, the king had been dead a long time, and the country had no heir.

She frowned as she thought about Tamar. She had been close to suggesting such a union with the young officer, but he had turned into such a disappointment lately. She was glad that she had not broached the topic. Her mind was reviewing all of the potential suitors when she heard someone enter the chamber. She turned to find Rattal bowing to her back. With her mind still on suitors, Queen Alycia chuckled to herself at the sight of the officer. Rattal was definitely not on the list.

“Tamar has assigned this meeting to you again today?” asked the queen.

“Actually,” frowned Rattal, “I do not know where Tamar is. He did not arrive at his office this morning.”

“What do you mean?” the queen asked sharply. “Where did he spend the night?”

“I do not know,” Rattal said softly.

“You don’t know?” shouted the queen. “Wasn’t it your job to keep track him? What do you mean you don’t know?”

“I was attacked while following him last night,” admitted Rattal. “It was made to look like a robber attacked me, but I believe that it was Tamar. I will find him soon.”

“You had better find him soon,” threatened the queen, “or you will be on the wall defending the city during the first wave of attacks.”

“I will find him,” Rattal promised.

“Leave the reports,” snapped the queen. “I will look at them later.”

“As you wish,” bowed the officer.

“Just a minute,” interrupted the queen. “The two foreign girls are in the prison. Have someone bring them up to see me. I want to have a friendly chat with them. You can find the prison, can’t you?”

“I will see to it right away,” bowed the officer.

* * *

Garl held up his hand when he heard the noise of someone approaching. The boys immediately dashed out of sight while the old man slid behind a tree. A few moments later, the elder walked into view. Garl grinned and stepped onto the trail.

“Tayo, Volox,” smiled Garl. “A bit of a long walk for a city lad, isn’t it?”

“Tayo, Garl,” frowned the elder. “Actually I was on my way to Etta. Perhaps we can walk together.”

“I am not heading that way,” shrugged Garl. “Why are you going to Etta?”

“I wish to see Mistake and MistyTrail,” answered Volox. “I miss them.”

“So you just decided to walk for several hours to visit?” probed Garl as he signaled for the boys to come out of hiding. “Do not think poorly of me for failing to believe you, Elder. What is your true goal?”

Volox looked at Eltor and Caldal moving out of their hiding spots. A deep frown etched into his forehead.

“I should be asking you the questions,” retorted Volox. “As en elder I am aware that all three of you have been forbidden to enter Morada, yet you all appear to be heading directly towards it. Why?”

“The girls were arrested in the middle of the night,” offered Eltor, earning him a glare from the old man.

“The girls trusted Volox,” Caldal jumped to his friend’s defense. “Besides, we may be able to use his help in freeing them.”

“Arrested?” gasped Volox. “Then I am too late. You are right about my motives, Garl. I was coming to Etta to take Mistake and MistyTrail to someplace where they could hide. I feared that the queen might strike out at them.”

“Then you know who they are?” asked Garl.

Volox stared into Garl’s eyes trying to find the answer to the question the old man had just asked. Finally, he sighed and shook his head.

“I think I understand who you say they are,” Volox answered. “I do not know if that is the truth, or just something that your crazy mind has dreamed up for excitement, but either way it puts their lives in jeopardy. I wanted to spare them from that.”

“How will the elders act if they girls are indeed the princesses?” asked Garl.

Even though Volox expected that Garl’s premise was that the girls were the lost princesses, it still startled him to hear it verbalized. He stared at the old man and wondered if he really was crazy.

“The elders do not speak as one,” Volox finally answered. “The queen is not at her best these days. She has had Vitalora arrested for treason. Whoever the girls are, it is best if they disappear for a while. The last place we want them is before the queen.”

“We agree on something,” nodded Garl. “For your information, they are Alahara and Alastasia. I have no doubts about it.”

“How can you be sure?” asked Volox. “There is no sure way that you can know.”

“Isn’t there?” retorted Garl. “You are not a mage, but even a learned elder has probably come across some references to the Kieran spell of compulsion. Have you heard of it?”

“It is tickling my memory,” admitted Volox, “but I cannot bring it forth.”

“It is a spell created by Kieran himself,” explained Garl. “It is a peculiar compulsion spell because it has strange side effects. It can only be cast by one of the Kieran line, and it cannot be used against one of the Kieran line. Both girls have mastered the spell.”

“So they are indeed of the Kieran line?” Volox inhaled deeply. “You are sure of this?”

“You may think me crazy,” smiled Garl, “but you will not find a man alive who does not acknowledge my skill in magic. I am positive that both girls are of royal blood. Now, can you point to any twins in the recent Kieran line that are unaccounted for? Any other than the princesses, that is?”

“No,” Volox shook his head. “Tamar declared last night that they must be the lost princesses, but I could not imagine them surviving the catastrophe that the queen went through. I guess it is just asking a lot to believe such a miracle is possible.”

“I will not fault you for those feelings,” smiled Garl. “I felt that way myself two days ago. That is why I snuck into the royal vaults yesterday to review the Prophecies of Kieran. I had to be sure.”

“You snuck into the royal vaults,” gasped Volox. “That could cost you your life.”

“It could,” nodded Garl, “but what is the worth of my life compared to the fulfillment of the Prophecies of Kieran?”

“I could have told you what was in the scrolls without you risking your life,” declared Volox. “The Council of Elders recently researched them when we discussed the fate of the boys. Some of us believe that Kaltara is requiring the elves to join with the humans because of the rebirth of Angragar.”

“Those are the earliest of the prophecies that you are talking about,” countered Garl. “There were later prophecies that are more pertinent to the situation within Elvangar. Interestingly enough, someone has removed the copies of those scrolls. I had to access the innermost vaults to gain access to the originals.”

“You are truly crazy,” remarked Volox. “I do not want to know how you accomplished what you did. What is so important in those scrolls that someone would steal the copies?”

“They prophesize the return of the lost princesses in the Time of Calling,” declared the old man.

“Merciful Kaltara,” gasped the elder. “Can you prove this?”

Garl reached inside his cloak and pulled out the copy of the scroll he had made. He only unrolled it slightly as he held it before the elder. Volox read the scroll with interest and reached out to expose some more of it. Garl drew the scroll back and placed it inside his cloak.

“It is a copy that I penned myself,” admitted Garl, “but I will guarantee its accuracy. The Council of Elders can access the original and compare it.”

“Your evidence is overwhelming, if not proof positive,” declared Volox, “but it hardly matters now. If the girls have been arrested, it will be out of our hands.”

“Is it?” asked Garl. “You are a member of the Council of Elders. What if you present this evidence to the Council? Will it be enough to convince them?”

“Most of them,” nodded Volox, “but not all of them. Malid and Amber agree with the queen’s stringent policies on avoiding the humans. I doubt they would recognize the sun at the height of the day if it interfered with their agenda. Besides, the Council of Elders is merely an advisory board. We cannot overrule the queen.”

“The Council of Elders can isolate the queen,” suggested Garl. “If you can possibly unite them on this, they can appeal to the citizens directly. If that happens, I doubt the army would move against the people or the girls.”

“That is a long shot,” frowned Volox. “My own son is a high ranking officer, and he is being followed daily by agents of the queen. He has been restricted to the city. That is why I am making the trek to Etta.”

“Things are even worse than I imagined,” sighed Garl. “Let’s walk while we talk. We must find a solution to this problem before it is too late.”

“Do the girls know who they are?” asked Volox as the four elves began walking towards Morada.

“No,” answered Garl. “They do know that they are of the Kieran line, and they do know that they have a relative here.”

“How do they know that?” asked the elder.

“Mistake was given a magical carozit from the Sage of the Mountain,” explained the old mage. “It indicates the relative distance from the user’s current location of the nearest relative. When Mistake and MistyTrail both held it, it indicated a relative a few hours walk away. That would be Morada.”

“Well at least they will not try telling anyone that they are the princesses,” Volox sighed with relief. “That would be the worst thing they could do right now. Where will you go when we reach the city?”

“We have no destination,” answered Garl. “We will need a place to hide while we determine how we can free the girls.”

“Come to my house,” offered Volox. “You can have my spare room. The boys can sleep on the floor with Tamar. Together we can plan our next moves.”

* * *

A key was inserted into the door lock again. Mistake and MistyTrail jumped to their feet. One went to the left of the door while the other went to the right. They tried to position themselves to see as much of the corridor outside the cell as possible. The door opened and an officer marched in.

“You have a meeting with the queen,” declared the officer. “If you have any weapons hidden on your bodies, leave them in this cell. I cannot be held responsible for your safety if you ignore this edict. You will be searched before you meet the queen.”

Mistake and MistyTrail glanced at each other. MistyTrail sighed and released the two knives from her arm sheaths. She placed them on the floor. She reached around to her back and removed a hidden knife under her belt and added it to the growing pile that Mistake was creating. MistyTrail then removed two knives from her boots, and unstrapped a pouch at her waist that held Sakovan throwing stars. The officer’s eyebrows rose comically as he watched the girls disarming. Mistake completed the disarmament by placing the blowgun given to her by the Qubari on top of the pile.

“Is that all?” asked the officer as he tried to hide a smile.

The girls sighed and nodded. The officer ushered them out of the cell and into the corridor where a dozen soldiers were waiting. The soldiers immediately surrounded the girls and waited for the officer to leave the cell and lead the procession out of the prison.

Mistake’s eyes took in every detail as they were escorted out of the prison. MistyTrail counted the steps and memorized the path taken to the exit. She was surprised to see that the paths outside the prison were blocked off with ropes. She had been in this area of the city before when they stayed with Volox and Anija, and she had never seen any paths blocked off. She wondered about it as she saw curious citizens craning their necks to see whom the soldiers were escorting.

The walk to the palace was not long. The girls saw it as they approached. A huge magnificent tree grew out of a wide park-like square. The branches of the tree were high off the ground and spread out in a great circle encompassing the whole square below. The group marched onto a large platform and the officer pulled once on a small rope. A distant bell could be heard ringing far above them. Instantly the large platform began ascending.

MistyTrail admired the view of the city as they rose high into the ancient tree. They rose up into the branches and passed several platforms before coming to a stop in the upper reaches of the tree. As soon as the platform stopped, the soldiers herded Mistake and MistyTrail along a corridor and into a large room. Several guards stood sentry in the room. The officer immediately approached the guards.

“The foreign girls, Mistake and MistyTrail, as the queen requested,” announced the officer.

Two guards separated from the others and approached the girls. They searched for hidden weapons. One of the guards found Mistake’s lock picking tool hidden in her belt and frowned at it.

“What is this?” he asked.

Mistake forced her face to turn red by holding her breath and forcing her facial muscles. She smiled weakly at the guard.

“I use it to clean my toenails,” she answered softly. “I get infections a lot from running in the jungle.”

The guard grimaced as he handed the tool back to Mistake. MistyTrail almost burst out laughing when the guard subconsciously ran his hand over his own clothes as if to wipe it clean.

“Follow me,” said the other officer as he led the girls away.

He walked them along a short corridor and into the throne room.

“Touch nothing,” advised the guard. “The queen will be with you shortly.”

Mistake and MistyTrail gazed around the empty room. It was simple and clear of unnecessary furniture, yet held an air of importance. They walked to the railing and gazed downward. A whole section of the city spread out before them, and they marveled at the view.

Mistake turned around to view the room and then reached into her pack and extracted the carozit. She held it upside down and watched the balls clang together. MistyTrail immediately reached out her hand and placed it on top of Mistake’s. The balls moved almost imperceptivity apart. There was hardly room for a hair between the balls, but they could both see that they were not touching.

Suddenly the balls clanged together, and the girls looked up and saw a woman enter the room. Mistake and MistyTrail looked at each other knowingly. The woman approached without greeting. Mistake and MistyTrail remained frozen, unsure of what to say or do.

“What is this you have?” asked the woman as she reached for the carozit.

As the woman touched the carozit, the balls flew upward. All three of them reacted to the unexpected movement of the balls by letting go of the carozit. It tumbled to the floor. The woman stepped back a pace and stared at the girls.

“It is customary in Elvangar to bow when you meet the queen,” the woman said sternly.

“We will,” promised Mistake as she bent down and picked up the carozit. “Is she nice?”

“I am the queen,” replied the woman, frustration seeping into her voice. “Queen Alycia. Which of you is which?”

Mistake and MistyTrail immediately bowed. Neither of them had to force an embarrassed look to their faces when they rose.

“I am Mistake,” answered the Fakaran, “and this is my sister MistyTrail. I apologize for not knowing that you were the queen.”

“That is excusable,” smiled the queen as she seemed to warm to the girls. “I guess living in the human world you are used to more extravagant clothing. The elves believe in simplicity. Someone should have already given you some elven clothes,” she added as her nose crinkled at the animal skins that the girls wore. “I am sure that we can rectify that when you leave.”

“Why have we been imprisoned?” asked MistyTrail. “If we have broken any of your laws, it has only been through ignorance. We certainly have not meant to.”

“You have made certain statements,” frowned the queen. “Statements that in Elvangar have special meaning. I have come to understand that a crazy man poisoned your minds. He will be dealt with, and you will be released. It is nothing to concern yourselves with.”

“If you mean Garl,” replied Mistake, “I don’t believe that he is crazy. I wouldn’t want to see him harmed either. He is about the only one here in Elvangar who has really befriended us.”

“What you believe is irrelevant,” snapped the queen. “It is what I believe that matters. He tried to tell you that you are from the Kieran line. False representation of your ancestry in Elvangar is a serious offense. As I can tell after seeing you that you were not aware of this offense, I can hardly punish you for it, but Garl knows better. He was banished from Morada and stripped of his membership in the Society of Mages for previous offenses. He has obviously not learned yet how to behave.”

“But we are Kierans,” protested Mistake. “Garl proved it with a magic spell.”

“I was told that you recanted such foolish statements,” scowled the queen. “If you persist with such nonsense, I will have no choice but to punish you.”

“We will stop,” promised MistyTrail before Mistake could say anything to further anger the queen. “I guess we are still ignorant of the elven ways. We do hope to learn more about the elves. Do you have children?”

The queen’s forehead creased as she stared at MistyTrail. She tried to determine if the question was asked innocently or not, but she could not.

“I did have children at one time,” said the queen, “but we no longer discuss such things. It is considered rude in Elvangar to pry into the background of royalty.”

“We do not mean to be rude,” interjected Mistake, “but this magical carozit indicates that we are relatives of yours. Neither of us knows our parents so we were wondering if you know who they are. Did you ever have daughters around our age?”

“You insolent whelp,” snapped the queen as she stepped forward and slapped Mistake hard across the face.

Mistake reeled from the blow, her carozit falling to the floor. Tears came to Mistake’s face and her fists closed in anger. She bent down to get her carozit, and the queen swung her leg to kick Mistake while she was bent over.

“Don’t hurt my sister!” shouted MistyTrail as she cast the spell of compulsion on the queen.

The queen fell to the floor and screamed as her hands flew to her head and clasped it tightly. MistyTrail stood in a trance staring at the queen as Mistake leaped to her feet.

“Stop it,” shouted Mistake. “Release the spell. You are hurting our mother.”

MistyTrail snapped out of her trance and shook her head just as the guards raced into the room. She immediately dropped the compulsion spell.

Chapter 25

The Patriots

The guards raced across the floor of the throne room. Two of them immediately drew their swords and moved between the fallen queen and the two girls. Four other guards continued onward to seize Mistake and MistyTrail. The queen stopped screaming and began to groan.

“What is going on here?” one of the guards asked.

“They attacked me magically,” moaned the queen.

The guards holding Mistake and MistyTrail viscously tightened their grips on the girls. They dragged Mistake and MistyTrail from the throne room and turned them over to the waiting squad of soldiers with orders to return them to the prison. Word spread quickly that the queen had been magically attacked.

Back in the throne room, the guards were just helping the queen back to her feet. Her head throbbed with a dull pain, and she swayed when she stood, so the guards gently carried her to her throne and set her down.

Within minutes Karaza entered the room. He moved swiftly to the queen and knelt next to the throne. He dismissed the guards with a wave of his hand, and they dutifully retreated to the adjoining room.

“What happened?” inquired Karaza. “I heard that you were attacked magically.”

“The foreign girls,” the queen said weakly. “They used magic on me. My head throbs with pain. Make it go away.”

Karaza wove a calming spell and a healing spell together and cast it on Queen Alycia. Almost immediately the throbbing dimmed and then disappeared altogether. The queen sighed with relief.

“Why did you have them brought before you?” Karaza asked with a hint of annoyance in his voice. “I said that I would take care of them. Tell me all that transpired.”

“You led me to believe that they were innocent,” scowled the queen. “You said that they recanted their statements that they were of the Kieran line. You said it was all Garl’s fault. You lied to me.”

“I did not lie,” retorted the mage. “I put them under a truth spell. They stated that they were not of the Kieran line. You must tell me what transpired here.”

“They acted all nice and innocent,” recalled the queen. “It was almost a pleasant conversation until they asked about my children. First they insisted that they were Kierans and stuck up for Garl. Then they inquired about my children and claimed that they were related to me. They had this stick with balls attached to it and claimed that it proved that I was their relative. Then one of them had the boldness to directly ask if my daughters would be around their age. I could not stand such audacity. I slapped the insolent whelp. That is when the other one attacked me magically. Why was I not told that they were mages?”

“Our reports indicated that their magical talents were practically nonexistent,” frowned Karaza. “Perhaps they used magic to counteract the truth telling spell I used during the interrogation. I will see that they are moved to the mage cells.”

“I am disappointed in you, Karaza,” frowned the queen. “Those girls could have killed me. You cannot imagine how upset I am over this incident.”

“I can imagine,” frowned Karaza. “Let me help you to your chambers. I will cast a spell of tranquility on you so that you can rest. You will feel much better when you awaken.”

The queen nodded and allowed the Head of the Society of Mages to escort her to her sleeping chamber. Karaza cast a spell over the reclining queen and watched as she fell into a deep sleep. He smiled inwardly as he left the queen’s chambers and summoned the guards.

“The queen is in shock,” Karaza announced. “Your allowing of dangerous visitors into her presence is most disturbing. You should review your procedures to determine where the failure in security occurred.”

“We had no idea that the girls possessed magic,” complained the Head Guard. “It was the queen herself who asked for the foreigners to be brought before her.”

“I am not placing any blame on you,” soothed Karaza. “I am just pointing out that others very well may. The queen was close to death today. Do you not think that will arouse some passions from the citizenry?”

“I understand,” nodded the Head Guard. “We will double our presence immediately.”

“That is not good enough,” Karaza shook his head. “She is to have no visitors until I approve them. I have put her to bed so that she may rest and heal from the effects of the magical attack. I will be by periodically to check on her. Let no one else enter.”

“The palace will be sealed,” promised the Head Guard. “What will happen to the foreigners? I had them taken back to the prison.”

“What should happen to assassins?” retorted Karaza. “I will arrange for their executions immediately. I suppose that there will need to be some hearing among the elders before they are executed, but I think speed is essential here, especially where magic is concerned. I suspect that you and your men may be called to testify before the Council. That may prove to be embarrassing for you. Perhaps it would wiser for you to prepare a statement declaring that the foreigners tried to assassinate the queen. That would alleviate any need for your men to be questioned. I doubt you would want anyone else to know how lax your security was.”

Karaza did not wait for a response from the Head Guard. He swept out of the room and headed for the platform for the trip to ground level.

* * *

Mistake and MistyTrail were shoved brutally into the their small cell. They fell to the floor, scattering their small piles of weapons. The door slammed shut.

“That didn’t turn out well at all,” frowned MistyTrail as she sat up and dusted off her clothes.

“I can’t believe you attacked our mother,” scowled Mistake. “You could have killed her.”

“She was hurting you,” retorted MistyTrail. “No one hurts my sister and expects me to stand by and watch. I would do it again.”

“She hardly hurt me,” sighed Mistake. “My human mother did much worse to me, and I survived. Besides, this is our real mother. I am sure that she would love us if she got to know us. I don’t want to see her hurt.”

“She was about to kick you out of the tree,” countered MistyTrail. “You would have died from the fall.”

“I do not want to see her hurt,” Mistake repeated adamantly.

“I am sorry,” sniffed MistyTrail as she rose and wrapped her arms around Mistake. “I don’t want to see either of you hurt. What are we going to do now?”

“I don’t know,” frowned Mistake as she hugged her sister back. “I think we just destroyed whatever chance we had at winning the queen’s favor. I doubt that she will release us from prison now.”

“Probably not,” agreed MistyTrail as she broke the embrace and gathered her weapons. “I wonder if we will be charged for attacking the queen?”

“If we are,” replied Mistake as she slid her weapons into their proper places, “I will stand with you. What one of us does, we both do.”

“But I am the only one who actually attacked her,” argued MistyTrail. “You should go free.”

“I am not going anywhere without my sister,” Mistake smiled weakly. “We will figure something out.”

A key was inserted into the door and both girls turned and stared as it opened. Karaza walked in, a smile on his face.

“I understand that you saw the queen this morning,” stated the elven mage.

“I did not mean to hurt her,” MistyTrail said quickly. “Please tell her that I am sorry.”

“I am sure she understands,” smiled Karaza. “In fact, she has asked me to make sure that your accommodations in the prison are befitting your station. You both deserve a much larger room with beds to sleep on. Please follow me.”

Mistake and MistyTrail gazed at each other questioningly. They shrugged and followed the mage out of the cell. There were no soldiers in sight in the corridor beyond the cell. Karaza led the way along the corridor and turned into another corridor. Halfway along the new corridor, Karaza stopped and unlocked a large metal door. He opened the door and waved his hand for the girls to walk through. Mistake hesitated at the doorway and peered into the room. Her eyes opened wide in wonderment as she viewed the furnishings.

The room was nicely furnished with a large bed, sitting chairs, standing closet, and a dresser. She walked into the room. Karaza started to close the door behind her, but MistyTrail swiftly slid through the door.

“You each have your own room,” frowned Karaza.

“There is no need for that,” smiled MistyTrail. “We sleep together.”

Karaza shrugged and closed the door and locked it. The girls did not speak for a while to make sure that Karaza was long gone.

“What do you make of this?” asked Mistake as she bounced down on the bed. “Maybe the queen does understand after all.”

“Then why are we still in prison?” frowned MistyTrail. “Did you notice that there were no guards in the corridors? Isn’t that strange?”

“That only shows that they think we are harmless,” shrugged Mistake as she stretched out on the bed.

MistyTrail sat in one of the plush chairs and looked at the scrape on her leg that had occurred when they were thrown into the other cell. She examined the scrape and prepared to cast a healing spell on it. Pain shot through her head and she fell forward to the floor. Mistake bolted from the bed and was at her sister’s side in seconds.

“What happened?” asked Mistake.

“Pain,” panted MistyTrail. “I think I know why we were moved.”

“Why?” asked Mistake.

“This is a mage cell,” answered MistyTrail. “Any use of magic will cause extreme pain. All I tried to do was cast a small healing spell for the scrape on my leg. It hurt real bad, Mistake.”

“So that is why the corridors were empty,” scowled Mistake. “They are treating us like dangerous rogue mages. Only the mage interrogator was allowed to be near us. I bet he had powerful shields surrounding him at all times.”

“They don’t plan on letting us go,” declared MistyTrail. “I have really messed up this time. They think we tried to kill the queen. We are being treated like dangerous magical prisoners. I am so sorry, Mistake.”

Mistake walked back to the bed and sat down. She gazed around the pleasantly appointed room and shook her head.

“You are right, MistyTrail,” she finally nodded. “We are never getting let out of here, but we are leaving anyway.”

“What do you mean?” asked MistyTrail.

“I mean that we have to start thinking about how to escape,” answered Mistake. “If they truly believe that we tried to kill the queen, they will execute us.”

“There will be more to escaping than just unlocking the door,” frowned MistyTrail. “We are deep inside this prison, and the prison is deep inside the city. How will we get out? Where will we go when we get out?”

“We will do whatever is required to escape,” declared Mistake. “I would rather die fighting for freedom than allow them to execute us.”

“Do you mean you would kill the guards?” asked MistyTrail.

“Only if we have no choice,” nodded Mistake, “but yes, that is exactly what I mean. We have to get out of here, and we have to do it quickly.”

“And then what?” MistyTrail frowned and sighed. “There is no place in Elvangar that we can hide that they will not find us. It is hopeless.”

“We will not stay in Elvangar,” declared Mistake. “We will use the ship that Eltor and Caldal hid. We will leave this place and never come back.”

“Leave Elvangar?” brightened MistyTrail. “You mean we can return to the Sakova or Angragar?”

“Not exactly,” replied Mistake. “We have another future ahead of us.”

“What are you talking about?” questioned MistyTrail.

“Do you remember when we dropped the carozit in front of the queen?” asked Mistake.

“Of course,” nodded MistyTrail. “It was not that long ago.”

“Why did you let go of the carozit?” asked Mistake.

“I don’t know,” puzzled MistyTrail. “I guess it was a reaction to the balls flying upward. Why do you ask?”

“That is exactly why I let go as well,” smiled Mistake. “At the moment the queen’s hand joined ours on the carozit, the balls flew apart from each other. We have another relative, MistyTrail. And that relative is far away from here. That is where we are going.”

“Another relative?” pondered MistyTrail. “I wonder where we will be going. Which direction do we go? We don’t really know where to go.”

“We will figure it out,” promised Mistake. “I found you, didn’t I?”

“That you did,” smiled MistyTrail. “Let’s figure a way out of this place. I counted the paces from our old cell. Shall I draw a map?”

* * *

Tamar checked for any followers before he moved to the base of his father’s tree. He hurriedly climbed the tree, ignoring the rope for the platform. He didn’t bother to knock, but rather opened the door and slid in. The others looked up questioningly as he entered.

“Mistake and MistyTrail have been moved to mage cells,” reported Tamar. “Evidently they are the ones that the rumors talk about.”

“They would never try to assassinate the queen,” objected Volox. “Especially with magic. I can’t believe they know that much magic.”

“Do not discount their magical abilities,” disagreed Garl. “Both girls have very strong capabilities. While I do not think they would have tried to kill the queen, I can envision a scenario where it looked like they did.”

“How?” asked Tamar. “What is this scenario that you talk about?”

“The girls know a compulsion spell that can only be used by Kierans,” explained Garl. “The problem with the spell is it cannot be used against another Kieran. It causes great pain when it is used that way. The queen is obviously from the Kieran line. If the girls tried to use the compulsion spell, it could have been disastrous.”

“Why would they use a compulsion spell on the queen?” asked Volox.

“That I cannot answer,” shrugged Garl, “but I can take a guess. As a mage tutor, I drive my students hard. I believe that it makes them excel, and history has proven me right. When a student is so driven, they tend to narrow the selection of spells that immediately come to mind in times of stress. The selection that is in the forefront of their minds are the last spells hammered into them because they have been practicing them so often. Sometimes the results can be humorous, such as casting a healing spell to ward off a robber. I fear that this time the results were not found to be humorous at all.”

“So there might be some truth to the accusations being lodged against Mistake and MistyTrail, even though they never intended to kill the queen?” summarized Volox.

“Yes,” nodded Garl. “The situation might be rectifiable, but I do not hold out much hope. There are evil forces at play in Elvangar. It is best if we can get the girls out of prison in any way that is possible.”

“I could bring the matter up before the Council of Elders,” offered Volox. “I doubt that anything bad would happen to the girls once their claim as the lost princesses is known to the people.”

“You do not understand,” sighed Garl. “The lives of Alahara and Alastasia are endangered. We must get them out of the prison, and we must do it now.”

Everyone stopped and stared at the old man from Etta. While the others had accepted his claim about the girls being the lost princesses, actually referring to them by name had a chilling effect. No longer was it Mistake and MistyTrail in trouble; now they were the princesses of Elvangar.

“What can we do?” asked Volox, his tone showing that he was committed to helping.

“We need to get Anija out of the city,” stated Tamar. “She must be taken someplace safe.”

“Why me?” asked Anija.

“Because you will be used against Tamar and me,” answered Volox. “Our son is correct. We will both be enemies of the state soon. You must be hidden. I think Eltor and Caldal should find a safe place for my wife. Tamar and I should not even know the location that she is taken to.”

“You speak wisely,” nodded Garl. “The lives of everyone in this room are about to change drastically. The boys and your wife should be spared from that anguish.”

“But we want to help Mistake and MistyTrail,” objected Caldal. “That is the reason that we have come to Morada.”

“Are you ready to forfeit your lives?” scowled Tamar. “That is what we are talking about here.”

The boys’ eyes grew large at Tamar’s mention of death.

“Tamar is correct,” Volox said softly. “I am not sure how much the three of us can do to save the princesses, but we are determined to try. That does not mean that you boys must die as well.”

“I will admit,” Eltor said nervously, “that I did not realize that you were talking about dying, but now that you have put it on the table, I still plan to help. I will not run away.”

“I agree,” Caldal said emphatically. “Our lives were already forfeit when Mistake and MistyTrail rescued us. I cannot walk away while their lives are endangered, even if it means my own death.”

“You tell them, boys,” smiled Anija. “We may not be warriors, magicians, or elders, but every elf has the right to be involved in this. I will not hide myself in some remote village while my government murders my son and my husband. I am not leaving.”

Volox and Tamar both opened their mouths to object, but Garl pushed his chair back and rose. Everyone looked at him expectantly.

“Anija is correct,” declared Garl. “Every elf is entitled to work for the well being of the royal family. Let us not waste time arguing over this. We need to determine what each of us has to offer and how best to utilize those skills. There is more at stake here than any of you realize.”

“What do you mean by that?” asked Volox. “Is there something that you are keeping from us?”

The old man looked around the room and made eye contact with each person in it. He nodded to himself as if he had answered some unasked question. He reached into his cloak and extracted the scroll he had copied from memory in the library. He placed it on the table and everyone leaned to read it while Volox unrolled it.

“Merciful Kaltara!” gasped Anija. “That is not possible. Not after all these years. It just can’t be.”

“Yet the part about the princesses obviously is true,” frowned Volox. “Do you believe this to be true, Garl?”

“I do,” Garl nodded. “I would not be here if I did not believe in the Prophecies of Kieran. My ancestor was much favored by Kaltara. Kieran’s visions were the truth of what is to come.”

“And just where will this king be found?” asked Tamar. “I notice that the scroll does not address this matter.”

“No, it doesn’t,” conceded Garl, “the scroll is clear enough for me. It states that the lost princesses will find this king. They cannot do that if they are dead or imprisoned.”

“Can you boys write?” asked Anija.

Eltor and Caldal both nodded. Garl looked skeptically at Anija and waited for her to explain her thoughts.

“Good,” Anija said decisively. “Eltor, Caldal, and I are going to make copies of this scroll. I plan to make sure that dozens of copies appear around this city in appropriate places. I know that you said public opinion will not help much, but we are only six. We will need more help.”

“Make the copies,” Garl nodded, “but do not distribute any of them until I say it is alright to do so. I do not want to tip our hand just yet.”

“Or the guards at the prison will be increased,” agreed Tamar. “There are a few soldiers that I would trust my life to. I plan to talk to them. I am sure they will help us free the princesses.”

“What do you want me to do?” asked Volox.

Before anyone could answer, there was a knock at the door. Everyone froze except the elder who rose quietly and approached the closed door.

“Who is it?” he shouted through the door.

“A call to Council,” shouted the voice on the other side of the door.

Volox cracked the door slightly and stared at the soldier.

“What is the urgency?” he asked. “No meeting is scheduled today.”

“I was not told,” answered the soldier, “but rumor is that it is for a vote regarding the execution of the assassins. The meeting starts within the hour.”

“Thank you,” Volox said as he closed the door.

Volox walked back to the table and sat down. He exhaled deeply and shook his head.

“Now I know what I will be doing,” he said softly. “I will stall that meeting as long as I can. Still, there is not much time to accomplish what we must.”

“How long can you stall?” asked Garl.

“Several hours I think,” answered Volox, “but it depends on how testy things get. Malid may try to force the vote over my objections. I would like a copy of that scroll to carry with me. It may buy us an extra hour or so.”

“What about members of the Society of Mages?” asked Tamar. “Do you still have friends there, Garl?”

“No,” Garl shook his head. “I have previous students, but even they will avoid me. I was fortunate to find one to help me access the royal vaults, but that will not happen again.”

“What happened there?” asked Volox. “When I was new in this city, your name was among those listed as the shining stars of Elvangar. A year or two later you were dismissed from the Society and disappeared. No real explanation was ever given.”

“It is not something I like to talk about,” frowned Garl, “but it is pertinent to this matter. I was a rising star in the Society of Mages, as was Karaza. We often tried to outdo each other in what I thought was a friendly competition, but I was sadly mistaken.”

“Karaza is now the Head of the Society of Mages,” interjected Volox for those who did not know.

“Things between us really turned foul when I was chosen to be the Head of the Society of Mages,” continued Garl. “Karaza was furious. He told everyone who would listen that I was selected only because I was the king’s uncle, but that is not how our king carried out his duties. He was nothing if not honest, fair, and objective.”

“You were the king’s uncle?” Volox echoed with surprise. “I never knew that, and the king was responsible for my elevation to elder. I though that I knew him well.”

“You probably did,” smiled Garl. “He did not play favorites. After the incident of the great storm, the queen was in a terrible state of depression. Who could blame her? Her loss was of a magnitude that no one person should suffer. I tried to console her by telling her that the king was not dead. I promised her that he would be found and returned to her. Karaza claimed that I was lying to her to solidify my high position because she really favored Karaza over me. He said that I would be replaced if she knew the truth of her husband’s death.”

“And all you were trying to do was to comfort her in her time of loss?” asked Anija.

“No,” Garl shook his head. “I truly believed that the king was alive. I was very close to my nephew. I was sure that I would have felt it in my heart if he had perished. I tried to share my hopes with her.”

“And she didn’t believe you?” asked Tamar.

“Worse,” sighed Garl. “About a year after the terrible incident, Karaza convinced the queen to allow him to mount an expedition into the world of the humans to search for the king. He promised to use his magic powers to locate the king if he lived. She granted his wish. When Karaza returned, he was unlike his old self. He claimed to have found the grave of the king, proving his death, and therefore my dishonesty. The queen was incensed that I continued to believe that the king was alive. I was stripped of my title, thrown out of the Society of Mages, and banned for all time from stepping foot in the city of Morada.”

Chapter 26

Defending the Accused

Tamar ushered the two soldiers into his office and closed the door. He walked across the room as far away from the door as he could get and motioned for the two soldiers to follow him. They dutifully obeyed.

“I am going to say something to the two of you that must remain confidential,” opened Tamar. “Can I trust that you will not repeat what you are about to hear?”

“There is no need for such a question,” responded Lortar. “You know us better than to ask such a question.”

“I hope that I do,” replied Tamar, “because what I am going to ask of you, some would call treason.”

“I cannot believe that,” Fengri shook his head. “You would never commit treason. I have never met a more loyal officer.”

“It will not be treason,” confirmed Tamar, “but some will call it that. Can you see a mission through to its end while being called a traitor?”

“If I believe in it,” nodded Lortar. “The fact that you believe in it already says a great deal to me. What is it you want us to do?”

“Read this,” Tamar said as he handed a copy of the scroll to the soldiers.

Lortar and Fengri read the scroll together. When they were done they returned it to Tamar.

“What is that scroll?” asked Fengri.

“It is a copy of one of the Prophecies of Kieran,” answered Tamar. “Do you understand what it is foretelling?”

“The prophecy is clearly stated,” replied Lortar, “but why are you showing it to us?”

“Have you heard the rumors of the rebirth of Angragar?” asked Tamar.

“Of course,” nodded Lortar. “Everyone has.”

“Well the rumors are true,” declared Tamar. “The first Prophecies of Kieran stated that when Angragar was reborn we would enter the Time of Calling. Does this make any more sense regarding the scroll that you have just read?”

“It does,” shrugged Fengri, “but I am still missing the connection.”

“There was a report of an attempted assassination of the queen,” explained Tamar. “The supposed assassins are two young women that come from another land. They are twins. They are of the Kieran line, and they are the age of the lost princesses.”

“But if these are the princesses of the prophecy,” frowned Fengri, “why would they try to kill the queen?”

“I don’t believe that they did,” answered Tamar. “I think it is a ploy by someone else to have the princesses executed, thereby destroying the prophecy. I am sure that you both know of my special association with the queen? Well I have been forbidden entry to the palace on the orders of Karaza.”

“Of the Society of Magic?” gasped Lortar. “You choose some powerful enemies, Tamar. I have never trusted that man. What do you want us to do?”

“I plan to get the princesses out of the prison so that they cannot be executed,” declared Tamar. “I need your help. I will not lie to you. This mission could very well mean the death of all of us, but I believe in the Prophecies of Kieran. I have always stood to offer my life in the defense of Elvangar, and that is exactly what I am doing now. Will you aid me?”

“Without question,” nodded Fengri.

“Count me in,” agreed Lortar.

“Continue with your duties while I gather some more men,” Tamar said. “I will call for you shortly. Be prepared for battle.”

Fengri and Lortar saluted and left the office. When they opened the door, Rattal was standing outside of it. Tamar saw him and beckoned him in.

“Close the door,” ordered Tamar. “We need to talk.”

“I found my sword,” Rattal said scornfully. “I thought you would want to know.”

“Your sword?” Tamar asked innocently. “Had you lost it?”

“I am no fool,” sneered Rattal as he crossed the room to stand in front of Tamar. “I may not have seen you hit me, but I know it was you.”

Too fast for Rattal to react, Tamar pulled his belt knife and held it to Rattal’s throat.

“Ah, but you are a fool, Rattal,” Tamar smiled menacingly. “If you plan to shadow someone you should at least have the skill to do so without being noticed. Let me explain some facts of life to you. The queen fancies me as a potential husband. That is why she has sent you to follow me. Given the circumstances, ask yourself who will prevail if the queen must decide that one of us must die and the other must live.”

“What are you talking about?” Rattal asked nervously as he realized the truth about the queen’s motives. “Why would one of us have to die?”

“Because that is where this game will end,” replied Tamar. “Do you really think it logical that she would reward you if you found nothing to report about me? And would she then reward you if what you did find out about me dashed her dreams of matrimony? There is no way that you come out a winner in this game, Rattal.”

“I have little choice but to follow the queen’s orders,” retorted Rattal.

“Not exactly true,” smiled Tamar. “I am still your commanding officer. I can give you an order that requires your extended absence from Morada. If you are willing to accept such an order, this issue between us can be forgotten by all.”

“I cannot just ignore the queen,” frowned Rattal. “Even if you ordered me out of the city, I am duty bound to see her first. She will cancel your orders.”

“That would normally be true,” nodded Tamar, “but you will be denied access to the palace today. The queen will not be able to fault you for your failure to check with her.”

“I was already denied entrance,” sighed Rattal. “Where will you send me?”

Tamar sheathed his knife and walked to his desk. He scribbled a note and handed it to Rattal.

“It is a nice position,” smiled Tamar. “You will be in charge of inspecting all of the outlying defenses. You will be gone from the city for some time. No one need know anything about our little discussion here. Is that acceptable?”

Rattal frowned and nodded silently. He turned and left the office. Tamar waited a few minutes before leaving his office in search of more soldiers to stand for the princesses.

* * *

Eltor watched Caldal position himself in the busy market. Caldal selected the intersection of the two busiest aisles of the market. People moved by him in every direction. Eltor smiled and started running towards his friend.

“Caldal,” shouted Eltor, “have you heard the news?”

Everyone turned to see what the excitement was. The passersby slowed at first and then halted as Eltor stopped in front of Caldal and talked loudly.

“The Prophecies of Kieran are coming true,” declared Eltor. “The lost princesses have returned to Elvangar. I have heard that they are already in the city.”

“Here in Morada?” Caldal asked excitedly.

“Yes, yes,” Eltor replied excitedly. “At last the Time of Calling has come. How great this day is for Elvangar. To imagine that we would live in the Time of Calling and witness all that the great Kieran prophesized come true.”

“Let’s go find the lost princesses,” Caldal said excitedly. “There will be great jubilation in Elvangar tonight.”

At that, Eltor and Caldal ran off together. The crowd in the intersection and beyond began to buzz with a thousand conversations. People asked what the Time of Calling was, and who the lost princesses were. Not many elves had the answers to those questions, but everyone was excited that something great was happening in Elvangar.

Not far away, at the library, Anija was looking at the collection of old scrolls that were maintained for the public. It was a historical section that offered the public copies of major historical documents. From the dust on the shelves, not many elves cared to read historical documents. She found the section set aside for the great Kieran. There were copies of poems that he had written, and copies of many of the laws he passed as king.

Anija looked around to see if anyone was near before pulling a copy of Garl’s scroll out and placing it on the shelf. She placed it right next to a copy of the earliest of the Prophecies of Kieran. Anija smiled inwardly and started to leave the library. Before she could exit the building, she heard a woman talking to the librarian.

“Where can I find the Prophecies of Kieran?” the woman asked.

“That would be in the historical section near the back,” replied the librarian.

Anija grinned and left the library. As she walked down the short flight of steps, a dozen people were rushing up them. None of them were running, but they were all walking as fast as they could without appearing to be in a hurry.

* * *

Volox walked into the meeting room of the Council of Elders. He stared briefly at the empty chair where his good friend Vitalora should be sitting. Malid sat at the center of the table tapping his fingers anxiously. Behind him stood Karaza, Head of the Society of Magic. Volox had not expected to see the mage in the meeting. He frowned deeply as he sat down in his assigned chair.

“Now that we are all here,” sighed Malid, “we can get this nasty business out of the way.”

“Nasty business?” asked Volox. “Have I missed something?”

“You will be informed in due time, Volox,” replied Malid. “I would like to call this meeting to order.”

“That is not possible,” objected Volox. “The chamber is not empty of spectators.”

“Karaza is the Head of the Society of Mages in case you didn’t recognize him,” Malid sighed heavily. “He is the one who called this meeting.”

“I do recognize the distinguished mage,” Volox nodded politely to Karaza, “but I am also familiar with the rules of this Council. No spectators are allowed to observe the proceedings without the authorization of the full Council.”

“Karaza is not a spectator,” scowled Malid. “He is representing the queen in a serious matter.”

“Oh?” retorted Volox. “It must be a very serious matter indeed for the queen to interfere in our proceedings, but since when is the Society of Mages a substitute for the queen?”

“There has been an attempted assassination of the queen today,” snapped Malid. “This body has to hold a trial of the accused. Why are you bringing up such petty rules?”

“An assassination attempt?” gasped Volox. “This is unheard of. By all means we should commence a discussion about this immediately. I request that you clear the room of spectators so that we can begin. I know the rules may seem petty to you at the moment, but the rules were put in place for sound reasons. Let the esteemed Head of the Society of Mages wait in the adjoining room where he will be available when we need to call on him.”

Malid seethed with anger and smashed his fist down on the table. Karaza shook his head and placed his hand on Malid’s shoulder to calm him.

“I do not have any problem with waiting in the adjoining room,” announced Karaza. “Let the rules of the Council be adhered to. I am sure that your deliberations will be swift. There is only one verdict that you can bring in a situation such as this.”

Karaza turned and left the room. Malid glared at Volox, but Volox appeared not to notice as his eyes scanned the other members of the Council to gauge their reactions.

“Very well,” sighed Malid as he stared at Volox, “let this Council session begin. Are there any objections?”

Volox shook his head and smiled at Malid.

“Earlier today,” Malid began, “the queen asked to speak to two prisoners. The foreign girls, named Mistake and MistyTrail, were escorted to the throne room to meet Queen Alycia. They were searched for weapons, as any prisoner would be before meeting with the queen. After a short while, the royal guards heard the queen screaming. They rushed into the room to find Queen Alycia on the floor writhing in pain. Mistake and MistyTrail were standing and making no attempt to aid the queen in her time of distress. Mistake was heard to tell MistyTrail to release the spell. Evidently she did and the queen recovered enough to state that the girls attacked her magically. The prisoners were immediately taken from the throne room and incarcerated. We now must hold a trial to determine the fate of the accused. Are there any questions?”

“Did anyone witness this attack?” asked Volox.

“I just stated the sequence of events in their entirety,” replied Malid. “This is a rather simple matter, Volox. I do not know what your agenda is here, but we could all do without your foolishness. The queen would like to see a speedy execution of the assassins. It is up to this body to provide that for her.”

“I see several problems here,” declared Volox, “and I do not think well of your characterization of my objections as foolish. This august body is the highest court in the land. We should never make life and death rulings in a hurry without knowing all of the facts. Are there any elders here who would disagree with that statement?”

Volox made a point of making eye contact with each of the other elders. All of the elders shook their heads except Amber and Malid.

“All of the facts have been presented,” countered Malid. “There is no mystery here. The foreigners tried to kill the queen and were stopped by the guards. It is that simple. There is really nothing to discuss.”

“Why did the girls try to kill the queen?” asked Volox.

“I have no idea,” scowled Malid.

“What spell was used to harm the queen?” inquired Volox.

“I don’t know,” grumbled Malid.

“If the magical spell used had the capability of killing the queen,” questioned Volox, “how were the guards, who have no magical skills, able to stop the attack before the queen was killed?”

“What is your point here, Volox?” demanded Malid.

“My point is that this body must have all of the facts of this case before we condemn two young women to death,” declared Volox. “So far, we have no motive. We have no witness to the attack. We do not actually know if a magical spell was used at all, other than some guard’s second hand testimony that the queen in a moment of pain said she was being attacked. There are many questions here that must be answered before we kill two innocent people.”

“You are trying to drag this out for some reason,” Malid said suspiciously. “What are you up to?”

“I am after justice,” stated Volox. “We are being ask to condemn two girls to death. Is it too much to ask that we actually have the case presented to us properly? I am not talking about making a big production of this, but all of the witnesses are right outside this chamber. The girls are in a prison not far from here. The royal guards are at the palace not far away. The queen is also in the palace. Why can’t we hear exactly what happened? Why are we being rushed into this? Can not our prison hold the accused a few hours longer?”

“Volox is right,” interjected another elder. “I find it highly irregular that we are being rushed in this serious matter. Even if all of the facts presented so far are correct, it is not a clear-cut case of assassination. Certainly for one of the girls in any event. One of them asked the other to stop. Do we kill both of them?”

“A good point,” added another elder. “The queen said the girls were attacking her magically. She didn’t say the girls were trying to kill her. Why not? I think we need to have questions answered before I can vote to kill these two girls.”

“I propose that we gather all of the witnesses that have pertinent information on this event,” stated Volox. “I would like the queen to be included in that list.”

“The queen is in shock,” Malid shook his head. “She is in no condition to testify. She is not even accepting visitors or well wishers.”

“Perhaps we can leave her off the list for now,” conceded Volox, “but we can certainly start with the others.”

Murmurs of approval rippled around the table and Malid conceded that he would have to produce witnesses to get his conviction.

“Very well,” sighed Malid. “We will break for one hour while I gather the witnesses. We will start promptly in an hour, whether all of the members are here or not. I give you fair warning.”

Malid rose signaling the end of the session. He stormed out of the room and shook his head at Karaza. The Head Elder waved for Karaza to follow him and then walked along a corridor to his office.

“That was quick,” remarked Karaza, “but you do not seem thrilled by the outcome.”

“We haven’t started yet,” complained Malid. “Volox got the other elders to agree to the need for witnesses.”

“Witnesses?” scowled Karaza. “What witnesses? There was no one in the room except the accused and the victim. Are these elders such fools that they will let assassins go free?”

“No, no, no,” Malid shook his head. “Volox just likes to act as if he is important some times. I will bring the royal guards in and let them answer questions. Then Volox will have nothing to complain about. It is only a short delay. What can it matter?”

“I wonder,” pondered Karaza. “I think Volox is up to something. Can you restart the meeting without him? Does he even need to be involved?”

“I said that we would restart promptly in an hour,” answered Malid. “Any member who is not there will not be missed by me. What are you planning? Or don’t I want to know?”

“I was merely wondering if Volox didn’t show if your meeting would go easier,” shrugged Karaza. “I do not know how meetings of the elders are run. If you will excuse me, I think I will go for a stroll. I will be back in an hour to wait for the verdict.”

Karaza left the office and proceeded out of the building. He looked around and saw a group of elders walking through the plaza. He hurried to catch up to see if Volox was one of them. When he got close enough to identify the individual elders, he saw that Volox was not among them. He turned and scanned the area in all directions. Finally, he saw another smaller group of men leaving the building that he had just come from. He backtracked casually and smiled inwardly when he saw Volox walking with three other elders. He started to follow them at a distance.

The small group went into a bakery. Karaza stayed in the park across the street, leaning against a tree. He waited patiently for the elders to buy whatever it was that they had entered the bakery for. He waited almost fifteen minutes for the elders to reappear. The four men crossed the street and headed for the park. Karaza moved slowly around the tree so that he could observe them without being seen.

Volox and the other three elders entered the park and sat on the rim of a large fountain in the center of the park. The men ate bread and talked casually. Volox tried to turn the conversation to the current matter before the Council, but the other elders did not want to discuss it. Some of them tossed small pieces of fresh bread to the birds, while they talked about their families.

After half an hour of sitting by the fountain, the group rose. They started to walk out of the park, but Volox managed to get one of the elders to sit on a bench with him and discuss the attack of the queen. The other two elders continued on their way. Volox did not go into a lot of detail about the case, but he tried to present the need to be very careful when dealing out such harsh sentences. The other elder seemed to agree, but he soon rose and left the park.

Karaza smiled inwardly as he recognized the chance he had been waiting for. He moved closer to Volox, keeping himself hidden from view. When he was close enough to accomplish his goal, Karaza cast a spell of sleep upon Volox. Karaza snickered softly as he congratulated himself on solving the problem of the persnickety elder. The snicker quickly turned into a frown as Volox yawned and threw the last of his bread to the birds.

Karaza’s brow creased in confusion. He cast the spell again, but Volox did not seem to be affected. Volox appeared ready to leave and Karaza started to get desperate. He had only wanted to delay the elder, but now he was willing to hurt him to delay him. Karaza aimed a force bolt at the legs of the bench that Volox was sitting on. He figured that the bench would collapse and the elder might be knocked unconscious. Even if he was not knocked out, Karaza could put him to sleep when he offered to heal him.

The force bolt ran true, streaming towards the legs of the bench. Karaza watched the air part as the transparent burst of energy ripped through the air. Suddenly, it dissipated. That was when Karaza realized that Volox was shielded. His eyes darted around the park, looking for the mage that was protecting the elder. He could see no one. Karaza’s lips curled in disgust as Volox rose from the bench.

Karaza tried to gauge the size of the shield around the elder. He contemplated what he would construct if he were trying to protect someone. After a moment, he smiled to himself. He gazed up at the trees and calculated the elder’s path. Timing the casting perfectly, Karaza sent a force bolt streaming into the trees. It severed a large limb, which started falling towards the ground. Volox looked up in horror at the loud cracking noise. He saw the large limb falling down, but there was no time to move.

Unexpectedly, the limb broke in half several feet above the elder. The two halves each fell to different sides of the elder. Volox sighed with relief and started walking again. As the elder approached the building where the Council of Elders met, Karaza was fuming. Throwing caution to the wind, Karaza’s arms rose over his head. Suddenly, the sky sparked with lightning. A huge bolt slammed downward at the elder. Thunder rolled across the sky, and citizens screamed as they saw the lightning strike Volox. A blinding flash obscured the image of Volox.

Seconds later, they saw the elder looking up at the sky in wonder. He shook his head and shrugged as he entered the building. Karaza cursed under his breath as his eyes still searched for the hidden mage who had dared to cross his path. He couldn’t think of any mage that was powerful enough to protect against such a powerful lightning bolt.

Karaza left his hiding spot and moved towards the building, his mind still processing the list of mages who might defy him. When he reached the door to the building, only one name remained on the list. He turned around abruptly and searched the area for his old nemesis, Garl, but the old man was not to be found. Karaza hissed as he opened the door and stepped into the building.

Chapter 27

Gamara

Mistake sighed in frustration and sank to the floor. She put her back to the door and stared into space.

“What is the matter?” asked MistyTrail. “I have never seen you fail to pick a lock before. Is your tool broken?”

“There is nothing wrong with my tool,” grumbled Mistake. “This lock is magically protected. There is no way that I will ever be able to pick it.”

“Then we need another plan,” shrugged MistyTrail. “They will have to open that door some time. We need to figure out what we are going to do when that happens.”

Mistake rose and crossed the room. She bounced down on the bed next to MistyTrail and sighed again.

“It will likely be Karaza that opens the door,” Mistake said. “He will be well shielded. Just what do you think we can do?”

“We still have our knives,” MistyTrail pointed out. “Maybe his shields will not offer him physical protection?”

“So we kill him with knives and then run for the exit of the prison in the middle of Morada?” Mistake asked sarcastically. “I am sure that will work just fine.”

“This is not like you,” frowned MistyTrail. “You never give up. You never stopped searching for me until you found me. We will find a way out. Let’s think about it.”

“I am not sure exactly how much trouble we are in,” replied Mistake. “We might be in very serious trouble, or it is possible that someone will figure out that we didn’t really mean to hurt the queen. It would be great if we could sneak out of here, but killing a guard or Karaza will certainly mean trouble. If we must kill someone, we have to be positive that we can complete our escape, or we will just make things worse.”

* * *

The squad of elven soldiers marched through the city of Morada. In the center of the mass of brown uniforms was a hooded prisoner with his hands bound together and a large pack upon his back. The citizens turned and watched the small procession go by, wondering who was being taken to prison and what offense he might have committed. While such an escort was not a normal sight in Morada, it only held the citizens’ attention briefly before they returned to gossiping about the return of the lost princesses.

The squad of soldiers marched briskly in formation. Only the most astute observer would notice that the prisoner was keeping cadence, and even then it would be assumed that the prisoner was a soldier turned bad.

The column approached the prison and halted outside the door. The officer leading the column stepped forward to address the four sentries standing guard at the door of the prison.

“Tamar,” greeted one of the sentries, “it is not often that we see you here. You must bring a most dangerous one for us today.”

“Indeed we do,” Tamar said seriously. “We have a rogue mage that has already killed a number of my fellow soldiers.”

“Well,” replied the sentry, “we will make sure that he is housed in the mage wing.”

“No,” retorted Tamar, “I will make sure that he is housed in the mage wing. No offense to you or your men, but I am personally responsible for this criminal. I will not relinquish control of this fiend until I personally see him put in his cell. My men will accompany me.”

While the deviation from normal procedures raised a few eyebrows, none of the sentries were bold enough to deny the high-ranking officer his request. Two of the sentries opened the doors to the prison and held them while Tamar marched his men into the building.

Tamar had been to the prison on many occasions and knew the way to the mage wing. There were numerous guards within the corridors and the cell areas. They all knew Tamar by sight and many of them greeted him as he passed by. When they reached the mage wing, the two soldiers on guard duty looked questioningly at the approaching column of soldiers. Tamar called his column to a halt as the two guards approached.

“What have we here?” asked one of the guards.

“A most dangerous villain,” replied Tamar. “Which of the cells are currently occupied?”

“We have many empty mage cells,” replied the guard. “We will find a nice one for him.”

“He does not merit a nice cell,” retorted Tamar with a hint of distaste for the prisoner. “I asked which cells were occupied. I will choose the cell that this prisoner occupies.”

The guards’ faces creased with confusion. All of the mage cells were the same. One guard shrugged his indifference while the other pointed to the girls’ cell. Tamar walked past the two guards, causing them to turn around to see what he was doing. When Tamar suddenly halted and turned around again to face the two guards, he had a broad smile on his lips.

“I am sorry to cause you this inconvenience,” Tamar shrugged, “but I am sure in time you will come to understand the necessity of it. I need two cells opened, the one that is occupied, and another. Hand me the keys, please.”

By captivating the attention of the guards, Tamar had allowed his men to be placed behind them. Knives suddenly appeared at the throats of the two guards. One of the guards extended his arm slowly towards Tamar. In his hand was a ring with two keys. Tamar took the ring of keys.

“There are only two keys,” the guard said anxiously, “one for the mage cells, and one for the other cells. The larger one is for the mage cells. Why are you doing this?”

“Because Alahara and Alastasia do not belong in cells,” Tamar stated as he unlocked an empty cell. “You will not be harmed unless you try to stop us. Get in the cell.”

The knives at the throats of the guards were removed and the guards slowly stepped into the cell. One of the guards turned towards Tamar after he entered.

“Who are Alahara and Alastasia?” he asked. “Our only prisoners are the foreign girls.”

“They are the lost princesses,” declared Tamar as he closed the door and locked it.

Tamar walked to the door of the girls’ cell and inserted the key. He waved to his men to hug the wall before he turned the key and unlocked the door. Then he backed away from the door and waited.

Inside the cell, Mistake and MistyTrail became instantly alert when they heard the key in the lock. Mistake dashed for one side of the doorway while MistyTrail dashed to the other. The princesses waited for the door to open. Several long seconds passed and nothing happened. Mistake frowned at MistyTrail. MistyTrail shook her head and shrugged. More seconds slowly expired and still nothing happened.

Slowly, Mistake’s hand rose to the door. She pulled slightly on it and felt it move. She froze and waved for MistyTrail to get behind her. MistyTrail crept past the doorway and crouched behind Mistake.

“I am going to open it,” Mistake whispered. “Be ready to move when I do.”

MistyTrail nodded, but Mistake did not see her. She was already tensing to throw the door open. In a burst of speed, Mistake threw the door open and dove into the corridor. She rolled across the floor and came up in a crouch with a knife in each hand. MistyTrail swiftly moved to occupy the doorframe. She also held a knife in each hand. Tamar stood against the wall. He was grinning broadly.

“Tamar?” gasped Mistake. “Why are you here?”

“To rescue the princesses,” he grinned. “Let’s get back inside the cell. You have to change clothes.”

Mistake looked past Tamar at the squad of soldiers lined up along the wall. Tamar saw the concern in her gaze.

“These men are loyal to me,” Tamar said as he waved the prisoner forward.

The prisoner’s hood had already been removed and his hands untied. Without the hood and bindings, he looked like any other soldier. He unslung the large pack on his back and handed it to Tamar. Tamar handed it to Mistake.

“Put these uniforms on and hurry,” ordered Tamar. “We have already been in here too long for my liking. Put your own packs into the big one. We will straighten it all out after we are outside the city.”

Mistake dashed into the room. She dared not close the door, but Tamar stood in the doorway with his back to the girls. They swiftly changed their clothes and stuffed their packs into the large pack.

“We are ready,” Mistake said as she and MistyTrail exited the room and handed the pack to Tamar.

“Good,” Tamar replied as he signaled for his men to form two columns. “I hope you have some ability for marching in formation. I like my columns to look sharp. Get in the middle of the columns.”

The girls ran and inserted themselves into the columns. Tamar closed the door to their cell and marched to the front of the columns. He nodded to his men and the columns marched for the exit. They passed through the regular cellblock and the corridors leading to it. They reached the exit from the prison and two guards held the doors for them. As the column marched out of the prison, one of the guards called out to Tamar.

“Why are you taking his pack out with you?” asked the guard.

Tamar separated from the column as he signaled for them to continue marching.

“I considered it too dangerous to leave with him,” Tamar replied to the guard.

Another guard tapped the first guard’s arm and pointed at the column leaving the prison grounds.

“There were only ten plus a prisoner and the officer when they entered,” he said excitedly. “Now there are fourteen of them.”

The four guards tensed and drew their swords. Tamar shouted to his men as he turned and ran for his life. A whistle blew somewhere behind Tamar, and he knew that word would spread quickly. Soon the streets of Morada would be filled with soldiers searching for the treasonous column of soldiers. He looked over his shoulder and saw that his pursuers were not as physically fit as he was. Already their mouths were open, gasping for air, while Tamar felt as if the race had not yet begun. He caught up to his column of men and shouted terse orders.

The two columns immediately split up, each going in a different direction. Tamar continued to run straight ahead and dashed into an alleyway. He paused for a moment to catch his breath and see what his pursuers would do. The four guards stopped and gazed in both directions. One of the guards took command of the others. He started shouting orders and pointing. Tamar frowned at the shouted orders. While the prison guards were out of shape, they were not dim-witted. Instead of following either of the two columns, they were alerting the city guard. Within minutes the city would be shut down. Tamar knew he had to move quickly. He turned and ran for the rendezvous point.

The city of Morada was not a walled city. Lush forests surrounded it with well-worn paths leading to the outlying villages. At the edge of the city was a very old wooden house. The sole occupant of the house was an ancient woman who had no eyeballs, a result of magic gone awry. She lived in solitude, never wandering out except to harvest her garden. If she had any neighbors, they would have thought it strange to see a dozen soldiers open the door and file into her house.

The blind woman heard the door open and listened intently to the sounds of footsteps crossing her threshold. She walked into the kitchen and took a spare mug off the shelf. She moved with precision steps in the small kitchen and took a pot of boiling tea off the fire. She carried the pot and the cup into the main room of the small house and set it on the table.

“I only have one spare cup for the tea,” the old woman said. “I am afraid that you will have to share.”

Another set of footsteps crossed the room after closing the door. He smiled at the old woman even though it was obvious that she could not see him.

“Thank you, Gamara,” said Tamar. “I am sorry that we had to intrude like this on your solitude, but I am grateful that you have allowed us to.”

“Are they among you?” asked Gamara.

“They are,” replied Tamar as he took Mistake and MistyTrail by the arms and led them towards the old woman. “I do not know which is which,” he added as he took the old woman’s hands and placed them on the shoulders of Mistake and MistyTrail, “but Alahara and Alastasia stand before you.”

“Kaltara bless you both,” smiled the old woman as her hands ran up the faces of the girls, memorizing their features. “Twins they are. I can feel it.”

“Has Garl arrived?” asked Tamar.

“Not yet,” replied Gamara. “He will be by soon. He always keeps his word.”

“You are Garl’s sister?” asked MistyTrail. “He mentioned you to us when we lived with him in the village.”

“That I am,” nodded Gamara. “And he told me of you two when he visited the city to search the royal vaults. I am so thrilled that you have returned. I just wish that Avalar was alive to see it.”

MistyTrail frowned at the old woman, her mind searching her memory banks to find what was suddenly gnawing at her.

The door opened again and then closed. Garl entered and crossed the room. He hugged his sister and kissed her cheek.

“I told you he would be here soon,” smiled Gamara.

“The whole city is in search of this column of soldiers,” commented Garl as he broke the embrace. “It is only a matter of time before they realize who was smuggled out of the prison.”

Tamar turned to face his men. “I am forever indebted to you men,” he said. “You have accomplished a great deed today by freeing the lost princesses from prison. I can ask no more of you. I release each of you to return to your stations so that you are not hunted down by the army.”

“Our faces have already been seen,” replied Fengri. “It would be foolish of us to return to our posts now.”

“Some faces may indeed be remembered,” nodded Tamar, “some may not. It is up to each man to weigh the consequences of his actions from this point forward. I fully expect to be hunted down and executed. I will not think ill of any man who chooses not to stay with me, for to do so invites almost certain death.”

“I would not have come this far if I did not believe in you and the lost princesses,” declared Lortar. “I am with you to the end.”

Ripples of agreement spread through the soldiers, but Garl stopped it by raising his arms above his head.

“Even if you decide to stand against the army that will come,” stated Garl, “the princesses will not be staying. They must begin their search for the lost king. They must leave Elvangar.”

“We plan to leave by ship,” interjected Mistake. “I would like someone who knows how to sail to accompany us. I have tried sailing and failed at it.”

“I will take you wherever you want to go,” promised Tamar.

“Then you men should know that they might stand alone against the army,” nodded Garl. “Are you men still enthused to give up your lives?”

“Tamar and the princesses are not yet on the ship,” replied Fengri. “I would not like to see them fail because I was fearful of my life. Count me in.”

“And me,” added Lortar. “To return to my post is to forfeit my life. I will take my chances in the jungle until the princesses return.”

The rest of the soldiers added their agreeing voices to chorus. Tamar smiled and the men and nodded.

“Now all we have to do is steal a ship,” declared Tamar.

“We know where a ship is hidden,” offered Mistake. “We have to get to Alamanda.”

“Through Etta is the best path,” declared Garl. “That may well be one of the first places the army searches.”

“Then we should move out quickly,” declared Tamar. “Speed will be our defense against capture.”

“Avalar?” MistyTrail suddenly asked as she came out of her trance. “Did you say Avalar?”

“Yes,” nodded Gamara. “That was the king’s name. Your father was King Avalar.”

“Not was,” MistyTrail said excitedly. “Is. Avalar is alive.”

“I knew it,” Garl said triumphantly. “I was sure that I would have felt his death. How do you know he is alive?”

“I saw him,” replied MistyTrail. “He is on the Island of Darkness.”

“What are you talking about?” frowned Mistake. “We never saw him on the Island of Darkness. I would remember.”

“You did not see him,” replied MistyTrail. “Do you remember when Eltor posed as a Motangan soldier and marched us through the prisoner cages?”

“How could I forget?” Mistake shivered as she recalled the episode.

“In the very last cell was a single male elf,” explained MistyTrail. “He was by himself, but he was different than the rest of the prisoners. He was calm and at peace with himself. It was as if his imprisonment had not affected his demeanor.”

”I do remember you mentioning a strange elf in the last cage,” frowned Mistake, “but that is quite a leap to assume that it was our father.”

“Granted,” nodded MistyTrail, “but he spoke to me. He said but a single word, and I did not understand what he was trying to tell me. That single word was Avalar. He said it so calmly and self assuredly. I guess any other elf would have immediately known what he was saying, but I was not from Elvangar. I hope he did not despair from my lack of understanding.”

“Then we must return to the Island of Darkness,” Mistake swallowed hard.

“Yes,” MistyTrail nodded nervously. “It is a journey that does not cause me great joy, but we will rescue our father or die trying.”

“It is time for you to flee,” interrupted Garl. “Take your men out the back, Tamar. Always keep the princesses protected.”

“You are not coming?” asked Mistake.

“No,” answered Garl. “There is work for me yet in Morada. Volox, Anija, and the boys are in danger. I am the only one who can help them. Leave now, and I will do what I can to slow down your pursuers.”

Tamar nodded and ordered his men to get ready. Fengri opened the front door and gazed out. He signaled that the way was clear. Mistake hugged Garl goodbye, while MistyTrail gently kissed Gamara’s cheek. In moments the group was outside the small house and entering the forests along a well-beaten path.

Garl followed the group at a distance. When they finally rounded a bend and passed out of sight, the old man raised his arms in a magical dance. As his hands swayed back and forth, buds erupted through the hard packed soil of the trail. Long stalks followed the buds, and soon the entire pathway and the floor of the forest around it erupted into dense foliage. Garl continued his magical spell as the thicket spread in every direction. When he was done, Garl smiled in satisfaction. Whether the army detoured around the thicket or tried to cut through it, they would waste over an hour. Garl turned and strode towards the city center.

He passed dozens of soldiers searching every nook and cranny of the city. They searched every alleyway and left sentries on every corner as they tried to close the city down.

* * *

“That is all she said?” asked Volox. “Release the spell?”

“Well,” hemmed the guard, “it was a little more than that, but it made no sense.”

“This Council will determine if it makes sense of not,” retorted Volox. “Tell us exactly what she said.”

The guard nodded and answered, “She said ‘Stop it. Release the spell. You are hurting our mother.’”

“You are hurting our mother?” echoed Volox.

“So the foreigners are deranged,” snapped Malid. “That does not excuse their behavior.”

“No,” countered Volox as he took the scroll out and passed it to the elder next to him, “but maybe this will explain the words used.”

“What is that?” asked Malid angrily. “What is in that scroll?”

“Read it aloud,” Volox urged the elder who held it.

The elder read the entire scroll. Many of the elders were shocked to hear the words, others frowned in confusion as they wondered what they were listening to.

“What is the nature of that scroll?” asked Amber. “Is this something that you made up as a joke? This is not a trivial matter that we are dealing with.”

“It is one of the later Prophecies of Kieran,” declared Volox. “It is a copy of course, but you can verify it against the original with the queen’s permission.”

“But we already know that we are in the Time of Calling from our research on the earlier Prophecies,” frowned one of the elders. “If this is truly coming to pass, then those foreign girls really are the lost princesses. We cannot possibly execute them until we learn the truth of this matter.”

“That is exactly my point,” Volox readily agreed.

A solider opened the door and stepped into the room. Malid turned to him with scorn etched on his face.

“This Council is in session,” scowled Malid. “Remove yourself immediately.”

“I came to alert you to potential violence,” declared the soldier. “People are gathering in the street demanding to see the lost princesses.”

“What?” snapped Malid. “They must be dispersed immediately. Where is the army to control the mobs?”

“The army is busy sealing the city,” answered the soldier. “There has been an escape from the prison.”

“An escape?” Volox asked innocently. “Who has escaped?”

“I heard it was the two foreign girls,” answered the soldier. “I heard that Tamar is responsible for the escape. I am sorry to have to tell you that.”

“Get out,” Malid shouted at the soldier. “You, too,” he added to the guard who had been called as a witness.

Both men scurried out of the room, but they left the door open. Malid stood steaming as he glared at Volox.

“This whole meeting has been delayed by you,” accused Malid. “You have stalled at every turn to give your son time to free the prisoners. You are an accomplice to the assassination attempt on Queen Alycia. You shall hang alongside the girls when they are captured.”

“I have been doing my civic duty to make sure that you did not rush blindly into executing the lost princesses,” Volox defended himself. “In fact, that is exactly what you would have done, never knowing that you were destroying the Prophecies of Kieran.”

“That does not excuse your actions,” retorted Malid. “You are guilty of treason. Hanging you will have no effect on the Prophecies of Kieran. Besides, I am willing to bet that this scroll is a forgery. I do not know what game you are playing at, but it is over. You shall hang before the day is over.”

“Why should we wait for the hangman?” snarled Karaza as he entered the room through the open door. “The scroll is definitely a forgery. I think such extraordinary treason deserves and extraordinary death,” he sneered as his arm rose menacingly and pointed at Volox.

Chapter 28

The Royal Tree

Volox cringed as Karaza’s hand pointed at him. The elder knew he was endangering himself by stalling the execution of the princesses, but he had not expected to die like this. He closed his eyes and offered a quick prayer to Kaltara. Nothing happened.

Volox opened his eyes and saw Karaza sneering at him. Other elders were leaving their chairs and moving away from Volox. The whole room seemed to be in motion when an old man stepped through the door.

“Put down your useless arm, Karaza,” Garl said. “Elvangar does not accept executions without a vote of the Council of Elders, and they have not yet voted for one.”

Karaza spun and faced Garl. “So you are the one shielding him?” he spat. “I suspected as much, but you have just violated the queen’s orders. You have been banned from the city for years.”

“So I am,” nodded Garl, “but you are not going to do anything about my return. You have already tried to kill Volox several times today and failed because I was protecting him. I will continue to protect him. Now I see you trying to kill an elder and claim that you are doing so because of what transpired here in the latest session. Tell this Council why then you tried to kill him before this session.”

“I tried no such thing,” spat Karaza. “Summon the guards, Malid, and have this criminal arrested.”

“I can produce witnesses who will testify otherwise,” Garl retorted, ignoring the threat of guards arriving, “but why quibble over such details. I will not allow you or anyone else to kill an elder without trial.”

“All this talk of killing will stop,” declared Malid, as he grew nervous in the presence of two powerful mages. “The Council of Elders will not rule on any executions this day. The foreigners have escaped and must be recaptured before they can be executed for attempted assassination, and Volox is not going anywhere. If this Council finds him guilty of treason, it will do so only after a thorough investigation. For today, this Council is adjourned.”

The frightened elders scurried for the door and left the room quickly. Karaza glared at Garl and then Malid. He stormed out of the room. Only Malid, Volox, and Garl were left in the room.

“You have made a powerful enemy in Karaza,” Malid said to Garl. “You would be wise to leave Morada immediately.”

“Karaza has been my enemy for almost two decades,” replied Garl. “Back then I thought it best for the sake of Elvangar to seclude myself in a remote village. That was the worst mistake of my life. I am not about to repeat it.”

“You are going to defy the queen?” gasped the Head Elder.

“Defy the queen?” echoed Garl. “No, Malid, I am going to straighten the queen out. Those two young women that you were trying to execute are Alahara and Alastasia. Furthermore, they are currently on a quest to return King Avalar to power.”

“King Avalar?” frowned Malid. “He has been dead for years. Karaza even found his remains.”

“Then won’t Karaza be surprised when the king returns?” quipped Garl. “I must take Volox with me when I visit the queen. It is necessary for his protection. I suggest for your own betterment that you accompany us.”

“You can’t be serious?” balked Malid. “The palace is closed to all. Even if it was not, Queen Alycia would never see you.”

“You underestimate me, Malid,” smiled Garl. “Come along.”

Volox moved to Garl’s side. The old man extended his hand to usher Malid through the door. The Head Elder stood indecisively for a moment and then shook his head and left the room. Garl and Volox followed and then Garl took the lead. He marched across the plaza and approached the palace guards with Malid and Volox close behind. The guards tensed as the trio approached.

Garl did not say a word. As he got closer, he waved his hand as he stared at the guards surrounding the platform. The guards stepped aside and Garl led the two elders onto the platform. He reached out and pulled the rope causing a distant bell to ring in the higher reaches of the Royal Tree. The platform rose smoothly. When it stopped at the uppermost level, two guards drew their swords defensively.

Garl smiled and stared at the guards. Their minds instantly clouded with confusion, but that lasted only a second before they sheathed their weapons and stepped aside. Garl led the way along a corridor.

“Why do these guards obey you?” whispered Malid. “Does the queen know that you are coming?”

Garl ignored the question as they entered a large room. Over a dozen soldiers occupied the room, and Garl knew that he could not cast compulsion on all of them. He concentrated on the two closest to him. They nodded and pointed to a short corridor on the other side of the room.

“What is going on?” asked a distant soldier. “We were told no visitors.”

“Would you deny entrance to the Head Elder?” asked Garl as he fixed his gaze on the vocal soldier.

The soldier suddenly shook his head and lowered his gaze to the floor. None of the other soldiers decided to interfere. Garl led the way along the short corridor, and the group entered the throne room. Garl closed the doors and then waved his hand over them. The ancient wood of the doors suddenly sprouted new life. Vines grew out of the woodwork and crisscrossed both of the doors. In mere moments a massive binding of vines sealed the doors. They would not be easily opened.

“What are you doing?” asked Malid. “I don’t like the looks of this.”

“It is to ensure our privacy,” answered Garl. “Wait here while I awaken the queen.”

Garl crossed the throne room and entered the queen’s chambers. He found the queen fast asleep on her bed, still dressed in her royal garb. Garl frowned as he placed his hand on the temple of the queen. He nodded knowingly after a moment and cast a spell to remove the one cast by Karaza. The queen opened her eyes and stared up at Garl.

“You?” she scowled as she jumped out of bed. “How dare you show your face in my city? You have been banished for life.”

“Yes,” Garl sighed with annoyance. “I have heard that before. Come into the throne room. You have visitors.”

The queen opened her mouth to further verbally abuse the old man, but Garl had already turned and left her chambers. The queen stormed into the throne room and saw Malid and Volox waiting for her.

“What is going on?” the queen asked in confusion. “I have not called for a meeting of elders in my throne room. Why are you here, Malid? And why is Volox here?”

“So many questions,” Garl said softly, “but you are not asking the right ones. Why aren’t you asking who induced your coma-like sleep that I just awakened you from?”

The queen blinked with confusion. She turned and stared out over the railing and saw the setting sun. She looked back at Garl.

“How long have I slept?” she asked calmly.

“Only the better part of a day,” answered Garl, “but the spell that you were under would have kept you in that state indefinitely.”

“Why should I believe you Garl?” snapped the queen. “I believed in you once, and you tore my heart to shreds. You were relentless with your foolish statements of hope and joy. You can’t imagine how sickened I became just by the sound of your voice. How dare you return?”

“Earlier today you had a meeting with two young women,” Garl said, ignoring the queen’s tirade. “Did those girls try to kill you?”

“They attacked me magically,” snapped Queen Alycia. “No one attacks the queen and gets away with it.”

“Did they try to kill you?” Garl repeated stubbornly. “What spell did they use on you?”

Queen Alycia’s brow creased as she replayed the meeting in her mind.

“It hurt,” the queen replied softly. “My head felt like it would pulverize.”

“Did it feel like a Kieran compulsion spell?” asked Garl.

“Yes,” the queen gasped, “but no. I mean the symptoms were the same, but it was much too powerful for a compulsion spell. Besides, I do not believe the fairy tales they were trying to sell. There are no missing Kierans. I am a Kieran, and I would certainly know if any were missing.”

“Except for your own daughters,” Garl said softly.

“No,” shouted the queen. “My daughters are dead. Why are you doing this to me all over again? You are such a horrible, despicable old man. I should have had you hung years ago when you pestered me day and night about Avalar still being alive. How can anyone be as cruel as you?”

“I have never tried to hurt you,” Garl said, tears forming in his old eyes. “I agreed to the banishment so that I would no longer disturb you, but that was such a foolish mistake. I should have stayed and fought Karaza for you. Instead, I allowed him to rule you. He has caused you to be consumed with hatred. My absence hurt you more than my pestering.”

“What are you saying?” Queen Alycia asked as she noticed the tears in the old man’s eyes. “What does Karaza have to do with this?”

“I will get to that in a moment,” answered Garl, “but there are other matters that must be discussed first. Did you authorize a trial of the girls for attempting to assassinate you?”

“No,” the queen shook her head. “I never had the chance. They were dragged out of the room before I could recover from the pain. Why?”

The color drained out of Malid’s face. He stepped forward and bowed to the queen.

“The Council of Elders was advised that you demanded a speedy trial and execution of the two known as Mistake and MistyTrail,” declared Malid. “We have been in discussion all day over this matter,” he added as he glanced at Volox.

“Who authorized this?” asked the queen. “And why didn’t the Head Elder come to me to confirm such a weighty matter?”

“Karaza brought word to me,” answered Malid. “As for checking with you, the palace was closed immediately after the attack. Even I was not allowed admission.”

“None of this makes sense,” frowned Queen Alycia. “The girls did attack me, and indeed if they had not stopped, they might have killed me, but I do not believe that was their intent. We were all angry. I overreacted by hitting one, and the other magically struck back. They are insolent young women and deserve a severe punishment, but I will not stand for someone else putting words into my mouth. Karaza will get an earful from me on this matter.”

“Do you remember what they said as the guards entered the room?” asked Volox.

“The one called Mistake shouted for the other to stop,” shrugged the queen. “That is how I know they did not intend me harm. They are still barbaric. If you think that will make me excuse their conduct, Volox, you are mistaken.”

“Actually,” Volox said softly, “from the reports of the guards, Mistake pleaded for MistyTrail to release the spell because she was hurting their mother.”

“How dare you?” snapped the queen. “I will not have you people constantly dragging up my past family whenever it suits your needs. I forbid you to mention this subject any more. Do you understand me?”

Volox stepped closer to the queen and handed her the scroll. He immediately stepped back in case her anger took a more physical route. The queen huffed as she unrolled the scroll and read it. Her facial features grew taut as she read it until finally she threw the scroll on the floor.

“What rubbish is this you have given me?” she snarled. “If there is one more attempt to get me to believe those girls are related to me, I will have you all hung.”

“That scroll is one of the later Prophecies of Kieran,” declared Garl. “Why should reading the prophecies of your ancient ancestor get you so upset?”

“Because it's such an obvious attempt to trick me,” scowled the queen. “I will not stand for it.”

“Have you stopped to listen to yourself?” sighed Garl. “Everyone appears to be tricking you into making you believe that your lost daughters have returned. Even your ancient ancestor Kieran is in on the joke. Now tell me, what is the purpose of this charade? Even if the girls were falsely accepted as your daughters, they would not endanger your rule. So what does everyone hope to gain from this farce? Think clearly for a moment, Alycia. What if beyond all hope, your daughters actually did survive that tragic day somehow? You have convinced yourself through your grief that it is impossible, but what if it were true? Think about how you are treating these girls. They were almost executed today. Could you ever forgive yourself if you later found out that they miraculously survived the sinking of the ship?”

“It can’t be,” Queen Alycia shook her head vigorously. “It is not possible. Don’t make me go through this again, Garl. For Kaltara’s sake, have mercy on me.”

“Kaltara has blessed you in more ways than you know,” Garl said softly. “I taught those girls the Kieran compulsion spell. The Kieran magic is strong with both of them. I am glad that the guards intervened to save your life, because it could have killed you, and if that happened, those girls would be motherless once again.”

“Stop it!” cried Queen Alycia. “Just stop it!”

The queen fell to her knees and began crying. Her hands gripped her hair and pulled savagely. Garl knelt next to the queen and put his arm around her shoulders. He gently pried her fingers away from her hair.

“Why, Garl?” sobbed the queen. “Why are you doing this? Is this my punishment for banishing you? Is that it?”

“No, Alycia,” soothed the old man. “I have never sought to harm you, and I never will, but I will not let you harm Alahara or Alastasia either. They turned into beautiful women, Alycia. I can see Avalar’s features in their faces.”

The queen looked into Garl’s eyes for a long moment as if she could detect the truth of his statements. A vision of Mistake and MistyTrail as they appeared that morning flashed before her eyes. Slowly she nodded.

“There was a resemblance to Avalar,” she said softly. “Garl, please don’t do this to me. Don’t raise a false hope where none exists. Can’t you let them stay dead?”

“Isn’t that what I did when I moved to Etta?” asked Garl. “All these years I still believed that they lived, but I did not bother you with my feelings. Even when the foreign girls showed up in my village, I did not assume to know whom they were. Even when I discovered accidentally that they were of the Kieran line, I did not bring this information to you. But when the carozit pointed to a relative in Morada, I had to come and search the archives for the Prophecies of Kieran. I would not be here today if I was not absolutely sure that those girls are your daughters. I pledge my life on it.”

Queen Alycia stared at the old man as if she just recognized him for the first time.

“You once said that everything in life is uncertain,” stated the queen. “I remember that day very well. It was the day that I banished you from Morada. I asked you to pledge your life that my husband still lived when Karaza returned and said that he found Avalar’s remains. You said that there was no certainty in life and that you could never make such a pledge.”

“That is what I said,” agreed the old man. “I always felt that Avalar was alive, but there is always uncertainty.”

“But you make the pledge today for the identity of my daughters?” asked the queen.

“I do,” nodded Garl. “I can find no purchase for uncertainty in this matter. Alahara and Alastasia are alive and well.”

“Or were a while ago,” frowned Malid.

The queen’s head snapped to glare at the Head Elder. “What do you mean by that?” she demanded. “Speak.”

“The girls escaped prison,” Malid said haltingly. “The army is out searching for them now.”

Suddenly, the vine covered doors shook wildly. Malid and Volox looked at the doors and immediately moved to the furthest wall to be clear of any fighting. Garl rose and helped the queen to her feet. He led her to the throne and seated her.

“What is going on?” asked Queen Alycia.

“That will be the Great Deceiver,” frowned Garl. “Karaza has come to reclaim you as his prize.”

“Prize?” questioned the queen as the door rattled violently.

“He has been using you, Alycia,” sighed Garl. “He was always scrambling for more power. His control over you is his greatest accomplishment.”

“Surely, you are just reliving old conflicts,” the queen shook her head. “Karaza is not a violent man.”

“You are sadly mistaken, Alycia,” Garl said softly as the doors exploded in a shower of wood. “In a few moments, either I or Karaza will be dead. If it is me that dies, remember that I love you as a daughter. I always have.”

Garl moved swiftly away from the queen. Karaza stormed into the room with a dozen mages in tow. His dark eyes glowed as he glared at Garl.

“You have interfered one too many times,” spat Karaza.

“Do you really need an army to support you?” goaded the old man as he nodded at the additional mages who had entered the room.

“I will use what is available to me,” retorted Karaza. “You can use what is available to you.”

“Stop this,” shouted the queen. “I will not have violence in this palace.”

“He has brashly violated the law,” retorted Karaza. “Even now he has probably filled your mind with nonsense. Death is the only punishment fit for him.”

“I forbid it,” countered the queen. “Desist immediately.”

“You have already authorized it,” snapped Karaza. “Do not forget your own words. You told me to do whatever I needed to do to silence him.”

“I said that I forbid it,” the queen said adamantly. “Depart from my presence immediately. All of you get out!”

The mages that had accompanied Karaza were obviously confused. Their brows knitted as they stared at the queen and then Karaza. Garl saw the confusion and pressed on it.

“The Head of the Society of Mages should be the strongest in the land,” Garl said loudly. “Those who would help him defeat an old man would be guilty of a heinous crime unless it was sanctioned by the queen. Well it is not sanctioned. Obey your queen and depart.”

The mages fidgeted. One of them backed quietly out the door. When it was noticed that he was missing, the other mages fled.

“Now what is available to you is slightly less than what is available to me,” grinned Garl.

Karaza glanced at the two elders. Garl saw his glance and shook his head.

“I was not referring to them or anyone else,” Garl declared. “I was referring to the power within you. It always was inferior to mine.”

Karaza’s hand shot up and sent a force bolt streaming at the old man. The shields surrounding Garl dissipated its force, but the power of it still shook the old man. Garl glanced up at the tree limbs above the throne room. He stared at them as Karaza unleashed another force bolt.

Sweat began forming on Garl’s forehead. While his shields were holding, he had underestimated the power of his rival. Another blast rocked the old man, and Garl knew his time was limited. He concentrated on the Royal Tree and smiled as he saw it start to change.

Karaza saw Garl’s smile. He threw another force bolt and then looked up to see what the old man was looking at. He screamed when he saw the tendrils coming towards him. He tried to move, but it was too late. Long, thick vines wrapped around Karaza’s arms. Others descended and began to wrap around the mage’s body. In mere moments, Karaza’s body was completely encased in vines. At Garl’s command, the vines retreated upward, carrying the body with it. When it was all over, one could see the outline of the mage’s body where it had become a permanent bulge in the bark of the tree.

Queen Alycia swooned in her throne. Garl hurried over to her, his power exhausted. He knelt by the queen’s side and held her hand. The queen smiled down at the old man’s head.

“He was doing something to me, wasn’t he?” asked Queen Alycia.

“I suspect that he was, but I do not know what hold he had over you,” replied Garl. “How do you feel?”

“Like a great weight has been lifted from me,” smiled the queen. “I no longer feel despair or hatred. How could this have happened?” she asked. “How could I have not known that I was changed?”

“I believe that he struck in the moment of your greatest despair,” guessed Garl. “You certainly would have been vulnerable at that time. He was clever in taking things slowly. If you had changed too dramatically or suddenly, people would have suspected something. As it was, even I was fooled. Even when you banished me, I figured it was my fault. That is why I did not protest it. In a sense, he defeated both of us. No wonder he chose to openly confront me now. He must have thought me an old fool who would run and hide. That is what I did the last time.”

“Well you will not run this time, Garl,” smiled the queen. “I need you by my side. I want your help in finding my daughters.”

“They are gone,” frowned Garl.

“What do you mean gone?” the queen asked with alarm. “No. I want to see them. Why would they leave?”

“They have gone to bring Avalar home,” answered Garl as he held the queen’s hand between both of his.

“They know where his remains are?” asked the queen. “I asked Karaza for the location when he found them, and he said he could not remember the name of the place.”

“No, Alycia,” smiled Garl. “They have gone to bring your husband home, not his remains. Avalar is alive.”

“How do you know?” the queen asked skeptically. “Are you placing all of your faith in the scroll?”

“Do you remember the carozit that the girls held when they visited you?” asked Garl.

“Yes,” nodded the queen. “They seemed quite fond of it.”

“It is magical,” explained Garl. “When members of a family hold it together, it tells how far away the next relative is. At Etta, both girls held it and it showed that their relative was in Morada. That was you. When you touched it, the balls flew apart. Do you remember that?”

“I do,” nodded the queen. “We were all so startled that we dropped it.”

“The balls flew apart because Avalar is far away,” continued Garl.

“But how can we be sure that it is really Avalar?” asked Queen Alycia.

“MistyTrail actually met him when she was on the Island of Darkness,” answered Garl. “At that time she had no idea who the man was, but he said one word to her. That word was Avalar.”

“Praise Kaltara,” cried the queen as tears ran down her cheeks. “I will send our armies to this Island of Darkness. I will not let my daughters risk so much. I want them with me here in Elvangar.”

“No,” advised Garl. “Your daughters can succeed where armies would fail. You must put your trust in Kaltara. I am positive that he has been watching over the princesses for a long time now. The best thing any of us can do is to pray for their safe return.”

Chapter 29

King of the Dragons

The eastern bank of the Meliban River was mostly forested while the western bank of the river began a great expanse of arid wasteland stretching to Lake Jabul, Vandegar, and beyond. At the great bulge of the north fork of the river, a lone tribesman sat quietly before a campfire. His campsite was in a wide clearing on the eastern shore near a ford used by most of the travelers in the area. A large sack of food rested by his side.

Gorgi sat on a log carving a figure out of a block of wood. Occasionally he looked up to watch the distant plume of dust on the western horizon. As the plume grew larger, the Extala tribesman tried to calculate the number of riders that must be approaching. He extracted several spare knives from the smaller pack that he was wearing. Putting down his carving, Gorgi rose and tried to visualize the coming encounter.

He walked back to where the line of trees at the edge of the clearing began. Selecting the place where he would flee into the forest, he shoved one of the knives into the far of a tree. Nodding thoughtfully, he measured off half the distance to the log he had been sitting on. He stooped down and dug a small trench in the soil. He buried a knife and moved a thin layer of soil over the top of it. He memorized the spot so that he would be able to quickly grab the knife if he had to flee in a hurry. Returning to the log, he placed the third knife behind the log and then walked around it and sat back down. He picked up his carving and continued to whittle.

When next he looked towards the west, he whistled to himself. The dust plume had become a multitude of smaller plumes. Gorgi estimated between one and two dozen riders were heading for the ford. He swallowed hard as he realized his vulnerability. Most of the groups in the past week had been no more than a handful of riders at a time, although one group had consisted of ten riders.

Gorgi rose and turned the spit over the fire, rotating the roasting clova. He took a stick and stirred the embers before returning to his log. He looked to the west again and was finally able to count the riders. He could count twenty riders. He could also recognize their colors, although he had been fairly sure they that they were Jiadin since he had seen the first dust plume. All of the riders over the past week had been Jiadin.

Gorgi picked up his carving and continued his work as he waited for the riders to arrive. He did not have long to wait. The Jiadin came streaming across the ford holding their swords high and shouting old war chants. Gorgi looked up as if he was barely interested in the new arrivals. The Jiadin encircled the Extala tribesmen. Only then did Gorgi put down his carving and stand up.

“Welcome fellow Fakarans,” Gorgi said loudly. “I am Gorgi. Would you join me for a meal? I have more clova than I know what to do with.”

“We are not Fakarans,” spat one of the riders. “We are Jiadin, and if we want your clova, it is ours for the taking. What are you going to do about it?”

“I would prefer to invite you to join me in eating,” retorted Gorgi. “You gain little by fighting with me when I am offering you everything anyway. Besides, if we eat as friends, I can save your lives.”

“What do you mean?” scowled another rider. “How can a tribesman save our lives? Are there others hiding in the trees?”

“I am alone,” Gorgi shook his head. “What I meant is that I can share knowledge about the dangerous path you are on. The way ahead is not safe. Will you help me eat the clova?”

“Any path is safe for the Jiadin,” boasted one of the riders. “We go where we want to.”

“Be quiet, Jaker,” scowled the leader as he stared suspiciously at Gorgi.

The leader’s eyes rose and scanned the forest for any signs of other tribesmen. He saw nothing to disturb him.

“Dismount,” the leader said loudly. “We are going to accept Gorgi’s invitation. Stay alert.”

The Jiadin dismounted and tied their horses to the trees. The leader approached Gorgi and extended his sword hand in promise of a truce. Gorgi readily grasped the leader’s hand.

“I am Niger,” stated the leader. “Although we have never met, I have heard of you, Gorgi. You are known as an excellent tracker and swordsman. The Extala should be proud to have you.”

“The Extala were always proud to have me among their fold,” smiled Gorgi, “but the tribes are not what they used to be. Today everyone is considered a Fakaran. There is no more rivalry.”

“Tell that to the tens of thousands of Jiadin who still roam the wilds,” retorted Niger.

“The Jiadin are Fakarans,” insisted Gorgi. “You are our brothers, and you will be accepted into the fold.”

“And live in cities like women and children?” balked Niger. “That will never come to pass. Real Fakarans are warriors, not farmers.”

“I don’t know,” shrugged Gorgi as he walked to the fire and rotated the clova. “I like a good fight as much as any man, but I also want the chance to have a wife and children. Besides, there is going to plenty of fighting to come soon enough.”

All of the Jiadin had gathered around the fire. They were all listening intently to the conversation.

“Fighting?” Jaker asked suspiciously. “What fighting? Are the tribes coming after the Jiadin again?”

“The tribes have been trying to round up the Jiadin,” confessed Gorgi, “but to welcome them as brothers, not to exterminate them. Thousands have already joined with us, but that is not what I was talking about.”

“What were you talking about?” asked Niger.

“The Dragon Prophecy,” Gorgi sighed. “Haven’t you heard about it?”

“There are dragons…” began one of the Jiadin.

“Shut up,” shouted Niger. “I am talking to Gorgi,” he said more calmly. “Why don’t you men begin eating? And make sure that you save some for me.”

The men started carving the clova, but there attention was still on the conversation.

“What is this prophecy that you talk about?” asked Niger.

“It was foretold that one day Fakara would be engulfed with dragons,” stated Gorgi. “The dragons would terrorize the riders of the plains and the hikers of the mountains. The dragons would multiply and continue to feast upon man and horse alike until the new king arrives.”

“King?” echoed Niger. “We don’t need no king.”

“Ah,” smiled Gorgi, “but we do because that is the only way that the dragons will stop eating us. You do not have to worry about bowing down to any king, though. That king just might be you.”

“Me?” laughed Niger. “Now that is a prophecy that I like. I would make a good king.”

“You might at that,” smiled Gorgi. “All you have to do is defeat the King of the Dragons in battle. Whoever does that will be King of Fakara.”

“One man against a dragon?” balked Niger. “What fool would attempt that?”

“That is why I am here,” retorted Gorgi. “I plan to fight the King of the Dragons.”

Niger stared at Gorgi with skepticism. He stepped back to take the measure of a warrior who would willingly pit himself against a dragon. He shook his head.

“You may be good, Gorgi,” stated Niger, “but no man is that good. You would be better off riding with us. You have shown that you have courage.”

“Someone must defeat the dragons,” replied Gorgi. “For when the dragons are gone, the real battle begins.”

“What real battle?” asked Niger. “What are you talking about?”

“The invasion that is coming,” answered Gorgi. “You really need to learn more about these prophecies. A massive army is coming from across the seas. Over a million men will seek to annihilate all life, not just in Fakara, but in Khadora and Omunga as well.”

“Nonsense,” blustered Niger. “These are tales that you spinning. Nowhere in the world is there such an army.”

“You call them tales,” Gorgi shook his head, “but the prophecies are real. You may not believe in dragons, but I can tell you right now that the Bone Mountains and the Giaming Mountains are full of them. The Fakarans are sending all their women and children to the eastern coast to safeguard them.”

“There are dragons to the east?” Niger asked anxiously.

“Lots of them,” nodded Gorgi. “I am on my way to the Bone Mountains to find the King of Dragons and battle him. Oh, why bother. You can’t possibly understand what I am trying to tell you. You probably have never seen a dragon.”

“Oh we have seen them,” frowned Niger. “They infest the Fortung Mountains in the west. That is why we were heading east. Is there no place safe any more?”

“According to the prophecies,” replied Gorgi, “there is only one place that the dragons will not go, that is until the King of Fakara is crowned.”

“Where is that?” asked Niger.

“Vandegar,” answered Gorgi. “It is said that the dragons will avoid Vandegar. It is forbidden for them to approach it. But on the day when the King of Dragons is defeated, the new King of Fakara will ride the King of Dragons, and he will fly to Vandegar to gather all Fakarans to prepare for battle against the evil horde from across the sea. That is when the real fighting will begin.”

“Vandegar?” frowned Niger. “That place is a dust bowl. There is nothing to eat there.”

“I heard that the Fakarans are sending wagonloads of food there to feed the people,” shrugged Gorgi.

“Why would they do that?” questioned the leader. “There are likely to only be Jiadin there.”

“As I said before,” answered Gorgi, “the Fakarans want the Jiadin to join with them for this great war that is coming. They must feel that they have to keep you alive until then. At least that is what I think.”

“Is this true?” asked Niger. “Have you seen any of these food caravans?”

“I saw one when I left the new city of Meliban,” nodded Gorgi. “Of course, many Jiadin are electing to just join with the Fakarans now. You could do that as well. I know that you and your men would be welcomed.”

“We are fighters,” Niger shook his head. “We have no use for cities.”

“Then Vandegar is your only hope,” replied Gorgi, “unless you each plan to fight the King of Dragons alone.”

Niger looked up and stared at the distant peaks of the mountains to the east. He sighed and shook his head.

“I think we will continue east for a while to see if what you say is true,” declared Niger.

“Understandable,” nodded Gorgi. “Many men must learn things the hard way. Let me ask you a question, Niger. If you find dragons, and I am sure that you will, will you return to Vandegar or fight them.”

“Fighting dragons is not a fair fight,” Niger shook his head. “If you have told the truth, we will turn towards Vandegar and sample the Fakaran food, but we are not going to live in any city.”

“And if the day comes when the King of Fakara flies to Vandegar,” probed Gorgi, “will you join with him to defeat the evil hordes?”

“I find your prophecy hard to believe,” chuckled Niger. “I cannot imagine an army so large, but the Jiadin were born to fight. If your king flies to Vandegar on a dragon, then I will believe your tall tales.”

“Fair enough,” smiled Gorgi. “I have a large sack of food near my log. I am not going to need it where I am going. You are welcome to take it with you to Vandegar.”

“You are leaving now?” asked Niger as Gorgi started walking to his horse.

“I am,” nodded Gorgi. “It is time for me to try my hand at slaying a dragon. Good luck to you and your men, no matter what path you take.”

The Jiadin watched the tribesman leave. They quickly returned to devouring the clova.

“Do you believe his tales?” asked Jaker. “I think it is a bunch of nonsense.”

“It might be,” mused Niger, “but I wonder what the point of it would be. I do know that Brakas was working for someone overseas. So were those strange magicians that hung around Grulak. And we did see dragons in the Fortung Mountains. There is just enough truth to his tales to cause me to wonder. That is why we are continuing to the east. I want to see for myself if dragons exist in those mountains. Perhaps it is just a ploy to keep the Jiadin from seeing what the Fakarans are up to.”

Suddenly, one of the Jiadin pointed skyward and shouted. Everyone looked up and saw the dragon circling overhead. As they scrambled for their horses the dragon swooped down and hovered over the trees just to the east of the campsite. It belched short bursts of fire into the air and roared loudly.

The Jiadin did not dare enter the forest or they would have to pass directly under the dragon. They raced across the ford and galloped to the west. The dragon swooped down on the fleeing Jiadin shooting long tongues of flame that heated the backs of the riders.

The dragon circled overhead and occasionally swooped down, its huge talons just barely missing a rider on each attack. After a while, the dragon gave up the attack and flew eastward. The Jiadin raced onward for another five minutes before finally coming to a halt.

“I guess that answers the question about the eastern mountains,” sighed Niger. “That fool Gorgi is going to die. No man can fight those beasts.”

“I’ll take my chances at Vandegar,” interjected Jaker. “Even if there is no food, that is better than being eaten alive.”

Niger nodded and looked up to scan the sky. “To Vandegar, men. Let’s hope Gorgi was right about the food.”

* * *

Mistake and MistyTrail sat near Tamar as he guided the ancient elven scout ship across the calm waters.

“Have you thought any on how we are going to get back into the temple?” asked Mistake.

“I have been thinking about it constantly,” nodded MistyTrail. “Haven’t you noticed me shivering?”

“Me, too,” admitted Mistake.

“You did it once,” interjected Tamar. “Why not do it the same way?”

“The last time was an accident,” frowned Mistake. “We really were lucky to escape with our lives.”

“It wasn’t luck,” MistyTrail shook her head. “I know that Kaltara was watching over us. I hope he does so this time, too.”

“We should have brought Tamar’s men with us,” frowned Mistake. “At least we would have a better chance.”

“I don’t think so,” MistyTrail disagreed. “I think what helped us last time was the small number of people in our party.”

“There is wisdom to that, MistyTrail,” smiled Tamar. “Often a small group can succeed where larger ones fail. Still, I worry about just the three of us. Neither of you are capable of wielding a two-handed sword with any precision. I wish we had worked harder on that before the lessons stopped.”

“I could ask Emperor Marak for help,” suggested Mistake. “I am sure that he would help us.”

“I am sure that he would as well,” nodded MistyTrail, “but I fear that he would offer to come with us.”

“What is wrong with that?” asked Tamar.

“He is the Torak,” answered MistyTrail. “The world cannot afford to lose him on the Island of Darkness. Besides, he does not have enough time to do everything that must be done to prepare for the invasion. I think we should tell him what we are doing, but not ask him for help.”

“You are right,” agreed Mistake. “How are we going to get the king out of the cell? Should we try the same trick we tried the last time?”

“What did you try the last time?” asked Tamar.

“We entered the temple through a second-story balcony,” explained Mistake. “After we got to the ground level, Eltor acted like a Motangan guard and made believe that MistyTrail and I were his prisoners. We marched through a long corridor of cells that was loaded with krul guards, those big ape creatures that I told you about.”

“And the kruls believed the act?” asked Tamar.

“They were skeptical,” replied Mistake, “but we also did not try to remove a prisoner. That might make a difference. It is quite different to be adding new prisoners versus taking one out. The guards are meant to make sure that no prisoners leave.”

“That is an important difference,” nodded Tamar. “It is quite similar to how we got you two out of prison. It is always easier to bring someone in.”

“So it is likely that we will have to fight our way out of there?” asked MistyTrail.

“I think we should try to avoid it,” replied Tamar, “but we had best plan to be prepared for it. I should have brought one more man with me. I think four would be the perfect number. You two can help Avalar while I and another warrior protect you. Maybe we should return to Elvangar and get someone to go with us?”

“I will not take the chance of returning to Elvangar,” Mistake stated adamantly. “Besides, we have a lot of human friends. I am sure one of them will come with us.”

“Why would a human risk his live to save an elf,” questioned Tamar, “especially when the elves refuse to aid the humans in the coming battle?”

“Because they are our friends,” answered Mistake.

“Friends can be counted on to help you get out of trouble,” frowned Tamar, “but that is not what you will be asking them to do. You will be asking them to join with us in getting into trouble. Let’s be honest about this. You will be asking some human to give up his life for an elf. There is an extremely good chance that anyone who comes with us will die before this is over. I say we go back and get one of my men. They will risk their lives for the King of the Elves.”

“I am not going back,” declared Mistake. “We will go to the Island of Darkness alone.”

“I know someone who will come with us,” MistyTrail said softly.

“You cannot ask a human to give up his life to save an elf,” Tamar shook his head, “even if that elf is the king.”

“I would not ask HawkShadow to give up his life for an elf,” replied MistyTrail. “I doubt that I could convince him to come if that were the case.”

“If that were the case?” echoed Mistake. “Tell me that you are not going to lie to HawkShadow to get him to come.”

“I would never lie to HawkShadow,” MistyTrail replied, her voice quaking slightly. “He would not come to save an elf, but he would volunteer to come if it was to save my father.”

Tears came to MistyTrail’s eyes as she thought about HawkShadow.

“Who is this HawkShadow?” Tamar asked softly.

“He is a Sakovan assassin,” answered Mistake. “I have worked with him in the past. You could ask for no better person at your back. MistyTrail is right. HawkShadow would come to help MistyTrail save her father. They were very close when they worked together.”

“I look forward to meeting any human that my princesses look up to,” smiled Tamar. “If he is willing to risk his life to save MistyTrail’s father, he surely must be part elf. How can we contact him?”

“I will contact him,” MistyTrail offered as she wiped her eyes and rose.

MistyTrail walked to the bow of the ship and wove an air tunnel to StarCity. Mistake watched her for a moment and then wove her own air tunnel to Angragar. Tamar watched curiously as Mistake spoke to someone and asked to speak to Rejji.

“Mistake,” Rejji said happily, “are you alright?”

“I am fine,” answered Mistake. “MistyTrail and I are in a ship heading towards Angragar. We have an elven friend with us. I wanted you to know so that the Qubari do not get upset and attack us.”

“The Qubari would never attack the elves,” Rejji replied. “Still, I will pass the word that you are coming. Was there a problem in Elvangar?”

“Somewhat of a problem,” replied Mistake. “I will tell you all about it when we arrive. We have to return to the Island of Darkness. Can you procure the chart that Emperor Marak had made of the island? I think a copy of it would be helpful to us.”

“You want to return to the Island of Darkness?” balked Rejji. “I do not think that is a wise idea. What could possibly be so important to you to make you choose such a dangerous path?”

“It is a long story,” sighed Mistake.

“Tell him,” urged Tamar. “If you are asking him for help, he has a right to know the truth.”

Mistake nodded to Tamar. “We are going to rescue a man from the temple there,” Mistake told Rejji. “The man is our father. He is also the King of the Elves.”

“King of the Elves?” echoed Rejji. “But that means…”

“I know what it means,” sighed Mistake. “It is enough of a shock to MistyTrail and me that we even have a father. I do not want to think further about the implications.”

“I will round up men to go with you,” Rejji declared.

Tamar’s eyebrows rose. He tapped Mistake on the shoulder and leaned close to her ear.

“Why?” he whispered. “Because the man is your father, or because he is the King of the Elves? Ask him.”

Mistake frowned at Tamar and shook her head. Tamar nodded his head vigorously.

“Are you still there?” Rejji asked worriedly.

“Yes,” answered Mistake. “I thank you for your offer, but we don’t want men to go with us. We want to keep the party small. Just get us the chart.”

“You will have the chart and anything else you need,” promised Rejji. “I will talk to you when you get here about how many men you will need.”

“Rejji!” protested Mistake. “I know you heard me. Why are you being so insistent?”

“Two reasons,” Rejji replied. “I would do anything to see you reunited with your father, and I would do anything to rescue the King of the Elves. We need their help, Mistake. I am sure that you know that.”

“We will talk when we arrive, Rejji,” replied Mistake. “Please do not make any plans regarding my trip to the Island of Darkness before I get there. Don’t make me sorry that I told you what we were up to. Promise me.”

“I will make no definite plans before I talk to you,” Rejji promised after a short pause, “but I must tell Emperor Marak. I will need to get a copy of the chart from him.”

“Alright,” agreed Mistake.

Mistake dropped the air tunnel as MistyTrail was returning from the bow.

“Did you reach him?” asked Mistake.

“I did,” nodded MistyTrail. “He promised that he would come. He has to speak to Lyra first. He cannot just walk off and leave the Sakova undefended.”

“Do you think she will stop him from coming?” asked Mistake.

“No,” MistyTrail shook her head. “Nothing stops HawkShadow when he has made his mind up. I am sure that Lyra knows that.”

“I think that I have a lot to learn about your humans friends,” commented Tamar. “Their responses amaze me. Then again, I must have an awful lot to learn about my princesses. You must both be remarkable women to inspire such loyalty to you.”

MistyTrail and Mistake looked at each other and grinned.

Chapter 30

Skimmers

The ancient elven scout ship entered the harbor of Angragar. Tamar’s eyes opened wide as he viewed the city of legends. The harbor was full of ships and the docks were alive with hundreds of colorfully clad humans. As he maneuvered around the anchored ships, Tamar saw some ancient elven trading vessels. He could not take his eyes off the ships that had not been seen in centuries.

“Look out!” shouted Mistake.

Tamar turned just in time to see the ship in front of him. He turned the scout ship sharply and the sails fluttered in the wind. He exhaled slowly.

“Sorry,” the embarrassed elf said. “I should keep my mind on sailing. MistyTrail, grab the line at the bow. Throw it to someone on the docks when we get close enough. Mistake, do the same with the stern line. I promise to keep my eyes on where we are going.”

The princesses sprang into action while Tamar corrected the ship’s course and headed for an empty dock. The ship floated perfectly alongside the dock, and the girls threw the lines to men standing on the dock. Rejji and Bakhai marched out onto the dock and grinned at the girls.

“Welcome back,” shouted Rejji as he waved to the girls.

The girls jumped off the ship and Tamar followed.

“This is Tamar of Elvangar,” introduced Mistake. “Tamar, this is Rejji and Bakhai.”

“Welcome to Angragar,” smiled Rejji. “Let’s go to the palace. There are some people there that I would like you to meet.”

Tamar smiled back at Rejji and nodded. The small group made their way to the center of the city. Tamar’s eyes constantly moved, taking in every sight and memorizing it. What amazed him the most was the architecture of the buildings. While they were not the same as the buildings in Morada, it was easy to see the influence of ancient elven style in many of the buildings. He wondered if this is what Alamanda would look like if it still existed.

Rejji led the way into the palace. He ushered them into a huge room that had a large table and chairs in it. The room was also full of people standing around in groups talking quietly. The room fell silent as the small group entered it, and everyone turned to face the newcomers. Rejji took Tamar around the room introducing him to everyone.

The humans were all smiling, and Tamar could feel a sense of excitement in the air. He thought it odd that everyone was fawning over him when he was just a mere soldier, and the real honored guests should be Mistake and MistyTrail, the princesses of the elves. He turned and saw that people who already had been introduced were gathering around the girls. He smiled as he understood that the humans were being polite to a friend of the girls. It was obvious that the girls were already highly honored and cared for. He had not expected humans to act in such a manner.

“And this is Emperor Marak of Khadora,” Rejji was saying. “He is the Torak.”

“I have heard much about you, Emperor Marak,” nodded Tamar.

“And I so little about you, Tamar,” smiled the Torak, “and please, call me Marak. I hope we have some time together to talk. I would like to know more about your people.”

“And Lyra, the Star of Sakova,” continued Rejji.

“I have also heard of you,” smiled Tamar. “I did not envision you as one so young. You are quite beautiful.”

“Why, thank you,” blushed Lyra. “I would love to join you when you speak with Marak. I, too, have a burning curiosity to learn about our ancient allies.”

“This is HawkShadow,” introduced Rejji. “I believe he will be going with you to the Island of Darkness.”

Tamar’s eyes measured the Sakovan. He was impressed with what he saw.

“Tayo, Tamar,” greeted HawkShadow as the Sakovan also measured the worth of the elf.

“Tayo, HawkShadow,” Tamar grinned at being met with an elven greeting. “I am happy with MistyTrail’s choice. We shall do well together.”

“That we shall,” HawkShadow nodded confidently.

Rejji continued with the introductions, and Tamar struggled to remember all of the names. When everyone had been introduced, they gathered around the table. In the center of the table were two large charts. One depicted the mainland and the Island of Darkness in relation to it. The other was a detailed chart of the coastline of the Island of Darkness. Captain Mynor moved to the center of the table and picked up an arrow to use as a pointer.

“Angragar is here,” the captain pointed. “The temple on the Island of Darkness is right here. It will be dangerous for you to sail a direct course for it.”

“Why?” asked Tamar.

“It is one of their busiest patrol sectors,” answered Captain Mynor. “It is also one of their busiest harbors. I certainly don’t want to tell you how to go about your mission, Tamar, but I am willing to share what knowledge I have. I have spent a great deal of time mapping the coast of Motanga and determining the placement of their patrols.”

“No, please continue,” urged Tamar. “I have never seen the Island of Darkness. Whatever information you can share will be most welcome.”

“Not far from the city,” nodded Captain Mynor, “is a lonely stretch of jungle. The patrols from both directions stop short of covering it. It is right here,” he pointed. “It would require you to go through some dense jungle, but you should be able to get close to the city without being seen. Also, if you can get your ship right up to the beach, it will be protected from view of the patrols. There is a small natural cove in that area.”

“That sounds rather promising,” nodded Tamar.

“We are not going to have a lot of people trying to go with us on this mission, are we?” Mistake asked as she scanned the faces in the room.

The Torak smiled and replied, “You can have as many people with you as you want. You can also have none if that is your desire. We are all gathered here to support you, but not to interfere with what you want to do.”

“Is that true?” Tamar asked skeptically. “Would you really send an army if Mistake wanted you to?”

“We would,” nodded the Torak. “Personally, I think an army would be shredded before they reached the temple, but I would commit the troops if asked. Although I personally would love to see Mistake and MistyTrail reunited with their father, this is also the King of the Elves that we are talking about. I have made no secret of my desire to form an alliance with the elves to defeat Vand. I fear that we may fall before his armies without your help. So, yes, I would sacrifice an army for this mission.”

“Are things really that dire?” asked Tamar.

“Vand has an army of one million men,” answered Lyra. “He has kruls to squander, and he has already sent hellsouls to attack us from within. We don’t know what other tricks he might be planning. The situation is dire. Will the elves help?”

“I am a mere officer,” replied Tamar. “In fact, I am probably now a criminal.”

“A criminal?” asked Rejji. “What did you do?”

“He helped us escape from prison,” replied MistyTrail. “Now is not the time to discuss it. Tamar is no more a criminal than I am, but the reality is that the elves will not be aiding in the fight against Vand.”

“Does that change your mind, Marak?” asked Tamar.

“Not a bit,” the Torak answered without hesitation. “There are things in life that are inherently right or inherently wrong. Freeing the King of the Elves is the right thing to do, regardless of whether he aids us or not.”

Tamar stood silently for a moment gazing at the people in the room. He ended with his eyes studying Marak.

“I believe you,” Tamar declared, “but the point is not open to debate. We have decided that the mission is best accomplished with a small group. It will be just the four of us.”

“I figured as much,” grinned the Torak. “I took the liberty of having five Motangan uniforms made up. The three for MistyTrail, Mistake, and HawkShadow have already been tailored. We will need to have yours properly tailored before you leave.”

“What is the fifth one for?” Tamar asked with suspicion.

“For the king,” replied the Torak. “You may not need it, but it won’t hurt to have it just in case.”

Tamar nodded appreciatively. “You do plan well, Marak,” he grinned. “I think I should have the uniform tailored immediately. I would like to leave for the Island of Darkness as the earliest opportunity.”

“I will take you right now,” offered Bakhai. “Follow me.”

Bakhai led the elven officer out of the room. As soon as he was gone, everyone started talking again. Marak, Lyra and Rejji approached Mistake and MistyTrail.

‘What kind of trouble did you get into in Elvangar?” asked Lyra.

“We were accused of trying to assassinate the queen,” replied MistyTrail, “but we really didn’t mean to hurt her. She is our mother.”

“Your real mother?” asked Rejji.

“Yes,” nodded MistyTrail. “She wasn’t very nice to us. In fact, she doesn’t believe that we are related.”

“I hope our father is nicer,” added Mistake.

“You can’t choose your parents, Mistake,” smiled Marak. “Just remember that you have many friends here. If you ever need a home, you have three countries to choose from. Not many people can say that.”

Mistake grinned and hugged Marak. HawkShadow called to MistyTrail and the girls moved across the room to talk to the Sakovan assassin.

“How is your Jiadin gathering going, Rejji?” asked Marak.

“Fairly well,” answered the Astor. “Twenty thousand have joined with us so far, but that still leaves a great number of them on the loose. Myka is doing a great job and loving it, too. I don’t think she has had this much fun in a long time. She is racing around all over the country to make the Jiadin think that there are dozens of dragons. Her flying skills are fantastic. I have watched a few of her raids. I often thought that she would actually gore some of the Jiadin, but she has not.”

“She must be an incredible creature,” Marak said admiringly. “Can I meet her?”

Rejji hesitated for a long time before answering, “I will ask her permission first, but I think she will agree to it. She knows a great deal about what we are trying to accomplish. I don’t think she likes the idea of Vand’s people coming here. When I told her about that old prophecy that Yltar found, she actually became enthusiastic about helping.”

“The Dragon Prophecy?” asked Marak. “I thought Yltar said its authenticity was in doubt?”

“That was what I was led to believe,” shrugged Rejji, “but Myka disagrees. She says the prophecy is real, but that the humans who recorded it just didn’t understand it properly when they recorded it. It matters little at this point. Myka is fulfilling the prophecy in any event. If it works, the Jiadin will be ready to fight on our side.”

“Excellent,” smiled Marak. “I plan to stay for a few days in Angragar anyway. See what she says about meeting with me.”

Rejji nodded and moved on to other guests. Marak took Lyra’s hand and led her out of the room. Gunta and Halman did not even try to follow the Torak. They stayed and mingled with the others.

The Torak and the Star exited the palace and walked to one of the many parks that dotted the ancient city. They settled down on the grass and started talking.

“Do you think it is wise to let those two girls go back to the Island of Darkness?” asked Marak.

“They are not exactly little girls,” smiled Lyra. “I bet they are older than me, maybe even older than you.”

“I am not much older than you,” grinned Marak. “Can’t be more than a year or two.”

“I do worry about them going,” admitted Lyra, “but it is not our decision. It is their father that is imprisoned.”

“But they are the elven princesses,” retorted Marak. “The king and the two princesses could die on that island, and you heard what they said about their mother.”

“What you really mean is that it would lessen the chance of the elves joining in our struggle,” frowned Lyra.

“It would indeed do that,” agreed Marak, “but that is truly not what I was thinking. I was thinking about the elven people. Mistake and MistyTrail are kind of wild right now, but I know they would do what is best for their people if they were thrust into a leadership position. Some good people must survive this coming conflict, Lyra, and I am not too sure that we will be among those who survive.”

“Have you lost faith in Kaltara?” asked the Star.

“Certainly not,” Marak shook his head, “but I also know that the result of these coming battles does not rest on Kaltara. He made that clear to me at Changragar. Vand is human and it is for humans to destroy him. That’s you and me.”

“Among others,” nodded Lyra.

“Many others,” agreed the Torak, “but you know what I mean.”

“Yes, I do, Marak,” replied Lyra. “You are worried about what is to come. We all are. Our lives have been shaped by this time we live in, and death will have many chances to claim us in the near future. What if by some miracle we do defeat Vand? What do you see as our future?”

“Do you mean us?” asked Marak.

“No,” laughed Lyra. “Oh, I am willing to discuss that at some point, but I meant everyone, the world.”

“A valid question,” mused Marak. “I have not given that any thought at all. We will have three great nations that are finally united after centuries of petty rivalries. I suppose the future could be bright indeed. Of course there would need to be a ruler who is capable of keeping it all together.”

“You?” asked Lyra.

“No,” Marak shook his head. “I am not interested in ruling people. I only got involved in all of this because I could not stand the inequities that existed. They are practically gone now. After this war, my skills will no longer be needed.”

“That’s funny,” replied Lyra.

“Why is that funny?” frowned Marak.

“Because I feel the same way, but I suspected that you didn’t,” answered Lyra. “You always seem to be the perfect ruler. You always have an answer to any question asked, a solution to every problem. I never wanted to be the Star of Sakova. In fact, I fought it in the beginning, until I discovered that you can’t fight Kaltara and win.”

“We are so much alike,” grinned Marak.

“Don’t say that while MistyTrail is still around,” laughed Lyra. “She will gloat.”

“I bet she would,” laughed Marak. “She always said we would make a nice couple.”

Marak sighed and stared up at the sky in silence for a while. Lyra reached over and took his hand, and Marak realized that he had not had a private relaxing moment in years. He tried very much to put all of his worries out of his mind, but he just could not. He stared at the clouds and saw meanings in each of their shapes. Suddenly, he sat up.

“I can’t just relax,” Marak declared. “How about a walk up the river. I will show you the new boats we are building.”

“Let’s go,” Lyra readily agreed as she hopped up.

The Torak and the Star strolled through town and then along the bank of the river to an area that was only known to the Qubari and a few select others. The Qubari warriors on guard smiled to the Torak and let him and Lyra pass through.

“Why the guards?” asked Lyra.

“This is the most secret thing we are hiding from Vand,” explained Marak. “I am having the boats made here because the Qubari tell no secrets to any outsiders. They are also excellent woodworkers.”

They passed through a narrow stretch of jungle and emerged in front of a large lake. Scores of frameworks dotted the shores of the lake. There were more Qubari guards, and they looked to see who had entered the area. They waved, as did some of the workers. Marak led Lyra over to one of the finished boats and pointed to it proudly.

“It is called a skimmer,” Marak said. “It is Captain Mynor’s design.”

Lyra looked at the tiny craft and shook her head. It appeared much like a canoe, but it had a giant crossbow on each end and a mast in the center.

“What do they do?” asked Lyra.

“These are the boats that are going to attack Vand’s navy,” explained Marak. “They are two man crafts, although they can easily hold four men if necessary. That was important in case one of them is sunk, another can pick up the survivors.”

“And the crossbows?” asked the Star of Sakova.

“We hope they will be strong enough to pierce the hulls of Vand’s ships,” answered Marak. “They haven’t been tested yet.”

“Don’t you think that is rather important?” frowned Lyra.

“Extremely important,” nodded Marak. “If the crossbows don’t work, the whole idea is unsound. We have tested the stability and speed though. They are amazing little boats. They had a small keel for stability and yet they are still light enough to carry up on the beach if needed. They have extendable rudder boards that enable them to turn quicker than any boat I have seen. In short, they are very maneuverable.”

“But they can only be used if we know when Vand is going to attack,” Lyra pointed out.

“Quite true,” frowned Marak. “Fisher’s spy on the island has been unable to find that out. I don’t mean he can’t find out the hour of the attack, he doesn’t even have an idea of the month. That is a problem for us.”

“I believe that you mentioned the last time we were in Angragar that you wanted some of these positioned in the Sakova,” stated Lyra. “Is that still true?”

“Very much so,” nodded the Torak. “We can carry dozens of these on one of my larger ships. I want to build them first and then move them. Your only seaports are cities that used to be Omungan. I am fearful of spies.”

“Understandable,” nodded Lyra, “but this location gives me an idea. Can the boats be rowed?”

“Certainly,” replied Marak. “What are you thinking?”

“They could be kept in the Sakova itself,” answered Lyra. “The Tanzaba River and the Elkeltar River have headwaters that are very close to each other, yet the two rivers come out far apart. If we stored the crafts in the Sakova near those headwaters, we could use either river to get them to the sea.”

“So they would be hidden from prying eyes and could exit whichever place the Motangans were not,” nodded Marak. “I like it. I could have my ships deliver them at night, and you could have trusted people cart them away by wagons.”

“That is team work,” grinned Lyra. “You should test the crossbows before we go through all of this trouble, though.”

“I will see to it,” promised the Torak. “How are the Omungans integrating into the Sakova?”

“Much better than I expected,” replied the Star of Sakova. “I think those that could have caused us the most trouble were the generals of the large armies. When we saved General Didyk’s life from the hellsoul, his attitude changed remarkably.”

“Do you think he is sincere?” asked the Torak.

“Oh, yes,” nodded Lyra. “I am sure of it.”

“You tested him, didn’t you?” grinned Marak.

“More than a few times,” Lyra grinned back. “He is really helping out with the planning for the defense of the Sakova. So are General Kapla and General Romero. In fact, all of the generals are being helpful. They are trying to outdo each other, but it is a good spirited competition.”

“Let’s head back,” suggest Marak. “I don’t want to be noticed missing.”

They headed back along the trail through the jungle and along the river. When they returned to the palace, Tamar was showing off his Motangan uniform.

“It fits you well,” complimented Lyra.

“I had the king’s made up the same as mine,” replied Tamar. “From MistyTrail’s description, it should be pretty close.”

“When are you leaving?” asked Marak.

“Before dawn,” answered Tamar. “If my calculations are correct, we should reach that small cove just after dark on the day of arrival.”

“That is wise,” commented Captain Mynor. “You are leaving yourself good leeway in case of poor winds or adverse currents. I have done my best to mark the currents on the charts, but those are only indications of what we observed. They could change.”

“The elven scout ship will be driven more by the winds than the currents,” replied Tamar. “Still, I will take them into account.”

“Is there anything else we can do for you?” asked Marak. “Anything at all?”

“Pray for our safe return,” answered MistyTrail.

“That goes without saying,” smiled Lyra. “Perhaps we should all turn in for the night. I would like to be up to bid farewell to these courageous warriors.”

The party broke up and everyone went to the guesthouses that Rejji had assigned to them. Marak slept fitfully as he dreamed about the coming battles and Lyra’s question of what the world might look like when it was all over. Finally, he gave up on sleeping and crawled out of bed. He left his guesthouse and walked to the temple. The two Qubari guards outside the temple smiled and nodded to him as he entered the building. Marak thought there was a hint of hidden message in their demeanor, but he brushed it off.

He made his way through the dark corridors of the temple, not bothering with a torch. He knew his way fairly well as the same layout was used for Changragar. He reached the prayer chamber and stepped inside. The room was completely black. He moved cautiously towards where he felt the center was and dropped to his knees. His heart felt like it would explode when he heard the voice.

“I am sure glad that you didn’t trip over me,” Lyra said softly.

Marak breathed a sigh of relief as he recognized Lyra’s voice.

“You could give a young man a heart attack that way,” Marak replied. “How did you know it was me? I can’t even see you in here.”

“I can’t see you either,” chuckled Lyra. “Who else would be coming here at this time of night? I am willing to bet that you couldn’t sleep because you were replaying the conversation that we had earlier. Am I right?”

Marak didn’t answer for a long time. He knelt there in the darkness and probed his inner feelings. When he did speak, it startled Lyra.

“I love you,” Emperor Marak declared.

“I know,” smiled Lyra. “I love you, too.”

Chapter 31

Island of Darkness

The seas were calm and the half moon gave sufficient light to see the coastline. HawkShadow and Tamar were wearing the uniforms of Motangan soldiers. Mistake and MistyTrail wore their animal skins. HawkShadow grabbed a bow and a quiver of arrows from the deck of the elven scout ship. He moved forward and scanned the shoreline as Tamar guided the ancient ship into the small cove. The sails luffed as the ship ran gently onto the narrow beach. HawkShadow leaped out of the boat and pulled it further onto the beach.

MistyTrail and Mistake jumped to the beach while Tamar gathered up the bows and quivers and carried them to the beach. He handed them to Mistake and turned to help HawkShadow drag the ship fully onto the beach. Mistake searched the edge of the jungle for any signs of a trail. She found a narrow trail and stood at its entrance waiting for the others. HawkShadow picked up the bows and quivers and distributed them to the others. He kept two for himself.

“I know the plan is to leave the bows in the jungle to use for our retreat,” Tamar whispered to HawkShadow, “but why did you bring two for yourself?”

“I didn’t,” replied HawkShadow. “I figured that the king would know how to use a bow. If he is in any decent condition when we escape, his help might be needed. If he is not well, all I have wasted is a bow and a quiver of arrows.”

“The king is an elf,” grinned Tamar. “Even if he is weak, he will know how to use one.”

Everyone gathered near Mistake and she started along the jungle trail. The others followed in single file with Tamar at the rear. The creature noises fell silent as the small party invaded the jungle. Mistake led at a slow and cautious pace, but she soon began walking a little faster as her eyes became accustomed to the dimmer light in the jungle.

They marched for almost fifteen minutes before they heard the noise of something large moving through the growth. Mistake froze, and the others stopped behind her. Everyone remained silent and listened to the noise. It was getting louder, and it sounded like it was coming from behind them. They all turned around to face the beach. Tamar nocked an arrow to his bow.

Suddenly, a huge shape stepped out of the foliage and appeared on the trail. The krul was fifteen feet tall, and its mouth opened to shout when he saw the invaders. Tamar let fly his arrow. It struck the krul between the eyes. Tamar swiftly nocked another arrow, but it was not necessary. The huge creature fell backwards and hit the ground with a loud thump. HawkShadow drew his sword and raced past Tamar to the creature’s body.

“It is dead,” HawkShadow whispered. “Help me move its body off the trail.”

Tamar dropped his bow and raced to help HawkShadow. The two men struggled to move the giant creature. They could not lift it, but they managed to drag it into the foliage alongside the trail. Tamar ripped up some leafy vines and covered the body as best he could. They walked back up the trail to the waiting princesses.

“What was that?” asked Tamar.

“That is a krul,” replied MistyTrail. “Your aim was excellent. I did not think one arrow could fell such a beast.”

“Well,” interjected HawkShadow, “we know where to aim in the future. Let’s move onward before another one comes.”

Mistake nodded and the group continued onward. It took another fifteen minutes of walking until the jungle began to slowly turn to forest. HawkShadow softly called for a halt.

“This looks like where we should leave the bows,” the Sakovan assassin said. “If we left our bows in the forest ahead, they would be too noticeable to anyone chancing by. We should spread them out so that we all don’t stop at the same time to retrieve them. Choose a spot that is recognizable from the direction we will be traveling.”

The group spread out along the trail and chose the hiding spots for their bows and quivers. When they were done they gathered at the edge of the forest. HawkShadow studied the forest for several minutes, trying to get a feel for it. Finally, he selected two trees that they could use to locate the trail. He bent down at each tree and carved a star into the accumulation of moss at their bases. He silently pointed to the two marked trees and waited until each of the party had acknowledged the marks. When they were done, MistyTrail took the lead. She angled through the forest towards the sounds of the distant screams.

“Does this screaming go on every night?” HawkShadow whispered to Mistake.

“It does not last all night,” nodded Mistake. “We heard it several nights in a row. The rest of the time we were too far from the city to hear it. We should wait until most of it stops.”

“Most of it?” questioned HawkShadow. “Why not all of it?”

“Some of the victims continue screaming through the night,” frowned Mistake, “long after the torture has ended. When the majority of the screaming has stopped, the torturers will go to bed, their appetites sated for one night.”

A cold shiver ran through HawkShadow’s body as he tried to envision such a bizarre people. He pushed the thoughts from his mind and continued scanning the forest to memorize the route that they were taking. A short while later, MistyTrail held up her hand and froze. No one needed to ask what the problem was. The sudden sounds were loud enough that everyone immediately looked to their left.

“Hide,” whispered MistyTrail as she darted for the nearest tree.

Everyone scattered and found shelter behind large trees. A few moments later a dozen kruls appeared. They made no attempt to be quiet as they stomped noisily through the forest talking to one another. The kruls walked by, totally unaware of the invaders hiding in the forest. No one moved until the sounds faded completely.

“They talked as if they were going home after a day’s work,” commented Tamar. “What do those creatures do?”

“Many chores,” answered Mistake. “They cut down trees and haul the logs to the shipyards. They hunt for escaped elves. We even saw them turning a giant wheel in the mine where Eltor worked.”

“But they were walking away from the city,” HawkShadow pointed out.

“The kruls do not live in the cities,” replied MistyTrail. “They dwell in the forests in small groups. We do not want to stumble into such a camp.”

MistyTrail started leading again. After a half hour of walking slowly, they came within sight of the city. They gathered together and stared at the back of the temple.

“At least we won’t have to travel on the city streets this time,” commented Mistake. “The last time we came out a couple of blocks to the left.”

“This trip from the cove has consumed over an hour,” frowned Tamar. “That can be a lifetime when one is trying to escape.”

“We moved slowly to get here,” replied HawkShadow. “It would be nice if we had that luxury on the way back, but I would not count on it. The return trip will be much quicker.”

“I hope you are wrong,” replied Tamar as he looked across the wide barren area between them and the temple. “There are plenty of soldiers outside the temple. How are we going to get to it without being seen?”

“We aren’t,” frowned HawkShadow as he studied the temple. “How did you enter the last time, MistyTrail?”

“Can you see the second story balcony on the left side?” MistyTrail asked as she pointed. “It leads into a library. Mistake scaled the side of the building and dropped a rope for Eltor and me to climb up.”

HawkShadow looked at Mistake and nodded his appreciation of her skills.

“Did you leave the same way?” asked Tamar.

“Of course,” replied Mistake. “We even took the rope with us so that they would not know how we got in.”

“I would wager that they investigated thoroughly to find their weakness,” frowned HawkShadow. “What other entrances are there?”

“The main entrance is in the front,” answered MistyTrail. “The back entrance that we are looking at is the only other way in that I know of. We have never seen the fourth side of the temple.”

“What are you thinking?” asked Tamar after several moments of silence.

“I am leery about using the same entrance that was used the last time,” replied HawkShadow. “Tamar, see if you can move further to the right and get a view of the far side of the temple. I am going to check out the library balcony.”

Tamar moved silently through the forest to his right. HawkShadow faded into the forest to his left. The Sakovan assassin moved along the edge of the forest until the city buildings blocked his view of the rear of the temple. He stared across the barren wasteland at the city street across from him. He saw nothing moving. He stood erect and marched out of the forest. While he kept his head facing straight ahead, his eyes swiveled constantly for any sign of trouble. He tried to walk as swiftly as he could without appearing to be in a hurry.

When he had crossed the barren wasteland and reached the city street, HawkShadow paused in the shadows to calm his nerves. He inhaled and exhaled deeply and then marched along the street to the first intersection. He turned to the right and continued marching towards the side of the temple.

He eventually came to the end of the buildings on the street. There was a wide open area between the last row of buildings and the temple. He could just see the outline of soldiers at the front of the temple, but no one else was in sight. He marched out into the open area and stood staring up at the balcony.

HawkShadow was standing in the open for only a few moments before a squad of soldiers arrived and surrounded him. HawkShadow turned slowly and gazed at the soldiers. He recognized the squad leader by the extra stripes on his sleeves. He was also the only one of the soldiers who had not drawn a sword.

In the distant woods behind the temple, MistyTrail cringed and grabbed Mistake’s arm she pointed at HawkShadow.

“Oh, no,” Mistake said with alarm. “We are ruined before we even start.”

“What is the problem?” asked Tamar as he returned from his scouting trip and settled down next to the princesses.

“HawkShadow went to check the balcony,” answered MistyTrail. “He has been captured.”

“I was just growing fond of him,” frowned Tamar. “He moves more like an elf than many elves I know. We will have to proceed without him.”

“No,” MistyTrail replied adamantly. “We must ambush that squad before they get him into the temple.”

“And give up on rescuing the king?” retorted Tamar. “If we attack that squad, we will never gain entrance to the temple. Are you really willing to make that trade? If it were I that was captured, I would expect you to carry on without me. I would prefer that to abandoning the King of the Elves.”

“Let’s wait to see what happens,” suggested Mistake. “Perhaps they will take him to somewhere other than the temple. If so, we can rescue him after we get the king free.”

“They have not attacked him yet?” MistyTrail said hopefully. “He appears to be talking to them.”

Under the balcony, HawkShadow turned to face the officer.

“What are you doing here, soldier?” asked the officer.

“I was sent out to check the area,” replied HawkShadow. “The mage in the library sensed a presence down here. He demanded that I check it out. I do not see anything out of the ordinary. By chance was your squad patrolling under the balcony just recently?”

The officer shook his head and sighed. “Will these prima donnas never learn?” he asked rhetorically. “Why didn’t you tell the mage that he doesn’t have to worry about the balcony? Everyone in there should know by now that the shutters have been magically alarmed. You would expect more from a mage.”

“No wonder he is in the library,” snickered HawkShadow. “He still has much to learn, but still I dared not refuse him.”

“No, you couldn’t, soldier,” agreed the officer as he signaled for his men to stand down and sheath their swords. “Take my advice, though. The next time one of those great mages tells you to check under the balcony, take yourself a break and enjoy a snack. It is a much better use of your time.”

“I like that idea,” chuckled HawkShadow. “In fact, maybe I still have time to grab one.”

“Have one for me, too,” scowled the officer as he motioned for his men to form a column. “I have another four hours out here until I get a break.”

HawkShadow watched the column move towards the street that he had used to sneak towards the temple. He knew that he could not stay under the balcony, and he was loath to approach the front of the temple. He also could not be seen walking away from the temple. He inhaled deeply and turned towards the rear of the temple. His eyes scanned the edge of the distant forest, but he could not see his friends. He had no doubt that they could see him.

HawkShadow walked slowly around the corner of the temple. There were at least two squads of soldiers at the rear of the temple. The Sakovan assassin was tempted to hide in the shadows until the suspicious patrol had moved on, but other soldiers had already noticed him come around the corner. Several of them stared at him, as if a lone soldier in the city was an oddity. HawkShadow steeled his nerves and marched towards the gaping rear entrance of the temple.

He saw several soldiers tense at his approach and knew that he would be closely scrutinized if he tried to enter, so he stopped short of the entrance and leaned against the wall of the temple as if waiting for somebody. Eventually a curious officer approached him.

“You are not part of my detail,” declared the officer. “What are you doing here?”

“I am waiting for the delivery of two elves,” replied HawkShadow. “I was instructed to make sure that they were delivered to the proper cell.”

“Elves?” questioned the officer. “I was not notified that there was a delivery tonight. Where are they coming from?”

HawkShadow hesitated too long as he tried to think of an answer. He had no idea of any of the names used on the island, so he could not mention the name of another city.

“I asked you a question, soldier,” scowled the officer.

“I can’t say,” answered HawkShadow.

“You can’t say?” glared the officer. “What do you mean you can’t say?”

“It is a matter of secrecy,” HawkShadow replied softly. “I was ordered not to reveal the origin of the slaves.”

“Who ordered you to remain quiet about this?” demanded the officer.

Again HawkShadow felt a moment of failure. He did not know any of the Motangan names except Vand, and he didn’t think that the officer would believe that. He was sure that the Emperor had his own personal guards that would carry out special orders. As the officer once again demanded an answer, HawkShadow remembered Mistake mentioning that she had seen Aakuta inside the temple.

“Aakuta,” HawkShadow replied conspiratorially, “but I will deny having told you that. Look, I am not trying to be trouble to you, but I do not want to be punished by the mage.”

The officer’s glare softened and he nodded sympathetically.

“I won’t mention a thing,” promised the officer, “but I wish these mages would use proper procedures. How do they expect us to secure the temple when they go around breaking all the rules?”

“They do seem to be favored,” shrugged HawkShadow. “I try not to get on the wrong side of them.”

“That is wise,” nodded the officer. “When are these elves supposed to arrive?”

“They should have been here already,” frowned HawkShadow. “I think I am going to go looking for them. There is only one man escorting them, and that worries me, but the mage was precise with his instructions. I hope to be back shortly.”

The officer nodded, and HawkShadow started walking across the barren strip towards the forest. His friends watched him approach.

“Does he know these Motangans?” Tamar asked with surprise at seeing HawkShadow walking around freely.

“No,” grinned MistyTrail. “He has never been here before, but this is not the first time that HawkShadow has amazed me.”

“He seems to blend in wherever he goes,” admired Mistake.

HawkShadow entered the forest and walked well past his friends to make sure that no on saw him meeting anyone. He turned and crept back to them.

“What did you learn?” asked MistyTrail.

HawkShadow took a thin wire out of his belt and handed it to Tamar. Tamar looked at the wire questioningly.

“Bind the top of your ears so that they lay flat against your head,” instructed HawkShadow. “Make sure that your hair covers both the wire and your ears.”

Tamar nodded and made a large loop out of the wire. HawkShadow sat on the ground and faced the rear of the temple.

“The shutters to the library are magically alarmed,” reported HawkShadow. “If we tried to enter that way, we would be caught quickly.”

“There is another balcony on the far side,” offered Tamar, “but I have no idea where it leads to.”

“I think I have found a way in,” declared HawkShadow, “but I doubt that we will be able to leave the same way.”

“How do we get in?” asked Mistake.

HawkShadow smiled and pointed to the large opening in the rear of the temple. “I spoke to the officer there. He is expecting me and another soldier to be escorting two elves. Evidently, it is highly irregular for prisoners to enter in this manner, but I told him that Aakuta had requested it in secrecy. The soldiers do not care much for the mages here in Motanga.”

“There is a reason for that,” frowned Mistake. “The mages here are the ones who torture the prisoners. I feel uneasy even hearing Aakuta’s name.”

“What is done is done,” shrugged HawkShadow. “We should take this opportunity to get into the temple before that officer is replaced by another.”

“Do you remember the map I drew of the interior?” asked MistyTrail.

“I never forget a map,” smiled HawkShadow. “If my sense of direction is any good, we need to make a left upon entering the rear of the temple. There we should find the door that the kruls would not let you pass through.”

“And Avalar’s cage is just beyond it,” Mistake said excitedly. “Maybe we can get in and out of there so quickly that no one will even notice.”

“One thing at a time,” replied Tamar as he covered the wire with his hair. “First we have to get in.”

“Let’s go,” HawkShadow said as he rose to his feet. “Let me do the talking if we are stopped.”

HawkShadow and Tamar sandwiched the girls between them and then marched out of the woods. They walked normally across the barren strip. As they reached the rear of the temple, most of the soldiers turned to watch their approach. A few of the soldiers became alert, but they relaxed as the officer strode forward to greet them.

“Ah,” smiled the officer, “now I understand. Why didn’t you say that they were off-islanders? They must be important not to be brought in through the harbor.”

“I imagine that they are,” nodded HawkShadow. “Do not spread the word of your observations. I want to survive this mission.”

“I understand,” nodded the officer as he led the group through the gaping entrance.

The inside of the temple was cavernous. There was a large clear area immediately inside the doorway, with dozens of doors and corridors radiating off of it. The officer started to turn to the right, and HawkShadow halted his little group.

“We need to go to the left,” announced HawkShadow.

“No,” countered the officer. “The left side is full. You need to take them to the right.”

HawkShadow saw several hooded figures at the rear of the room. One of them looked curiously at the new arrivals. HawkShadow felt a chill race up his spine. He motioned for the officer to come closer and the man complied.

“Look,” whispered HawkShadow, “my instructions state a particular cell. If there are already prisoners in it, I will remove them and take them to the right side, but I do not want to stand here and discuss it. The mages in this room are already taking notice of the new arrivals, and Aakuta will have my hide if anyone finds out about these girls.”

The officer changed his position so that he could look to the rear of the room without it appearing obvious. He slowly nodded his head.

“You will owe me for this,” warned the officer.

“I am sure that I will,” HawkShadow chuckled softly, “but if my guess is correct, you don’t want the attention of the mages on you, either.”

“You are correct,” grinned the officer. “Still, you owe me. Follow me.”

The officer turned and led the group to the left. Mistake leaned close to HawkShadow and whispered to him.

“I think one of those mages was Aakuta,” she whispered. “He looked at us and immediately slipped through a doorway. We may have trouble ahead. I am sure that he must have recognized me.”

HawkShadow nodded his head and sighed slightly to ease his tension. The officer took a look over his shoulder to see if there was a problem and then continued across the large room. He reached the doorway to the cell area and stopped. As he fumbled through his key ring, HawkShadow noticed a group of three mages approaching them from the rear of the room. He gently tapped Mistake, who was next to him, and nodded towards the mages. Mistake alerted MistyTrail, and she alerted Tamar.

“Too many keys,” complained the officer as he continued to try different keys in the lock.

The officer fumbled the keys and they fell to the floor. HawkShadow bent down swiftly and retrieved them. He handed them back to the officer.

“Now I have to start all over,” complained the officer. “Why don’t they make all the locks the same?”

HawkShadow glanced over his shoulder and saw the three mages approaching. They were already half way across the floor and HawkShadow felt sweat forming on his brow.

“Start from the other end,” HawkShadow suggested to the officer. “There is no sense in trying the same keys over again.”

The officer nodded and tried another key. The mages were only twenty paces away when the officer found the correct key. He turned the key and opened the door. HawkShadow roughly shoved Mistake and MistyTrail through the door. Tamar quickly followed them, and HawkShadow thanked the officer as he slipped through. Mistake tried to put her foot in the door so it wouldn’t close, but HawkShadow pulled her away as he heard one of the approaching mages shout.

“Why did you stop me?” frowned Mistake. “It would be the quickest way to open the door if I jammed the lock before it closed.”

“Because the mages wanted to know who the two elves were,” HawkShadow answered softly as he saw the nearest krul approaching. “We must be swift in getting out of here, but we are not leaving by this door. We have already received too much unwanted attention. Where is Avalar?”

Chapter 32

Avalar

MistyTrail stared into the last cell and saw the calm male elf sitting with his back against the wall. He stared at her curiously. MistyTrail smiled broadly.

“Avalar?” asked MistyTrail.

The man smiled and nodded. “You should not talk in here,” he said softly. “They will punish you. Stay strong and preserve. Kaltara will aid you.”

“No talk,” shouted a krul as he advanced towards MistyTrail.

Tamar inserted himself between the krul and MistyTrail. HawkShadow tapped Mistake on the arm and pointed to the lock on the cell holding Avalar. He then straightened and rounded the corner, walking briskly past the krul. The krul frowned and turned to watch HawkShadow while Mistake raced to unlock Avalar’s cage. Avalar became suddenly interested in what was going on. He looked at Mistake and then at MistyTrail. He shook his head and focused on Tamar. Finally, he rose and stepped close to the door of the cage.

“Who are you people?” he whispered.

“We have come to free you,” MistyTrail grinned. “Are you all right?”

“Elves and humans?” frowned Avalar as he stared at Tamar.

“I am elven,” Tamar said softly. “The other male is human. Act calmly, but be ready to run.”

Meanwhile HawkShadow wandered from cage to cage sticking his face up to the bars on each one. He not only captivated the attention of the first krul, but every other krul at that end of the corridor was watching him. HawkShadow managed to keep an eye on what was going on at the end of the corridor as he moved from cage to cage.

The corridor seemed to stretch onward forever. HawkShadow counted over forty kruls before he gave up counting and he was sure there were more at the far end of the corridor. He had managed to pass by six of the giants while keeping their attention focused on him.

“Give him the uniform,” MistyTrail urged softly.

Tamar glanced over his shoulder at the kruls and then reached into his pack and passed the uniform to Avalar.

“You people have come prepared,” Avalar said as he hurriedly put on the uniform.

“It’s open,” Mistake grinned as she restored the piece of metal to her belt.

Avalar was struggling with the uniform. He had large bracelets on both arms and he could not fit them through the sleeves. MistyTrail opened the cell door and stepped inside. She grabbed the material on one of the sleeves and pulled hard. She heard the material rip, but she got Avalar’s arm through the sleeve. She immediately repeated the procedure on the other arm.

Suddenly, one of the kruls noticed MistyTrail in the cage. He bellowed loudly and pointed towards the end of the corridor. All of a sudden the corridor erupted into chaos. Kruls started running towards the cage with Avalar and MistyTrail in it. The kruls growled as they charged and it was obvious to everyone that the time for talking and bluffing was over.

Tamar drew his two-handed sword and stepped towards the charging kruls to make room for the king and the princesses behind him. MistyTrail and Avalar stepped out of the cell while Mistake’s hands filled with knives. Tamar slashed into the first krul, slicing his abdomen open. The huge krul continued to charge and Tamar jumped back a pace and brought his sword out in front of him. The krul impaled himself on the sword. When the krul tumbled to the ground, it pulled Tamar’s sword from his hands.

HawkShadow pulled his sword and charged at the kruls from behind. He swung his two-handed sword at the legs of the first krul he could reach. The sword sliced cleanly through one leg and half way through the next. The krul slammed to the floor. HawkShadow jumped on its back and drove his sword deep into the krul’s neck. The krul stopped struggling, and HawkShadow pulled his sword free and charged towards Tamar.

Tamar pulled his sword out of the dead krul just in time to swing at the next giant. He sliced deep into the krul’s extended arm just as Mistake’s knife flew into one of its eyes. MistyTrail threw a Sakovan star at the next krul and hit it in the head, but it halted only long enough to rip the star from its flesh and throw it aside.

“I could use a weapon,” Avalar said.

MistyTrail handed him a knife as she threw another Sakovan star. This time she struck the krul in the eye and it turned to one side as it screamed. Tamar sliced high on the krul that Mistake had wounded. He sliced into the neck of the krul while Mistake dove under its legs and came up behind it. She turned and drove a knife into its back as high as she could reach. The krul wobbled from both assaults and tumbled to the ground. Tamar had to jump out of the way of the falling giant.

HawkShadow caught up to another krul and again went for its legs from behind. The massive creature screamed and fell forward. As HawkShadow jumped on its back and delivered a killing blow, Mistake shouted.

“Behind you, HawkShadow!” she screamed.

HawkShadow did not even look back. He hurled his body forward and dove for the floor, tossing his sword high to get rid of it. Avalar reached up and snatched the sword from the air. The elves moved to the sides of the corridor as HawkShadow rolled past them. Tamar and Avalar immediately strode forward and attacked the krul that was chasing HawkShadow.

“The arms,” shouted Avalar as he struck out with the sword.

Avalar sliced cleanly through the creature’s left arm while Tamar cut off the right arm. The creature halted and screamed horrendously. MistyTrail’s star and Mistake’s knife both impacted the creature’s face. It fell atop the body of another krul and Avalar ended its life with a strong slice of the throat.

“We will not make it out of here this way,” shouted HawkShadow as he gained his feet and saw dozens of kruls heading towards them from the far end of the corridor. “Try the lock on the door we came in, Mistake.”

The kruls that were approaching were not charging. They were approaching cautiously although they were growling loudly. They clumped into groups, totally blocking the corridor as they approached. Avalar handed the sword back to HawkShadow, while Mistake ran for the door to the rear of the temple.

“I would like one of those if we come across one,” smiled Avalar.

“You certainly know how to use one,” smiled HawkShadow. “We will find you something.”

“It’s no good,” shouted Mistake. “It is magically locked like the cell in Elvangar.”

“You are from Elvangar?” asked Avalar. “But I have seen you girls outside my cage before.”

“Only I am from Elvangar,” Tamar said. “It is a long story, and it can wait until we are free.”

“Freedom from my cell is not freedom on this island,” frowned Avalar as he watched the kruls move slowly towards them. “We had trouble with those last five kruls. I cannot imagine how we will survive the next dozen. Even if we get by them, we will be hunted down.“

“We have a ship,” offered HawkShadow as he stepped alongside the elven king. “We are not staying on this island.”

“We are in deep trouble,” Mistake interrupted nervously. “A mage is joining the battle. Look at the far end of the corridor.”

“Stop!” the mage shouted loudly. “Stop at once.”

The kruls turned to look behind them and saw the mage walking towards them. They growled and turned back towards the elves. The mage shouted again, but the kruls paid no attention to him.

“Get ready,” warned HawkShadow. “Try to keep the kruls between us and the mage. If we can keep the kruls crowded together, we have a chance of defeating them. Don’t let the back ones move around the ones we attack.”

“That is Aakuta,” snarled Mistake. “He will kill the kruls just to get at us.”

As if her words were prophetic, the mage hurled a fireball at the backs of the kruls. One of the creatures burst into flames. Its scream was horrifying as it threw its body to the floor and began rolling around trying to extinguish the flames.

“Mistake,” Avalar called urgently, “if you can get around locks, try the ones on my wrists.”

Mistake ran to Avalar’s side and studied the bracelet. Aakuta threw another fireball and another krul erupted in flames. The other kruls growled with rage. They turned to face the mage. Aakuta stopped approaching and threw another fireball. Another krul erupted in flames. The rest of the kruls shoved aside their flaming comrade and charged towards the mage.

“Got one,” Mistake said triumphantly as she move around to Avalar’s other wrist.

“Looks like the kruls have a different idea than the mage,” grinned MistyTrail. “Maybe we should charge after the kruls? Then we would be too close for the mage to get all of us.”

“Or we can stand our ground and hope that the kruls get the mage,” countered Mistake.

“And that there aren’t too many of them left when the mage dies,” added Tamar.

“No,” announced Avalar as the other wristband fell away, “we advance but slowly.

HawkShadow’s eyebrow rose as he looked at Avalar. “Are you a mage?”

“That is what the bracelets were for,” grinned the elven king.

“I think I’ll keep this sword for myself then,” grinned HawkShadow. “Let’s go.”

As the five escapees advanced steadily along the corridor, the kruls charged Aakuta. Fire flew from the fingertips of the human mage as the kruls got nearer. The front row of kruls erupted into flaming balls of fur. They turned and tried to flee away from the mage, but other kruls were right behind them. Some of the second tier kruls began to catch fire from the burning kruls.

Aakuta started stepping slowly backwards, tossing fireballs as he retreated. The flames from the burning kruls leaped upwards, and the prisoners fled to the back of their cells as the intense heat began to spread. The flames were so high that the mage could not see the escapees and they could not see him. Neither side could actually see that all of the kruls were already dead.

The escapees halted before the fires. Suddenly, a blue cast surrounded the corpses. The flames died out completely, and ice began to form on the bodies. Over the heap of charred bodies, the escapees were able to see Aakuta again. Avalar’s arms rose and pointed towards the human mage.

“He is all that stands against us now,” Avalar stated as he prepared to cast a spell.

“No,” shouted HawkShadow as he knocked Avalar’s hands down.

“What are you doing?” shouted Mistake. “Are you crazy? That is Aakuta. He can kill us with one spell.”

“That is not Aakuta,” announced HawkShadow. “That is Master Malafar, Lyra’s father. Do not harm him.”

MistyTrail stared at the mage’s face under his hood and gasped. “HawkShadow is right. That is Master Malafar.”

“Hurry,” shouted the human mage. “You do not have much time. Follow me.”

Aakuta retreated to the end of the corridor where he had left the door blocked open just a bit so he wouldn’t have to unlock it. He pushed it all the way open and placed his back against it while the escapees climbed over the bodies and raced for the door.

“Enter the first room on your right and be silent,” instructed Aakuta.

Mistake led the group and slid into a small storage room. A woman in a robe frowned as the group piled in. As soon as the last of the group had exited the cell area, Aakuta let the door close. He followed the group into the room, unaware of the furtive figure that was hiding in the stairwell just outside the door to the cells.

“You are Master Malafar!” gasped MistyTrail. “Why did Mistake think you were Aakuta? What are you doing here?”

“It is too long a story to relate now,” answered Aakuta. “The short answer is that I came here to repay my daughter’s people for the ill that I caused them. I could not do so in the Sakova or in Omunga. I needed to be someone else. I became Aakuta. What is important now is to get you out of here. I also want you to take Rhoda with you. She is a Khadoran mage who was kidnapped and tortured.”

Rhoda looked with uncertainty at the strange group. Aakuta smiled at her and placed his hand calmly on her shoulder.

“I know most of these people, Rhoda,” the mage said. “If anyone can get you home, it is them. I can’t protect you here forever.”

“But if I am gone,” frowned Rhoda, “they will suspect you. They will kill you. Come with us.”

“I cannot,” Aakuta shook his head. “My work here is not done. Besides, I have no life left on the mainland. I betrayed my own people, and I betrayed my daughter’s people. I have nowhere to go.”

“Lyra would love to have you back, Master Malafar,” stated MistyTrail.

“Omunga and the Sakovan are now one,” added HawkShadow. “There is no need for you to stay away now.”

“There are other reasons, HawkShadow,” frowned Aakuta. “My wife and son are dead. My academy and reputation are ruined forever. It is not just a matter of acceptance. I don’t belong there any more. I will not spend my life as an old aging mage with nothing to do. I have a purpose here. I must alert the Torak when I discover the timing of the invasion. If I can’t do it, no one can. There is no one to take my place here on Motanga.”

“I do not know you,” Avalar said, “but I admire your courage. Thank you for saving us in the cell area.”

Aakuta nodded curtly to the elven king and rolled a scroll across the table. Everyone gathered around to see what was on it.

“This is the best map I could create,” apologized Aakuta. “Leaving by the front door or the rear is out of the question. The alarms will be sounded before you could exit. There are two balconies on the second level. They know that the girls came and went from the library one the last time they were here, so they have magically alarmed both of them, but they are sloppy with their security, as you already know. Otherwise you would not be inside this building.”

“It sounds like they were expecting someone to return,” frowned Mistake.

“Indeed,” nodded Aakuta. “Avalar has been kept here for many years. He has been their insurance that the elves would not interfere with Vand’s plans. They thought that he was the target the last time you snuck in.”

“So how do we get out?” asked HawkShadow.

“They constantly check the alarm on the library shutters,” explained Aakuta, “but that is not true of the other balcony. I disabled that alarm over a week ago. No one has noticed yet. I know because I check it daily. This is the location of the room that leads to the balcony,” he added as he tapped the hand-drawn map.

“A meeting room?” asked Mistake. “Will anyone be in it?”

“No,” replied Aakuta. “It is seldom used. Important meetings are held in the throne room.

MistyTrail stared at Rhoda in her red robe. “Is that all you have to wear?”

Rhoda nodded and MistyTrail reached into her pack and gave Rhoda her uniform.

“It may be a little tight, but it better than nothing,” smiled MistyTrail.

The men turned their backs to Rhoda as she slipped into the uniform.

“I will check the corridor outside the door,” Aakuta said. “I dare not travel with you, though. Are you sure that you can find the balcony?”

“We will find it,” HawkShadow assured the human mage. “Take care of yourself, Master Malafar. I will tell Lyra about your decision to stay.”

“I am not sure that I want her to know,” frowned Aakuta. “She already has too much to worry about. She holds too many responsibilities for one so young. She does not need another.”

“Perhaps not,” MistyTrail said as she hugged Aakuta, “but you must know that she loves you dearly. The Sakovans will welcome you whenever you wish to return. Never doubt that.”

Aakuta’s lips pressed tightly together, and he broke the embrace. He opened the door a crack and peered out. Seeing no one, he opened the door fully and stepped into the corridor.

The six escapees filed out of the room. HawkShadow took the lead and headed towards the front of the temple. He left the lowest floor at the first staircase, heading towards the ground level. He paused to listen at the ground level and then continued up to the second level. He moved stealthily as he stepped out of the stairwell. The corridor was empty and he turned towards the rear of the temple.

When he reached the rear corridor, he halted before turning the corner. He could hear two men around the corner talking. Mistake moved close to him, and he bent down to listen to her.

“An alarm will sound as soon as anyone enters the cell area,” she whispered. “Once that happens, alarms will go off all over this island. We cannot wait for these men to finish their conversation. We must hurry if we wish to live.”

HawkShadow nodded and tapped Mistake’s palm. She nodded as a knife slid into her hand. HawkShadow nodded three times. On the third nod, Mistake ran around the corner and threw her knife. It struck a hooded man in the throat. HawkShadow stepped around the corner, his long sword held before him. With a quick slash, the second man’s head rolled across the floor. Mistake retrieved the knife from her victim as the rest of the group rounded the corner.

The rear corridor ran the width of the pyramid and no one else was in sight. HawkShadow picked the pace up and began running quietly. The others matched his speed. When they reached the far corner, HawkShadow slowed and peeked around the corner. There were two soldiers at the far end of the corridor near the front of the large temple. He pulled his head back.

“Two guards at the front of the temple,” explained HawkShadow. “They are way too far away to attack, and we cannot wait for them. Any ideas?”

“How far is the balcony room?” asked MistyTrail.

“About half way,” answered HawkShadow.

“Do you think they would see a soldier walking the corridor as strange?” she asked.

“Probably not,” shrugged HawkShadow. “What do you have in mind?”

MistyTrail hopped onto HawkShadow’s back and wrapped her arms around his chest.

“Carry me to the room,” ordered MistyTrail. “I will create a fog so that the others can follow us.”

“A fog indoors?” frowned Mistake. “Is that wise?”

“I don’t know,” shrugged MistyTrail. “Do you have a better idea?”

“I can dissipate it when we reach the room,” offered Rhoda. “Perhaps they will not notice it, or they will think they didn’t really see it.”

“I am game,” replied HawkShadow. “Hang on, shrimp, you are going for a ride. Just get off me quickly if they approach us. I will want my sword.”

HawkShadow straightened and turned the corner. He strode close to the wall to minimize the view of the far away soldiers. The two soldiers appeared to be engrossed in their conversation. They did not turn to look, and HawkShadow opened the door to the meeting room and entered sideways to avoid having MistyTrail seen.

“Don’t overdo the fog,” warned HawkShadow as he looked around the room to make sure it was empty. “Just enough to hide our people.”

MistyTrail nodded and cast her spell. The corridor grew misty and opaque. As soon as the soldiers disappeared from view, Mistake led the rest of the group in a run towards the meeting room. The group entered the room and Rhoda immediately turned back to the doorway. She cast a spell and the fog came soaring into the room. She closed the door, leaving the corridor appearing normal.

“Nice,” complimented Avalar. “We have the makings of a fine team here.”

Rhoda smiled at the elven king as HawkShadow opened the shutters to the balcony. He stepped onto the balcony and looked down. He quickly withdrew his head and backed into the room.

“We have three problems,” the Sakovan assassin announced. “We have no rope, and there are two guards below the balcony.”

“No rope?” questioned Avalar.

Tamar shrugged and said, “we left it in the forest when it became apparent that we could not walk through the back door carrying it.”

Mistake looked at MistyTrail and grinned. “We can take care of the other two problems,” she announced. “You guys find some rope.”

The elven princesses snuck out onto the balcony. They peeked over the railing at the two guards standing below. MistyTrail tapped Mistake and pointed towards the distant frameworks of the shipyard. Mistake nodded. The princesses each cast the compulsion spell on one of the guards. The guards looked at each other and then started walking away from the temple. They crossed the clear area and entered a street heading towards the shipyard. When the princesses turned around to reenter the meeting room, they bumped into Avalar.

“There is much I have to learn about you two,” he smiled. “May I get past you?”

“You will learn a lot about us later,” chuckled Mistake as she moved aside to let the elven king onto the balcony.

Avalar cocked an eyebrow but quickly dismissed her words. He leaned over the railing and gazed at the ground below him. He closed his eyes and magically searched the grass below. Mentally, he felt the blades of grass brush against his face, but he kept on searching until he found the buried treasure, a winter store for some hard working squirrel. He focused on the acorn and concentrated. He did not need to open his eyes to see the mighty oak sprout upward. He continued to concentrate as he bent the forces of nature to his will. When he finally opened his eyes, the oak tree’s branches danced happily near the railing of the balcony.

“We are ready to descend,” Avalar announced as he entered the meeting room.

HawkShadow stared through the open shutters and shook his head as the sight of the tree awaiting them. He wasted no time asking questions of the elven king. He moved swiftly to the balcony and stepped over the rail and onto a sturdy branch. Within seconds, HawkShadow was on the ground, sword drawn, as he waited for the others to descend.

When the whole group was on the ground, HawkShadow led the way across the clear area and onto the street leading away from the temple. They turned to the right at the first intersection and proceeded to the end of the block.

“More fog, MistyTrail,” ordered HawkShadow. “I think that is the only way to get this large group across that wasteland.”

MistyTrail nodded and cast her spell. She did not hold back this time and great billows of fog rolled out across the wasteland. When the fog was thick enough to obscure the forest ahead of them, HawkShadow led the way forward at a run. They paused when they reached the forest and HawkShadow nodded to Rhoda.

“Disperse it,” he nodded.

Rhoda called upon the winds and blew the fog upwards into the sky. No sooner had the fog lifted than the alarms started sounding. The soldiers at the rear of the temple immediately became alert.

“That is cutting it close,” sighed HawkShadow. “A few more minutes and we would not have made it.”

“You don’t understand, HawkShadow,” corrected Mistake. “The escape is not nearly over. The soldiers and kruls will not just be chasing us from the temple. The woods will be crawling with them. They will be coming at us from every direction. The kruls can smell elves very easily. We need to run, and run fast.”

Chapter 33

The Escape

HawkShadow and Mistake started running through the woods behind the temple of Vand. Avalar and Rhoda followed, with Tamar and MistyTrail bringing you the rear. The horns that had started blaring from the temple were being joined by an ever-increasing chorus from all directions. Tamar looked over his shoulder and saw dozens of soldiers racing out of the temple.

“There is a large group giving chase,” shouted Tamar.

“There are mages among them,” added MistyTrail as she also looked back and saw hooded men among the charging soldiers.

No one responded, and MistyTrail stopped looking back. The group raced through the forest until a krul stepped out in front of them. HawkShadow and Tamar drew their swords without stopping. The krul just stood waiting for its prey to arrive. HawkShadow charged with a burst of speed, and the creature’s large mouth opened wide in a grin. The Sakovan assassin raced right up to the krul and then ducked below its swinging arms and veered around it. He turned and swung viscously into the back of the creature’s legs. The krul screamed in pain as the rest of the group detoured around it. As the creature dropped to its knees, Tamar swung his sword at the krul’s throat. He did not stop to verify the kill, but he heard the impact of the krul’s body hitting the ground.

The group reformed with HawkShadow and Mistake leading again. MistyTrail felt the air beside her head tremble and a tree off to her right exploded, sending a fine spray of bark and wood splinters through the air. MistyTrail urged Tamar further to the left as she increased her speed.

“We need to do something quick,” MistyTrail yelled. “Magical projectiles are coming from the rear.”

“Fog,” replied Avalar. “Do not let them see us as targets.”

MistyTrail nodded and tried casting her fog spell as she was running. The result was less than desirable. A misty haze trailed behind the group, marking their path of escape. Still, it made individual targets difficult for the mages to see.

“It’s not working,” frowned MistyTrail.

Avalar looked over his shoulder and saw what MistyTrail was talking about. He also saw the large group of men gaining on them. He faced forward once more as his eyes sought to distinguish the features of the dim forest far before them.

“We need a burst of speed,” shouted Avalar. “Head for that row of four trees slightly to the right, HawkShadow, and make it quick.”

HawkShadow immediately complied without question. He and Mistake raced forward to the landmark that Avalar had suggested.

“Leave your spell for now,” Avalar said to MistyTrail. “As soon as we are behind the hedge, lay it on thick.”

Avalar then grabbed Rhoda by the arm and raced after HawkShadow. MistyTrail dropped her spell and ran forward with Tamar, but she could not see the hedge that the elven king was talking about.

Avalar started casting his spell before he reached the four trees in a row. A long line of buds protruded from the forest floor as HawkShadow and Mistake raced between the trees. Avalar and Rhoda had to step over the foot-high stalks, and MistyTrail and Tamar had to actually jump over the fast-growing hedge, which was already a pace high. Avalar halted and turned to continue his spell. Rhoda also stopped and tried to catch her breath. She was not used to such strenuous running. MistyTrail grinned broadly as she finally understood what Avalar was trying to do. She cast a fog centered on the hedge, which was already eight feet tall.

HawkShadow and Mistake had halted a hundred paces past the hedge when they realized that no one was following them. Their eyes scanned the forest ahead for any signs of the enemy while they waited for the others. When Avalar and MistyTrail were done with their spells, Avalar hoisted Rhoda over his shoulder and started running. MistyTrail and Tamar followed.

“Now head back to the left,” Avalar called softly to HawkShadow.

HawkShadow nodded as he and Mistake turned slightly to the left to find their path through the jungle. Shouts of alarm sounded from behind as the pursuing soldiers and mages slammed into the high hedge, which had been hidden in MistyTrail’s blanket of fog. Shouted curses and hollering reverberated through the forest, and MistyTrail smiled when she heard the growls of nearby kruls alerted by the noise. She envisioned the huge creatures tearing into the soldiers, mistaking them for the escapees.

HawkShadow almost missed the trees with the stars marked in the moss. They had approached at a slightly different angle and HawkShadow saw the marks as he was racing by. He turned abruptly and found the trail that led through the jungle to the beach. The group entered the trail in single file with Mistake going first. While the trail was wide enough for two people to stand abreast, it was not wide enough to travel side-by-side.

HawkShadow was the first to reach the spot where he had stashed his two bows. He stepped off the trail and slung his quiver over his head. He held out Avalar’s bow and quiver as the eleven king came running along the trail. The king stopped and put Rhoda down, put on his quiver and grabbed his bow. He also stepped off the trail and nocked an arrow as Rhoda ran after Mistake.

“You came prepared,” Avalar smiled at HawkShadow. “What other surprises are in store?”

“We have a ship on the coast,” HawkShadow answered as MistyTrail and Tamar raced by. “Let’s hope we get to it. It is quite a ways yet. You go on. I will be along shortly.”

Avalar nodded and stepped back on the trail. As soon as the king started running, HawkShadow saw the first of the soldiers appeared on the trail. HawkShadow sent an arrow into the man’s chest and then turned to race after Avalar. He ran past Mistake who standing off the trail with an arrow nocked. He grinned at her as he passed and heard her arrow fly seconds later. A distant scream testified to the accuracy of her shot.

Each member of the team with a bow took their turn at stepping off the trail and firing one arrow at the pursuers before joining the end of the column. The tactic worked well for a while as it slowed down the pursuers. Unfortunately, it ended up leaving Rhoda in the lead as she had no bow, and was not skilled with one in any event.

Rhoda rounded a bend in the trail and abruptly halted. Blocking the trial before her was a huge krul. It saw her and growled loudly in victory. The air mage defiantly cast a spell and sent a whirlwind of trail dirt flying into the creature’s face. Avalar was second in line, and when he rounded the bend he bumped into Rhoda. He quickly recovered and sent an arrow flying into the creature’s open mouth. The krul howled in pain, but it did not fall down. It ripped the arrow from its mouth and threw it at Rhoda, but it bounced harmlessly to the ground. Avalar sent another arrow into the creature’s face. It struck him between the eyes. The creature wobbled slightly and then fell to the ground.

“They are catching up,” shouted Tamar as he backed around the bend in the trail.

“And I hear more noises in the jungle alongside us,” Avalar said softly. “Take the lead HawkShadow. You may need your sword more than your bow.”

HawkShadow nodded and handed his bow to Rhoda. He pulled his sword and stepped past the Khadoran mage to take the lead. HawkShadow raced along the narrow trail, his eyes scanning the dense jungle on both sides of the trail. He frowned as he thought about the beach that waited ahead. They needed time to launch the elven scout ship, and the group behind them was too close to allow for that time. His mind raced as he tried to work out a plan to get off the island.

Suddenly, fireballs screamed through the air. None of them struck the escapees, but several of them were much too close for comfort as they slammed into the foliage on both sides of the trail.

“Forget the arrows and run,” shouted MistyTrail. “We need to put some distance between us and those mages.”

The group needed no further encouragement. They all raced for the beach. Mistake was last in the group and several dozen paces after she rounded a bend, she heard a snap behind her. She looked over he shoulder and saw a wire stretched across the trail. She shook her head in confusion, but she did not slow down as she ran along a straight section of trail that stretched for several hundred paces. She looked over her shoulder again as she heard the shouts behind her.

“Arrows now!” shouted Mistake as she watched the pursuers tripping over the wire and falling to the ground.

The group halted and immediately turned around and nocked arrows to their bows. They sent arrows flying into the mass of Motangans. Unexpectedly, from each side of the trail, arrows flew from the jungle foliage. The new arrows soared into the Motangan soldiers until nothing stirred on the trail behind the escapees.

“Get to the beach,” shouted a voice from the jungle. “Run!”

“Do it!” shouted HawkShadow as he turned and continued running. “To the beach.”

The group did not hesitate. They all turned and ran after HawkShadow. As they emptied onto the beach the group stopped and stared. Bodies littered the beach and the sands were stained with blood. Three men stood in black and silver uniforms. One of the men wore a cape.

“Emperor Marak?” shouted Mistake. “What are you doing here?”

“I certainly am not here to interfere with your plans,” Marak grinned at Tamar. “I was just in the neighborhood testing out our new boats. I suggest you hurry and launch your elven scout ship. The Motangan ships will be by shortly.”

“Those were your men in the jungle?” asked HawkShadow as he waved Tamar over to the scout ship.

“Botal’s squad is covering the jungle trail for now,” nodded the Torak as he stared at Avalar, “but other Motangans arrived a while ago by the beach trail. There may be more coming from each direction.”

HawkShadow and Tamar dragged the scout ship into the water, and the three women immediately jumped in. Avalar walked over to Marak and placed a hand on his shoulder.

“Whoever you are, friend,” Avalar smiled, “I owe you a debt of gratitude.”

“We shall talk in Angragar,” smiled the Torak. “You owe me nothing.”

Avalar swung into the scout ship, and Tamar followed him as HawkShadow pushed the craft away from the beach. By the time HawkShadow pulled himself over the side, Tamar had the sails unfurled, and Avalar had the helm, guiding the ship out to sea.

Avalar watched over his shoulder as close to twenty men emerged from the jungle. They carried five small boats and set them in the water. Four men filled each of the boats. The skimmers moved with surprising speed as they darted out of the small cove.

“Ship off the port bow,” shouted Tamar. “I suspect it is Motangan.”

Avalar turned to look at the ship. His jaw grew rigid as he calculated the speed and direction of the other ship. He angled his craft to starboard, but he did not think he would be able to outrun the enemy vessel. The mood on the scout ship grew tense and silent as the large enemy ship continued to gain on them. The enemy ship had its sails full of wind, and the only way that Avalar could accomplish the same windage was to parallel the coast of Motanga. He knew that was not a good idea.

Unexpectedly, two of the small Khadoran vessels came between the elven scout ship and the enemy vessel. Avalar watched with curiosity as the Khadorans headed straight for the enemy ship.

“What are they doing?” Avalar asked aloud. “They will be crushed by that behemoth.”

Suddenly, a projectile flew from one of the skimmers. It struck the Motangan ship just above the waterline. The enemy warship turned sharply and headed toward the small vessel as if to ram it. The small boat darted away while the other Khadoran boat sent another projectile into the opposite side of the ship. It also struck the Motangan ship just above the waterline.

The enemy vessel now had two large holes in its sides. As it turned to maneuver, water flowed through one of the holes. By the time the captain of the Motangan vessel realized the danger, it was too late. The large ship began to sink as the waterline rose and reached both of the holes in the hull. The small Khadoran boats darted away to safety.

“Incredible,” remarked Avalar. “Who are these people?”

“That was Emperor Marak of Khadora that you spoke to on the beach,” answered Mistake. “His black-clad warriors are members of his clan.”

“What was the meaning of his words on the beach?” asked Avalar. “He spoke about meeting in the city of legends. How is that possible?”

“Angragar has risen,” answered MistyTrail. “Emperor Marak is the Torak.”

“Merciful Kaltara,” Avalar replied as his eyebrows rose. “And what about the Star and the Astor? Have they been found yet?”

“You know of the prophecies?” MistyTrail asked excitedly. “Yes, they have both been found. They are good friends of ours.”

“How is it that you know of the prophecies, and Queen Alycia does not?” asked Mistake.

“Is she still alive?” Avalar asked softly. “Is she well?”

“She is alive,” answered Tamar. “I worry for her, though. She does not want to join with the humans to fight Vand. She no longer allows visitors without the permission of the Head Elder. There are other things that she has done, but I am not the best person to relate such things,” he added as he looked at Mistake and MistyTrail.

Avalar caught Tamar’s gaze. He looked at the elven girls with curiosity.

“You two are not from Elvangar,” Avalar stated as he recalled Tamar’s statement inside the temple. “I thought that meant that you were born on Motanga, but you appear to be very familiar with the humans. Who are you?”

“You cannot tell from our faces?” asked Mistake.

Avalar stared at their faces. He noticed the similarity to his own, but he shook his head with disbelief. Just the memory of his daughters brought tears to his eyes. MistyTrail walked to the helm and wrapped her arms around Avalar. Mistake smiled and joined her.

“Can it be?” Avalar asked as tears rolled down his cheeks. “Dare I think it is possible?”

“You had better believe it, Father,” cried MistyTrail.

“Or we will take you back to the Island of Darkness,” added Mistake.

“But Karaza told me that you both had died,” cried Avalar as he hugged both girls.

“When did you see Karaza?” Tamar asked worriedly.

“About a year after my capture,” replied the elven king. “I guess he was captured, too. We only spoke briefly and then I never saw him again.”

“He lives in Morada,” spat Tamar. “He is the Head of the Society of Mages. He said that you were dead and that he saw your remains.”

Avalar’s hands closed into tight fists, and his face contorted in rage. MistyTrail and Mistake backed away from their father as they felt his body tense and go rigid.

“Take the helm, Mistake,” snapped Avalar as he walked to the rail and clenched it with his hands.

Mistake obediently took the helm, but her teary eyes remained on her father. After a few minutes, Avalar appeared to calm down. He exhaled slowly and let go of the rail. He wiped the tears from his eyes and turned around. He smiled at his daughters.

“I am sorry to disrupt our reunion,” apologized Avalar. “The problem is one that I will deal with when I return to Elvangar. Now it is time for us to get to know one another again. The first thing we must do is rid ourselves of those names. No daughter of mine will be named Mistake. Which of you is Alahara?”

Mistake and MistyTrail looked at each other and shrugged.

“We don’t know,” Mistake and MistyTrail answered in unison.

Avalar smiled and dismissively waved Tamar and HawkShadow forward. He walked behind Mistake and lifted her tunic. Mistake went rigid, but she did not interfere. Avalar grinned and let the tunic fall back into place. He took Mistake’s hands off the helm and turned her around and hugged her.

“You are Alahara, the first born,” Avalar said as he kissed her on the forehead.

He turned to MistyTrail and embraced her. He kissed her on the forehead and said, “And you are Alastasia. You followed on the heels of your sister. Praise Kaltara that you are both alive. Tell me everything that has happened in your lives.”

“First,” smiled Alastasia, “We need to get Mistake, err, Alahara away from the helm. She knows nothing about sailing, and I don’t want to die.”

“She will learn,” smiled the elven king as he wrapped an arm around each of his princesses. “Just because you fail once at a task is no reason to abandon it. I can see that I have much to teach you two. You will both share in manning the helm on the way to Angragar. Now where do we start?”

* * *

Lady Mystic hid in the corner of the stairwell, tears rolling down her cheeks. She watched Aakuta lead the invaders to his small storage room and then fled up the stairs to her room. She slammed the door and then kicked it in a fit of rage. She picked up a chair and threw it against the wall, knocking books off the shelves. Finally, she collapsed to the floor and began beating her fists against it.

“I told him not to put me in this position,” Lady Mystic screamed. “Master Malafar,” she spat. “Father of the Star no less. How could he do this to me? I should skin him alive. No. No, that would be too good for him. He must be made to suffer.”

Lady Mystic’s hands went to her head and she began to pull on her hair. Finally, the fury worked its way out of her system. She sat up and gasped for breath. She was exhausted.

“I can’t do any of that,” she sighed. “I still love him. How could he do this to me? I told him not to make me choose between him and Father. Why couldn’t he just listen to me? What am I to do now?”

* * *

The alarms blared loudly as Aakuta stepped out of the small storage room and closed and locked the door. He looked both ways in the corridor before backing to the opposite wall and sending a powerful force bolt into the door of the storage room. The door splintered under the impact and collapsed amidst a shower of wooden splinters.

Aakuta nodded approvingly and walked away. He wound his way through the maze of corridors until he came out in the large room at the rear of the temple. The area was a scene of chaos as soldiers ran around wondering what was happening. He walked across the room and found the officer he had seen earlier escorting the invaders. The officer turned and looked at him in surprise as he recognized him.

“Aakuta?” the officer said nervously.

“Come with me,” ordered Aakuta. “I have some questions to ask you.”

“I am on duty right now,” frowned the officer. “The alarms are sounding. I cannot leave.”

“It will only take a minute,” insisted Aakuta. “Are you defying me?”

“No,” the officer said quickly, “but it must be quick. My men are being called to duty.”

Aakuta turned and strode back across the floor of the large open room. The officer dutifully followed. They entered a corridor off the rear of the room and Aakuta opened the first door he came to. He looked into the room and saw no occupants. He stepped in and waited for the officer. When the officer stepped into the room, Aakuta closed the door.

“You escorted some people into the temple tonight,” declared Aakuta. “Who were they, and why were they here?”

“I didn’t tell anyone,” the replied nervously.

“Answer my question,” glared Aakuta. “Who were they, and why were they here?”

“Two soldiers and two elven girls,” answered the officer, his voice quaking with fear. “They said that they were ordered here by you.”

“By me?” Aakuta echoed with outrage. “An obvious lie,” he spat. “Who else heard such treasonous talk?”

“No one,” replied the officer. “The soldiers were quite adamant about not revealing your name. They told no one else. I really must go now. My men will be looking for me.”

“Let them look,” snarled Aakuta as his reached out and grabbed the officer by his throat.

The officer’s hands rose and wrapped around Aakuta’s arm, but the mage’s strength was magically enhanced. The officer’s head snapped to one side, and his limp arms fell to his side. Aakuta tossed the body in the corner and left the room.

The dark mage made his way up the stairs. He entered the library and grabbed a book off the shelf. He sat in a comfortable chair and pretended to read it while the alarms blared all around him.

Suddenly, the door to the library flew open and four soldiers entered with their swords drawn. They looked around the room, their eyes landing on Aakuta.

“Has anyone been through here tonight?” asked one of the soldiers.

“Not a single person,” Aakuta answered calmly, “and I have been here for hours. What is that infernal racket?”

“Alarms,” answered the soldier as he waved two of his comrades into the room. “There are invaders in the temple. I am posting guards in this room. It would be advisable for you to return to your quarters. These invaders are armed and dangerous.”

Aakuta put the book down and rose. “Perhaps I have read enough for one night. Good luck with your hunt.”

Aakuta rose and walked by the soldiers and into the corridor beyond. He made his way up the stairs, but instead of going to his quarters, he went to Lady Mystic’s. He knocked loudly on the door and received no answer. He frowned and knocked louder.

Lady Mystic opened the door. She was fully clothed, and her hair was a mess. She stepped to one side so that Aakuta could enter. Aakuta stepped into the room. His eyes landed on the broken chair and the books that had obviously fallen from the shelf. Lady Mystic closed the door.

“What has happened here?” asked Aakuta. “I was in the library reading and soldiers entered to say there were invaders in the temple. Did they enter your room? Are you all right?”

“I didn’t sleep well,” Lady Mystic answered softly as she walked over and picked up the books. “Perhaps it’s those trilling alarms going off. How is anyone supposed to get any sleep around here?”

Aakuta walked over to Lady Mystic and embraced her. He tried to kiss her, but she turned her head. Aakuta frowned.

“What is the matter?” Aakuta asked. “Have I done something to offend you?”

“I don’t know,” Lady Mystic replied coldly. “Have you?”

“I would never hurt you,” Aakuta replied as he hugged her tightly. “You know that I love you too much. You have given me a new life, one that causes me to look forward to the future.”

“I wish that I could believe that,” replied Lady Mystic, tears once again beginning to well up in her eyes. “I have never felt about anyone the way I feel about you. Still, I feel as if you are using me. I do not think your expression of love is genuine.”

“Then you should think again,” smiled Aakuta. “My love for you is genuine. What must I do to prove it to you?”

“You could start by telling me about Malafar,” answered Lady Mystic.

Chapter 34

Dobuk

Aakuta crossed the room and sat down in a chair. Lady Mystic looked at him expectantly, but Aakuta said nothing.

“Tell me about Malafar,” repeated Lady Mystic. “Tell me the truth. You owe me that much.”

“I do indeed,” sighed Aakuta. “How did you find out?”

“I was downstairs tonight when you helped out your friends,” answered the high priestess.

Aakuta nodded sadly and began, “I am Master Malafar of the Omungan Academy of Magic. Or at least I was at one time.”

“At one time?” frowned Lady Mystic.

“Yes,” nodded Aakuta. “I thought that I was happy in my own way at the time, but I was merely deceiving myself. I lost my son first and then my wife. My daughter became the Star of Sakova, leader of the Sakovans, a people that I thought were barbaric savages. I murdered the leader of Omunga, because I was drugged, but even after I overcame the drug, I could not accept my daughter’s people. I also could no longer accept my own. I was a man standing alone against the world.”

Lady Mystic sat in a chair facing Aakuta and urged him to continue.

“I murdered another Katana,” continued Aakuta. “I don’t know whether I did it for personal revenge, or to make amends to my daughter. Whatever the reason, it once again endangered my daughter and her people. I almost died that day, but the Sakovans nursed me back to health. Strange as it seems, even though I caused the Sakovans so much harm, they cared for me. Or pitied me, I am not sure which, and it didn’t matter at that point. I had to leave for good. I decided to take a new identity and disappear. Lyra’s trip to meet with Lord Marak seemed to be an ideal time to do it.”

“Is that when Aakuta was born?” asked Lady Mystic.

“Yes,” nodded Aakuta, “but something also happened then. I met the Chula people who were also known to be barbarians, but they were not. Oh, they dress like savages, but they are a wise people. They helped me understand what a fool I had been all of my life. They explained to me about Vand and the war that was to come. They made me understand what a difficult position my daughter was in, and how special she is, not just to the Sakovans, but everyone in the world. How could that not change my attitude?”

“I have no experience of my own to compare it against,” Lady Mystic said softly.

“Finally,” continued Aakuta, “I met the Khadorans. They were not like anything I had expected. There was no national cohesion like Omunga had. Khadora was a bunch of clans all seeking to outdo the other. Only Marak was different. I realized that I could help him. That is when I started to change. That is when Aakuta was born.”

“Surely that is not what brought you here?” asked Lady Mystic.

“Not directly,” Aakuta shook his head. “At first I just wanted to be left alone to meditate, but Khadoran greed made that impossible. My name became known to the clans, and I saw that I would never have peace in Khadora. I found out about the Jiadin invasion and figured it was Vand’s first move to crush civilization. I made a vow to get involved and help out wherever I could, but even then I had no idea where it would lead.”

“To courting Vand’s daughter,” sniffed Lady Mystic.

“Yes,” Aakuta agreed sadly. “When Marak was imprisoned, I tried to free him, but he refused to flee. That puzzled me at first, but then I realized what he was thinking. He was committed to the death to stop Vand. I had to make the same commitment to save my daughter and her people. I did.”

“That is where Zygor came in?” probed the high priestess.

“And Brakas,” nodded Aakuta. “I figured out what Zygor’s game was, and I beat him at it. When I tracked down Brakas, I realized that Vand would just send a replacement for Zygor, and another, and another. I had to stop that to give everyone time to prepare. When I heard that Smarc was coming, I knew what I had to do.”

“And that brought you to Motanga,” nodded Lady Mystic. “So you have been playing me for a fool ever since, and I did not detect it because you do not believe in Kaltara or anything else. You came here planning to die, didn’t you?”

Aakuta sighed and stared at the floor. The room was quiet for several minutes. Only the grating blare of the horns invaded the silence.

“I guess I did,” Aakuta finally replied. “I had no home any more. I had no future. There was nothing for me to look forward to.”

“And you used me to gain knowledge about Vand’s plans,” accused Lady Mystic.

“I did at first,” admitted Aakuta, “but that changed. It wasn’t supposed to change, but I could not help it. I never dreamed that I would meet someone like you. I wish it had happened before I came here. I would never have gotten in that boat.”

“You could have just stopped fighting against Vand,” Lady Mystic pointed out. “I warned you that I never wanted to choose between the two of you.”

“I couldn’t stop,” Aakuta shook his head. “Vand already suspected me. Even if I stopped, he would find out what I had done in the past. There was no exit for me. Besides, you don’t understand what Vand is.”

“I don’t understand?” balked Lady Mystic. “Vand is my father. I know him better than anyone else alive. How can you say such a thing?”

“You see him as your father,” nodded Aakuta. “That is the problem. You are viewing him through a beautiful morning mist, but you truly do not understand him. You are ever loyal to him and think he will be the same towards you. He will not. You are just as discardable as I am. His only loyalty is to whatever is in that room that he visits daily.”

“My father would never discard me,” Lady Mystic raged. “You are the one who does not understand Vand. How dare you say such a thing?”

“In my position,” replied Aakuta, “I feel free to state the truth as I know it. There is no reason for me to try to deceive myself. That is what I ran away from. I will never do that again.”

“As long as you feel that you must tell the truth,” retorted Lady Mystic, “what do you really feel for me? Do you love me, or was that just part of your disguise?”

“I wish that I could say that it was part of my disguise,” frowned Aakuta, “but the truth is, I really have fallen in love with you. I never meant for it to happen, but it has.”

“And I should believe this because?” prompted the high priestess.

“It matters little now whether you believe me or not,” sighed Aakuta. “You asked me not to make you choose between me and your father, but here we are. That is exactly the position that I have put you in. I am sorry.”

“You really do love me?” Lady Mystic asked with tears in her eyes.

“I do,” Aakuta smiled thinly.

Lady Mystic rushed over to Aakuta and kissed him. He rose and hugged her just as a loud knock sounded on the door. Lady Mystic broke the embrace and answered the door.

“You are ordered to the throne room,” declared a soldier. Seeing Aakuta through the open door, he continued, “Your presence is also required, Aakuta.”

The soldier disappeared, presumably to summon others. Aakuta crossed the room nervously and shut the door.

“I am sure this will be about the alarms,” Aakuta stated. “Fix your hair. You don’t want your father seeing you looking like that.”

Lady Mystic nodded and ran into the other room and brushed her hair. She smiled warmly at Aakuta as he opened the door for her. They climbed the stairs together and entered the throne room. The room was packed with military officers, mages, and other high officials. Even Clarvoy, the spymaster, was there. Fresh scorch marks and blood marred the floor, and it was obvious that Vand was in a foul mood. The doors at the rear of the room slammed shut and everyone fell silent.

“This temple was attacked tonight,” Vand declared. “A large group of our enemies came onto our island, entered this most sacred temple, and stole away with the elven king. You cannot imagine how angry this makes me. What is worse is that it is now clear that these invaders had inside help. That is something that I will not stand for. I want those that are responsible to step before me.”

No one moved, and Vand’s face grew darker by the second. Clarvoy approached and knelt before Vand.

“You Clarvoy?” Vand shouted with rage. “You would do such a thing?”

“I would never knowingly harm you or your efforts,” Clarvoy answered with a steady voice. “I offer myself up only for my lack of discovering the spy within your midst. Had I acted better, the elven king would still be captive.”

“This is true,” nodded Vand, “but you are not the one I seek. Get up.”

Clarvoy rose, but he did not move back to his previous position.

“There is another loss that we suffered tonight,” Clarvoy stated. “The mage from Raven’s Point was also taken from us.”

Vand’s dark eyes immediately glared at Aakuta. He waved the spymaster away, and Clarvoy returned to his station.

“How were your interrogations going, Aakuta?” scowled Vand. “Did she give up the secret of the air tunnel before she fled?”

“This is the first report that I have had concerning her disappearance,” replied Aakuta. “As for the air tunnel, she has told me nothing so far.”

“So far?” shouted Vand, causing everyone in the room to cringe. “Do you expect her to tell you more now that she is gone?”

“I suppose not,” Aakuta replied, his eyes staring at the floor before him.

“You suppose not?” Vand mocked Aakuta. “You would have no more success in getting anything out of her than I have getting something out of you. Lady Mystic?”

“Yes?” bowed Lady Mystic.

“Your demeanor tells me more than Aakuta’s words,” Vand said, his eyes narrowing to pinpoints. “You know who is responsible for this, don’t you?”

Lady Mystic did not answer. Her eyes dropped to the floor and her breath became ragged.

“Speak,” shouted Vand. “Tell me that Aakuta is the spy. Tell me!”

Lady Mystic spoke so softly that her breaking voice was inaudible.

“Tell me!” Vand shouted louder.

“It was Aakuta,” snapped Lady Mystic as tears rolled down her cheeks.

Aakuta moved swiftly to salvage what he could of his life. His arm came up and pointed at Vand, but nothing happened. Vand glared at him and then grinned broadly.

“You cannot attack me when I have a room full of mages,” sneered Vand. “Do you think they would allow you to hurt me?”

Aakuta looked around the room and saw over a dozen mages with their arms pointed at him. He understood then what had happened. Vand had been ready for the confrontation even before Lady Mystic spoke. Vand had his mages surround Aakuta with inverse shields. The dark mage would be incapable of sending a spell outside the shields.

“You already knew,” Aakuta said accusingly. “Why did you subject your daughter to such agony? Have you no heart at all?”

“Heart?” sneered Vand. “I have not believed in such petty emotions in centuries. As for my daughter, she had a choice to make as to where her loyalties were placed. I would have been sorely disappointed if she had not betrayed you.”

“So now you know the truth,” Aakuta said. “You should also know that you can not win the coming war. Why throw away this empire that you have built up? If you go to war against Khadora, you will lose it all. Be happy with what you have.”

“Khadora is only the beginning,” sneered Vand. “My armies will march over the length and breadth of the entire world. Before I am done, Kaltara will kneel before me and beg for mercy, but he will receive none. Just like you will receive none. Take him behind the throne room,” he ordered his guards.

The soldiers seized Aakuta, but there was nothing he could do about it. The mages kept their inverted shields around him, and he saw no victory in scratching the hands of the guards. He let himself be dragged out of the room. When he looked back, he saw two soldiers escorting Lady Mystic. She did not look as though she wanted to witness what was coming, but she had no will to fight it, either.

Aakuta knew where he was being taken. He had wanted to see what was inside the secret chamber ever since he had heard about it. Now he was going to get his chance, whether he wanted to or not. As the guards halted in front of the chamber’s door, Aakuta hurriedly erected his own defensive shields inside the inverted ones that surrounded him.

Vand opened the door to the chamber. Hot arid air instantly flowed through the door, immediately parching Aakuta’s throat. Vand gave the order and the guards shoved Aakuta through the doorway. The door slammed shut behind him.

Aakuta immediately felt his shields being battered. He looked around what he thought would be a chamber, but it was not a chamber. It was a place, massive sprawling wasteland from horizon to horizon. Aakuta shook his head to clear his vision. The plains were far too vast to exist within the confines of the temple. The mountains would dwarf the temple and make it appear insignificant.

Aakuta licked his lips and rotated slowly. There was no door behind him. No walls around him. Where the door should have been, was a crude arch made of rough stones. Aakuta walked through it, but he merely came out the other side. Then he heard the laughter.

Aakuta whirled to face the sound, but all he saw were mountains, dark, black mountains. Volcanoes erupted to the right and to the left, and lava flowed freely down the sides of the towering peaks. He felt his shields begin to shrink. His first impulse was to strengthen the shields, but he knew that he would merely waste his energy. The battering was relentless and there was no escape from his alien prison.

“What are you?” asked a booming voice. “You come to me like a man, yet the smell of fear is not strong upon you. You serve Kaltara, yet you do not even know him. What sort of creature are you?”

“Who are you?” Aakuta asked. “Show yourself.”

“Answer the question,” countered the booming voice.

“I am a man,” replied Aakuta. “I am called Aakuta.”

Suddenly, the black mountain in front of Aakuta moved. The ground trembled and huge rocks fell away as the mountain shattered. In place of the mountain was a huge black beast with spiked horns upon its head. Its eyes were red like the lava, appearing molten and constantly flowing in one direction or another. Its snout protruded from below the eyes and curved, sharp teeth filled its cavernous mouth. It had long claws extending from its hands and feet.

“Aakuta,” echoed the beast as it rolled the name around as if tasting it. “I am Dobuk, and you shall serve me for eternity.”

Aakuta’s shields continued to shrink. His feet now protruded outside of the shields, and he could feel them burning. The pain was incredible, but Aakuta tried his best to ignore it. He knew that he only had a short time left before he succumbed to the evil.

“Serve you?” echoed Aakuta. “What can I do that you cannot?”

“Do not try to outwit me human,” laughed the demon. “Better men than you have failed. The question has nothing to do with my powers. It has to do with my amusement. You are already feeling the pain. I can tell. I smell your nerves screaming for release, but death is my whim, not yours.”

“Suppose I refuse to provide your enjoyment?” asked Aakuta.

“Try,” sneered the demon. “Many others have tried. It is quite amusing.”

Aakuta’s mind whirled with possibilities, but he could not think of a way out of his predicament. His shields no longer covered his legs, and the nerves carried his pain to his mind where it exploded in massive sensations that made Aakuta scream.

“Ah, delightful,” smiled Dobuk. “I do love those who think they can defy me. Scream on little man.”

Aakuta’s mind raced to find a way to end the pain. He fell to the ground and it seared his body. He screamed in agony. He remembered the stories that Lady Mystic had told him about the others who had been subjected to this chamber. He remembered the tales of endless pain, agony, and insanity. The pain and agony was already upon him as he felt his shields disintegrating. Rather than reinforce the shields, Aakuta narrowed them. He brought the shields inward until they only encircled his mind.

“You win, Dobuk,” Aakuta cried out. “Do with me what you will. I will fight you no more.”

Every nerve in Aakuta’s body screamed with pain. He closed his eyes and put every ounce of his strength into holding the shields around his brain. At first he thought he had at least succeeded at preserving his sanity, but then everything went black. As his body screamed for death, he heard the final words of Dobuk.

“You disappoint me human,” the Fallen One said. “You were devious when you were alive, but now you are nothing.”

* * *

The door to the chamber was opened, and Aakuta charged through it screaming. He ran straight across the corridor and slammed his head into the wall. His body collapsed to the floor and writhed in pain, but he rose again and staggered about. His crazed eyes rolled from person to person, but he saw no one. Lady Mystic started crying. Aakuta turned and raced for the roof.

“Ah, the great Aakuta,” sneered Vand. “He thought he was mage enough to take my place. Now he is just another crazy man wishing to die. Even jumping off the roof will not ease his pain.”

“What have I done?” cried Lady Mystic. “Can’t you help him?” she pleaded to Vand. “Please. For me?”

“For you?” balked Vand. “You are as guilty as he is. You are the one who accepted him on this island. You are the one who taught him about us. You are the one who turned a blind eye to his obvious spying. No, Lady Mystic, I will do nothing for him. In fact, I will allow him to live for a long time, much longer than any of the others. Do you know why?”

“No,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “How can it possibly please you to torture him so?”

“Him?” laughed Vand. “No, my dear daughter, it is you who is being punished. I have warned you about emotions, but you fell in love with a spy. Well, look at your lover now. Watch him everyday as he pleads for you to kill him. But you can’t, you know. You do not have the power to kill him.”

“But I am your daughter,” Lady Mystic protested through her tears. “I am your flesh and blood. How can you do this to me? I even betrayed him for you.”

“Yes,” smirked Vand, “and that part was delicious, watching you betray your lover. Of course, I already knew he was guilty, but that would hardly teach you a lesson now, would it?”

“Is that what this is all about?” snapped Lady Mystic. “You are tearing my heart apart to teach me a lesson? How will that make me serve you better?”

“Serve me?” balked Vand. “You will no longer be allowed to serve me. Your only task in life from this moment forward is to enjoy the suffering of your lover.”

Lady Mystic’s tears flowed down her face and dripped onto the floor. Vand glared at her and waved the guards over.

“Escort this person out of the temple,” instructed the Emperor with a dismissive wave of his hand.

* * *

Tens of thousands of Jiadin surrounded the temple at Vandegar. Fakaran wagons dotted the encampment, and more of them constantly moved in and out of the campsite. Some warriors stood around in groups talking about the olden days of tribal warfare, but the most prevalent topic was the Prophecy of the Dragons. A feeling of isolation reigned over the men as much as it would in a city under siege. While no army was attacking them, there were dragons in every direction. No sane man attempted to leave the safe area of the Vandegar Temple.

“We might as well be dead,” complained one warrior. “What are we going to do? Stay here for the rest of our lives and hope the Fakarans don’t stop sending us food?”

“Why don’t you go find the head dragon and defeat it,” taunted another warrior.

“Don’t talk nonsense to me,” snapped the first warrior. “There is no man alive that can take on one of those dragons and live to tell about it. We are all doomed.”

“I would do anything to get out of here,” sighed a third warrior. “Life has not been very good since Grulak rose to power. I wish he had never been born. We would still be tribesmen riding the plains and looking for spoils. Those were the days.”

“I heard there is war coming again,” interjected a fourth warrior. “I wouldn’t mind wielding a sword for something other than practice. I don’t even care who the enemy is.”

“That is just a tale,” scowled the first warrior. “That is supposed to happen after the dragons go away. You will never live to see it.”

Suddenly, a bunch of shouting erupted, and the four warriors turned to see what the excitement was. Thousands of men were pointing to the east. They turned to see what everyone was so excited about and saw a dragon flying towards them.

“They ain’t suppose to bother us here,” worried the first warrior. “Where do we go now?”

“Look,” shouted the second warrior, “there is a man astride it.”

“Someone has defeated the King of the Dragons?” gasped the third warrior. “Can it be?”

Everyone watched as the giant dragon banked and flew around the Vandegar Temple. A man was clearly visible riding on the back of the huge dragon. He held some kind of long staff high in the air and pointed to the front of the temple. The dragon swooped down, and warriors scrambled for whatever cover they could find.

The dragon hovered in front of the temple and rested its claws gently on the railing of a balcony. The man slid off the back of the dragon onto the balcony and the dragon flapped its powerful wings and lifted off the balcony and soared high into the sky. The dragon continued to circle the temple, but the warriors’ attention was now on the man with the staff. Thousands of Jiadin warriors crowded as close as they could to the front of the temple to see who the man was. Suddenly, he held up both of arms for quiet.

“Greetings Jiadin warriors,” shouted the man. “Your time of exile is now over. I am King Rejji of Fakara, ruler of all lands east of the Fortung Mountains. I come to you to welcome you into the fold of Fakara and ask you to prepare for war.”

Rejji gazed at the mass of men below the balcony and wondered how they were receiving his message. It was heartening that no one had tried to attack him yet.

“Our land will soon be invaded from across the sea,” Rejji continued. “The Fakarans are determined to repel the evil invaders. I want my Jiadin brothers to stand by my side. Will you fight?”

The crowd mumbled and glanced at one another.

“Will you fight?” Rejji shouted louder. “Are there men below me who call themselves warriors? Or do I gaze down upon a flock of clova? Will you fight?”

Thousands of men raised their swords and shouted, but Rejji was not satisfied.

“Have I not saved you from the dragons?” shouted Rejji. “I offer every warrior a home, a horse, and a weapon. I offer every warrior a chance to go down in history as part of the greatest army to ever exist. I offer every warrior a chance to fight a foe that threatens to annihilate all life from this land, including each and every one of you. Will you fight by my side?”

Tens of thousands of voices rang out in unison. Swords were raised high, and the warriors started chanting Rejji’s name. Rejji grinned and raised the Staff of the Astor high.

Chapter 35

King of the Elves

“The large crossbows are powerful enough to penetrate their hulls,” declared Emperor Marak, “but we need to create those holes below the waterline. Only when the Motangan ship tried to turn did the sea flow in.”

“That is difficult,” frowned Captain Mynor. “As soon as the bolts drop below the water, they will lose a great deal of their punch. They may no longer pierce the hulls.”

“Well,” the Torak shook his head, “that is what we need. We need to create holes below the waterline. See what you can come up with.”

Emperor Marak left the room and walked along a corridor. He saw Rejji just entering the palace in Angragar and hurried to meet him.

“I heard that your test went well,” smiled Rejji. “Is the elven king safe?”

“They are on their way to Angragar as we speak,” nodded the Torak. “They should be here soon. As for the test, we still have some refinements to make. How did your meeting with the Jiadin go?”

“Much better than I expected,” frowned the Astor, “but I do not care much for creating false prophecies. I feel as if I tricked them into doing what is right.”

“That is exactly what you did,” smiled Emperor Marak. “Do not let it trouble you so much. You tried every other way to bring the Jiadin to your side. They are primarily men without honor. They care for nothing other than fighting and plunder.”

“Still,” frowned Rejji, “it does not feel right. What will Kaltara think?”

“You had the choice of tricking the Jiadin or slaughtering them,” retorted the Torak. “Not only would you have wasted eighty thousand potential warriors by destroying the Jiadin, but you would have also lost the majority of the free tribes trying to do it. As for how Kaltara would feel about it, he instructed you to gather the faithful and the unfaithful. Besides, where was your deceit?”

“I used a prophecy to trick the Jiadin,” replied Rejji. “I do not think the Dragon Prophecy really meant to foretell what I did with Myka. I don’t think it had anything to do with the Jiadin.”

“Others disagree with you,” smiled Marak. “Yltar says that Myka believes in the prophecy and that is was resolved as it should have been. She says only the errors of the humans who recorded it make it appear unrelated. Put this matter to rest, Rejji. Now that you have the Jiadin, figure how best to use them to defeat Vand. Trust me when I say that before this is over, they will praise you for gathering them. Vand’s forces would have slaughtered them in the opening salvo of the war.”

“I suppose you are right,” nodded the Astor. “I still don’t know whether or not I can integrate them into the Free Tribes. Years under Grulak’s reign have twisted their minds. All they want to do is kill someone for the pleasure of it.”

“Maybe you can siphon off those that can be rehabilitated and keep the others separate,” suggest the Torak. “I am sure that you will find the right solution. Let’s go down to the docks and greet the elven king.”

The Torak and the Astor left the palace and headed for the docks. Lyra was already at the wharf and the trio gathered together.

“Here they come,” pointed the Star of Sakova. “How will you greet him, Rejji?”

“As a friend and ally,” answered the Astor. “Whether or not he joins his people to ours, it was his ancestors who preserved this city by hiding it. We owe the elves a debt of gratitude for that.”

The elven scout ship sailed slowly across the harbor as Alastasia nervously piloted the vessel around the anchored ships. She called for Tamar to take the helm as they approached the dock.

“I am not about to ram this ship into the Star,” Alastasia said anxiously.

“You did well,” smiled Tamar as he took the helm.

Alastasia moved forward and stood beside her father and sister.

“You see, it is not too hard to sail,” smiled Avalar as he put his arm around his daughter.

“It was fun,” smiled Alastasia. “See the two people with Emperor Marak? The man is Rejji. He is the Astor. The woman is Lyra, the Star. You will like them.”

“Do not be offended if they call me Mistake,” interjected Alahara. “It is the only name they have ever known for me.”

“I will not be offended,” promised the elven king. “From what you have told me of your lives in this world, I owe much to those three.”

The elven ship glided alongside the dock. Alahara grabbed the forward line and threw it to a dockhand. HawkShadow did the same with the stern line. King Avalar and the two princesses stepped off the ship and onto the dock. Marak, Rejji, and Lyra bowed slightly to the king. Avalar bowed in return.

“We meet again, Marak,” smiled Avalar as the two groups closed with each other. “I am indebted for your help on the Island of Darkness.”

“And we are all indebted to your people for hiding Angragar so long ago,” replied the Torak. “May I introduce, Lyra, the Star of Sakova, and Rejji, the Astor and King of Fakara.”

“Let us go to the palace and have refreshments while you rest from your journey,” suggested Rejji.

“An excellent idea,” nodded Avalar. “We are not staying long in Angragar. I am anxious to return to my people, but there is a favor that I would like to ask of you.”

“Whatever I can do for you,” replied Rejji, “will be done. What do you need?”

“I wish to be properly dressed for my return to Elvangar,” stated the elven king. “I also want my daughters to be presented properly. Are there tailors in Angragar that can accommodate me?”

“There are many fine tailors in Angragar, “ frowned Rejji, “but how will they know what to make?”

“Tamar mentioned that he saw some people in this city wearing elven garb,” replied Avalar. “He could also consult with the tailors to advise them.”

“I forgot that Angragar was trading with the elves when it was preserved,” smiled Rejji. “Everything is exactly as it was when the city was abandoned. I will arrange for it.”

“Excellent,” smiled Avalar as the group started walking towards the palace.

Marak dropped back and draped his arms over the shoulders of Mistake and MistyTrail.

“Princesses, eh?” the Torak smiled. “I can’t wait to see the two of you in proper clothes.”

Both Alahara and Alastasia scowled at Marak, and they both gently jabbed him in the side.

“I am truly happy for both of you,” smiled Marak. “Your father seems to be a man you can look up to. Don’t trouble him too much.”

“Too much?” chuckled Alahara. “We would never trouble him at all.”

“Right,” laughed Alastasia.

Avalar heard the laughing behind him. He looked over his shoulder and smiled. When the group reached the palace, Rejji snapped off orders to his men. Food was brought into the courtyard, and tailors took measurements. The meal was informal, and people came and went during it. Marak took Rhoda aside and had a long discussion with her. Tamar and HawkShadow sat in a corner and discussed tales of each other’s homeland. As dusk approached, the clothes that Avalar requested were delivered. He excused himself and took the princesses with him. They were gone a long time, but when they returned, everyone stared in silence.

Avalar, Alahara, and Alastasia were dressed in gowns of pure white tyrik silk with gold edgings. Their long hair flowed down their backs, their pointed ears protruding through the hair. On their shoulders were golden crests.

“What a beautiful sight you present,” smiled Lyra. “What do the crests signify?”

“It is the crest of Kieran,” answered King Avalar. “As king of Elvangar, I am the head of the Kieran line. My daughters will follow my rule when my time is over.”

“I hope that is not anytime soon,” interjected Marak. “Will the elves stand with us against Vand?”

“I cannot answer your question, Emperor Marak,” frowned King Avalar. “I have been gone too long from my people. Elvangar is troubled right now. That is the reason for my need to return promptly. I can promise you that we will not be your enemies. I am impressed with what I have seen during my short stay here. The stories told me by Alahara and Anastasia add more to the image of your righteousness, but I must do what is best for the elven people.”

“Understandable,” nodded the Torak. “Will we have contact with you in the future?”

“We will,” nodded King Avalar, “even if that communication is to inform you that the elves will remain lost to others. Now we must go.”

“It is almost dark,” Rejji declared. “Will you not wait for morning?”

“No,” replied King Avalar. “I wish to time my arrival in Elvangar for when the people are awake. That requires me to leave now. May we meet again under favorable terms.”

* * *

“Alamanda,” pointed Tamar as the setting sun reflected off the white piles of rubble. “Should we dock there and gather my warriors?”

“There will be no fighting upon our return,” King Avalar shook his head. “Either the people will accept me as the rightful king, or they will not. I will not kill them to ensure my rule.”

“That’s good,” frowned Princess Alahara. “I feel naked without my knives.”

“You should have no need of knives,” smiled King Avalar. “You are a Kieran. Knives are ineffective compared to your other powers.”

“If we had learned to use those other powers,” frowned Princess Alastasia. “We never finished our lessons with Garl.”

“If Garl still lives,” promised the king, “your lessons will continue.”

“What will you do with our mother?” asked Alahara. “She will want to put us back in prison.”

“Or worse,” worried Alastasia.

“She will have to imprison me first,” vowed Avalar. “While I will not fight to regain the throne, I will die to protect my daughters. I cannot imagine Alycia as the woman you described to me. I fear that she is under the power of Karaza. Whether it breaks the law or not, I will kill that evil mage. He is a disgrace to the elven people.”

“Be careful,” warned Alastasia. “We have just found our father. We do not want to lose you again.”

Avalar smiled broadly and wrapped his arms around his daughters.

“You will never lose me again,” promised the elven king. “Not until I die.”

The ancient elven scout ship sailed through the night with each of the crew taking a turn at the helm. As the morning sun broke the horizon, Tamar guided the ship through the protective illusion that hid the channel to Morada. King Avalar walked to the bow and stood staring at the distant Gates of Elvangar. Alahara and Alastasia soon joined him and split up to flank him. He reached out his arms and draped them over the princesses’ shoulders.

“It is beautiful,” remarked Alahara. “I could not envision it from your description, MistyTrail.”

“Alastasia,” Avalar corrected with a smile. “It will be hard for the two of you to adjust to Elvangar, but your names must be the first step. You are princesses of the Kieran line. Never let anyone forget that.”

“You appear tense, father,” frowned Alahara as she felt her father’s arm stiffen as the Gates of Elvangar approached.

“I am,” admitted the king. “From what Tamar told me about Elvangar since my departure, I am concerned for our reception. There will be sentries atop the Gates of Elvangar. The queen will be alerted to our arrival before we finish passing through the channel. I can only presume that Karaza will know as well.”

“There will be boats waiting for us on the other side,” warned Alastasia.

“Yes,” nodded the king. “That is as it should be. Do not attack them. They will not harm us.”

Everyone fell silent as the scout ship entered the narrow channel between the massive stone walls of the Gates of Elvangar. The scout ship glided silently through the channel. When the channel emptied into the harbor of Morada, the sun was shining bright upon the city.

Instead of two boats of armed soldiers waiting for them, dozens of ships lined the way to the docks. Cheers erupted from the passengers of the ships, and the soldiers bowed low as the king passed by. Horns blared from all over the city, and Avalar could see people running to the docks. His lips widened and parted in a broad smile. He raised his right arm and waved to the bowing soldiers.

“Could this be a trick?” asked Alahara. “Or would the citizens welcome you without the blessing of the queen?”

“I do not know about the queen,” answered Alamar, “but the people are genuine in their joy. It feels so wonderful to be home at last.”

Without direction from the patrol boats, Tamar guided the elven scout ship to the royal dock. Thousands of people crowded along the wharf and waved. Cheers and shouts filled the air. As the ship glided along side the dock, Alahara moved to get the forward line. Avalar put his arm around her shoulder and stopped her.

“On this voyage,” Avalar said softly, “you are not a deckhand. Stay by my side.”

People on the dock reached out and held the ship fast as it floated next to the dock. Avalar guided his two daughter to the side of the ship and stepped onto the dock. Alahara and Alastasia stepped off next and continued to flank their father. The citizens of Morada bowed and singing erupted. King Avalar basked in the reception of the elven people. He smiled broadly and waved to the people for several minutes.

Suddenly, the city fell silent. King Avalar could see the crowd parting in the distance and understood what was happening.

“The queen is coming,” Avalar said softly to his daughters. “Regardless of how you were treated by her, you are to treat her with the respect due a queen. I will not permit my daughters to belittle the royalty of Elvangar for selfish reasons. The crown is more important than any of us. It demands respect.”

“I will try,” sighed Princess Alahara.

“No,” King Avalar said sternly. “You will not try, you will obey. Once the people of Elvangar lose faith in the crown, it can never be restored. I will not allow one of my daughters to be the cause of such disrespect.”

“I understand,” Alahara nodded. “I just hope she doesn’t hurt me again.”

The crowd parted and Queen Alycia marched through the gap. Her face was impassive as she approached. She walked directly to Avalar as everyone held their breath. When she stopped walking, Queen Alycia kneeled before the king and bowed her head in respect. The people cheered widely.

The queen rose, a wide smile upon her face. She reached up and removed the golden circlet from her head and placed it upon the king. She kissed King Avalar on each cheek and then embraced Princess Alahara.

“I am so sorry, Alahara,” whispered the queen. “I have not been myself for some time.”

“How did you know that I was Alahara?” asked the princess.

“You are on the king’s right,” smiled the queen. “Avalar would never break protocol.”

The queen walked to Alastasia and embraced her. She returned to stand in front of the king. Avalar smiled and kissed the queen. He then offered her his right arm. As the people cheered, the royal family marched off the dock and through the city streets to the Royal Tree. The royal guards smiled as they saluted the king.

The platform rose to the highest level and the royal family walked to the throne room. Only then did Avalar drop his smiling face.

“Where is Karaza?” he demanded.

Queen Alycia pointed upward and Avalar looked up and saw the bulge in the tree.

“How did this happen?” he asked.

“Garl figured out that Karaza was controlling me,” replied Alycia. “All of these years I thought you were dead. All because I refused to believe in Garl. I even banished him from the city and put Karaza in charge of the Society of Mages. I feel like such a fool.”

“Karaza knew that I was imprisoned on the Island of Darkness,” replied the king. “He visited there a year after our sinking. He must have sold his soul to Vand. I will reinstate Garl as the Head of the Society of Mages. What other ills have been committed that must be righted?”

“I have been busy correcting the errors of my last few years,” replied the queen. “Some thing cannot be undone, but I can make amends.”

“Prepare a list for me,” nodded Avalar. “There are troubled times ahead for Elvangar and the rest of the world. We must heal our own house before the trouble comes.”

“Will you aid the humans then?” asked Alastasia.

“I do not know,” admitted the king. “There will be discussions about it, but as I told the Torak, I will do whatever is in the best interests of the elven people.”

“You have met the Torak?” asked Queen Alycia.

“And the Star and the Astor,” nodded King Avalar. “They are humans of the caliber of King Regis and his ancestors. They are honorable people who believe in Kaltara. I will call a session of the Council of Elders tomorrow. This issue must be thoroughly discussed, and it is best to start soon.”

The queen turned to Alahara and Alastasia.

“I am truly sorry for what you had to endure,” she said. “Not just during your time in Elvangar, but all those years that I should have had people out looking for you. I do not know how I can make that up to you, I will try.”

“We survived,” smiled Princess Alahara. “If nothing else, it has taught us much about the humans and how people should be treated. I think there are many areas in Elvangar where we can take lessons from the humans.”

“Like what?” frowned King Avalar.

“Like the poor elven villages,” answered Princess Anastasia. “There should not be poor people in such a rich land as Elvangar.”

“And keeping the elders dependent upon the crown,” added Princess Alahara. “They should not lose their homes when the crown loses confidence in them.”

“And…” began Princess Anastasia.

“Stop,” grinned King Avalar. “I get the point. It seems as if our princesses are ready to be involved in ruling Elvangar,” he smiled at the queen. “I have great faith in their courage and their character. We must both tutor them in the ways of the elves.”

“With Garl’s help,” the queen nodded and smiled.

“And Kaltara’s blessing,” chirped Princess Alastasia.

Content

Richard S. Tuttle
Elvangar

Our story so far

Prologue

Chapter 1 In the Land of Humans

Chapter 2 Emperors

Chapter 3 An Odd Assortment

Chapter 4 Attack of the Hellsouls

Chapter 5 Western Woods

Chapter 6 Meliban

Chapter 7 Air Tunnel

Chapter 8 Qubari Jungle

Chapter 9 Words of Kaltara

Chapter 10 Angragar

Chapter 11 Best Laid Plans

Chapter 12 The Library

Chapter 13 The Plaza

Chapter 14 Love is in the Air

Chapter 15 The Asylum

Chapter 16 Alamanda

Chapter 17 Morada

Chapter 18 Queen Alycia

Chapter 19 Etta

Chapter 20 Council of Elders

Chapter 21 Return to the Mountain

Chapter 22 The Royal Vaults

Chapter 23 Tales of Long Ago

Chapter 24 The Royal Family

Chapter 25 The Patriots

Chapter 26 Defending the Accused

Chapter 27 Gamara

Chapter 28 The Royal Tree

Chapter 29 King of the Dragons

Chapter 30 Skimmers

Chapter 31 Island of Darkness

Chapter 32 Avalar

Chapter 33 The Escape

Chapter 34 Dobuk

Chapter 35 King of the Elves